2608

eSTELPLAN

Sales Orders

Release 4.0a

February 15, 2016

Copyright 2016 Invera Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Invera Inc. (hereinafter referred to as Invera) has prepared this document for use by its personnel, licensees and

customers. The information contained herein is the property of Invera and shall not be reproduced in whole or in

part without prior written approval from Invera.

Invera reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without

prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult Invera to determine whether any such changes have been

made.

The terms and conditions governing the licensing of Invera software consist solely of those set forth in the

written contracts between Invera and its customers. No representation or other affirmation of fact contained

in this document, including but not limited to statements regarding capacity, response-time performance,

suitability for use, or performance of products described herein shall be deemed to be a warranty by Invera

for any purpose or give rise to any liability of Invera whatsoever.

eSTELPLAN is a Trademark of Invera Inc.

Web: www.invera.com

Email: info@invera.com

Phone: (514) 935-3535

Fax: (514) 935-3850

Invera Corp. 6125 Luther Lane, #425

Dallas, TX 75225

U.S.A.

Invera Inc. 4333 St. Catherine Street West,

Westmount, Quebec H3Z 1P9

Canada

Table of Contents

1. OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 1 MAJOR FEATURES PROVIDED ........................................................................................................... 2 ORDER TYPES ........................................................................................................................................ 4

Blanket Orders ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Normal Orders ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Release Orders ....................................................................................................................................... 4 Standard Orders ..................................................................................................................................... 5 Transfer Orders ...................................................................................................................................... 5 Quotation ............................................................................................................................................... 5

SELLING BRANCH Vs SHIPPING BRANCH ...................................................................................... 6 ORDER STORAGE AND TRACKING ................................................................................................... 9 ORDER STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................................... 10

Order Header Information ................................................................................................................... 11 Order Detail Information ..................................................................................................................... 11

ORDER PRINTING FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 13 CREDIT, PROFIT, PRODUCTION AND SHIPMENT HOLD ............................................................ 15

Credit Hold .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Profit Hold/Verification ....................................................................................................................... 15 Production Hold ................................................................................................................................... 16 Shipment Hold ..................................................................................................................................... 16

2. ORDER ENTRY ................................................................................................................................... 17 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................... 17 USER DEFAULTS ................................................................................................................................. 18 ADDING A NEW SALES ORDER ....................................................................................................... 20

Adding an Order Header...................................................................................................................... 20 Orders without Items ........................................................................................................................ 21 Order Defaults Window ................................................................................................................... 21 Job Defaults Window ....................................................................................................................... 22 Freight Defaults Window ................................................................................................................. 23

Optional Customer Remark Window .................................................................................................. 23 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 24

Order Header Action Bar ..................................................................................................................... 25 Order Header Fields ......................................................................................................................... 26

Adding an Order Item .......................................................................................................................... 32 Restriction ........................................................................................................................................ 32 Product Identifier ............................................................................................................................. 33 Note Entry ........................................................................................................................................ 34 Ordered and Balance Quantities ...................................................................................................... 34 Enhanced Weight ............................................................................................................................. 35 Weight Unit of Measure ................................................................................................................... 35 Order Item Charges .......................................................................................................................... 35 Classification Information ............................................................................................................... 35 Order Item Action Bars .................................................................................................................... 39

Table of Contents Page ii

Costing Verification ............................................................................................................................. 40 Branch Direct Shipment Request Window .......................................................................................... 40 Scheduling Order Items to the eSTEL/Cap-Plan Schedule ................................................................. 41 Printing an Amount on the Forms ........................................................................................................ 41 Workflow Interface .............................................................................................................................. 42

CHANGING A SALES ORDER ............................................................................................................. 43 Workflow Interface .............................................................................................................................. 43 Changing an Order Header .................................................................................................................. 43

Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 44 Changing the Ship-To Number ........................................................................................................ 45

Changing an Order Item ...................................................................................................................... 46 Part Specs ......................................................................................................................................... 46 Product ............................................................................................................................................. 46 Product Description .......................................................................................................................... 47 Classification Fields ......................................................................................................................... 47 Taxes ................................................................................................................................................ 48 Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 48

Production/Shipping Hold Update Utility ........................................................................................... 49 Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 49 Sales Order Production/Shipping Hold Update Screen .................................................................... 50 Session Log ...................................................................................................................................... 51

Sales Order/ Transfer Order Status Update Utility .............................................................................. 51 Status Update Screen ........................................................................................................................ 51 Status Update ................................................................................................................................... 53

Deleting a Sales Order ......................................................................................................................... 54 Deleting an Order Header .................................................................................................................... 54

Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 54 Deleting an Order Item ........................................................................................................................ 54

Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 54 Workflow Interface .............................................................................................................................. 55

COPYING AN EXISTING SALES ORDER ......................................................................................... 56 Copying Order Header Information ..................................................................................................... 56

Defaulting the Ship Hold.................................................................................................................. 57 Work Order Date Default ................................................................................................................. 57

Copying Order Item Information ......................................................................................................... 57 Restrictions ....................................................................................................................................... 58

COPYING AN EXISTING ORDER ITEM ............................................................................................ 60 Restrictions .......................................................................................................................................... 60

Copying a Blanket Item to a Release Order ..................................................................................... 60 VIEWING ORDER TOTALS ................................................................................................................. 62

Totals Window ..................................................................................................................................... 63 PRODUCT SCHEDULE INTERFACE ................................................................................................... 65

Book ................................................................................................................................................. 65 Cmn Schd ......................................................................................................................................... 65 Sch Trs ............................................................................................................................................. 65

AUTOMATIC PRINTING ...................................................................................................................... 66 Profit/Credit Verification at Time of Order Form Printing.................................................................. 66 Print Address Labels Window ............................................................................................................. 67

Display of the Print Address Labels Window .................................................................................. 67 Production Work Order Printing .......................................................................................................... 68 Override Printer for Forms Printing ..................................................................................................... 68 Credit Held Orders ............................................................................................................................... 68

3. ORDER, INVOICE AND QUOTE ITEM CHARGES ..................................................................... 69 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 69

Table of Contents Page iii

Restrictions .......................................................................................................................................... 70 CLASSIFICATION OF REVENUE ....................................................................................................... 71

Sales Category ..................................................................................................................................... 71 Sales Type ........................................................................................................................................... 71 Charge Number ................................................................................................................................... 71 Charge Quantity Type ......................................................................................................................... 72

Changing the Charge Quantity Type ............................................................................................... 72 Included and External Charges ............................................................................................................ 72

Markup/Markdown Percentage Charge Entry ................................................................................. 74 SALES TAXES ....................................................................................................................................... 77 CHARGE ENTRY .................................................................................................................................. 78

Adding a Charge Line.......................................................................................................................... 78 Changing a Charge Line ...................................................................................................................... 81

Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Deleting a Charge Line ........................................................................................................................ 81

Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Interface with eSTELprice and eSTELquote ....................................................................................... 82

Default Material Price ...................................................................................................................... 82 Freight-In ......................................................................................................................................... 82

BACK ORDER ITEMS .......................................................................................................................... 83 LOT Charges on Backorder ................................................................................................................. 84 Workflow Interface.............................................................................................................................. 84

CHARGE UPDATE IN BILL OF LADING AND INVOICING .......................................................... 85 Examples ............................................................................................................................................. 85

CASE 1: ........................................................................................................................................... 85 CASE 2: ........................................................................................................................................... 85 CASE 3 – Cannot Compute the Percentage of Shipped Vs Sold Quantity: ..................................... 86 CASE 4 – USQ=Y, no Pro-Rated Pcs/Msr/Wgt: actual BL Shipped Quantity is passed ‘as is’ to BL

Charge Quantity. .............................................................................................................................. 87 Restrictions when USQ=Y ............................................................................................................... 87

4. INVENTORY RESERVATION .......................................................................................................... 89 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................... 89 RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 90

Non-Specific Reservations .................................................................................................................. 90 Tag Master Required Products ............................................................................................................ 90 Warnings .............................................................................................................................................. 91

DEFAULT INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ....................................................................................... 92 Sales Order .......................................................................................................................................... 92

Restriction ........................................................................................................................................ 92 Transfer Orders .................................................................................................................................... 93 Invoice Entry ....................................................................................................................................... 93 Bill of Lading ...................................................................................................................................... 93 Outside Processing Purchase Orders ................................................................................................... 94 Outside Processing Receipts ................................................................................................................ 94 eSTELquote ......................................................................................................................................... 94 eSTELman ........................................................................................................................................... 94 Default Reservations Product Item ...................................................................................................... 94

Tag Master Required Products ......................................................................................................... 94 Tagged (non-Tag Master) Products ................................................................................................. 94 Non-Tagged Products ...................................................................................................................... 95 Restriction ........................................................................................................................................ 95 Interface with eSTELspec ................................................................................................................ 95

Default Reservation Pieces, Quantity and Weight .............................................................................. 96 Default Reservation Warehouse .......................................................................................................... 96

Table of Contents Page iv

Restrictions .......................................................................................................................................... 96 STANDARD RESERVATION ENTRY SCREEN ................................................................................ 97

Header Fields Description ................................................................................................................... 98 Adding a Specific Reservation ............................................................................................................ 98

Defaulting the Reservation Warehouse ............................................................................................ 99 Stock Available Window ............................................................................................................... 100 Displaying the On-Hand/Available ................................................................................................ 100 Exiting the Entry Window.............................................................................................................. 101

Reservation Validations ..................................................................................................................... 101 Interface with the Sales Category ................................................................................................... 101 Adding a Reservation on a Transfer Order .................................................................................... 102 Adding a Reservation on an Outside Processing PO or an Inventory Receipt ............................... 102 Adding a Reservation on a Bill of Lading ...................................................................................... 102

Adding a Non-Specific Reservation .................................................................................................. 102 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 102

Remarks Entry Window ..................................................................................................................... 103 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 103

Completed Reservation Entry screen ................................................................................................. 104 Scrolling Area Display ................................................................................................................... 105 Non-Specific Reservation Display ................................................................................................. 105 Displayed Codes ............................................................................................................................. 105

Changing a Reservation ..................................................................................................................... 106 Deleting a Reservation ....................................................................................................................... 106

RETURNS-TO-STOCK ........................................................................................................................ 107 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 107

BILLING WEIGHT .............................................................................................................................. 108 Reviewing Billing Weight ................................................................................................................. 108 Billing Weight Computation .............................................................................................................. 108

Inventory Organization Not WT .................................................................................................... 109 Inventory Organization = WT ........................................................................................................ 109 Enhanced Weight Factor ................................................................................................................ 109

BRANCH TRANSFER REQUEST ...................................................................................................... 110 Restriction .......................................................................................................................................... 110 Displaying Branch Transfer Request ................................................................................................. 110

INVENTORY DE-ALLOCATION FUNCTION ................................................................................. 112 De-Allocating in Transfer Order ........................................................................................................ 112 De-Allocating in Transfer Bill of Lading .......................................................................................... 113 De-allocating in Outside Processing Purchase Order ........................................................................ 114

Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 114 De-Allocation from Quote ................................................................................................................. 115

TRANSFER ORDER REQUEST CONFIRMATION .......................................................................... 116 RESERVATIONS UPDATE ................................................................................................................ 117

Major Features Provided .................................................................................................................... 117 Reinstating a Reservation ............................................................................................................... 117 Updating Non-Specific ................................................................................................................... 117 Handling Outside Processing Purchase Order................................................................................ 118 Shipping a Transfer Order on a Bill of Lading .............................................................................. 118

RAPID RESERVATION ...................................................................................................................... 119 Interface with Stock Available .......................................................................................................... 120

Rapid Reservation Window – Standard Mode ............................................................................... 120 Rapid Reservation Window – Bill of Lading Reserve Mode ......................................................... 121

On-Hand and Available Fields .......................................................................................................... 122 Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 122

5. RESERVATIONS AGAINST INCOMING MATERIAL .............................................................. 123

Table of Contents Page v

OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 123 ADDING NEW INCOMING MATERIAL RESERVATIONS ........................................................... 124

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 124 ADDING AN INCOMING RESERVATION IN ORDER ENTRY .................................................... 125

Warning Message .............................................................................................................................. 127 Items Copied From Customer Part Specifications ......................................................................... 127

ADDING AN INCOMING RESERVATION IN PURCHASE ORDERS .......................................... 128 Incoming Reservation Inquiry ........................................................................................................... 130

6. TRANSFER REQUISITION FROM QUOTE & SALES ORDERS ............................................. 133 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 133

Advantages of the Transfer Requisition Function ............................................................................. 133 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 133 Calling the Transfer Requisition Function in Sales Order Entry ....................................................... 134 Adding a Transfer Requisition .......................................................................................................... 134 Changing a Transfer Requisition ....................................................................................................... 136 Deleting a Transfer Requisition ......................................................................................................... 136

Manual Numbering of Transfer Orders ......................................................................................... 136 Creating the Transfer Order ............................................................................................................... 137

Transfer Order Defaults ................................................................................................................. 137 Charges and Costs on the Quote or Sales Order Item .................................................................... 137 Transfer Order Freight Information ............................................................................................... 137 Specific Inventory Reservations .................................................................................................... 138 Automatic Creation of an Incoming Reservation .......................................................................... 138 Combining Transfer Requisitions from Different Order Items ...................................................... 138

7. FREIGHT CHARGES AND COSTING .......................................................................................... 139 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 139

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 140 Outbound Freight Table..................................................................................................................... 140 Freight Responsibility........................................................................................................................ 140

Charge Freight ............................................................................................................................... 141 Freight Included ............................................................................................................................. 141

Delivery Method ................................................................................................................................ 141 Common Carrier ............................................................................................................................ 141 Our Truck ....................................................................................................................................... 142

ADDING FREIGHT CHARGES AND COSTS................................................................................... 143 Freight Responsibility Included ......................................................................................................... 146

Restrictions .................................................................................................................................... 146 Freight Responsibility Charge ........................................................................................................... 146 Delivery Method OT ......................................................................................................................... 147 Delivery Method CC ......................................................................................................................... 148 Foreign Currency’s Freight Vendor .................................................................................................. 149 Use of Outbound Freight Table ......................................................................................................... 149

CHANGING THE FREIGHT RESPONSIBILITY CODE .................................................................. 151 Case 1: CHG to COL ........................................................................................................................ 151 Case 2: COL to CHG ......................................................................................................................... 152 Case 3: INC to CHG ......................................................................................................................... 153 Case 4: COL to CP ........................................................................................................................... 153

CHANGING THE DELIVERY METHOD .......................................................................................... 154 CHANGING THE FREIGHT RATES AND UNIT OF MEASURE ................................................... 156

Change the Freight Charge Rate on the Header ................................................................................ 156 Change the Freight Cost Rate on the Header ..................................................................................... 156 Change the Unit of Measure on the Header....................................................................................... 156

LOT FREIGHT RATE .......................................................................................................................... 157 Freight-In Charges and Costs ............................................................................................................ 158

Table of Contents Page vi

8. ADD-ON AND AUTOMATIC COSTS ............................................................................................. 159 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 159

Add-on Costs ..................................................................................................................................... 159 Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 160

Automatic Costs ................................................................................................................................. 160 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 160 Product Installation Options ........................................................................................................... 160

COST ATTRIBUTION ENTRY SCREEN .......................................................................................... 162 External Cost Attribution Entry ......................................................................................................... 162 Internal Cost Attribution Entry .......................................................................................................... 164

AUTOMATIC COSTING ..................................................................................................................... 166 MATERIAL COSTS ............................................................................................................................. 168

Specific Inventory Reservations Cost ................................................................................................ 168 Average Costing ............................................................................................................................. 169 Corporate Average Costing ............................................................................................................ 169 Specific Costing ............................................................................................................................. 169

Non-Specific Inventory Reservations ................................................................................................ 170 Purchase Order Reservation Costs ..................................................................................................... 170 Buyout Costs ...................................................................................................................................... 171 Un-Reserved Orders .......................................................................................................................... 171

PROCESSING COSTS ......................................................................................................................... 172 PWC Processing Cost Per Theoretical Weight .................................................................................. 172

Procedure to Calculate PWC Cost ................................................................................................. 172 Changing the Item .......................................................................................................................... 173 Applicability of the Cost per Theoretical Weight Feature ............................................................. 173

Packaging and Skid Costing .............................................................................................................. 173 Packaging Cost ............................................................................................................................... 174 Skid Cost ........................................................................................................................................ 174

FREIGHT COSTS ................................................................................................................................. 175 ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS ............................................................................................................... 176

9. REMARKS PROCESSING ............................................................................................................... 177 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 177

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 177 MARKETING REMARKS ................................................................................................................... 179 HEADER REMARKS........................................................................................................................... 180

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 180 ITEM REMARKS ................................................................................................................................. 181

Defaulting Item Remarks ................................................................................................................... 181 Item Copied from a Customer Part Specification .......................................................................... 181 Item Created Manually ................................................................................................................... 181

ITEM REMARK TYPES ...................................................................................................................... 183 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 183

REMARKS ENTRY ............................................................................................................................. 184 Copying Customer Remarks .............................................................................................................. 185 Adding and Changing Remarks ......................................................................................................... 185 Reviewing Remarks ........................................................................................................................... 185 Copying Remark Template ................................................................................................................ 186

Replacing Remark Prompting Characters ...................................................................................... 186

10. PRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 187 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 187 SPECIFICATIONS WINDOW ............................................................................................................. 188

Tolerances .......................................................................................................................................... 188 Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 189 Formula Used ................................................................................................................................. 190

Table of Contents Page vii

Packaging .......................................................................................................................................... 191 Pcs/Tag ........................................................................................................................................... 191 Max Skd Wgt ................................................................................................................................. 192 Skid Type ....................................................................................................................................... 192 Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 193

DELETING A PRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS RECORD ........................................................... 194

11. ORDER LOOK-UP AND INQUIRIES .......................................................................................... 195 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 195 ORDER LOOK-UP ............................................................................................................................... 196

Header Page Look-Up ....................................................................................................................... 196 Detail Page Look-Up ......................................................................................................................... 197

OPEN ORDER INQUIRIES ................................................................................................................. 198 Access to Other Branches .................................................................................................................. 199 Product Installation Option ................................................................................................................ 199

ORDER INQUIRY MENU ................................................................................................................... 200 Order Selections ................................................................................................................................ 200 Item Selections .................................................................................................................................. 201 Order Indexes .................................................................................................................................... 201

Inquiry Information ........................................................................................................................ 202 SUMMARY INQUIRY SCREEN ........................................................................................................ 203

Summary Inquiry – Blank screen ...................................................................................................... 203 Order Selections ............................................................................................................................. 204

Selection Area ................................................................................................................................... 206 Cus/PO ........................................................................................................................................... 206 IS/Cus ............................................................................................................................................. 206 OS/Cus ........................................................................................................................................... 206 Cus/Type ........................................................................................................................................ 207

Order Summary – Completed Sample ............................................................................................... 207 SALES ORDER HEADER INQUIRY SCREEN ................................................................................. 210 ITEM INQUIRY SCREEN ................................................................................................................... 211

Item Inquiry – Blank Screen .............................................................................................................. 211 Order Item Selections .................................................................................................................... 212

Selection Area ................................................................................................................................... 212 Cus/Prod ......................................................................................................................................... 213 Cus/Part .......................................................................................................................................... 213 Product ........................................................................................................................................... 213 Order .............................................................................................................................................. 214

Item Inquiry – Completed Sample ..................................................................................................... 214 Blanket and Release Items Inquiry screen ......................................................................................... 216

SALES ORDER ITEM INQUIRY SCREEN ....................................................................................... 218 Completed and Deleted Order Items .............................................................................................. 218

ORDER ITEM STATUS INQUIRY SCREEN .................................................................................... 220 Completed and Deleted Orders ...................................................................................................... 220 Blanket Order Items ....................................................................................................................... 220

Order Item Status Inquiry Screen ...................................................................................................... 221 Order Item Section ............................................................................................................................ 223

Finished Reservation ...................................................................................................................... 224 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 224

Production Status Section .................................................................................................................. 224 Production Display ......................................................................................................................... 226

Shipping Status Section ..................................................................................................................... 227 Manifest Status Section ..................................................................................................................... 228 Order Balance Section ....................................................................................................................... 229

12. CROSS-REFERENCE INQUIRY .................................................................................................. 231

Table of Contents Page viii

OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 231 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 231 Cross-Reference Inquiry Window ..................................................................................................... 232

GENERAL RULES ON HOW TO USE THE INQUIRY .................................................................... 233 Displayed Codes ................................................................................................................................ 234 Action Bar Options ............................................................................................................................ 234

Extend Action Bar Option .............................................................................................................. 234 Inv Arc Action Bar Option ............................................................................................................. 235 Crd/Inv Action Bar Option ............................................................................................................. 237 Prf Action Bar Option .................................................................................................................... 237

ACCESS BY INVOICE/TRANSFER NUMBER ................................................................................ 239 ACCESS BY ORDER NUMBER ......................................................................................................... 241 ACCESS BY BILL OF LADING ......................................................................................................... 243 ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER NO. ......................................... 245 ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY CUSTOMER PART NUMBER ........................................................ 247 ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY PRODUCT......................................................................................... 249

13. SELECTION ENTRIES ................................................................................................................... 251

14. PRINTING ORDER FORMS .......................................................................................................... 271 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 271

Sold To Name and Address ............................................................................................................... 272 Automated Emailing of Sales Acknowledgements ............................................................................ 272 Branch Used to Verify the Product Installation Options ................................................................... 272 Product Installation Options Controlling the Printing of the Order Forms ........................................ 273

Print Shipping Order Form ............................................................................................................. 273 Print Order Form ............................................................................................................................ 274 Print Work Order Form .................................................................................................................. 274

Product Installation Options for the Order Forms Printing................................................................ 275 Barcoding ....................................................................................................................................... 275 Number of Copies to Print ............................................................................................................. 276 Contact Information ....................................................................................................................... 276 Job Number, Name and Address on Shipping Order ..................................................................... 276 Primary and Secondary Printers ..................................................................................................... 276 Item Due ......................................................................................................................................... 276 Company Name and Address ......................................................................................................... 276 Ship-From Address Printing........................................................................................................... 276 Fuel Surcharge ............................................................................................................................... 276 Heat Number on Shipping Order ................................................................................................... 277 Printing Tax and Exempt License Number on the Shipping Form ................................................ 277 Credit Log Printing ........................................................................................................................ 277 Back Order Printing based on Balance Quantity and Value .......................................................... 277 Back Order Printing based on the Order Item Balance Weight ..................................................... 277 Note Printing .................................................................................................................................. 277 Extended Description ..................................................................................................................... 277 Printing Certificate Remarks .......................................................................................................... 277 Back Order Printing by Item Due Date .......................................................................................... 278 Printing a Specific Type of Order Form ......................................................................................... 278 Profitability Section ....................................................................................................................... 278 Printing Inventory Reservations Information ................................................................................. 278 Profit Hold Log Printing ................................................................................................................ 278 Order Value .................................................................................................................................... 278 On-Hand Tag Weight Printing ....................................................................................................... 278 Product Item Remarks Printing on the Work Order Form ............................................................. 279 Printing the Measure ...................................................................................................................... 279 Shipping Remarks on Work Order Form ....................................................................................... 279

Table of Contents Page ix

Printing the Theoretical Weight ..................................................................................................... 279 Printing an equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure ...................................................................... 279 Printing the Work Order Required Message .................................................................................. 279 Header Remarks on Work Order Form .......................................................................................... 279 Decimal Gauge and Gauge Range Printing ................................................................................... 279 Salesperson Name .......................................................................................................................... 279 Order Item Status ........................................................................................................................... 280 Weight Printing on Shipping Order ............................................................................................... 280 Range of Work Order Printing Dates ............................................................................................. 280 Single/Multiple Items per Work Order Form ................................................................................ 280

Product Installation Options for Production Work Order Forms Printing ......................................... 281 Barcoding ....................................................................................................................................... 281 Number of Copies to Print ............................................................................................................. 281 Printing the Contact Information ................................................................................................... 281 Printing the Job Number ................................................................................................................ 281 Print/Reprint function .................................................................................................................... 281 Name and Address Printing on the Form ....................................................................................... 281 Minimum Amount Required for Printing an Item ......................................................................... 281 Print blank lines ............................................................................................................................. 281 Extended Description ..................................................................................................................... 281 Printing Certificate Remarks .......................................................................................................... 281 Printing of Incoming Product Information ..................................................................................... 282 Printing of Inventory Location for Non-Specific Allocations ....................................................... 282 On-Hand Tag Weight Printing ....................................................................................................... 282 Printing of non-Specific Reservations ........................................................................................... 282 Printing the Measure ...................................................................................................................... 282 Order Item Shipping Branch and Production Sequence (PSQ) code ............................................. 282 Shipping Remarks Printing ............................................................................................................ 282 Percentage of Original Ordered Quantity for Printing and Item .................................................... 282 Salesperson Name .......................................................................................................................... 282 Single/Multiple Items per Production Work Order Form .............................................................. 282

Product Installation Options for Sales Acknowledgement Forms Printing ....................................... 283 Number of Copies to Print ............................................................................................................. 283 Printing the Color and Location of a Product ................................................................................ 283 Customer Currency Symbol ........................................................................................................... 283 Fuel Surcharge printing .................................................................................................................. 283 Printing the Company Name and Address ..................................................................................... 283 Note Printing .................................................................................................................................. 283 Extended Description ..................................................................................................................... 283 Printing the Item Production Remarks ........................................................................................... 283 Printing the Measure ...................................................................................................................... 283 Printing an Equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure ..................................................................... 283 Printing the Salesperson Name ...................................................................................................... 284 Printing the Specification ............................................................................................................... 284 Printing the Order Amount ............................................................................................................ 284 Printing the Sales Acknowledgement ............................................................................................ 284

Product Installation Options for Product Picking Ticket Printing ..................................................... 284 Selecting the Zebra Printer Model ................................................................................................. 284

FORMS DESIGNATION AND USAGE ............................................................................................. 285 Sales Acknowledgement ................................................................................................................ 285 Sales Order ..................................................................................................................................... 286 Shipping Order ............................................................................................................................... 287 Production Work Order and Work Order ...................................................................................... 288 Product Picking Ticket ................................................................................................................... 289

Table of Contents Page x

Combinations of Forms that can be Printed ....................................................................................... 290 PRINTER ASSIGNMENT .................................................................................................................... 291

Sales Acknowledgements .................................................................................................................. 291 Sales, Shipping and Work Orders ...................................................................................................... 291 Order Forms Printer Assignment and Display in CS/IRIS ................................................................ 291 Multi-Warehouse, Branch Direct and Transfer Order Shipments ..................................................... 296

Other Branch Shipments ................................................................................................................ 296 Branch Direct Shipments ............................................................................................................... 296

Order Item Printing on Separate Printers ........................................................................................... 296 Sales Category Work Order Printing Reference Table .................................................................. 297 Work Order Printing ...................................................................................................................... 297 Work Order Form ........................................................................................................................... 298 Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 298

FORM PRINTING CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................... 299 Sold-By/ Ship-From Name and Address on Generic Forms .......................................................... 299 Sold-To/Ship-To Section................................................................................................................ 299 Ribbon Line Area ........................................................................................................................... 300 Test Certificate Information ........................................................................................................... 303 Order Header Remarks ................................................................................................................... 303 Product Information ....................................................................................................................... 304 Shipment Quantities ....................................................................................................................... 305 Production Specifications ............................................................................................................... 305 Item Charge Table .......................................................................................................................... 306 Charge Table Print Layout ............................................................................................................. 306 Profit Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 307 Inventory Reservations and Shop Instructions ............................................................................... 307 Shipping Remarks and Standard Messages .................................................................................... 309 Order Totals ................................................................................................................................... 310 C.O.D. Orders ................................................................................................................................ 311

SELECTION ENTRIES ........................................................................................................................ 312 Sales Acknowledgement .................................................................................................................... 312 Order Printing/Reprinting .................................................................................................................. 314

Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 314 Selective Order Forms Reprinting ..................................................................................................... 315

PRODUCTION WORK ORDER FORM PRINT ................................................................................. 321 Printer Assignment ............................................................................................................................ 321

PWC Printer ................................................................................................................................... 321 Form Printing Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 321

Printing Based on Order Item Shipping Branch ............................................................................. 322 Printing of Order Items .................................................................................................................. 322

Selection Screen ................................................................................................................................. 323 Production Work Order Sample......................................................................................................... 324

PRODUCT PICKING TICKET ............................................................................................................ 325 Printer and Stock Characteristics ................................................................................................... 325 Product Picking Ticket Reference Table ........................................................................................ 325

Printing Product Picking Tickets ....................................................................................................... 325 Printing Tickets from the Sales/Transfer Order and Credit Release Functions ............................. 325 Selective Printing of Product Picking Tickets ................................................................................ 326 Conditions for Printing ................................................................................................................... 326

Product Picking Ticket Layout .......................................................................................................... 327 Body of the Ticket .......................................................................................................................... 327

Ticket Stub Section ............................................................................................................................ 328 Sample Product Picking Ticket Layout ............................................................................................. 329 Product Picking Ticket with Barcoded Information .......................................................................... 330

Table of Contents Page xi

Product Picking Ticket without Barcoded Information ..................................................................... 331 WORK TAGS ....................................................................................................................................... 332

Printer and Stock Characteristics ....................................................................................................... 332 PRINTING LARGE-SIZED WORK TAGS ......................................................................................... 333

Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 333 Conditions for Printing ...................................................................................................................... 333

Restrictions .................................................................................................................................... 333 Work Tag Printer ............................................................................................................................... 333

WORK TAG LAYOUT ........................................................................................................................ 334 Body of the Ticket ............................................................................................................................. 334

Sales Order Information ................................................................................................................. 334 Remarks ......................................................................................................................................... 334 Sales Order Item Information ........................................................................................................ 334 Allocation Information ................................................................................................................... 334 Incoming Reservations ................................................................................................................... 335

Work Tag Sample .............................................................................................................................. 335 PRINTING SMALL-SIZED WORK TAGS ........................................................................................ 336

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 336 Work Tag Format .............................................................................................................................. 336

15. ORDER REPORTS .......................................................................................................................... 337 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 337

General Open Order Reporting Standards ......................................................................................... 337 Revenue and Costs ......................................................................................................................... 337 Profit Calculations ......................................................................................................................... 339

SALES ORDER AUDIT REPORT ...................................................................................................... 340 Selection Screen ................................................................................................................................ 340 Report Printing .................................................................................................................................. 341

OPEN ORDERS BY BRANCH/SALESPERSON/CUSTOMER ........................................................ 342 Selection Screens ............................................................................................................................... 342 Report Printing .................................................................................................................................. 343

OPEN ORDERS BY BRANCH/SALESPERSON/PRODUCT ........................................................... 345 Selection Screens ............................................................................................................................... 345 Report Printing .................................................................................................................................. 346

OPEN SALES ORDERS BY PRODUCT ............................................................................................ 348 Selection Screens ............................................................................................................................... 348 Report Printing .................................................................................................................................. 349

ORDER ITEM EXPEDITING REPORT ............................................................................................. 351 Selection Screens ............................................................................................................................... 351

Non-Specific Reservations Selection ............................................................................................. 352 Insufficient Finished Goods Selection ........................................................................................... 352 Insufficient Reservation Selection ................................................................................................. 353

Report Printing .................................................................................................................................. 353 Totals on the report ........................................................................................................................ 354

ORDER PRINTING CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 356 Selection Screen ................................................................................................................................ 356 Report ................................................................................................................................................ 356 Report ................................................................................................................................................ 357

ORDER FULFILLMENT REPORT ..................................................................................................... 358 Report Detail ..................................................................................................................................... 358

Product Lines ................................................................................................................................. 358 Order Lines .................................................................................................................................... 359

Examples ........................................................................................................................................... 360 Case A ............................................................................................................................................ 360 Case B ............................................................................................................................................ 360

Table of Contents Page xii

Case C ............................................................................................................................................ 360 Case D ............................................................................................................................................ 361 Case E............................................................................................................................................. 361

Report ................................................................................................................................................ 362 EXECUTIVE OVERVIEW REPORT .................................................................................................. 364

Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 364 Selection Entry Screen ....................................................................................................................... 364 Report Sample.................................................................................................................................... 365 Interface with eSTELoemtoll ............................................................................................................. 368

Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 368 MATERIAL SOURCE EXCEPTION REPORT .................................................................................. 369 BILL OF LADING MILL/HEAT REPORT ......................................................................................... 371

16. BOOKINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 373 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 373

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 373 SALES TARGET BY PRODUCT GROUP ......................................................................................... 374 SALES TARGET BY SALESPERSON ............................................................................................... 375 BRANCH SHIPMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 376 SCORE INQUIRY ................................................................................................................................ 377 STANDARD SELECTIONS ................................................................................................................ 379 BOOKING ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................................ 380

Report Printing ................................................................................................................................... 381 BOOKING TREND .............................................................................................................................. 384 BOOKING BY SALESPERSON .......................................................................................................... 386

Reports ............................................................................................................................................... 387 DETAIL BOOKING ............................................................................................................................. 391

Report Layout .................................................................................................................................... 391 New Orders .................................................................................................................................... 392 Profit Percentage ............................................................................................................................ 392

DAILY OPERATING REPORT ........................................................................................................... 394 Features and Functions ...................................................................................................................... 394

Gross/Net Profit Calculations......................................................................................................... 395 Bookings ............................................................................................................................................ 395

Today’s Order Section ................................................................................................................... 396 Month-to-Date Orders Section ....................................................................................................... 396 Year-to-Date Orders Section .......................................................................................................... 397 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 397

Sales ................................................................................................................................................... 397 Today’s Sales Section .................................................................................................................... 397 Month-to-Date Sales Section ......................................................................................................... 397 Year-to-Date Sales Section ............................................................................................................ 398

Open Orders ....................................................................................................................................... 398 Restrictions ..................................................................................................................................... 398

Inventory ............................................................................................................................................ 399 Incoming POs .................................................................................................................................... 399 Open Receivers .................................................................................................................................. 399 Cash Receipts ..................................................................................................................................... 399 Open Bills of Lading.......................................................................................................................... 400 Open Receivables .............................................................................................................................. 400 Report Sample.................................................................................................................................... 400

ORDER WEIGHTS OVERRIDDEN REPORT ................................................................................... 404 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 404 Report Sequence ................................................................................................................................ 404 Report Totals ..................................................................................................................................... 404

Table of Contents Page xiii

Report Field Description ................................................................................................................... 405 Report Sample ................................................................................................................................... 406

17. COUNTER SALES PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 407 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 407 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 408

Prerequisite ........................................................................................................................................ 408 Reference Table Setup ....................................................................................................................... 408 Delivery Methods .............................................................................................................................. 408 Payment Terms Validation ................................................................................................................ 409 Credit and Profit Verification ............................................................................................................ 409

Profit Verification .......................................................................................................................... 410 Reservation Verification .................................................................................................................... 410

Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 410 Workflow Messages .......................................................................................................................... 410

SUMMARY OF OPTIONS .................................................................................................................. 411 Miscellaneous Customer: Always a Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up ........................................ 411 Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up .................................................................................................. 411 Cash Order with Material Delivered.................................................................................................. 411 Account Order with Customer Pick-Up ............................................................................................ 411 Account Order with Material Delivered ............................................................................................ 412

ADDING AN ORDER THROUGH THE COUNTER SALES PROCESS ......................................... 413 Quote Entry ....................................................................................................................................... 413 Converting a Quote to Sales Order .................................................................................................... 413 Counter Sales Order Header .............................................................................................................. 414 Order Header and Item Status Update ............................................................................................... 415 Back Orders ....................................................................................................................................... 415

CASHIER PAYMENT PROCESSING ................................................................................................ 416 Cash Register Unpaid Orders ............................................................................................................ 416

Cash Register Payment .................................................................................................................. 418 Cash Register Refund .................................................................................................................... 419 Paid Orders..................................................................................................................................... 420 Cash Register Advance Payment ................................................................................................... 421 Cashier Total .................................................................................................................................. 422

Deleting an Order on the Cashier Payment Queue ............................................................................ 422 Cashier Payment Queue Cleanup ...................................................................................................... 422

CHANGING A SALES ORDER .......................................................................................................... 423 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 423 Counter Sales Change Order Screens ................................................................................................ 424

RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION ....................................................................................... 426 FORM PRINTING ................................................................................................................................ 427

Counter Receipt (orfcrp) .................................................................................................................... 427 Product Installation Options for the Counter Receipt .................................................................... 428 Standard Messages ......................................................................................................................... 428 Counter Receipt Printing/Reprinting ............................................................................................. 428 Form Sample .................................................................................................................................. 430

Pick Ticket (orfpkt) ........................................................................................................................... 431 Printer Assignment ......................................................................................................................... 431 Product Installation Options for the Pick Ticket ............................................................................ 431 Standard Messages ......................................................................................................................... 432 Form Sample .................................................................................................................................. 433

Work Order Form .............................................................................................................................. 434 CASH REGISTER JOURNAL ............................................................................................................. 435

Selection Entry Screen....................................................................................................................... 435 Report Sample ................................................................................................................................... 437

Table of Contents Page xiv

INVOICE AND GENERAL LEDGER UPDATE ................................................................................ 438 Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up .................................................................................................. 438

Invoice Entry Generation and Modification ................................................................................... 438 Invoice Update ............................................................................................................................... 438 Invoice Printing and Invoice Archiving ......................................................................................... 438 General Ledger Update .................................................................................................................. 438

Cash Order with Material Delivered .................................................................................................. 439 When the Order is paid in the Cashier Payment Queue ................................................................. 439 When the Material is Shipped on a Bill of Lading ......................................................................... 439

Account Order with Customer Pick-Up ............................................................................................. 439 Invoice Entry Generation and Modification ................................................................................... 439 Invoice Update, Invoice Printing and Invoice Archiving ............................................................... 439 General Ledger Update .................................................................................................................. 440

Account Order with Material Delivered ............................................................................................ 440

18. PERIODIC PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................ 441 ORDER COMPLETION AND DELETION UTILITY ........................................................................ 441

Order Completion Options ............................................................................................................. 441 Order Deletion Options .................................................................................................................. 442

Order Header Verifications for Completion ...................................................................................... 442 Order Item Verifications for Completion .......................................................................................... 442

Balance Quantity Verification ........................................................................................................ 442 Balance Amount Verification......................................................................................................... 443

Order Header Completion .................................................................................................................. 443 Order Deletion ................................................................................................................................... 443

Conditions for Deletion .................................................................................................................. 443 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 443

Completion or Deletion failure .......................................................................................................... 443 Deleting the Contact Information Record .......................................................................................... 444

ORDER COMPLETION AND DELETION LOG ............................................................................... 445 Log Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 445

Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 445 Log Sample ........................................................................................................................................ 446

ORDER CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE CLEANUP UTILITY .......................................................... 447 RESERVATION CLEANUP UTILITY ............................................................................................... 448

Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 448 HIGH LINE NUMBER ALLOCATION REPORT .............................................................................. 449 INTERFACE WITH BOOKING .......................................................................................................... 450

Special Case ....................................................................................................................................... 450 Ensuring Correct Bookings Calendar Creation/Bookings Table Re-initialization ......................... 450 Correcting Bookings Table Problems ............................................................................................ 450

APPENDIX A .......................................................................................................................................... 451 USER MENU OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 451

APPENDIX B .......................................................................................................................................... 453 COMPLETION AND DELETION ERRORS ...................................................................................... 453

Completion Errors.............................................................................................................................. 453 Deletion Errors ................................................................................................................................... 454

APPENDIX C .......................................................................................................................................... 457 DISTINCTION OF MATERIAL ORIGIN OVERVIEW ..................................................................... 457 DISTINCTION OF MATERIAL ORIGIN ........................................................................................... 457

Source ................................................................................................................................................ 457 Material Origin .................................................................................................................................. 458

REFERENCE TABLES ........................................................................................................................ 459 MATERIAL RESERVATION .............................................................................................................. 460

Table of Contents Page xv

Order Fulfillment – Change Mode Restrictions ................................................................................ 460 Quote Entry .................................................................................................................................... 461 Sales Order Entry ........................................................................................................................... 461 Invoice Entry .................................................................................................................................. 462

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 463

Table of Contents Page xvi

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

1. OVERVIEW

The Order Processing functions include all Sales Order processes required to enter and maintain Sales Order

information including those Sales Orders converted from eSTELquote. These functions also cover Sales

Order forms printing, reporting and inquiries.

The functions include:

Order Entry

Includes: Adding new orders

Changing and deleting of orders and items

Copying of orders and items

Immediate/Selective form printing

Sales, Shipping, Work Order and Production Work Order printing

Open Order Inquiries

Open Order Reports

Order Bookings Inquiries and Reports

The Order Processing processes also include all common functions used in different eSTELPLAN programs

such as eSTELquote, Bill of Lading Entry, Invoice Entry and Service Purchase Order Entry.

These processes include:

Item Charges

Inventory Reservations

Reservation against Incoming

Transfer Requisitions

Freight Charges and Costing

Item Costing

Remark Processing

Production Specifications

Periodic Procedures

1. Overview Page 2

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

MAJOR FEATURES PROVIDED

Multiple Charges per Order Item with each one classified as a Material, Processing, Freight or Other

Charge.

Customer Charges broken down into different revenue classifications for internal sales accounting.

For example, a total ‘delivered price’ to the customer can be broken out into Material, Processing and

Freight Revenue components for sales analysis purposes.

Charging of each Order Item based on one of the following Charge Quantity Types:

o Actual Weight

o Theoretical Weight

o Higher of the Actual or the Theoretical Weight

o Enhanced Weight

o Gross Weight

For foreign customers, and foreign freight vendors, ability to select whether to use a Fixed or

Variable Exchange Rate.

Handling of Counter Sales procedures and immediate pick-up of material by the Customer.

Possibility for each Order Item to be shipped by a different Branch from the Selling Branch to handle

own Branch as well as cross-Branch shipments.

Ability to reserve material located in another Branch. This generates an Inventory Transfer Request

to the other Branch.

Ability to create and print a Transfer Order from within the Order Item through the Transfer

Requisition function.

Ability to select multiple Product Items from the eSTELview Stock Available screen and

automatically reserve them to the Order Item.

Verification of the Customer credit during Order Entry as well as when printing Order forms to help

prevent loss from bad debts.

Optional Profit Verification to ensure that customer orders are profitable to your organization.

Ability for Salespeople to reserve inventory against specific inventory, Incoming Material Purchase

Orders, Transfer Orders or Transfer Bills of Lading, as well as a non-specific inventory grouping so

that the net material availability is updated.

Automatic calculations of all figures for Revenue, Costs, Profit, Profit Percentage so that the Order

and Invoice totals and profitability can be reviewed on-line by Sales or Order Entry personnel.

Ability to restrict access to Cost figures in Sales Orders, based on the User Group.

Availability of Order and Invoice accounting and management information for all Orders entered,

shipped, billed and Open Order Status.

1. Overview Page 3

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order booking and shipment analysis information provided by Customer, Product, Branch and

Company on a daily, monthly and year-to-date basis.

Ability to interface with the Production Schedule.

Distinction of Material Origin. Ability to restrict use of material based on the country or region of

origin.

1. Overview Page 4

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER TYPES

The following types of orders are handled by different eSTELPLAN functions.

Sales Orders – Reference Prefix ‘SO’

B – Blanket

N – Normal

R – Release

S – Standard

Transfer Orders – Reference Prefix ‘TO’

T – Transfer

eSTELquote – Reference Prefix ‘QT’

Q – Quotation

All Order Types are stored in the same physical files and share the same forms printing, inquiries and

report functions. All standard functions are discussed in the Sales Order manual, however any specific

function is discussed in its corresponding manual.

Blanket Orders

Used to create a standing Order for a customer’s Purchase Order that can be copied for individual Release

Orders. This maintains a total of the shipments to date against the Blanket. (Details of the shipments and

invoices are kept at the Release Order level.)

Blanket Orders are not submitted for Credit Verification nor can they have Work Order or Shipping Order

forms printed for them.

Normal Orders

Used to create a one-time Order for a customer’s Purchase Order. This is the default Order Type.

Release Orders

Created by copying a Blanket Order. As shipments are made, the Blanket Order balance is updated to

reflect the total weight and value shipped on the Release Orders.

1. Overview Page 5

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Standard Orders

Used to enter often-repeated orders which involve a standard product, remarks, charges and costs for

items frequently purchased by the customer. It does NOT contain any reservations nor is it printed as a

Work Order.

There is limited availability of Standard Orders on reports and inquiries.

Transfer Orders

Created through the Transfer Order Entry program or automatically by using the Transfer Requisition

function, Transfer Orders are used to move material from one Branch to another or from one Warehouse

to another within the same Branch. Refer to the Transfer Orders manual for more information.

Quotation

Created using eSTELquote. The quote is used to enter customer inquiries about prices and inventory

availability. Inquiries can be saved as a Quote and transferred to Sales Order. Refer to the eSTELquote

manual for more information.

1. Overview Page 6

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SELLING BRANCH Vs SHIPPING BRANCH

Every Sales Order has a ‘Selling Branch’ that is responsible for booking and invoicing the order. This is

stored at the Order Header level. Each order item also has a Shipping Branch that is the Branch that

actually ships the order to the customer.

Normally, the Sales Order is shipped by the Selling Branch from its own inventory. If there is no stock

available at the Selling Branch, the order or selected items from the order can be shipped from another

Branch directly to the customer, or the items can be reserved from another Branch’s inventory and

transferred to the Selling Branch.

The Selling and the Shipping Branches of a Sales Order normally default to the Branches defined in the

User Defaults of the person entering the Order.

The default Branches can vary, however, if you set the SBR=X Product Installation Option. If set to Y-

Yes, the Selling and Shipping branches default to the Customer’s branch as defined in the Customer

reference table record.

When the Selling and Shipping Branches of a Sales Order come from the User Defaults, they are allowed

to be different. You can force the Shipping Branch to be the same as the Selling Branch, if you set the

SHB=X Product Installation Option. If set to Y-Yes, the Shipping Branch defaults to the Selling Branch

when a new Order is created.

Both the Selling and Shipping Branch can be overridden if you have access to other Branch’s

transactions. (NOTE: If the SBR Product Installation Option is set to Y-Yes, then you can enter Orders

for all branches regardless of your Branch Access rights). There can only be one Selling Branch per

Order but there can be a different Shipping Branch for each Order Item.

If a Customer’s Order Item is to be shipped from two different locations, then you must create a separate

Item for each different Shipping Branch.

Example: An order contains three items. Items 1 and 3 are to be shipped from the Selling Branch while

Item 2 is shipped from another Branch. You must override the Shipping Branch on Item 2

with the other Shipping Branch.

When the Order Item is entered and the Shipping Branch is overridden to be different from the Selling

Branch, then, based on the Product Installation Option DSR=X, a pop-up ‘Branch Direct Shipment

Request’ window is displayed and you can enter pertinent information about the Sales Order Item. You

can print the Requisition for future reference or fax it to the Shipping Branch.

The Sales Order can be reserved against the Shipping Branch’s inventory so that material is reserved

immediately for the item. The Shipping Branch can ship this material or substitute other material as

appropriate to its inventory position and the customer’s requirement.

The Work Order Form is printed at the Shipping Branch so that the shipment can be prepared. The Sales

Order itself, including the Branch Direct items, is still controlled and invoiced at the Selling Branch.

If there are any changes to the Sales Order Item, the changes are made at the Selling Branch and a new

Branch Direct notice is sent to the Shipping Branch showing the changes. This provides a cross-reference

to the Shipping Branch in case there are any changes to the product or quantity ordered that need to be

1. Overview Page 7

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

changed at the Shipping Branch before the Order Item is shipped.

When the Shipping Branch ships the Order Item, the Selling Branch’s Order is updated to reflect the

quantities shipped. The Item must be invoiced at the Selling Branch.

The Accounts Receivable is updated using the Selling Branch’s number. The Sales Analysis and Sales

Journal files for the Order Item contain both the Selling and Shipping Branch numbers so that

management reports can be obtained for cross-Branch transactions.

1. Overview Page 8

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Selling BranchReceives Order

Selling BranchEnters Order

Item entered withShipping Branch

Shipping Order Printedat Shipping Branch

Item reserved againsttheShipping Branch's Inventory

or Incoming PO

Branch Direct ShipmentRequestsent to Shipping

Branch

Credit OK - Print fullSalesOrder at the SellingBranch

Order reviewed for Creditat Selling Branch

SalesAcknowledgementPrinted by SellingBranch

Work Order Item Printedat Shipping Branch

Order Item BilledbySelling Branch

Order Item Shippedby Shipping Branch

Order Flow for an Order taken at one Branch and Shipped by Another

1. Overview Page 9

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER STORAGE AND TRACKING

In order to provide management with the means to track order activity, a Sales Order is kept in the open

order files until it is completed. An order can be ‘completed’ by shipping and invoicing some or all

items, by manually deleting the remaining items, or it can be automatically completed by the Order

Completion Utility that is executed daily in the End of Day procedure.

Credit control is integrated with the open Sales Orders so that the Credit Department can review orders on

credit hold, release orders and add a Credit Status code to those orders that are still being reviewed. Refer

to the Accounts Receivable manual for details on Credit Hold functions.

While an order is open, it can be accessed using any of the Order Entry, Production, Bill of Lading or

Invoicing functions. Order Status Inquiries and reports can be used to view the status of the item and to

view the details of the order.

Once an order is completed, it can only be accessed using the Order Inquiry functions. This helps

management review the closed orders.

Based on the Product Installation Option DAY=999, completed orders are deleted from the order files and

are thus no longer accessible for inquiries and reports.

1. Overview Page 10

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER STRUCTURE

This diagram shows the components and relationship of the information kept for an order.

Order Header Information

(1 per order)

(1 per order)

(999 per order)ORDER ITEM

ORDER HEADER

Header, Global Allocation and

Shipping Remarks (3 types, 99 lines/type)

Order Totals (1 per order)

Billing Information (1 record per item)

Cost Attributions (99 lines per item)

Order Item Totals (1 record per item)

Production Specifications (1 set per item)

Item Remarks

(Types D, I, O, P, W) (5 types, 99 lines per type)

(99 records per item for PO)

(99 records per item for TO)

(99 records per item for Tfr BL)

Incoming Reservations

Transfer Requisition (1 record per item)

Inventory Reservations (999 combinations per item)

(1 per Item)Non-Specific Reservations

(up to 998 per Item)Specific Reservations

(1 per Item)

(up to 5 lines/Res)

Transfer Order Req

Allocation Remarks

1. Overview Page 11

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

All Orders share some common information and functions but have additional functional requirements to

control the processing and information needs of the company.

Order Header Information

Order Header Contains the Customer and/or Branch, transaction classification information,

various dates and reference information required to handle the order.

Header Remarks Contains general remarks concerning all items on the order.

Global Alloc Rmks Contains general work order instructions applicable to all items on the order.

Shipping Remarks Contains general remarks concerning the shipping instructions for all items on the

order.

Order/Item Totals Contains the totals for revenue, Costs, Profit and Profit % plus sales taxes, etc.

Order Detail Information

Billing Detail Contains the basic Order Item information including the product to be sold or

handled for the transaction. It also includes all fields about the Item including

the Order Status, Product sold, Material Price, Misc Charges, Sales Tax and

codes used to classify the type of sale, etc.

Cost Attributions Contains the detailed breakdown of costs for the Order Item. This is divided

into Internal Costs and External Costs. Refer to the Add-on and Automatic

Costs chapter for details.

Item Remarks Includes the different types of remark lines based on where the information is

to be displayed or printed. Refer to the Header and Item Remarks chapter for

details.

Production Specs Identifies the detailed production specifications for the item that are printed on

the Work Order and are used in the eSTELpro or eSTELman production

applications. Refer to the Production Specifications chapter for details.

Reservations Includes the inventory products reserved for the item. These are subdivided

into specific and non-specific reservations as well as Allocation Remarks.

Refer to the Inventory Reservations chapter for details.

1. Overview Page 12

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Incoming Reservation Identifies the Purchase Order, Transfer Order and/or Transfer Bill of Lading

Items that are reserved against the Order Item. Refer to the Reservations

Against Incoming Material chapter for details.

Transfer Requisition Contains the Transfer Requisition information used when creating a Transfer

Order from Order Entry. Refer to the Transfer Requisition chapter for details.

1. Overview Page 13

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER PRINTING FUNCTIONS

eSTELPLAN produces several forms that are related to the Order Processing functions. Some of these

must be used in conjunction with each other as they require specific procedures to be followed and

provide a tie-in to various computerized functions.

All forms are designed for use with completely blank paper or with partially blank paper that has a pre-

printed company logo at the top. This methodology reduces the number of different kinds of forms that

must be purchased.

A definition of each type of form is listed below.

Sales Acknowledgement The form printed and sent to the customer after the order is entered to

confirm the details of the order.

Sales Order The control document that contains all items on an order along with the

prices and costs for follow-up in the Sales Department.

Shipping Order The packing slip that contains all order items and is printed and distributed

to the warehouse for use in the preparation of the order for shipment. It

contains the full detail of the customer’s order and shipping instructions for

use in shipping the order.

Work Order An optional form that contains the product, processing instructions and

inventory reservations used to prepare the material for shipment.

Based on a Product Installation Option, WKF=X, this form can print all

items for the order or only one item per form depending on the

arrangement of the Warehouse and Location of processing equipment.

Bill of Lading A pre-printed, multi-part form used to ship a Customer’s Order Items by

common carrier. The Bill of Lading preparation requires the entry of the

items that are to be shipped along with the detail of each product or tag to

be shipped. Refer to the Shipping manual for details.

Invoice The invoice to the customer for any shipments made from the Bill of

Lading form or the Shipping Order form. Refer to the Invoicing manual

for details.

1. Overview Page 14

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Forms Printing Options

Customer Inquiry

Work Order Form

Customer Order Entry

Order

Acknowledgement

Form

Sales Order Form

Work Order Form

Work Order Form

Work Order Form

(Option 1)

Shipping Order Form

(Option 2)

Bill of Lading Entry

Bill of Lading Form

1. Overview Page 15

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CREDIT, PROFIT, PRODUCTION AND SHIPMENT HOLD

eSTELPLAN provides a number of points at which orders can be held back from further processing, form

printing, production or shipment due either to credit problems with the customer or to production related

issues.

Three separate sets of Order Hold codes are maintained for each order and operate independently of each

other.

Credit Hold

The Credit Hold is an optional set of functions for those companies that require a detailed calculation of

credit exposure for each customer prior to releasing an order for production.

The Credit Hold functions are used to suspend processing of an order subject to credit review of the

customer’s account. Details of the criteria used to hold the orders are listed in the Credit Verification

section of the Accounts Receivable manual.

When an order is placed on Credit Hold, the Sales Acknowledgement can be printed but the Order forms

cannot be printed unless the CRD Product Installation Option is set to print the forms regardless of the

Credit Hold code. However, the order cannot be shipped using the Bill of Lading function, nor can it be

invoiced, as the Credit Hold status prevents the action.

For an order to be printed, it must be subjected to credit review. If the order exposure is accepted, the

order will be printed. The order is subjected to a second credit review and may be held again if the value

is later changed to be greater than the released value or is sufficient to place the customer’s account over

its credit limit.

To release an order from Credit Hold, you must call up the Credit Release function and approve the order

for printing.

Information about the order, its credit status, the Hold and Release information is kept for Credit

Department follow-up purposes. This information is available up to the time the order is deleted.

Profit Hold/Verification

A Profit Verification function that occurs at order printing time helps you to monitor and control the

profitability of all Sales Orders as they are initially entered or later modified. A company-defined Net or

Gross Profit Percentage is used to identify the Orders whose profitability is low. These Orders are put on

Profit Hold until they are reviewed and released by the Sales Manager. This function is integrated with

the Automatic Credit Verification function. Refer to the Profit Verification Function chapter of the

Accounts Receivable manual for details.

1. Overview Page 16

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production Hold

The Production Hold function is used to stop an order from being processed, produced or shipped if the

order is not completely entered or the customer postpones delivery of the order to a later date or there is a

problem with the order during the production cycle.

An order can be placed on Production Hold at any time; it is not contingent on the Credit Department

review of the order. All that is required to put an order on Production Hold is to set the Production Hold

code to Y-Yes. Once the order is on hold, it cannot be printed, processed or shipped using the Bill of

Lading functions.

Shipment Hold

The Shipment Hold function is used to stop an order from being shipped if the order is not complete or

the customer postpones delivery or there is a problem with the order during the production cycle.

An order can be placed on Shipment Hold at any time; it is not contingent on the Credit Department

review of the order. All that is required to put an order on Shipment Hold is to set the Shipment Hold

code to Y-Yes. Once the order is on hold, it cannot be shipped using the Bill of Lading functions.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

2. ORDER ENTRY

OVERVIEW

The Order Entry function is used to add, change or delete Sales Orders and Order Items for customers up to

the point at which the Order is shipped and invoiced.

Orders are composed of a number of different screens, some of which are optional, that are used to enter the

order information, reserve inventory, enter costs associated with the order as well as production

specifications, transfer requisitions and remarks.

Order Entry is composed of the following screens:

User Defaults window

Order Header

Sales Order Defaults window

Freight Defaults window

Sales Order Header screen

Header Remarks screen

Order Totals window

Order Item

Order Item screen

Sales Order Item Reservation screen

– Non-Specific Reservations

– Specific Inventory Reservations

Item Remarks screen

Reservations against Incoming material window

Specifications window

External/Internal Costs screen

Item Totals window

Transfer Requisition window

Production Schedule window

Transaction Scheduling screen

2. Order Entry Page 18

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

USER DEFAULTS

The first time you access the Order Processing program, the following User Defaults window is

displayed.

User Defaults

Sls Cat BS

Source

Status E

Ref Brh PHI

Ship Brh PHI

IS Slspsn DG

Buyer

SO Date 12/07/04

Wrk Ord Dt 12/07/04

User Defaults window

The User Defaults fields must be entered. They are stored permanently by Login ID for use in Order

Entry each time the Order Entry function is called up. That way, they can be tailored to each person who

is entering orders and thus save entry keystrokes and time. They are automatically applicable to all orders

entered in each entry session unless changed.

The User Defaults window only appears if the fields are blank and must be defined. To override any of

the fields, once they have been saved, you must access the window again by pressing <Shift F7> at the

Order number field. The changes are then again stored permanently.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Sls Cat Sales

Category &

Allocation

The default Sales Category (Sales Allocation) used

for all new Orders created in the session.

Source Source

Reference

The default Source code used for all new Orders

created in the session.

Status Order

Status

The default Order Status code used for all new

Orders created in the session.

Ref Brh User’s Brh Branch

Reference

The Branch responsible for making the sale. This

is the Branch under which the Credit is reviewed

and under which the order must be invoiced. Can

be overridden if you have multiple branch access

rights.

Ship Brh User’s Brh Branch

Reference

The default Shipping Branch used for each order

item to indicate who delivers the material to the

Customer.

IS Slspsn Slsperson

Reference

The Inside Salesperson responsible for taking the

order.

The Product Installation Option, SLP=X, controls

whether to use the Inside Salesperson entered in

the User’s default or from the Customer or

Customer Ship-To account on the Order Header.

Buyer Not applicable in Order Entry. Used in eSTELquote

when converting a Buyout to a Purchase Order.

2. Order Entry Page 19

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

SO Date System

Date

Valid Date

greater

than or

Equal to

System

Date

The default Sales Order Date to be used for all

new Orders created in the session. Unless

modified in the User Defaults window, if the

current date is less than the System Date, the

System Date is moved to the Order Date but can be

overridden.

Wrk Ord Date System

Date

Valid Date

greater

than or

Equal to

System

Date

The default Work Order Date to be used for all new

Orders entered. Unless modified in the User

Defaults window, if the current date is less than

the System Date, the System Date is moved to the

Order Date but can be overridden.

Exception

If the SBR=X Product Installation Option is set to Y-Yes, the Selling and Shipping branches default to

the Customer’s branch as defined in the Customer reference table record.

If the SHB=X Product Installation Option is set to Y-Yes, the Shipping Branch defaults to the Selling

Branch.

2. Order Entry Page 20

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING A NEW SALES ORDER

The following screen is displayed once the User Defaults window is saved. You can access the User

Defaults window using <Shift F7> from the Order number field.

Type Sales Order Header SO No PHI-

Sold-to Ship-to

Slspsn IS- OS- Frt Resp Dlv Mth

Trm Pymt Cry Frt Charge /

Status Due Date Frt Cost /

Prn Hold Order Date Vendor

Ship Hold Wrk Ord Dt Ship Via

Cr Hold - Promise Dt Route-Stop -

Ship Brh Whs FOB Pt

Cus PO No Tx Rgn Apl Licence No

Release No 1

Job Number 2

Sales Cat Source 3

Bko Alwd Metric Mail 4

Test Cert Chem Phy Typ Shp Inv Frm Prt Ack Prt UD

1-Copy Order

Blank Order Header screen

Action Bar Action

Copy Order Calls the Copy Order window. Refer to the ‘Copying an Existing Order’ section for

details.

Adding an Order Header

The Order Header information is used to identify the Customer, Shipping Address and other order

information required for processing the order and allocating sales credit and accounting information.

When the Header screen is displayed, the Branch defaults from the User Defaults. You can change the

defaulted code to any valid Branch if you have multi-branch access, by pressing <Esc> from the Order

number field.

If you are using manual numbering (User Menu Option ‘m’), you must enter the Order number to proceed

with the entry. If you are using the automatic numbering system, simply press <Enter> from the Order

number field and the Order number is automatically assigned from the Controlled Reference number

table.

As long as the Order Header has not been saved, you can cancel the Header page entry at any time by

pressing <F4>. A message “Do you really want to cancel entry?” is displayed. Enter Y-Yes to cancel or

2. Order Entry Page 21

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

N-No to proceed with the entry.

Orders without Items

To ensure that no Order Headers are created by mistake, the question “Order has no items - do you wish

to delete?” is displayed when you exit the Sales Order. It allows you to automatically delete the Header

if no associated items were created.

Order Defaults Window

Once you press <Enter> at the Order number field, the Order Defaults window is displayed. The Order

Defaults fields are used for the current order only. These fields are not carried forward to the next order.

The cursor is positioned at the Sold-To field.

Sales Order Defaults

Type N

Sold-to 1010 ACME FAB

Ship-to 1

Due Date 11/11/11

Cus PO No 3

Release No 5

Promise Dt ASAP

Sales Cat BS

Source D

Order Defaults window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Type N B, N, R, S Used to specify the type of order. Valid codes

are:

B Blanket

N Normal

R Release

S Standard

To change the Type, press <Esc> from the Sold-To

field.

Sold-To Customer

Reference

The Customer number to which the material or

service is sold. A Look-Up with multiple options

is available to help you select this Customer. See

the ‘Customer Account Info’ chapter of the

Reference manual for more details.

An initial check of the Customer’s credit status

is made at this time and a warning is displayed if

the order is on credit hold. (See the ‘Credit

Verification’ section of the Accounts Receivable

manual for details.)

To ensure that no Sales Orders are created for

Temporary Accounts, an error message is displayed

if you enter a Temporary Customer number.

2. Order Entry Page 22

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Ship-To First

Ship-to

for the

Sold-to,

or 0.

Customer

Ship-To

Reference

The address to which the material must be shipped.

If there is no Ship-To on file for the customer,

the field is skipped and left blank. Then, on the

Header, the Ship-To Name and Address fields

default from the Sold-To Name and Address.

If there is only one Ship-To on file, the field

defaults to this Ship-To.

If there is more than one Ship-To on file for the

customer, the first one is defaulted, and a

message “Ship-to exists for this customer” is

displayed. To change it, press <Esc> from the Due

Date field.

Due Date Valid Date

PIO LDD=X

You must enter a valid date that can be used as a

default Due Date. If the LDD=X Product

Installation Option is set, the Due Date is

validated to ensure it is not prior to the System

Date.

The Due Date is required for scheduling and Open

Order reporting reference and selection.

Cus P/O No If the Customer table has the PO Required field

set to Y-Yes, then you MUST enter a Purchase Order

number, else the field is optional.

This number is used by the Open Order inquiries

and reports and is moved to the Accounts

Receivable Open Item for reference and selections

in Accounts Receivable inquiries.

Release No Optional Enter the Customer’s Release number, if

applicable. This number is used for Open Order

inquiries and reports and is moved to the Accounts

Receivable Open Item for reference and selections

in Accounts Receivable inquiries.

Promise Dt Optional This field is used if there is no specific Due

Date, but the Salesperson has made a promise such

as ‘When Ready’, ‘ASAP’ or ‘1st of Month’, etc.

Sales Cat User

Defaults

Sales

Category

and Sales

Allocation

Reference

The default Sales Category (Sales Allocation) to

be used for all Items on this Order. It can be

overridden for the current Order.

Restriction: The Sales Category for Toll Customers

must be Customer-Owned.

Source User

Defaults

Source

Reference

The default Source code to be used for all items

of the Order. Use a Source code that has the

Distinction of Material Origin flag set to Y-Yes

if the customer requires that you only ship

material that originates from a specific country

or region.

Job Defaults Window

If the Customer table has the Job Information Required field set to Y-Yes, the following window is

displayed once the Order Defaults are accepted.

Job Number Defaults

Job Number 5750

Job Number Defaults window

2. Order Entry Page 23

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Job number window is not displayed when the Job Information Required field in the Customer table

is set to N-No.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Job Number Cust Job

Reference

if entered

This information is used for Credit Verification

and Job Information table update in Order Entry

and Invoice Update. (See ‘Customer Job

Information’ for details.)

Enter a valid Job number or press <F1> or <Enter>

to exit the window. The JVL Product Installation

Option, when set to Y-Yes, forces you to enter a

valid Job number.

The JVL=X Product Installation Option controls the entry of a valid Job number window. Refer to the

Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Freight Defaults Window

Once the Order Defaults window is completed and accepted, the Freight window is displayed to allow

you to review all Freight related fields and make changes applicable to the current order. The Freight

fields entered in the Freight Defaults window are passed to the Sales Order Header. For more information

about Freight, refer to the Freight Charges and Costing chapter of this manual.

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp PP PPD Dlv Mth OT

Frt Charge /

Frt Cost /CWT

Vendor No

Ship Via OUR TRUCK

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt PREPAID TO DESTINATION

Probill No

Freight window

Optional Customer Remark Window

Based on the Product Installation Option DRA=X, a window containing customer remarks of a particular

type such as Credit Remarks, can be displayed after you accept the Freight Defaults window during Sales

Order Entry. This allows you to notify the Sales department or the Order Entry personnel of any

information or instructions regarding this customer, prior to the entry of the Order.

Customer Remarks

Call John at ext 345 for approval of all ABC Corporate orders.

2. Order Entry Page 24

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Restrictions

Only the Ship-To zero remarks are displayed in the window regardless of the actual Ship-To number

entered on the Sales Order.

The Customer Remark window is not displayed when a Sales Order is created by copying an existing

Order.

2. Order Entry Page 25

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Header Action Bar

Once the Freight window is completed, the Header page fields are displayed as shown in the following

screen.

Type N Sales Order Header SO No PHI- 4

Sold-to 1010 Ship-to 1

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

SUITE 101 SUITE 3423

PHILADELPHIA, PA 190215 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Slspsn IS-AG OS-SH Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth OT

Trm Pymt 99 Cry Frt Charge 2.2500/CWT

Status SHP Due Date 09/16/04 Frt Cost /CWT

Prn Hold N Order Date 09/16/04 Vendor

Ship Hold N Wrk Ord Dt 09/16/04 Ship Via OUR TRUCK

Cr Hold M- Promise Dt Route-Stop 142- 2

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS FOB Pt OUR WHSE

Cus PO No REP-96345-1 Tx Rgn Apl Licence No

Release No 1 PA E 532141-PS

Job Number 2 NT2 E

Sales Cat WS Source D 3 NT3 E

Bko Alwd Y Metric N Mail Y 4 PAPH A

Test Cert Chem Y Phy N Typ O Shp 2 Inv 1 Frm Prt Y Ack Prt N UD

1-Items 2-Chg Hdr 3-Hdr Rmks 4-Freight 5-Recost 6-Totals 7-Fax/Eml

Order Header Entry screen

Action Bar Action

Items Proceeds to the Order Item screen page.

Chg Hdr Allows you to change the various fields of the Header page by block of fields. Refer

to the ‘Change Order’ section for details.

Hdr Rmks Allows you to enter or change Order Header Remarks. Refer to the Remarks Processing

chapter for details.

Freight Allows you to recompute the Freight when either the item quantity or weight was

modified or any of the Freight related fields are changed. The Freight action bar

option blinks as soon as the Freight needs to be recomputed, otherwise, it is dimmed

and not accessible.

If you exit the Order while the Freight action bar option is blinking, the Freight is

recomputed automatically. This option is dimmed when you are creating a new Order as

there is no Freight to be computed. Refer to the ‘Freight Charges and Costing’

chapter for details.

Recost Allows you to recost the transaction to pick up the updated inventory costs after

finalizing the production’s costs. Refer to the ‘Add-on and Automatic Costs’ chapter

for details.

Totals Allows you to review the Order Totals page. This option is dimmed when you are

creating a new Order, as there are no Totals created until at least one Item has been

added to the Order.

2. Order Entry Page 26

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Fax/Eml If eSTELfax is installed, this selection generates a fax of the Sales Acknowledgement

form and displays the eSTELfax menu. You also have the capability to e-mail the

acknowledgement. This option is dimmed in the following situations:

If eSTELfax is not installed

When you are creating a new order

If the customer has the code ‘Acknowledgement Required’ set to N-No in the Customer

Information table

If the Counter Sales procedures Product Installation Option CSH=X is set.

When faxing a Sales Acknowledgement, the Fax number defaults as follows:

From the Ship-To table

o if a Ship-To is specified on the Sales Order Header and

o if a Fax number exists in the Ship-To table

From the Customer Information table

o if no Ship-To is specified on the Sales Order Header or

o if the Ship-To on the Header has a blank Fax number.

NOTE:

When the Fax option is not dimmed, Acknowledgement forms can be faxed regardless of the Order

Type. However, for Blanket Orders, no Freight Charge and Cost are computed prior to faxing the

Acknowledgment.

When you fax or email an Acknowledgement, you can also get a copy of the form printed if the Prt

on Sub field is set to Y-Yes in the eSTELfax User Defaults.

Order Header Fields

The following shows the Sold-To and Ship-To group of fields.

Type N Order Header Brh PHI-

Sold-to 1010 Ship-to 1

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

SUITE 101 SUITE 3423

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Field Name Default Validation Description

Type Order

Defaults

Display Order Type. Cannot be changed once the Order

Header fields are entered.

Brh Selling Branch. Cannot be changed once the Order

Header fields are entered.

Sold to Number Order

Defaults

Customer

Reference

Can be overridden before saving the Order Header.

2. Order Entry Page 27

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Name & Address Customer

Reference

Can be overridden if the Cash Account is set to Y-

Yes in the Customer table. If the Cash Account is

set to N-No, you cannot override the field.

If a record matching the Customer and Ship-To

numbers is found in the Customer Ship-To Override

Name/Address table, the alternate name and address

stored in this table default instead of the

Customer Information name and address. The

alternate name and address are then printed on the

Order Forms.

Ship-To Number Order

Defaults

Customer

Ship-to

Can be overridden.

Name & Address Ship-to

Reference

Can be overridden.

The following shows the next group of fields:

Slspsn IS-DG OS-SH Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth CC

Trm Pymt 1 Cry CAD V 0.87840000 Frt Charge /CWT

Status FAX Due Date 11/11/11 Frt Rate 4.0000/CWT

Prn Hold N Order Date 08/08/98 Vendor 1040

Ship Hold N Wrk Ord Dt 07/06/98 Ship Via US STEEL

Cr Hold N- Promise Dt 1 Route-Stop 142- 2

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS FOB Pt

Field Name Default Validation Description

Slspsn IS User

Defaults

or

Customer

Salesprsn

table

Inside Salesperson. Can be overridden.

OS Customer

Reference

Salesprsn

table

Outside Salesperson. Can be overridden.

A Product Installation Option, AOS=XXXXXX,

controls the access to the field to prevent

unauthorized personnel from changing it.

Trm Pymt Customer

Reference

Term of

Pymt Ref.

Terms of Payment. Can be overridden.

A Product Installation Option, ATP=XXXXXX,

controls the access to the Terms of Payments and

the Currency fields to prevent unauthorized

personnel from changing them.

A Product Installation Option, PAS=XXXXXX,

controls access to the Terms of Payment, the

Currency Rate, Currency code and the Tax fields.

Cry Customer Currency

Reference

The customer’s Currency Code, Type and Exchange

Rate are displayed next to the Terms of Payments

if the customer’s currency is different than the

Base currency.

Code: Customer’s Currency. Display field, cannot

be changed.

Type: V-Variable or F-Fixed, defaulted based on

the CET=X Production Installation Option.

Rate: The Rate defaults from the Currency table,

based on the customer. When the Type is V-

2. Order Entry Page 28

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Variable, if the Exchange Rate is overridden

on the Header, the Exchange Type is

automatically changed to F and the Order

must be re-costed.

NOTE 1: If the Type is V-Variable and the Rate

has been modified in the Currency table,

the Internal Charges are only re-computed

with the new rate when the Order is re-

costed. If the type is F-Fixed, the

Exchange Rate is not replaced from the

currency table at re-cost time.

NOTE 2: A Product Installation Option,

PAS=XXXXXX, controls access to the Terms

of Payment, the Currency Rate and code

and the Tax fields.

Status User

Defaults

Status

Reference

Status Code. Can be overridden.

Prn Hold N Y, N Used to prevent an Order from being put on a

Production Order or from being printed in case

there is a problem with the specifications of the

customer.

Options are:

Y Order is on Production Hold

N Order is not on Production Hold

An order can be placed on Production Hold at any

time after it is entered.

A Product Installation Option, AHC=XXXXXX,

controls the access to the field and prevents

unauthorized personnel from changing the code.

The same option also controls the access to the

Ship Hold field.

Ship Hold N Y, N Used to prevent an Order from being shipped using

the Bill of Lading function.

Options are:

Y Order is on Shipping Hold

N Order is not on Shipping Hold

An order can be placed on Shipping Hold at any

time after it is entered.

A Product Installation Option, AHC=XXXXXX,

controls the access to the field and prevents

unauthorized personnel from changing the code.

The same option also controls the access to the

Prn Hold field.

Credit Hold A, H, M,

N, P, %

Display

only

This code indicates whether the Order is on credit

hold, released or not reviewed yet.

Valid codes are:

A Automatically Released

H Credit Held

M Manually Released

N Not Reviewed yet

P Profit Released but not Credit Checked

% Profit Held

The Credit Status is entered by the Credit Manager

from the Credit Release function while the Order

is on Credit Hold.

2. Order Entry Page 29

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Due Date Order

Defaults

Valid Date The Order Due Date. Can be overridden.

Order Date User

Defaults

Valid Date The date the order is entered. Can be overridden.

Wrk Ord Dt User

Defaults

Valid Date The Work Order Date. Can be overridden.

Promise Dt Order

Defaults

Optional The free-form promise date. Can be overridden.

Frt Resp Freight

Defaults

Frt Resp

Ref.

Refer to the Freight Charges and Costing chapter.

Dlv Mth Freight

Defaults

OT, CC, CP Refer to the Freight Charges and Costing chapter.

Frt Charge/Cost Freight

Defaults

Optional Refer to the Freight Charges and Costing chapter.

Vendor Freight

Defaults

Vendor

Reference

Refer to the Freight Charges and Costing chapter.

Ship Via Ship-To/

Customer

Optional If the Delivery Method is OT or CP, then this

field defaults from the Ship Via stored in the

Ship-To/Customer table.

If the Delivery Method is CC, then the field

defaults to the Freight Vendor Short Name.

If the Delivery Method is changed from OT or CP to

CC on the Freight window or on the Header, the

Ship Via field is automatically updated and shows

the Vendor (carrier) Short Name corresponding to

the Vendor number entered in the Vendor field,

instead of defaulting from the Customer table.

Route-Stop Ship-To/

Customer

Optional Route and Stop. Can be overridden.

FOB Pt Freight

Defaults

Optional Freight On Board Point. Can be overridden.

Ship Brh User

Defaults

Branch

reference

Order Shipping Branch. Can be overridden.

Ship Whs Branch

Reference

Warehouse

Reference

The default Shipping Warehouse for the Shipping

Branch. Can be overridden.

This is the last group of fields on the Header page:

Cus P/O No 1 Tx Rgn Apl Licence No

Release No 1 1 PA E 532141-PS

Job Number 2 NT2 E

Sales Cat RA Source D 3 NT3 E

Bko Alwd Y Metric N Mail Y 4 PAPH A

Test Cert Chem Y Phy N Typ O Shp 2 Inv 1 Frm Prt Y Ack Prt N UD

Field Name Default Validation Description

Cus P/O No Order

Defaults

Customer

PO

Required

The Customer’s Order number assigned to the Order.

It can be overridden. Refer to the Order Defaults

section for details.

2. Order Entry Page 30

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Release No Order

Defaults

Optional The Customer’s Release number assigned to the

Order. It can be overridden. Refer to the Order

Defaults section for details.

Job Number Order

Defaults

Optional,

Job

Reference

The Job number assigned to the Order. It can be

overridden with another valid Job number. Refer

to the Order Defaults section for details.

Sales Cat Order

Defaults

Sales

Category

This is the default Sales Category code to be used

for all Items on the Order unless it is manually

changed on the item.

Source Order

Defaults.

Source

Reference

This is the default Source code to be used for all

Items on the Order. Each Item automatically

carries this code unless it is manually changed on

the Item.

NOTE: Use a Source code that has the Distinction

of Material Origin flag set to Y-Yes if the

customer requires that you only ship

material that originates from a specific

country or region.

Bko Alwd eSTELPLAN

Company

N, Y Backorders Allowed. Controls whether multiple

shipments are allowed for the order or not.

Options are:

N Multiple shipments are not allowed for the

Order and, therefore, the Order is flagged as

Completed once it is invoiced.

Y Multiple shipments are allowed for the Order.

Metric Base

Measure

N, Y Controls the Order Base Measure.

Options are:

N Default for installations with an Imperial

Base Measure and can be changed if required

Y Default for installations with a Metric Base

Measure and cannot be changed.

Mail Y N, Y This field controls printing of the Sales

Acknowledgement Form and later the Invoice Form.

Options are:

N A message “DO NOT MAIL” is printed on the

Sales Acknowledgement and Invoice forms when

they are printed.

Y Default. This message is not printed.

Test Cert

Ship-To/

Customer

The Test Certificate required fields control the

information printed on the Order, Bill of Lading

and Invoice forms.

Chem Chemical Analysis Required Yes or No.

Phy Physical Test Required Yes or No.

Typ Type of Certificate. Valid options are:

C – Certificate of Compliance

O – Original Certificate

S – Separate Certificate

T – Tag Certificate. A Separate

Certificate per each BL Reservation

that has a unique Group/Size/Grd/Mill/

Heat and Physical information.

2. Order Entry Page 31

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Shp Ship-To/

Customer

Number of Certificates by Shipment

When the Cert Type is S or T, determines the

number of copies of Test Certificates that

print along with the Bill of Lading form.

When the Cert Type is O and IMG=Y on the Bill

of Lading Entry program, defaults to the Cpy

field of the Print Certificates window and

determines the number of copies of images

(Original Mill Test Certificates) that print.

When the Cert Type is C, used for information

only.

Inv Ship-To/

Customer

Number of Certificates by Invoice.

Tx Rgn Ship-To/

Customer

Tax Region

Reference

The access to the Tax Regions and the other Tax

fields can be restricted using the Product

Installation Option PAS=XXXXXX. This PIO also

controls access to the Terms of Payment and

Currency fields.

The Tax Region represents the taxing authority for

which the Sales Tax is collected. The code

identifies which portions of revenue are taxable

for the region and the rate of tax applicable to

the region.

The Taxes are recomputed automatically any time

the Tax Regions are changed.

Apl Ship-To/

Customer

A, E The Sales Tax Applicable code indicates whether or

not the transaction is subject to Sales Tax for

each of the four Tax Types. Valid codes are:

A Applicable

E Exempt

License No Ship-To/

Customer

Optional The License number is used for customer and

accounting reference. The number can be entered

regardless of whether the customer is taxable or

exempt from tax.

Frm Prt Display N/Y Indicates if the Sales Order has been printed.

Ack Prt Display N/Y Indicates if the Acknowledgement form has been

printed. The printing date is displayed next to

the Ack Prt field.

UD Ship-To/

Customer

User

Defined

reference

Two character User Defined code. Can be

overridden as required.

When a new Sales Order is entered, the User

Defined code defaults from the Customer Ship-To

reference to the Order Header. If there is no

Customer Ship-To, the UD defaults from the

Customer reference.

When a Sales Order is created for a Customer Ship-

To that has no UD code defined (blank UD field),

the UD code defaults as follows:

From the Customer reference if there is no

State code in the Customer Ship-To.

From the Customer Ship-To reference if there

is a State code in the Customer Ship-To. In

this case, a blank UD is carried to the Sales

Order Header.

When a Sales Order is created from a Quote, the

2. Order Entry Page 32

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

User Defined code is copied from the Quote Header

to the Sales Order Header.

Adding an Order Item

The Order Item is composed of several screens. The required screen containing the billing information

including the product ordered, the charges and classification of the Item is entered first. The optional

screens are the Inventory Reservation, Item Remarks, Cost Attributions, Production Specifications,

Reservations Against Incoming Material and Transfer Requisition screens.

The optional screens/windows are standard functions that are used, and work in the same manner as in

other eSTELPLAN programs. These standard functions are:

Inventory Reservation used to reserve existing inventory products against the Order Item.

Item Remarks contains the different Remarks that are used to provide instructions

to the warehouse or shipping departments.

Specifications used to enter customer specifications for tolerances and packaging

instructions.

Reservations Against Incoming used to make Purchase Order Reservations or Transfer Order

Reservations for the Sales Order

Internal/External Costs used to add specific costs over and above the material cost itself.

Access to this screen can be restricted by setting the User Group

Display Cost field to N-No (in the User Group Information table).

Transfer Requisition used to create a Transfer Order from Order Entry.

This section discusses the Order Item Billing screen in detail. Each optional function is discussed in a

separate chapter of this manual.

When you accept the Freight Defaults window, the cursor is positioned on the Items action bar option.

Press <Enter> or select the Items action bar option to display the Order Item screen.

Restriction

To add an Item to a Release Order, you must copy it from the corresponding Blanket Order. Refer to the

Copying an Item section for details.

2. Order Entry Page 33

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Type N ACME FAB Order Item SO No PHI- 4-

Cus Part Specs: -

Group

Size

Grade Width Length Ga

Order Msr Wgt

Bal Msr Wgt

Sls Cat/Typ - Chg Qty Typ

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

Taxes Total

Status Due Date Prn Seq MPO WKO Upd Usg

Ship Brh Whs Source Stk/NST Org Due Dt BKO Sts

1-Copy Itm

Order Item screen

Action Bar Action

Copy Itm Used to copy an existing Item. If you select to copy an Item, a window is displayed

to allow you to specify which Item you want to copy.

The standard sections of the Order Item screen are:

Product Identifier

Order Quantities

Item Charges

Classification Information

Product Identifier

This section identifies the product being sold.

Cus Part Specs: [P] 1010-123456

Group CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil Drawing Quality

Size 18 .0465 Min X 10.2500”

Grade DQ Width 10.2500” Length GaM 0.0465

Field Name Default Validation Description

Cus Part Specs Cus Part

Specs

Reference

You can <Esc> from the Group field to enter a Part

Specification number. The Part number is printed

on the Order forms under the Product Description

2. Order Entry Page 34

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

and is used in the Order Inquiries.

If you have eSTELspec or eSTELmill installed, you

can copy a Part Specifications record to the Order

Item. A Part Specifications Look-Up, as well as a

Part Specification Inquiry, allows you to review

all Parts and select the one you want to copy to

the Order Item. You can <Esc> from the Part field

to change the Customer number if you need to copy

a Part Specifications that belongs to a Customer

different than the Sold-To Customer of the Sales

Order.

The Part Specification Type, P-Permanent or V-

Variable, is displayed before the Customer number

when the Item is created from a Part

Specifications record. Refer to the eSTELspec

manual for more details.

Group, Size, Grade,

Dimensions and Gauge

Reference

(Various)

This is the product being sold. It must be a

valid Product Master. The information is entered

as per the standard Billing Information Product

Entry. Refer to the ‘Inventory Handling’ chapter

of the User’s Guide for details.

Note Entry

A Product Installation Option, NTE=X, controls the display of a window to allow you to enter a 30-

character Note to record specific information about the ordered Item such as the required size or grade.

You can review and change the Note using the Change action bar option.

Based on the Product Installation Option, the Note Entry window is displayed prior to entering the

Product Group or after having entered the Pieces, Measure and Weight of the Item. If the Option is not

set, the window is not displayed. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Ordered and Balance Quantities

The following section identifies the original quantities ordered and the balance left on the order:

Order PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Bal PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Both the original Order quantities and the balance of the Order are shown for reference. After initial

entry, if you change the Order Balance, the Quantity Ordered is changed by the difference between the

old quantity and the new quantity.

Example: The original Quantity Ordered was 50 MTN, and the current Balance is 30 MTN. If the

Balance is increased to 40 MTN, meaning the customer wants an additional 10 MTNs, the

Quantity Ordered field is also increased by 10 MTNs so that it would then show 60 MTNs

and a Balance of 40 MTNs. This permits the modification of Items that are on Back Order

so that you can increase or reduce the balance to be shipped on subsequent shipments and

still show what the customer’s total order quantity was.

2. Order Entry Page 35

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Pieces, Quantity and Weight fields are entered using the standard Pieces, Measure and

Weight entry routine. Refer to the User’s Guide for details.

Enhanced Weight

If you charge based on the Enhanced Charge Quantity Type, the Enhanced Weight is defaulted as the

Order Balance Weight. Refer to the Billing Weight Computation section of the Inventory Reservation

chapter.

Weight Unit of Measure

You can change the Weight Unit of Measure by pressing <Insert> from the Wgt field. If used, the cursor

is positioned in the Unit of Measure field and you can enter any valid Weight-based UM (such as TON,

KGS, MTN).

If the charges are based on weight, the new Weight Unit of Measure is automatically passed to the Charge

Table in Add and Change modes.

Pressing <Enter> in the ‘Weight’ field moves the cursor directly to the Charge Table.

Order Item Charges

This section identifies the different charges applicable to the item.

Sls Cat/Typ WS- Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT E 20000 LBS 5150.00

10 PACKAGING 0.7500 CWT E 20000 LBS 150.00

3 DELIVERY 2.2500 CWT E 20000 LBS 450.00

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT I 20000 LBS 5150.00

Taxes 53.00 Total 5,803.00

Refer to the ‘Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges’ chapter for details.

Classification Information

Status SHP Due Date 09/16/04 Prn Seq SL SLT MPO N WKO Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS Source D Stk/NST S Org Due Dt 09/16/04 BKO Sts Y

Field Name Default Validation Description

Status Order

Header

Status

Reference

The Order Item Status code. It can be

overridden as required.

2. Order Entry Page 36

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Due Date Order

Header

Valid Date

PIO LDD=X

Due Date. Can be overridden for each item on

the Order.

Prn Seq 1.PartSpec

2.StdLoc

3.PIO PSQ

Production

Sequence

Reference

The access to the Production Sequence field is

controlled by the Product Installation Option

PSQ=XXX. If PSQ is set, then the Sequence code,

and the Process codes that are associated with

the Sequence, default based on the Part Spec,

the Standard Location table or the PIO. The

Sequence Code can be overridden if required.

The code is used for Production Planning reports

and Work Order Reports.

MPO N, Y If eSTELman is not installed, the MPO Required

field defaults to N and cannot be accessed.

If eSTELman is installed, a Product Installation

Option, MPO=X, controls the default of the MPO

Required field. The MPO field denotes whether a

Material Processing Order is required for the

Item or not.

This field defaults from the Part Specifications

if the Order Item is created using a Part

number.

When exiting the Order Item, if the MPO Required

field is Y, the following prompt is displayed:

“Do you wish to create MPO?” The default is N.

If you answer Y, the MPO is automatically

created.

Restrictions:

If the Order Header Credit Hold code is ‘H’, the

following message is displayed: “Warning - Sales

Order on Credit Hold. Do you wish to create an

MPO? N”.

If the Sales Order Production Hold code is ‘Y’,

the following error message is shown: “Order on

Production Hold. Cannot create MPO.”

WKO PSQ table

or Sales

Category

table

N, Y This field is used to indicate if you want to

print the item on the Work Order Form.

Options are:

N The item is not printed on the Work Order.

Y The item is printed on the Work Order form.

The field defaults as follows:

Based on the PSQ if the Default WKO Print field

is set to Y-Yes or N-No

Based on the Sales Category if the PSQ Default

WKO Print field is set to S or if no PSQ exists

on the Order Item.

If the MPO Required field is set to Y, the Work

Order Required field defaults to N. This avoids

the generation of unnecessary forms. If

required, you can change the Work Order Required

field back to Y at any time.

2. Order Entry Page 37

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Upd Usg PIO USG N, Y Update Usage. The default is controlled by a

Product Installation Option USG=X.

The code can be changed at any time since the

Inventory Transaction table indicates what code

was used for a particular receipt.

Options are:

N No

Y Yes

This code is passed to the Invoice Entry when it

is generated for the Order or from a Bill of

Lading for the order and affects the way the

Product Statistics table is updated at Invoice

Update time. Refer to the Inventory handling

chapter in the User’s Guide for details.

Ship Brh Order

Header

Branch

Reference

The Branch that is responsible for shipping the

Item. Can be overridden on each Item.

If the Shipping Branch differs from the Selling

Branch, based on a Product Installation Option

(DSR=X), a Branch Direct Shipment Request window

is displayed after the item entry is completed.

See the Branch Direct Shipment Request Window

section of this chapter.

Restriction: The Shipping Branch cannot be

modified when an Incoming Reservation or a

Transfer Requisition exists for an item.

Whs Order

Header

Warehouse

Reference

The Warehouse from which the order is to be

shipped. Can be overridden.

Source Order

Header

Source

Reference

Used to identify the Source of the purchased

material and Distinction of Material Origin

requirements. The Source can be changed subject

to Distinction of Material Origin restrictions.

Stk/NST S N, S, W This code is used to indicate a sale that is

either a one-of-a-kind or a sale of non-stock

material that will not be repeated, and,

therefore, should not update the Usage

statistics for the products reserved.

The valid codes are:

N Non-Stock

S Stock

W Windfall

The code is updated in the Sales Analysis files

for the transaction so that reports on Windfall

and Non-Stock sales can be obtained.

Org Due Date Order

Header

Display The Due Date at time the Order was entered. The

field is displayed for reference and is used in

eSTELperformance based on a Product Installation

Option available in Customer Delivery

Performance.

The Original Due Date can be changed as long as

the Order Item number has not been assigned

(i.e., at the point when you are creating the

item only).

BKO Sts Display The Backorder Status field is Y-Yes, if the Item

was partially shipped, and the Backorder was not

printed yet. Once you print the Backorder form,

the BKO field becomes N-No.

2. Order Entry Page 38

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

End Use PIO EUS End Use

Reference

The End Use field display is based on the

Product Installation Option EUS=XXX. Refer to

the Product Installation Options Guide for more

details.

If EUS is set, then the End Use code and the End

Use Description default, based on the PIO, and

can be overridden if required. The End Use

Description is printed on the Sales

Acknowledgement and Work Order forms for

reference when producing the Order Item.

2. Order Entry Page 39

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Action Bars

Type N ACME FAB Order Item SO No PHI- 4- 1

Cus Part Specs: 1010-

Group CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality

Size 20 .0350 Nom X 48.0000" X Coil

Grade CQ Width 48.0000" Length GaN 0.0350

Order PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Bal PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT E 20000 LBS 5150.00

10 PACKAGING 0.7500 CWT E 20000 LBS 150.00

3 FREIGHT 2.2500 CWT E 20000 LBS 450.00

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT I 20000 LBS 5150.00

Taxes 53.00 Total 5,803.00

Status SHP Due Date 09/16/04 Prn Seq SL SLT MPO N WKO Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS Source D Stk/NST S Org Due Dt 09/16/04 BKO Sts Y

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Icr 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts A-Tr Req B-Sch

Order Item – completed screen

Action Bar Action

Res Proceeds to the Inventory Reservation Entry screen where you can add or change

Specific or non-Specific Inventory Reservation. Refer to the ‘Inventory Reservation’

chapter for details.

To prevent salespeople from removing other salespeople's reservations to, in turn,

reserve the products on their own Sales Orders, access to this action bar option is

controlled by the RES Product Installation Option. Refer to the Product Installation

Options Guide for details.

Change Allows you to change the various fields of the Item screen by block of fields. Refer

to ‘Change an Existing Order’ section for details.

Rmks Calls the Standard Remark Entry Program where you can add or change Order Item

Remarks. Refer to the ‘Remarks Processing’ chapter for details.

Icr Calls the Standard Incoming Reservation Entry Program where you can add or change

incoming reservations against Purchase Orders, Transfer Orders or Transfer Bills of

Lading. Refer to the ‘Reservations against Incoming Material’ chapter for details.

Specs Calls the standard Order Specifications Entry program where you can enter or change

customer Specifications for Tolerances and Packaging instructions. Refer to the

‘Production Specifications’ chapter for details.

Cost Calls the Cost Attribution Entry program where you can add specific Internal/External

costs over and above the material cost itself. Refer to the ‘Add-on and Automatic

Costs’ chapter for details.

Hdr Proceeds to the Header screen.

Total Displays the Order Item Totals window.

Sts Calls the Order Item Status Inquiry where you can review all the open shipments and

productions jobs for the Item.

Tr Req Calls the Transfer Requisition window.

2. Order Entry Page 40

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Sch Calls the Production Schedule window. This option is only available for Normal,

Release or Transfer Order Items. It is disabled if the Order Item is on an eSTELpro

Job or eSTELman Step. Refer to the ‘Production Schedule Interface’ section for

details.

Costing Verification

The Product Installation Option, WMC=X, controls the display of the warning message “Warning: No

Product Balance for non-specific reservation. Mat cost is 0”. Refer to the Product Installation Options

Guide for details.

Branch Direct Shipment Request Window

The following window is displayed in the Order Item and the Inventory Reservation screens, based on the

Product Installation Option, DSR=X, when the Shipping Branch is different from the Selling Branch and

you wish to make a request to the Shipping Branch to ship material directly to a customer on your behalf.

Branch Direct Shipment Request

Sell Br PHI Order 86- 3 METAL WORKS INC

Slspsn DG DAVE GREEN 6Aug04 13:15

Stock Br CHI Item Due Dt 11Nov11

Transmit To peter Reply To solange

Bar Angle ASTM A36

2” x 2” x 1/4” X 20’

50 PCS Meas 1000 ' Weight 3190 LBS

Remark

Total Amount: 350.90

Branch Direct Shipment Request window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Sell Brh Header Display The Sales Order Selling Branch.

Order-Itm Item Display The Sales Order number and Item number. The

Customer Name from the Order Header is displayed

next to the Sales Order Number.

Slspsn Header Display The Salesperson from the Order Header.

Date & Time System Display The System Date and Time of the request.

Stock Brh Item Display The Shipping Branch from the Order Item.

Item Due Dt Item Display Order Item Due Date.

Product Desc Item Display Order Item Product’s Description.

Pcs, Meas, Wgt Item Display The Order Item Pieces, Measure and Weight balance

on order.

2. Order Entry Page 41

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Transmit To User Name Valid user Login ID of the person at the Shipping Branch

responsible for approving Inter Branch shipments.

Reply To Valid User Login ID of the person entering the Sales Order.

Remarks Optional Used to enter comments about the Order Item

requirements (2 lines of 50 characters).

If you have the Product Installation Option for the Direct Ship Request window turned on, and you press

<F1> when exiting the window, an internal flag is set on the Order Item. This flag prevents you from

deleting the whole Order later, and an error message is displayed to remind you of the Direct Shipment

Request. To delete the whole Order, you must first delete the Item, the window is displayed and then you

can proceed to delete the whole Order if required.

Scheduling Order Items to the eSTEL/Cap-Plan Schedule

A Product Installation Option, CAP=X, set on the Order Entry program, controls the scheduling of an

Order Item to the eSTEL/Cap-Plan Schedule. When the PIO is set to Y-Yes, the question “Do you wish

to insert this item into Rolling Schedule?” is displayed once the Order Item is entered. If you enter Y-

Yes, the Mill Order Booking screen is displayed and you can proceed to insert the item into the Rolling

Schedule.

The Order Item screen displays <CAP> if the item is booked to the eSTEL/Cap-Plan schedule:

Type N ACME FAB Order Item SO No PHI- 4- 1

Cus Part Specs: 1010-

Group CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality

Size 20 .0350 Nom X 48.0000" X Coil

Grade CQ Width 48.0000" Length GaN 0.0350

Order PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Bal PCS Msr Wgt LBS

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT E

10 PACKAGING 0.7500 CWT E

3 FREIGHT 2.2500 CWT E

Taxes Total

Status Due Date 09/16/04 Prn Seq SL SLT MPO N WKO Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh CHI Whs CFS Source D Stk/NST S Org Due Dt 09/16/04 BKO Sts Y

<CAP> <ICR>

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Icr 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts A-Tr Req B-Sch

Order Item screen

Printing an Amount on the Forms

A Product Installation Option, DPA=X, controls the display of a window to allow you to specify the Prt

Amount field. This field indicates whether the Order Charges, the Order Value or both are printed on the

2. Order Entry Page 42

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Shipping Order form. Refer to the Order Forms chapter for details.

This field also applies to the Bill of Lading form printing. Refer to the Shipping manual for details.

Workflow Interface

If the Workflow functions are enabled, a workflow message is emitted when an Order Item is added. If

the Credit or Profit Verifications are also enabled, workflow messages are emitted when an order is

placed on Credit or Profit Hold.

Refer to the ‘Workflow Management’ chapter of the eSTEL/SCOPE manual for details.

2. Order Entry Page 43

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHANGING A SALES ORDER

If you want to access or change an existing Sales Order, enter the Order number. If you do not know the

Order number, you can use the Order Look-Up function from the Order number field to scan the existing

Open Orders and pick the Order to be maintained.

When the Order number is entered, the Order Header information is displayed and you can then proceed

with the required changes.

Workflow Interface

If the Workflow functions are enabled, workflow messages are emitted when changes are made to the

following Sales Order fields:

Due Date

Inside Salesman

Outside Salesman

Order Quantity

Deletion of Specific Reservations

If the Purchase Order Header/Item Due Date is changed, a workflow message is also emitted.

Refer to the ‘Workflow Management’ chapter of the eSTEL/SCOPE manual for details.

Changing an Order Header

To change any of the fields in the Header, select the action bar option Chg Hdr. A window is displayed

listing the groups of fields.

Change Header

1. Sold-To

2. Ship-To

3. Slspsn

4. Terms

5. Status

6. Dates

7. Freight

8. Ship Brh

9. Cus Ref No

A. Sales Cat

B. Sales Tax

C. Certs

D. User Def

Select the group you wish to modify and the cursor is placed on the first field of that group:

Option Action

Sold-To To change the Sold-To number, Name and Address

Ship-To To change the Ship-To number, Name and Address

2. Order Entry Page 44

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Option Action

Slspsn To change the Inside and Outside Salesperson codes

Terms To change the Terms of Payment and Currency fields

Status To change the Status and Hold fields

Dates To change the Due, Order, Work Order and Promise Dates

Freight To change the Freight section

Ship Brh To change the Ship Branch and Warehouse

Cus Ref No To change the Job number, Customer Purchase Order and Release number

Sales Cat To change the Sales Category, Source, Backorder Allowed, Metric and Mail codes

Sales Tax To change the Tax fields

Certs To change the Chem, Phy, Typ, Shp, Inv

User Def To change the User defined code

NOTE: The Product Installation Option WHC=X controls the display of a warning message if any

of the following fields is changed on the Order Header:

Sales Category

Shipping Branch

Shipping Warehouse

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Restrictions

As long as the Order number has not been assigned, in Add mode, you can change the Sold-To

number. However, once the Header page has been added and the Order number assigned, the Order

information is saved and the Sold-To number as well as the Order Type can no longer be changed.

The Customer’s name and address can only be changed if the Cash Account field in the Customer

Information table is set to Y-Yes.

If you want to change the Due Date while Items exist, a prompt is displayed “Change all items to

same due date?” If you enter Y-Yes, the new Due Date is passed to all the Open Order Items. If you

enter N-No, the change affects the new added Items only. When the Product Installation Option

LDD=X is set, the Due Date is validated to ensure that it is not prior to the System Date.

If you change the Sales Category on the Header page after the Items have been entered, the new code

is NOT passed to the Items. If the code must be changed on the Items, you must manually do the

change on each individual Item affected, as the specific Charge codes used on the Order Items may be

invalid with the new code.

If you change the Source code while items exist, a prompt is displayed “Change all items to same

Source code” is displayed. If you enter Y-Yes, the new Source code is passed to all the open order

items. If you enter N-No, the change affects the new added items only.

If you change the Tax Region codes, the new Tax Rates are automatically applied on all Items once

you save the Header.

2. Order Entry Page 45

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If you change the Tax Applicable codes on the Header, a prompt “Do you wish to update all items?”

is displayed. If you enter Y-Yes, all the Open Items are updated as per the Header and the Taxes are

re-computed. If you enter N-No, the Tax Applicable codes on all open items remain unchanged. The

new applicable codes are only used for the new entered Items.

If you change both the Tax Regions and the Tax Applicable codes on the Header, the Items are

automatically updated as per the new Header Rates and Applicable codes.

Changing the Ship-To Number

You can change the Ship-To number at any time regardless of the Order Type even if shipments were

done against the Order. If you change the Ship-To number on the Order Header, the program does the

following:

Replaces the following Order Header fields as per the new Ship-To:

o Ship-To Name and Address

o Inside Salesperson, if originally defaulted based on the Ship-To

o Outside Salesperson

o Sales Territory

o Route – Stop

o Delivery Method

o Ship Via

o Freight Responsibility

o Test Certificates fields

o Mail code

o Tax Regions and Tax Applicable codes

If the Tax Regions change, then the new Tax Applicable codes and the new Tax rates are

automatically applied to all Open Items once you commit the Header.

If the Tax Region does not change, and the Tax Applicable codes change, a prompt “Header Tax

Applicable codes have been changed. Apply to items?” is displayed. If you enter Y-Yes, all the Open

Items are updated as per the Header and the Taxes are re-computed. If you enter N-No, the Tax

Applicable codes on all Open Items remain unchanged. The new applicable codes are only used for

the new entered items.

If the Freight related fields change, the Freight action bar option is triggered.

Restrictions

A Product Installation Option, SHP=XXXXXX, restricts access to the Ship-To Address in the Quote

and Order Header, unless a password is entered.

If you change the Ship-To number on the Order Header, the Header Remarks are not re-defaulted

from the new Customer Ship-To. It is your responsibility to review these Remarks and delete or edit

them if required

2. Order Entry Page 46

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Changing an Order Item

To change information on the Item screen, use the Change action bar option. This displays a window

listing the different sections of the screen that can be changed.

Change Item

1. Part Specs

2. Product

3. Prod Desc

4. Pcs/Qty/Wgt

5. Charges

6. Classific

7. Taxes

Change Item window

Part Specs

The Part Specs selection positions the cursor at the Part Specification field after the Customer number.

You can use the Look-Up to scan the list of existing Part Specs for the customer. If you choose a

Customer Part Specification, the Product details change according to the Part Spec chosen.

The CCP=X Product Installation Option controls whether or not users can change the Part Specification

number after an Order Item has been entered. When it is set to N-No, the Part Specs option on the

Change Item window is dimmed.

Restrictions: The following restrictions apply when selecting or changing the Part Spec:

The Product Item can only be changed to a Product with the same Inventory Logic Control code and

Inventory Organization excluding T-Tagged.

You are not allowed to change the Part Spec if any corresponding open transaction exists for the

Order Item such as Bill of Lading, Invoice or production job.

If the new Part Spec number includes Charges, Specs and Remarks, they are not copied into the Order

item.

Product

The Product selection positions the cursor at the Group field allowing you to change the Product Item.

Restrictions: The following restrictions apply when changing the Product:

The Product Item can only be changed to a Product with the same Inventory Logic Control code and

Inventory Organization excluding T-Tagged.

You are not allowed to change the Product Item if any corresponding open transaction exists for the

Order Item such as Bill of Lading, Invoice or production job.

If the Item was copied from a Customer Part Specification, refer to the eSTELspec manual for the

applicable restrictions.

2. Order Entry Page 47

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Once the Product is changed, either by changing the Product directly or via Customer Part Specification,

the following occurs:

The Item Description is reformatted based on the new Product Item.

The cursor is positioned at the Pieces field, with the number of pieces of the old Product Item still

displayed.

o If the new Product is Piece Controlled, the Measure and Weight are automatically re-computed

based on the existing number of Pieces on the Item and the new Product Item.

o If the new Product is not Piece Controlled, the Weight is re-computed based on the existing

Measure on the item and the new Product Item.

o If no theoretical weight can be computed for a Product Item (e.g., Coil) then the Pieces, Measure

and Weight will remain the same as for the old Product Item.

If the Product Group is changed, the new Product’s Tax Status is verified and the taxes are re-

calculated accordingly.

If you use eSTELspec, the standard verifications are made and you are prompted if you change the

ordered Product Item into one that matches a Customer Part Specification.

If you change the ordered Product Item, the transaction item is re-costed.

If you change the Product Item on an Order Item that has Specifications,

o A warning message, “Product Group has changed, review product Specifications” is displayed.

o A question is displayed to allow you to recalculate the Outside Dimensions or Weight.

o The “Do you wish to recompute the Pcs/Tag?” question is also prompted to trigger the re-

computation of the Pieces/Tag, based on the billing pieces and quantity.

o The Gauge Tolerance is cleared out if the new Product Master is not gauge-required.

o The Physical Test results in the Specifications are not changed.

If Reservations exist for the item and a change is made to the item Product, Pieces, Measure or

Weight, the prompt “Product was changed. Review (V) or Redefault (D) allocation?” is displayed

allowing you to either review the existing Reservations, delete and redefault them, or leave them

unchanged.

Product Description

Allows you to change the product description.

You can set the OPD=X Product Installation Option to ensure that the Item Product Description cannot

be modified in Add or Change mode unless the corresponding Product Master Product Description is

blank. This feature prevents the overriding of stock Product Descriptions while still allowing the entry of

a description for miscellaneous products.

Classification Fields

When you change the PSQ code from one code that has the Default Allocation field set to Y-Yes, to a

PSQ code that has the Default Allocation field set to N-No, or vice versa, the following warning message

is displayed “PSQ Default Allocation changed: Please verify allocations”.

The Work Order Required field is then re-defaulted as in Add mode.

2. Order Entry Page 48

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Taxes

When you select to change the Taxes, the Tax window is displayed as follows:

Sales Tax

1 PA E

2 NT2 E

3 NT3 E

4 PAPH A 200.22

Item Tax Window

The cursor is positioned at the first Applicable code field and you can change them as required. The

Taxes are recomputed once you press <F1> from the Tax window. The Total Taxes is redisplayed on the

Item screen.

The access to the Tax Applicable codes can be restricted using the PAS=X Product Installation Option.

Restrictions

Changing the Original Due Date is controlled by the Product Installation Option, DUE=X. By

default, you cannot access this field once the Order Item is committed. If the option is set, you can

access and change the Original Due Date even if the Order Item has been committed. Refer to the

Product Installation Options Guide for details.

If there is any related open transaction (Bill of Lading, Invoice, eSTELman or eSTELpro), a warning

message “Open Transaction exists. Please verify” is displayed and the action bar option Sts is

available for you to review the open transactions before you proceed with the changes.

If there is a related BL or Invoice, the following Order Item fields cannot be changed:

o Charge Quantity Unit of Measure and Charge Rate Unit of Measure.

o Sales Category Allocation Type. The Sales Category can be changed as long as it has the same

Allocation Type as the original one (i.e., I–Inventory, C–Customer-Owned).

o Charge line. It cannot be deleted.

Any change done to the Order Item is not passed to the corresponding open transactions, Bill of

Lading or open Invoice Entry. When an Invoice for a Bill of Lading is generated, the Invoice fields

are copied from the Bill of Lading and not from the Sales Order. Therefore, the Charges are as per

what was on the Sales Order at shipping time and do not necessarily reflect the new Charges on the

Order.

For Cash on Delivery (COD) Orders, the Bill of Lading value is printed on the BL form using the Bill

of Lading Charges, which does not reflect the changes done to the Order.

The Tax Region codes cannot be changed on the Order Item. They are saved on the Header and

apply to all the Items on the Order.

2. Order Entry Page 49

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production/Shipping Hold Update Utility

The Production/Shipping Hold Update utility allows you to update the Production and Shipping Hold

codes of all open orders for a selected Customer. The following functions are provided:

Places the Sales Orders or Transfer Orders on Production, Shipping or both Production and Shipping

Hold.

Releases the Sales Orders or Transfer Orders from Production, Shipping or both Production and

Shipping Hold.

Updates the Order Header with the Hold or Release Date and Time as well as the Login ID of the user

who ran the utility.

Creates a SO Prn/Shp Hld Upd Session Log if some orders couldn’t be updated. Indicates the reason

why the Hold codes weren’t modified.

Restrictions

You can only update the Order Production and/or Shipping Hold codes for one Customer at a time.

For the selected Customer, all open orders are updated without any exception. If you need to update

only a few orders, you should modify the Hold codes of those orders in the Order Entry program.

For Transfer Orders, you need to know the Customer Number corresponding to the Destination

Warehouse in the TO Header. This number is available in the Warehouse reference table.

2. Order Entry Page 50

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Order Production/Shipping Hold Update Screen

Sales Order Production/Shipping Hold Update

1. Customer Number 1010

2. Production Hold [N]

3. Shipping Hold [N]

0-Update

Sales Order Production/Shipping Hold Update

Field Name Default Validation Description

Customer Number Customer

Reference

table

Identifies the Customer that needs to have its

orders placed on Production and/or Shipping Hold

Production Hold N H, N, R Used to modify the Production Hold code of a batch

of open orders. Options are:

H - Hold. All open orders for the selected

Customer are placed on Production Hold. The Prn

Hold field in these Order Headers becomes Y.

N - No change to the Production Hold code.

R - Release. All open orders for the selected

Customer are released from Production Hold. The

Prn Hold field in these Order Headers becomes N.

Shipping Hold N H, N, R Used to modify the Shipping Hold code of a batch

of open orders. Options are:

H – Hold. All open orders for the selected

Customer are placed on Shipping Hold. The

Ship Hold field in these Orders Headers

becomes Y.

N - No change to the Shipping Hold code.

R - Release. All open orders for the selected

Customer are released from Shipping Hold. The

Ship Hold field in these Order Headers becomes

N.

2. Order Entry Page 51

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Update Displays the “Proceed to update (Y/N)?” prompt. When you answer Y, it updates the

Production and/or Shipping Hold code as specified in the selection options.

Session Log

A Session Log is generated and displayed in the CS/IRIS Controller of the user who ran the Hold Update

utility. The Session Log lists the orders that couldn’t be updated and the reason why.

RUN: 15Sep11 15:37 STELPLAN METAL COMPANY scrslg259457 PAGE: 1

SO Prn/Shp Hld Upd Session Log

Ssn ID Brh Reference Message

PHI SO-007059- Object is in use by robertb

PHI SO-007061- Object is in use by karens

PHI SO-007062- Object is in use by robertb

Processing completed...

* End of Report: STELPLAN METAL COMPANY *

Sales Order/ Transfer Order Status Update Utility

The Order Status Update is designed to allow you to update the Sales and Transfer Order Item Status codes

using the minimum amount of keystrokes without having to go into the Order Entry programs. The Order

Status Update function can be performed outside of the sales office since the update program does not give

full access to the transaction entry program, preventing other changes to the order that could be made by

mistake.

Status Update Screen

The following screen is displayed when you call the Order Status Update program.

Status Update

App OR

The applications that can be updated are:

OR Default. To change the status of a Sales Order or Transfer Order

MN To change the status of an MPO (eSTELman)

PN To change the status of an eSTELpro job

You are then brought to the following screen, with the cursor positioned at the Status Code field.

2. Order Entry Page 52

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SO/TO Status Update

Sts Code

Orders

0-Update

Status Entry screen

Action Bar Action

Update Update all Order Items to the Status Code at the top of the Screen.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Status Code Status

Reference

Enter the Status code for which each of the Sales

Order Items in the table below needs to be

updated. The <F9> Look-Up is available at this

field.

Orders You can enter up to 10 different transactions to

be updated at the same time.

Branch User

Default

Branch

Reference

To update a different branch transaction, you can

<Esc> to change the branch, if you have multiple

Branches access rights. The <F9> Look-Up is

available at the branch field.

Order No/Item No Order file Enter a valid open Sales or Transfer Order. An

error message is displayed if the order is not in

the file or is closed. You can either enter a

valid Item number to update that specific Item or

leave the item field blank to update all Items on

the order. The <F9> Look-Up is available at the

Order and Order Item fields.

When you have finished entering all data, press <F1> to go. The cursor proceeds to the Update action bar

selection.

2. Order Entry Page 53

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SO/TO Status Update

Status B

Orders PHI- 62- 1 PHI- 81- 1

PHI- 63- 1 PHI- 82- 1

PHI- 83- 1 PHI- 84- 1

PHI- 85 PHI- 86

PHI- 88- 1 PHI- 89- 1

0-Update

Status Entry screen

Status Update

There are two options to complete the entry:

<F4> to exit without saving or updating

the Update action bar selection to update the entry screen

If you choose to update, each item on the screen will be updated with the Status Code in the Status field. If

the Sales Order is input with an Item number, then only that Item number is updated. If the Sales Order is

input without an Item number, then all items on that Sales Order are updated with the new Status code. The

cursor returns to the Status field so that you can continue updating orders for another Status. When you have

completed all updates, press <F4> to exit the program.

2. Order Entry Page 54

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Deleting a Sales Order

The Sales Order deletion function is only available if you use the User Menu Option ‘d’. This allows you

to give access to this function to authorized users only.

Deleting an Order Header

To delete the entire Sales Order, call up the Header and press <F6>. When you delete the Sales Order

from the Header, all its associated items are deleted.

Restrictions

If any of the Order Items is on an open transaction such as a Bill of Lading, an Invoice Entry or a

Production job, the Order cannot be deleted.

If the Order or any of its Items is scheduled on a Delivery Manifest, the Order cannot be deleted from

the Header.

If a Branch Transfer Request exists for one of the Items, a message is displayed and the Order cannot

be deleted. You must call up the Item and delete it from the Item screen. This displays the Branch

Transfer Request window and allows you to follow through on the cancellation process.

Deleting an Order Item

To delete the Order Item, access the item and press <F6>.

If any Specific Reservation exists for the Item you are deleting, a warning message “Specific Reservation

Exists. Do you wish to continue deletion?” is displayed. Enter Y-Yes to proceed with the deletion or

<Enter> to avoid the deletion of the item.

The Inventory Reservation is reinstated to its original source: back to inventory as available or to the

Blanket Order if it was copied from there.

If any Incoming Reservation exists, the Incoming available quantity is reinstated as available.

If the Order has no open or completed Items left after some Order Items have been deleted, the prompt

“Order has no items - do you wish to delete?” is displayed when you exit the Sales Order. It allows you

to automatically delete the Header.

Restrictions

If the Order Item is on an open transaction such as a Bill of Lading or an Invoice Entry, the Item

cannot be deleted.

If the Order Item is on a Delivery Manifest, the Item cannot be deleted.

If the Order Item is on an Inventory Processing, eSTELpro or eSTELman Job, the Item cannot be

deleted. You must first delete the production job or the Order Item from the job to delete the Order

Item. This ensures that no material is produced for an Order Item that has been cancelled.

2. Order Entry Page 55

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Workflow Interface

If the Workflow functions are enabled, a workflow message is emitted when an Order Item is deleted.

Refer to the ‘Workflow Management’ chapter of the eSTEL/SCOPE manual for details.

2. Order Entry Page 56

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

COPYING AN EXISTING SALES ORDER

When creating new Orders, you can use the Copy Order feature to copy one Order to another and then

override the required information about the new Order. You can also copy completed Sales Orders.

The copying of an Order is done in two steps. The first step identifies the Branch and Order to be copied

and the type of order to be created. The second step allows you to select the Order Items to be copied.

Copying Order Header Information

The Copy function copies the following types of Header information from one Order to another:

Header page information

Header Remarks

The ‘Copy’ function can be performed for the following types of orders.

From To

B Blanket B Blanket

B Blanket R Release

S Standard S Standard

S Standard N Normal

N Normal N Normal

The ‘Copy’ function is enabled when you are adding a new Order by selecting the Copy Order action bar

option. A window is displayed in which you enter the type of order to be created by the copy and the

Branch and Order number to be copied. You can only copy another Branch’s Orders if you have multi-

branch Access Rights.

Copy Sales Order

Order Type

Branch PHI

Order No

Field Name Default Validation Description

Order Type B, N, R, S The Order Type is verified against the Order you

are copying from.

Branch User

Defaults

Branch

Reference

Selling Branch. Can be overridden if you have

multiple branches access rights.

Order Number The Order number to be copied. An error message

is displayed if there is a conflict in the Order

number and Order Type.

2. Order Entry Page 57

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The first page of the Header information is displayed with a message “Do you really want to copy entry

(Y/N)?” If you are copying a completed Order, the following question is displayed: “This order is

completed. Do you really want to copy entry (Y/N)”. Note that you cannot copy an order with a

completed/deleted code set to ‘M’, i.e., an order that was manually deleted or automatically completed at

invoicing time because of its backorder status.

You have the option of accepting the new order by entering Y-Yes, or canceling the Copy by entering N-

No.

If you enter Y-Yes, the following window is displayed:

Default Due Date 08/15/04

Field Name Default Validation Description

Default Due Date Copied

Order

Valid Date Can be overridden. The Default Due Date is used

on the new Order Header as well as all copied

Items.

Defaulting the Ship Hold

A Product Installation Option, DSH=X, allows you to default the Production Hold and Shipping Hold

fields to N-No on a newly copied Order, even if the source Order has the fields set to Y-Yes. Refer to the

Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Work Order Date Default

The Work Order Date of the newly created Order is defaulted based on the Order User Defaults Wrk Ord

Dt field.

Copying Order Item Information

When creating a new Order using the Copy Order function, the Order Items can be selectively copied as

required. A screen is displayed listing the items that can be copied. You can review the Order Items and

mark those that you want copied.

The Copy Item function copies the following Detail page information:

The Product Information

The Charges (both Internal and External)

The Cost Attributions (both Internal and External)

The Production Specifications

The Item Remarks

The Original Due Date (it defaults to the Item Due Date)

The Description, Pieces and Quantity of all Open Items on the Order being copied.

The original Ordered Pieces, Measure and Weight, from the On Order fields, NOT from the On

Balance fields, of all Items being copied from an Order flagged as ‘Complete’

2. Order Entry Page 58

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

NOTE: Fully shipped items that have not been completed are also displayed in the Copy Items screen

with no Pcs/Qty/Wgt. Their Copy flag defaults to N-No but it can be overwritten to Y-Yes

individually. In this case, you cannot use the action bar Set All Yes.

Blanket Order Items having a zero balance for Pieces, Measure and Weight can be copied to a Release

Order.

Restrictions

The Copy function does not copy any Inventory Reservations or Reservations against Incoming

Material to the new order. However, when creating a Normal Order using the Copy function, the

Inventory Reservation is created as if the Order Item has been created manually.

When copying a Blanket Order to a Release Order, the On Balance Pieces, Quantity and Weight are

not copied to the Release Order. You must call up each Item and add the release quantities.

Order Type N Copy Items Brh PHI Order No 28

Ln Copy Product Sold Pieces/Quantity-U/M

1. Y Bar Angle ASTM A36 50

2” x 2” x 1/4” X 20’ 3190 LBS

2. Y Bar Angle ASTM A36 100

2” x 2” x 5/16” X 20’ 7840 LBS

3. Y Carbon Steel Plate ASTM A36 50

3/16” (.1875) X 48.0000” X 96.0000” 12256 LBS

4. Y Carbon Steel Plate ASTM A36 15

3/16” (.1875) X 48.0000” X 120.0000” 4596 LBS

5. Y Carbon Steel Plate ASTM A36 12

3/16” (.1875) X 96.0000” X 240.0000” 14707 LBS

6. Y Carbon Steel Plate Commercial Quality 50

3/16” (.1875) X 36.0000” X 96.0000” 9192 LBS

7. Y Carbon Steel Plate Commercial Quality 40

3/16” (.1875) X 48.0000” X 96.0000” 9805 LBS

8. Y Hot Rolled Steel Coil Drawing Quality

.0747 Nom X 48.0000” 20000 LBS

9. Y HR Steel Pickled & Oiled Commercial Quality

.0480 Nom X 48.0000” 25000 LBS

1- Set All Yes 2- Set All No

Copy Order Items screen

Action Bar Action

Set All Yes Sets or resets all Items on the existing Order to a Copy code of Y-Yes to copy to the

new Order.

Set All No Sets or resets all Items on the existing Order to a Copy code of N-No so they do not

get copied to the new Order.

To cancel the Copy Item function altogether, press <F4> at any time while on the Copy Item screen. A

confirmation message “Cancel Copy Item function?” is displayed. Enter Y-Yes to cancel the Copy Item

function, or N-No to proceed with the copy.

2. Order Entry Page 59

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

A Copy code Y-Yes or N-No is provided beside each Item number so that you can indicate which Items

are to be copied to the new Order. The default is Y-Yes (except for those Items that are fully shipped.)

The action bar options are provided so that you can globally change the default to N-No, or back to Y-Yes

and then set the required Items manually.

After you have marked all the Items you want copied, press <F1> to initiate the Copy Items function. A

confirmation message “Copy the Selected Items?” is displayed. Enter Y-Yes to copy all marked Items, or

enter N-No to cancel the Copy and return to the Copy Item selection screen to correct the selected Items.

If the Order being created is a Release Order copied from a Blanket Order, then the Blanket Order

number is added to the Release Order Header and each Item on the Release contains a cross-reference to

the Blanket Order Item it was created from. This provides for a continual link for Inquiry and tracing

reference between the two Orders and allows the Order Processing and Invoicing functions to update the

Blanket Order Item with the total Pieces, Quantity and Weight shipped as the Release Orders are

invoiced.

2. Order Entry Page 60

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

COPYING AN EXISTING ORDER ITEM

The action bar option Copy Item is available from the Order Item field if, at least, one Item has already

been entered on the current Order. The Copy Item action bar option is dimmed when:

there is no Item on the Order yet

the Order Type is R-Release Order

If you select it, the following window is displayed to accept the Order Item number to be copied.

Copy Item 4

The Copy Item field defaults to the last Item number entered for the Order and can be overridden by any

valid Item number. You can use the Order Item Look-Up function to review all Open Items and select the

one you need to copy.

When copying an Item, the original Pieces/Quantity, Charges and miscellaneous information are copied.

The cursor is positioned at the Dimension field. From there, press <Esc> or <Enter> through the fields to

make any changes required.

Restrictions

If you change the Product while copying the Item, the new product must have the same Inventory

Logic Control (ILC) and the same Inventory Organization as the one you are copying from.

When you are copying an item which was created using a P-Permanent Part number, the cursor is

positioned at the Pieces field and you CANNOT <Esc> to the Dimension or Product fields. Refer to

the eSTELspec manual for details.

The Freight Charge is not copied to the Order Item but is recomputed whenever the action bar option

Freight on the Header is selected.

Copying a Blanket Item to a Release Order

You can copy a Blanket Order Item to an existing Release Order. A window is displayed once you press

<Enter> from the Order Item number field if the Order Type is R-Release.

Blnk SO PHI- 510-

Copying a Blanket Order Item

Field Name Default Validation Description

Branch Header Display The Blanket Order Branch that was used to create

the Release Order.

2. Order Entry Page 61

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Number Header Display The Blanket Order number that was used to create

the Release Order.

Item Number Detail Blanket

Order

The Blanket Item number to be copied to the

Release Order.

Once you enter the Blanket Order Item number, all of the Item fields default from the Blanket Item and

the cursor is positioned in the Pieces field. You must manually enter the release quantities.

2. Order Entry Page 62

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

VIEWING ORDER TOTALS

The Order Totals window is used to provide a summary of the total Order Amount and profitability, Sales

Taxes, the number of items and Amount and Profitability of each item.

If you call this window from the Order Header page, then you can see the Order Totals only. If you call it

while you are on an Order Item, then the default shows the Item Totals but you have an option, through an

action bar selection, to see the Order Totals as well.

Example:

From Header page

Select Order Totals Action BarOption

OrderTotals screen isdisplayed

Exits back to Headerpage

<F4>

From Item page

Select Order Totals Action BarOption

ItemTotals screen isdisplayed

Exits back to Itempage

<F4>

Action bar option 1 goesto Order

Totals

Action bar option 2 goesto Item

Totals

Viewing Order Totals

2. Order Entry Page 63

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Totals Window

Item Totals

Order Wgt 6380 LBS

Alloc Wgt

Sales Sales Brkdown Costs Profit Pft %

Mat 1,722.60 1,722.60 1,584.01 138.59 8.05

Prs 47.85 47.85 32.50 15.35 32.08

Frt 63.80 63.80 47.85 15.95 25.00

Oth

Tot 1,834.25 1,834.25 1,664.36 169.89 9.26

Tax

Tot 1,834.25

1-Header 2-Item

Item Totals window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Order Wgt Display The Weight Ordered on the Item (Items Totals) or

on the entire Order (Order Totals).

Alloc Wgt Display The Weight allocated on the Item (Item Totals) or

on the entire Order (Order Totals). It includes

Specific and Non-Specific Allocations.

Sales Display The Sales value in Customer currency. If the

Customer currency is different than the base

currency, the Currency code is displayed next to

the Total Sales field.

Sales Breakdown Display The Sales value in base currency.

Costs Display The Cost value in base currency.

Tax Display The Tax Amount in Customer currency. It is shown

along with the Tax region to which it is to be

paid.

Profit Display Profit = Sales Breakdown - Costs.

Pft % Display Profit % = (Profit/Sales Breakdown) X 100

Tot Display The total Order or Order Item Amount.

The Sales, Sales Breakdown, Costs, Tax, Profit, Pft % and Tot fields are only displayed if the Display

Price and Display Cost fields are set to Y-Yes in the User Group table. None of this information is

displayed when the Bill of Lading Item has been invoiced.

Action Bar Action

Header This action bar is available at the Order Header and Order Item level. It displays

the total Order Weight Revenue, Costs and Profitability.

Item This action bar is available at the Order Item level only. It displays the summary of

Weights, Revenue and Costs for the individual Items only. You can switch to the Order

Totals to review the total Order Profitability if required.

2. Order Entry Page 64

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Totals

Total Completed Deleted Open

Items 3 1 2

Order Wgt 15323 4347 10976

Alloc Wgt 4596

Sales Sales Brkdown Costs Profit Pft %

Mat 2,733.72 2,733.72 2,258.09 475.63 17.40

Prs 47.85 47.85 32.50 15.35 32.08

Frt 109.76 109.76 82.32 27.44 25.00

Oth 45.96 45.96 45.96 100.00

Tot 2,937.29 2,937.29 2,372.91 564.38 19.21

Tax 10.11

Tot 2,947.40 [PAPH 10.11]

1-Header 2-Item

Totals window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Total Display The total number of Items on the Order and the

weight equivalent of those Items.

Completed Display The total number of Items that have been marked as

being shipped and invoiced complete and the total

weight of those Items.

NOTE: In the Order Totals inquiry, when you see

the Order Weight under the ‘Completed’

column but the Number of Item under the

‘Open’ column, this means that the Order

Item has been shipped on a BL but the BL

has not yet been invoiced.

Deleted Display The total number of Items that have been manually

deleted from the Order through the Order Item

Delete function and the weight of those Items.

Open Display The number of Items that are still open for

further shipment and the weight of those Items.

NOTE: When an Order Item is shipped on a Summary

BL (e.g., Bar Angles), the ‘allocated

weight’ is not moved from the ‘open’ to the

‘completed’ column until the BL Item is

invoiced.

2. Order Entry Page 65

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRODUCT SCHEDULE INTERFACE

When selecting the Sch action bar option, the following window is displayed.

1. Book

2. Cmn Schd

3. Sch Trs

Scheduling Menu

Book

This option manually calls the Booking function, with no check for a change. It is dimmed if the User

Group Prod Sched Access field is set to N-No.

The Order Item is booked on the Production Schedule for each PWC in the charge table based on the

Order-Balance Weight, the Scheduling Options table and the availability of the PWC Capacity.

The ASP Product Installation Option, when set to Y-Yes, enables booking of the Order Item Balance

Weight to existing PWC Schedules for each PWC entered on the Order Item Charge Table. This

functionality is available when creating a new Order Item manually, when copying on Order Item, when

copying an eSTELquote Item to a new Order Item, or when copying an Order to create a new Order. See

the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Cmn Schd

This option calls the Common Scheduling function. (It is called in Inquiry mode if the User Group Prod

Sched Access field is set to N-No.)

When the Common Scheduling function is called, no PWC is defaulted. You must specify one to inquire

on existing PWC Schedules. This function is independent of any charges in the Order Item Charge table.

The functions offered through the Common Scheduling window are useful for booking/scheduling the

Order Item to a specific PWC Schedule or for overriding capacity constraints.

Sch Trs

This option calls the Transaction Scheduling function for the current Order Item. (It is called in Inquiry

mode if the User Group Prod Sched Access field is set to N-No.)

This feature allows you to easily see where the Order Item has been booked, and the processing sequence

schedule.

Refer to the Production Scheduling manual for further details.

2. Order Entry Page 66

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

AUTOMATIC PRINTING

A Product Installation Option, PRT=X, allows you to initiate the Order Printing function from within the

Order Entry program so you do not have to print the orders using a separate function. The options are:

No print (default)

Selective print

Immediate Print

If the default ‘No Print’ is used, then you must execute the forms printing by using the ‘Print/Reprint

Order Forms’ function from the menu.

If the option for ‘Selective’ print is used, then each time a Sales Order is created from either Order Entry

or Quote Entry, a window is displayed, when you are exiting the Order, asking you whether or not you

wish to print the form. Enter Y-Yes to print, or N-No to leave printing to a later time.

If the option for ‘Immediate’ print is used, then each time a Sales Order is created from either Order Entry

or Quote Entry, the Order forms are automatically submitted to be printed when you exit the Order.

If an Order Header is in use by any other program while the printing is being done, the Order is not printed.

Instead, an error message is printed on the Session Log. You must then go back and submit the Order to be

printed again.

When you exit a Sales Order after calling it up in Change mode, the Order Print window is displayed to

allow you to re-print the forms if required.

Reprint order form ? N

Order Re-print Window

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Profit/Credit Verification at Time of Order Form Printing

If the Profit Verification function is enabled, the first Profit Verification is performed when all the Order

Items have been entered and a request to print the Order form is made. It takes place prior to the Credit

Verification and prior to the actual printing of the forms. The profitability of each Order Item is verified

against the Net or Gross Profit Percentage set in the PRF=X Product Installation Option. Refer to the

Profit Verification Function chapter of the Accounts Receivable manual for details.

If all the Order Items are profitable, the Order is then automatically credit checked.

If one Order Item’s Profit Percentage is below the minimum set in the Product Installation Option, the

entire Order is considered unprofitable and is put on Profit Hold for the reason ‘17’. The Order does

not get credit checked and the forms are not printed. In Order Entry, the ‘%’ code in the Credit Hold

field indicates that the Order is profit held.

2. Order Entry Page 67

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Print Address Labels Window

A Product Installation Option, PAL=X, set on the Sales Order Entry program, controls the display of a

Print Address Labels window when exiting a Sales Order. Refer to the Product Installation Options

Guide for details.

Print Address Labels

Number of Copies 1

Label Printer ILP8

Shipping Remarks Fragile - wrap carefully prior to shipment.

Refer to shipping code SK779-01 for all inquiries.

Please call John at ext #904 when shipment ready.

Print Address Labels Window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Number of Copies 1 Enter the number of Address Labels required.

Label Printer Shpg Order

printer of

the SO

Header

Shpg Brh

Valid

Printer

Printer on which the Address Labels is printed.

Warning: Shipping Order forms are printed on a

Line printer while Address Labels

require a Zebra Stripe printer.

Therefore, changing the Branch Options Shipping

Order Printer to the Address Label printer would

affect the printing of the Shipping Order forms.

Shipping Remarks User entered Shipping Remarks.

The information entered in the window is not saved. If you re-access the Sales Order, the Print

Address Labels window fields are reset to their default values.

Display of the Print Address Labels Window

If PAL=Y, the Print Address Labels window is displayed whenever you exit a Sales Order Header, even

if Address Labels have already been printed for the Sales Order.

The Print Address Labels window is displayed after the Sales Order form is printed as Credit Verification

is performed during the Order form printing process.

Restriction: The display of the Print Address Labels window is suppressed when the Sales Order Cr

Hold field is N-Not Credit Checked or H-Held.

2. Order Entry Page 68

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production Work Order Printing

A Product Installation Option, PWK=X, that works in conjunction with the Printing option, allows you to

control the automatic printing of the Production Work Order form when exiting a Sales or Transfer Order.

The Production Work Order is printed on the Branch Options Production Work Order printer for the

Order Item Shipping Branch. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Override Printer for Forms Printing

A Production Installation Option, DLT=X, allows you to override the default printer assignments if you

need to manually control where the Work Order and Shipping Order forms are printed. Then when you

exit the Sales Order, you can specify a Primary and Secondary Printers. Refer to the Product Installation

Options Guide for more details.

Print order form ? N

Prm Shp/Wrk Prt

Sec Shp/Wrk Prt

Order Print Window when DLT=Y

NOTES:

If the BLC=99 option is used with DLT=Y, the Shipping Order and Work Order forms are printed

according to the number of copies requested by BLC=99 on each printer—Primary and Secondary—

entered in the Pop-Up window.

When forms are printed both on a Primary and a Secondary Printer, in the CS/IRIS Controller, the

forms for the Secondary Printer are displayed under the 'root' Login ID instead of the Login ID of the

user who made the print request.

Credit Held Orders

A Product Installation Option, CRD=X, allows you to print Order forms for Credit Held Orders.

Depending on the option set, no form, the Order form only, or all Order forms are printed when exiting

the Sales Order Entry program or when converting a Quote into a Sales Order, even if the Order is Credit

Held. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

3. ORDER, INVOICE AND QUOTE ITEM

CHARGES

OVERVIEW

The method of adding Material, Processing, Freight and Other Charges to a Quote, Order or Invoice Item is

a standard function. It takes into account the Charge rate, the Quantity to be charged, different Units of

Measure and provides the ability to have External Charges that appear on the external documentation sent to

the customer, as well as an Internal breakdown of the revenue into different components for internal

accounting.

The main features provided are:

Automatically defaults the normal Charge based on the Item Sales Category.

Ability to have up to 9 combinations of Internal/External Charges on each Item using any of the valid

Charge codes for the item Sales Category.

All External Charges are in Customer Currency.

All Internal Charges are in Base Currency for easier comparison to costs.

Profitability is automatically computed by Item and for the total transaction.

Sales Tax is automatically computed based on the External Charges at time of entry so these can be

confirmed to a customer and included in credit evaluation.

Ability to charge based on Actual, Theoretical, Higher of Actual or Theoretical Billing Gross or

Enhanced Weights.

The automatic costing function that works in conjunction with the Charges table so that costing

records are created automatically for Processing under certain circumstances. Refer to the ‘Add-on

and Automatic Costs’ chapter for details.

Ability to specify discount or price increase by entering, upon certain conditions, a

Markup/Markdown Percentage. The Percentage is a user-defined code in the Unit of Measure field of

the Charge Table.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 70

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Restrictions

Although the Charge Table allows up to 9 Charges for each Item, you can only enter up to 7 as

Charge line 8 is reserved for the Freight and Charge line 9 is reserved for the Internal Material

Charges computed automatically by the system.

You cannot enter an Internal Material Charge using Charge code 1. However, you can use any other

valid Material Charge code.

You cannot use Charge code 3 as it is reserved by the system for the automatic Freight calculation.

You can only enter the Markup/Markdown Percentage user-defined code for Charge numbers of Type

M-Material and O-Other.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 71

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CLASSIFICATION OF REVENUE

The Item Charge Table provides different options to classify your revenues. The following discusses in

detail how each field in the Charge can be used.

Sales Category

The Sales Category Charge code used on the Item determines the General Ledger distribution of

revenue and expenses at Invoice Update time.

The Sales Category Allocation Type determines the reservation type that can be added on the item:

o If the Sales Category Allocation Type is I-Inventory, then the default Reservation is created using

the default Reservation Warehouse from the Branch table.

Only Owned material can be reserved to the Item.

o If the Sales Category Allocation Type is C–Customer-Owned, then the default Reservation is

created using the Storage Warehouse from the Branch table.

For non-tagged products, no default Reservation is created if the Item Sales Category Allocation

Type is C–Customer-Owned.

Only Customer-Owned material can be reserved to the Item.

o If the Sales Category Allocation Type is D-Direct Shipment, no default Inventory Reservation is

created and no access to the Inventory Reservation screen is available.

o Sales Category Allocation Type T is reserved for Transfer Orders.

Sales Type

The Sales Type is used to identify the type of sale for management classification of different aspects of

operation. The Type affects how the orders are handled internally and is used to summarize sales and

cost of sales in various reports.

Charge Number

The Charge code Type (F, M, O, P) determines how the Charge code is treated when it comes to

accumulating the Charge Amounts by each type of revenue. It is not necessary to have any one specific

type of Charge on each Item. If the Charges are only for Storage, Handling or Processing, then you need

only enter the appropriate Charge code for this type of revenue.

Charge code 1 is always reserved for use as the Material price. There can only be one External and one

Internal Charge of this number per Order Item. eSTELquote uses Charge code 1 to default the material

pricing.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 72

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Whenever a screen or report displays Material Price or Material Amount, it uses the Charge code 1

External Rate and Amount.

Charge Quantity Type

The Charge Quantity Type to which the Rate applies.

Valid Types are:

A - Actual, based on Actual Inventory Weight

T - Theoretical, based on a computed Weight

H - Higher of Actual or Theoretical

G - Gross, based on the weight of the inventory reservations plus the Tare Weight

E - Enhanced, Theoretical Weight multiplied by the Enhanced Weight factor

The Charge Quantity Type defaults based on the Customer Tag Information table. If no matching record

exists, it defaults based on the Product Installation Option TYP=X.

This code is used in Bill of Lading to determine the Shipping and, therefore, the Invoicing Weight to be

used for the transaction. It has no impact on the inventory reserved to the transaction and costed against

the Invoice; that is determined by the inventory reservations themselves.

Refer to the ‘Inventory Reservations’ chapter of this manual for details on entering Billing weight on

inventory reservations.

Changing the Charge Quantity Type

You can change the Charge Type to any valid Type, A, T, H, E or G.

If you change the Charge Quantity Type from E-Enhanced to any other Type or from any other Type

to E, a warning message: “Order Weight does not match the Charge Quantity Type. Please Verify” is

displayed. To re-trigger the Weight computation based on the new Charge Qty Type, you must

change the Pieces, accept the change and change it back to the original Pieces.

Included and External Charges

The Included and External indicate whether the rate is to be charged to the customer on the Invoice, or

whether it is to be used as an internal breakdown of the Material price shown on the Invoice.

The default for manual entry of prices is E-External. The cursor skips the field and proceeds to the

Quantity field. You can change the code to I-Included by pressing <Esc> at the Quantity field.

External Charges are the charges that are shown on the customer’s order and invoice forms and it is these

amounts that are collected from the customer. Sales Taxes are applied based on the External Charges

used. Any type of Charge can be used for External Charges.

Included Charges are charges that are to be deducted from the Material Charge External Amount and are

distributed to General Ledger and to Sales Analysis as though they were charged directly to the customer.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 73

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Whenever there is an External Charge for Material using Charge code 1, the program automatically

creates an Included Charge under Charge code 1. If you wish to deduct a rate for other Charges that are

included in the External Charge for Material, then you must enter the Charge code, the Rate, the UM and

I for the Charge Type. The total amount of all manually entered Included Charges is subtracted from the

External Charge Amount to determine the Included Charge amount for Material. (See below for

examples of Included/External Charges.)

If a Sales Order has multiple items but only the last item contains the dollar value and reservation(s) of

material, the prior items will show as having internal charges as well. These come from the Product

Master Balance table.

Examples:

CASE 1

An Order Item is for 10,000 LBS of Plate. The Item is billed to the customer as a Material price only but

there is a Freight Revenue component to be broken out for sales and accounting purposes.

The prices are entered as follows:

1 - Material 20.00/CWT External = 2,000.00

12 - Freight is 2.00/CWT Included = 200.00

When you complete the entry of the Charge Table, the 1-Internal Charge would be calculated

automatically and the new Charge Table entry would look like the following:

1 - Material 20.00/CWT External = 2,000.00

12 - Freight is 2.00/CWT Included = 200.00

1 - Material 18.00/CWT Included = 1,800.00

The customer would see 10,000 LBS @ 20.00/CWT for an amount of 2,000.00 on his quote, order and

invoice.

When the invoice is created, 1,800.00 is updated as Material Sales and 200.00 is updated as Freight

Revenue.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 74

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CASE 2

The sale is for 10,000 LBS of material at a ‘Delivered’ (all-inclusive) price. The inventory item reserved

to the order weighs 10,500 LBS and requires outside processing before it can be shipped to the customer.

The Salesperson enters the order, adds an External Material Charge to the item but enters separate

Included Charges for Processing plus the Freight Costs to transfer the material to the processor and back,

as well as the cost of freight to deliver the material to the customer.

1 - Material 10,000 @ 35.00/CWT External

2 - Processing 10,500 @ 50.00/TON Internal

12 - Freight In 10,500 @ 1.50/CWT Internal

12 - Freight Out 10,000 @ 2.00/CWT Internal

The Included Material Charge is calculated automatically as the difference between the External Material

and the three Included Charges added to the Order Item.

1 - Material 10,000 @ 28.80/CWT Included

The final Charge Table for the item would be displayed as:

1 - Material 10,000 @ 35.00/CWT External

2 - Processing 10,500 @ 50.00/TON Internal

12 - Freight In 10,500 @ 1.50/CWT Internal

12 - Freight Out 10,000 @ 2.00/CWT Internal

1 - Material 10,000 @ 28.80/CWT Internal

The customer would see only one Charge on the Order and Invoice.

Material, 10,000 LBS @ 35.00/CWT = 3,500.00

The Sales Journal and Sales Analysis for the Invoice would list 4 separate Revenue amounts with both the

Customer Billing and Included Charge distribution as follows:

Chg Qty Billed Revenue Amount

Mat 10,000 3,500.00 28.80/CWT 2,880.00

Prs 10,500 50.00/TON 262.50

Frt 10,500 1.50/CWT 157.50

Frt 10,000 2.00/CWT 200.00

Total 3,500.00 3,500.00

Markup/Markdown Percentage Charge Entry

You can enter a Markup/Markdown Percentage code in the Unit of Measure field of the Charge Table to

specify discount or price increase Charge lines on Quote, Sales Order or Invoice Items, as well as

Customer Part Specification records. This Markup/Markdown code is set on the Product Installation

Option PMV=XXX, for example PMV=PCT or PMV=%. Refer to the Product Installation Options

Guide for details.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 75

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Restrictions:

Entry of the Markup/Markdown Percentage Unit of Measure code is restricted to Charge numbers

above 9 - the allocation type (M, P, F or O) doesn't matter.

In order to enter a Charge line using the Markup/Markdown Percentage code, you must have an

External Material Charge on the item.

The Markup/Markdown Percentage only applies on the External Material Charge. It doesn't apply on

any other external charges such as Processing or Freight.

The Markup/Markdown Percentage code is not a valid Unit of Measure as defined in the Unit of

Measure reference table. It is displayed on the Standard Unit Measures Lookup but it is only

accepted in the UM field of the Charge Table of Order Processing functions. Consequently, this code

cannot be used to enter Costs on the Cost Attribution screen.

Entering a Markup/Markdown Percentage Charge: To enter a Markup/Markdown Percentage Charge

line on an item, specify

a Charge Rate. This rate can be entered:

o as a negative figure to apply a price discount or

o as a positive figure to apply a price increase

the Markup/Markdown Percentage code in the Unit of Measure field of the Charge Table.

The discount/increase amount is calculated as follows:

(Charge Rate/100) X the External Material Value

Copying Items: The Markup/Markdown Percentage Charge line is automatically copied and re-computed

in the following functions:

When copying a Quote Item

When converting a Quote into a Sales Order

Whenever the External Material Amount Charge code 1 is changed on a Quote, Order or Invoice

At Bill of Lading and Invoice creation time

When copying a Part Specification to a Quote or Order Item

When copying an Order or an Order Item

When creating an Order using the Rapid Order Release function

Printing Forms: When used, the Markup/Markdown Percentage is printed on the following forms:

Quote

Sales Order

Shipping Order

Acknowledgement

Invoice

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 76

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Example of a Percentage Markup printed on the Sales Acknowledgement:

S A L E S A C K N O W L E D G M E N T SO No PHI WS-564

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys Y 1 Original copies with Shipment, 0 with Invoice

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Bar Angle ASTM A36 5 PCS 319 LBS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

MATERIAL 319 LBS @ 60.0000 CWT 191.40

ADDITIONAL TAX 10.0000 % 19.14

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Thank you for your business.

Order Totals: 1 Items 319 LBS

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

210.54 210.54

********************************************************************************

Page: 1 .... Last

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 77

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES TAXES

The Sales Taxes are automatically computed on each item each time a change is made to the Charge

table. The Taxes are computed based on the following parameters:

Tax Regions

Tax Types

Item Tax Applicable Codes

Product Tax Status

The Product Installation Option, PAS=XXXXXX, allows you to restrict the access of the Tax Applicable

codes unless a password is entered.

Refer to the ‘Sales Tax Calculation’ section in the User’s Guide for more details.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 78

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHARGE ENTRY

The Charge table is a table of 9 Charges per Item. The Charge table displays the 9 Charges and the Total

of all Charges as well as the total Taxes.

Once multiple Charges have been entered, you can use the Up () or Down () arrows, from the Charge

field, to move between lines of the Charge table.

<F1> lets you exit and accept the Charge table.

Adding a Charge Line

The first Charge code defaults and the cursor stops at the Rate field but you can press <Esc> to change

the Charge Description. You can press <Esc> again to move further backwards to change the code if

there is no Charge to be entered for the default.

Once you press <F1> to exit the Charge table, the Material Included Charge and the Taxes are computed.

When you exit the Charge table, a verification is done to ensure the following:

That the total External Amounts charged to the customer are greater than or equal to 0.00 so that you

do not end up with a negative Invoice.

That the total of Included Charges is equal to the total of Charge code 1-External so that the Internal

revenue matches what is charged to the customer.

That each Processing Charge has its equivalent Cost Quantity.

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM TYP Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.7500 CWT E 4555 LBS 1172.91

12 PACKAGING 0.7500 CWT E 4555 LBS 34.16

2 PROCESSING PIK 1.0000 CWT E 4555 LBS 45.55

10 MISC. MATERIAL 1.0000 CWT E 4555 LBS 45.55

11 PACKAGING 0.7500 CWT I 4555 LBS 34.16

4 ADMINISTRATION COSTS 0.5000 CWT E 4555 LBS 22.78

3 FREIGHT 2.2500 CWT E 4555 LBS 102.49

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 4555 LBS 1138.75

Taxes 12.53 Total 1,435.97

Standard Item Charge Table

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 79

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Sls Cat Header

record

Sales

Category

Reference

The Sales Category for the Item, can be overridden

on each Item.

Type Sales

Category

Reference

1, 2, 3 Can be overridden.

Chg Qty Typ T, PIO TYP A, E, G,

H, T

The Charge Quantity Type to which the Rate

applies.

Ch Sales

Category

Reference

Sales

Allocation

The Sales Allocation to be used for billing.

Description Sales

Allocation

Reference

Optional This description is printed on the Order and

Invoice forms. Can be overridden as required.

PWC Processing

Work

Center

If the Charge Code is for a Charge Type P-

Processing, the field defaults the PWC to be used

for Charges and/or Costing based on the Default

PWC field of the entered Sales Allocation Charge

number. This allows for faster entry of

Processing Charge lines and the segregation of GL

activity by Process Type. The cursor is

positioned in the PWC field to allow you to change

the defaulted PWC if required. A Processing Work

Center Look-Up is provided to list the available

Work Centers.

Rate Based on

product

Optional The Charge Rate to be applied for the Charge code.

This is entered manually in Order Entry and is

carried forward to the Invoice. The Rate can have

2, 3 or 4 decimals depending on the

Pricing/Costing Decimals of the Product Group.

You cannot enter more decimals for any Charge than

is provided for by the Product coding. If you

have eSTELprice and are using 4 decimals for some

Processing or Freight Charges, these rates are

rounded to 2 or 3 places before being used on the

Quote or Order transaction. The number of decimal

places cannot be increased if it is 2 or 3.

However, you can always bill to only 2 or 3

decimal place accuracy for a product that has 4

decimal accuracy.

You can enter Charges that are to be deducted from

other Charges on the Item (such as Scrap

Allowances or Discounts) by entering a ‘-’ sign

for the Rate field.

Example: Material is 20.00/CWT.

Processing is 50.00/GTN.

Scrap Credit is 1.50-/CWT.

To enter the Scrap Rate, enter 1.50- and

press <Enter>.

Rate UM The Charge Unit of Measure to which the Rate

applies. This can be any valid Unit of Measure

for the product based on the Price Per check code

plus the Units for CUT, HRS and THW.

NOTE: The standard method of pricing for steel

products is per CWT in imperial and per CKG

in Metric measure. However, the weight for

these Rate UMs is always displayed in LBS.

Therefore, if you enter a Rate UM of CWT,

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 80

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

the default Quantity and Quantity UM is in

LBS. If you enter a Rate UM of CKG, the

default Quantity and Quantity UM is KGS.

TYP E-External I, E When you enter a Processing Charge line and

reference a Processing Work Center, the Charge

Line Type field defaults based on the PWC Charge

Type field: Included or External Charge.

This facilitates the entry of Processing Charge

lines for PWC that are always classified as I-

Included.

Quantity Billing

Qty.

Optional The Charge Quantity against which the Rate is

applied to determine the Charge Amount. This

defaults to the Theoretical Quantity ordered based

on the Unit of Measure of the Rate (if one can be

computed), but it can be overridden.

Example: If the Charge Rate UM is LBS, the

Quantity defaults to the Theoretical

Weight Ordered.

If the Charge Rate UM is FT for length

controlled products, the Quantity

defaults to the Theoretical Length based

on the Pieces and Length ordered.

If you override the Billing Quantity

Type, you must manually override the

Quantity to make it the quantity you wish

to bill.

Quantity UM The Charge Quantity Unit of Measure indicates what

the Quantity field represents. This defaults from

the Pieces, Quantity or Weight Unit of Measure

entered for the billed product and the Rate Unit

of Measure entered. It can be overridden as

required.

Example: If the Quantity Ordered Unit of Measure

is TONS, and the Rate Unit of Measure is

TONS, the Charge Quantity UM is in TONS.

If the Charge Rate is CWT or LBS, the

Charge Quantity UM defaults to LBS.

If the Charge Rate UM is CUT, the Charge

Quantity UM defaults to CUT.

Amount Rate X Qty Display The Amount of the Charge code for the Invoice

Item. This is calculated from the Charge Rate,

Charge Rate UM, Charge Type, Charge Quantity and

Charge Unit of Measure.

Because of the flexibility provided to change

Units of Measure and the Quantity to be billed for

the Charge and the fact that there are no decimals

on the billing Quantity for weights, it is

possible that in some circumstances the

combination of Charge UM and Quantity UM would

prevent an Amount from being calculated. If this

situation occurs, an error message “Quantity and

Units are too small to calculate Amount” is

displayed. You must change either the Charge

Rate, the Amount or the Units of Measure so that

an Amount can be calculated or delete the Charge.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 81

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Taxes Computed Display The totals of Sales Tax for all Tax Type for the

Item. This is calculated based on the product Tax

Applicability and the Charges for the item.

A detailed explanation and calculation of Sales

Tax Amounts is included in the ‘Sales Tax

Calculations’ section of the User’s Guide.

Total Amount +

Tax

Display The Total Amount of all Charges and all Sales

Taxes for the Item. This is the amount that is

used in Credit Verification. For Order valuation

and comparison on Open Sales Order reports and

Bookings reports etc., this amount is multiplied

by the Current Exchange Rate to obtain the Base

Currency Value of the Order Item.

The Currency Code is displayed next to the item

value if the Customer’s Currency is different than

the Base Currency.

Changing a Charge Line

When an order is changed such that the Pieces, Quantity or Weight Ordered is modified from the original

quantity, the Charges must be adjusted to bring the Quantities into line with the revised Quantity Ordered.

When a change that affects the quantities and/or the Charge Amounts for the Item is made, the new

balance of the Pieces, Measure or Weight quantities are defaulted to the Charge Quantity fields and the

Amount for each Charge is re-calculated automatically. The cursor is positioned on the first Charge code

and you can then override the Charges as required. If you had previously manually overridden the

quantities, you must manually change the new quantities.

Restrictions

The following restrictions apply in Order Entry if the Order Item is on an open transaction such as a Bill

of Lading or an Invoice Entry, and in Invoice Entry if the Invoice is for a Sales Order or a Bill of Lading:

You cannot change the Charge Rate Unit of Measure or the Charge Quantity Unit of Measure.

You cannot change the Sales Category Allocation Type. However, you can change the Sales

Category to any one that has the same Allocation Type (such as I-Inventory, C-Customer-Owned).

Existing cost line entries are validated to ensure that they are compatible with a modified Sales

Category. If an incompatible cost line is found, the change is rejected and the “Sales Category

incompatible with current cost table” error message is displayed.

Deleting a Charge Line

Position the cursor on the Charge line you want to delete and press <F6>.

Restrictions

You cannot delete a Charge line in Order Entry if the Order Item is on an open transaction such as a

Bill of Lading or an Invoice Entry.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 82

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

You cannot delete a Charge line in a Blanket Order if an open Release Order exists for it.

You cannot delete a Charge line in Invoice Entry if the Invoice is for a Sales Order or a Bill of

Lading.

Interface with eSTELprice and eSTELquote

Default Material Price

A Product Installation Option controls the default of the External Material Price. You can set PRI=X if

you use the Material Price Book to price your sales transactions. Refer to the Product Installation Options

Guide for more details.

When the PRI Product Installation Option is set to Y-Yes to default the Item External Material Price from

the Price Book, the Item Prices are automatically calculated in the Customer’s Currency.

Freight-In

If you use eSTELquote and a Freight-In Charge existed on your Quote Item prior to converting the Quote

into an Order, the Freight-In Charge line is copied from the Quote Item to the Order Item and can be

changed as required. Refer to the eSTELquote manual for details.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 83

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BACK ORDER ITEMS

A Back Order is created when a partial shipment or invoice is made against the original Order Quantity.

When the Back Order is created, the Order Item Charges are updated to modify the Charge Quantities so

that they accurately reflect the balance of the order quantity.

This update is accomplished by subtracting the shipped Amount from the original Amount, then the new

Charge Quantities are calculated from those amounts.

Example: The original order was for 15 Pcs of Pipe with a Total footage of 300’ and a total weight of

1,500 LBS.

Charges were:

Material 2.50/FT for 300’

Cutting 1.20/CUT for 15 Pcs

Freight 2.50/CWT for 1500 LBS

Equivalent to a value of:

Material $ 750.00

Cutting $ 18.00

Freight $ 37.50

A part shipment of 9 Pcs, 190’ and 995 LBS was made.

Equivalent to a value of:

Material $ 475.00

Cutting $ 10.8

Freight $ 24.875

The Balance on Order for the item is now 6 Pcs, 110’ and 505 LBS.

Equivalent to a value of:

Material $ 275.00

Cutting $ 7.20

Freight $ 12.625

Once a shipment for an order is done, either through a Bill of Lading or an Invoice, the item is given an

‘Unprinted Back Order’ status. You can then print the item balance using the Print Backorders selection

in the ‘Print/Reprint Order Forms’ or the ‘Reprint Selective Order Forms’ menus. Based on the Product

Installation Option PDB=X, you can also extend the Back Order status to other items of the Order and

have them printed on the Back Order form.

The Print Back Order function allows you to print only the Items that are considered as Back Orders and

were not printed yet.

NOTE: To get a printout of the Back Order Items only, you must do an ‘Original’ print and set the

Print Backorders field to Y.

If you do not want Order Items that have been fully shipped to print on the Back Order form when the

Product Installation Options MWT, QTY or MIN are not set, you must do a ‘Reprint’ and set the Print

Backorders field to Y.

Refer to the ‘Printing Order Forms’ chapter for more details.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 84

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

LOT Charges on Backorder

LOT charges are assumed to apply each time a shipment or Invoice is made against the Item. Therefore,

for multiple shipments, the LOT Charge is copied to each Invoice and the Back Ordered Item includes the

LOT Charge as an outstanding Amount. If you do not want LOT Charges to be applied to each shipment

then you must convert the Charge to a Piece/Measure or Quantity related Unit of Measure based on your

anticipated shipment schedule.

Workflow Interface

If the Workflow functions are enabled, a workflow message is emitted when a Backorder is created for a

Sales Order. Refer to the ‘Workflow Management’ chapter of the eSTEL/SCOPE manual for details.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 85

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHARGE UPDATE IN BILL OF LADING AND INVOICING

The Charges entered on the Order Item are automatically transferred to the Bill of Lading, then to the

Invoice. The transfer occurs in the background as—except for Cash on Delivery Orders—the Charges are

not printed on the Bill of Lading form.

The Charge Quantity on the Bill of Lading and Invoice is computed using the following pro-ration

method: (Shipped Quantity / Sold Quantity) X Order Charge Quantity (controlled by Product Installation

Option USQ=X).

Examples

CASE 1:

On the Order Item, the Sold Quantity and Quantity Unit of Measure (UM) equal the Charge Quantity and

Quantity UM:

Sold Quantity = 6600 LBS

Charge Quantity = 6600 LBS

Bill of Lading Item:

Shipped Quantity = 7660 LBS

The Bill of Lading Charge Quantity is pro-rated: Shipped Quantity / Sold Quantity X Order Charge

Quantity : 7660/6600X6600 = 7660 LBS

Invoice Item:

The Shipped and Charge Quantities are the same as for the Bill of Lading. The Charge Quantity can

however be manually modified.

CASE 2:

On the Order Item, the Sold Quantity and/or Quantity UM is different than the Charge Quantity and

Quantity UM:

Sold Quantity = 6600 LBS

Charge Quantity 1 = 6500 LBS

Charge Quantity 2 = 2 Hrs

Bill of Lading Item:

Shipped Quantity = 7660 LBS

Charge Quantity 1: 7660/6600X6500 = 7543,94, which is rounded to 7544 LBS

Charge Quantity 2: 7660/6600X2 = 2,3 Hrs

Invoice Item:

The Shipped and Charge Quantities are the same as for the Bill of Lading.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 86

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CASE 3 – Cannot Compute the Percentage of Shipped Vs Sold Quantity:

There are situations when the Shipped Quantity/Sold Quantity factor cannot be computed. This happens

for example when the Charge Quantity UM is by unit and the Sold Quantity in unit is not known at the

time the Order item is entered. To overcome this situation, the BL and Invoice Charge Quantity are

determined using the BL Shipped Quantity.

A) Order Item Sold and Charge Quantity are 0 and the BL Shipped Quantity is > 0

In this example the BL Shipped 100 Pcs and the Order Charge Qty is 0 Pcs:

Order Item

Sold Quantity = 0 Pcs

Sold Weight = 5000 LBS

Charge Quantity UM is EACH, i.e. Pieces. Note that even if the ordered weight is known, the

corresponding number of pieces has not been entered. The Charge Quantity UM is unit based,

therefore the Charge Quantity is computed as zero pieces.

Charge Quantity = 0 Pcs

Bill of Lading Item

Shipped Quantity = 100 Pcs

Shipped Weight = 5024 LBS

Charge Quantity = 100 Pcs. (Shipped Quantity is used as the BL Charge Quantity)

Note that the Charge Quantity UM being unit based, the Shipped Weight is not taken into account in the

computation.

Invoice Item:

Shipped Quantity = BL Shipped Quantity, which is 100 Pcs.

Charge Quantity = BL Charge Quantity, which is 100 Pcs.

B) Order Item Charge Quantity is > 0 and the BL Shipped Quantity is 0

In this example, a random length product, the BL Shipped 0 FT and the Order Charge Qty is 500 FT:

Order Item

Sold Quantity = 200 LBS

Sold Length = 0

Sold Weight = 200 LBS

Charge Quantity = 500 FT (Charge Quantity and UM was manually entered by Salesperson)

Bill of Lading Item

Shipped Quantity = 200 LBS

Shipped Length = 0

Shipped Weight = 200 LBS

Charge Quantity = 500 FT. Order Item Charge Quantity is used as the BL Charge Quantity

Restrictions

1. The entire Order Item Charge Amount is applied. If this is a partial shipment, the entire amount is

billed on the first shipment. Subsequent shipments will have a zero Charge Amount.

2. If the Shipped Vs Sold Quantity factor cannot be computed and USQ=Y (i.e. no pro-ration), the

program always uses the BL Shipped Quantity to get the BL Charge Quantity, even if the BL

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 87

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Shipped Quantity is zero.

Invoice Item:

Shipped Quantity = BL Shipped Quantity, which is 200 LBS.

Charge Quantity = BL Charge Quantity, which is 500 Ft.

CASE 4 – USQ=Y, no Pro-Rated Pcs/Msr/Wgt: actual BL Shipped Quantity is passed ‘as is’ to BL

Charge Quantity.

This option is intended for sites that are experiencing problems with the Invoice Charge Charge Quantity

not matching the quantity printed on the BL Form due to rounding differences.

In the previous examples, the Shipped Quantity and Charge Quantity are the same for the Bill of Lading

and the Invoice. Rounding differences may however cause the Invoice Charge Quantity not to match the

quantity printed on the Bill of lading form. The following example illustrates a difference of 1 KG

between the Bill of Lading and Invoice Charges:

Order Item

Sold Quantity = 6600 LBS

The Charge Quantity UM is changed from LBS to KGS

Charge Quantity: 6600 LBS = 2993.71 KGS, which is rounded to 2994 KGS

The quantity in the Charge table <ortchl> is calculated based on the KGS that were entered, in this

case 2994 KGS. 2994 KGS equals 6600.63 LBS, which is rounded to 6601 LBS and saved in the

Charge table.

Bill of Lading Item

Shipped Quantity: 9326 LBS = 4230.21 KGS which is rounded to 4230 KGS on the Bill of Lading

form.

Charge Quantity: 9326 / 6600 X 6601 = 9327.41 LBS, which is rounded to 9327 LBS in the Charge

table.

Invoice Item

Shipped Quantity = BL Shipped Quantity, which is 9326 LBS.

Charge Quantity = BL Charge Quantity, which is 9327 LBS. The LBS are converted to KGS: 9327

LBS = 4230.66 KGS which is rounded to 4231 KGS.

For the sites experiencing this type of rounding issues, the USQ=X option controls the use of the Pro-

Rated Pcs/Msr/Wgt or Shipped Pcs/Msr/Wgt. When USQ is set to Y-Yes, the Bill of Lading Charges

transferred to the Invoice are based on the actual Quantity Shipped (Shipped Pcs/Msr/Weight).

In the previous example, this means that the Invoice Charge Quantity transferred is 9326 LBS instead of

9327 LBS.

Restrictions when USQ=Y

The option does not apply to non Pcs/Msr/Wgt UM such as HRS or LOT. These are always pro-

rated.

In cases where the required Pcs/Msr/Wgt is not entered on the Bill of Lading, the Charge Quantity is

pro-rated.

3. Order, Invoice and Quote Item Charges Page 88

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Changes to the Order Item Charge Quantity are not passed through to the Invoice. The Invoice

Charge Quantities are based on the Pcs/Msr/Wgt Shipped.

Order Item Charge Quantities may not go to zero when an order is shipped. Your Order Item cleanup

Product Installation Options must be set to allow for the orders to be removed by the End of Day/End

of Month functions when the value of the charges is not zero.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

4. INVENTORY RESERVATION

OVERVIEW

The Inventory Reservation function is a standard eSTELPLAN Entry program that allows you to reserve

a Specific or non-Specific Product Item against a transaction. A non-Specific Reservation is a reservation

using a Tag number ‘ZZZZZZZ’.

An Inventory Reservation does not affect the On-Hand Pieces and Quantity of the reserved Product Item.

It reduces the availability by increasing the reserved fields on the Product Item record.

The Inventory Reservation program can be called from one of the following eSTELPLAN Transaction

Entry programs:

Order Entry: Sales and Transfer Order

Quote Entry

Bill of Lading Entry

Invoice Entry

Purchase Order Entry – Outside Processing

Office Receipt – Outside Processing Purchase Order

eSTELman – Step Entry

The screen layout, entry window, as well as the verifications, depend on the program it was called from.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 90

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RESTRICTIONS

In Order Entry, a Product Installation Option, RES=X, controls access to the Res action bar option on

the Sales Order Item screen.

A Product Installation Option, PCS=X, controls whether the reserved Pieces field can/cannot be left

blank for a Piece Control Required product.

Restriction: To prevent the Inventory files from getting updated during Invoice Update, the

Rapid Reservation window does not allow the entry of zero Pieces for Piece Controlled products

when creating a Return-to-Stock using a Credit Note or an Invoice, regardless of the PCS Product

Installation Option.

In Quote Entry, the Inventory Reservation does not reduce the availability of the Product Item. In this

case, the Reservations are used to cost the Quote Item and are converted to actual Reservations when

the Quote is converted into a Sales Order.

In Transfer Orders and Bills of Lading, all Reservations must have the same Inventory Logic Control

code since the Incoming Material record is what is shown to the destination Branch and the quantities

of the products reserved must be compatible so they can be included in the costing and quantity

incoming.

Inventory Reservations are not allowed on Standard Sales Orders.

Non-Specific Reservations

Non-Specific Reservations are not allowed for the following transactions:

o Bill of Lading

o Invoice Entry

o eSTELman

o Outside Processing Office Receipt

Non-Specific Reservations can only be entered for Tagged products. The reservation defaults to the

Group, Size, Grade, Dimension ordered and can be changed as required.

Due to the Product Item table structure, you cannot override the Gauge and Gauge Type on the non-

Specific Reservations. The Gauge Type defaults to N-Nominal regardless of the Item Gauge Type.

When reserving to a Transfer Order or an Outside Processing Purchase Order, the reservation Branch

must match the transaction Branch.

You cannot change the warehouse on a non-Specific Reservation to a warehouse that does not belong

to the shipping branch.

Tag Master Required Products

You cannot reserve more than the Quantity Available in inventory.

Except for a Transfer Order and Transfer Type Bill of Lading Item, you cannot reserve the same

Tag/Warehouse more than once on the same Item.

You cannot reserve a Transient tag to an Outside Processing Purchase Order or Office Receipt.

You cannot reserve a tag that is on QC or Production Hold to an Outside Processing Purchase Order,

Office Receipt or an eSTELman job.

You cannot reserve a tag that is on Shipping or QC Hold to a Bill of Lading.

Tags that do not meet the Distinction of Material Origin requirement cannot be reserved to the SO

Item, BL or Invoice.

The reservation Branch must match the transaction Branch for the following transactions:

4. Inventory Reservation Page 91

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

o Transfer Order

o Bill of Lading

o Outside Processing Purchase Order

o eSTELman Job

Warnings

A warning message is displayed if the Tag is on Shipping, Production or QC Hold in the following

transactions:

o Quote

o Sales Order

o Invoice

When reserving a Tag to an Outside Processing Purchase Order, a warning message is displayed if the

tag is on Shipping Hold.

Except for Bill of Lading Entry, a warning message is displayed when reserving a Transient tag.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 92

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

DEFAULT INVENTORY RESERVATIONS

The Inventory Reservations may default automatically depending on the transaction you are entering.

Sales Order

For Sales Order Type N-Normal, the Inventory Reservations can be created automatically for each Order

Item to match the Product Ordered without having to manually enter reservations. This permits automatic

costing of the Order as well as the reservation of material to at least cover the Order commitment.

If you want to avoid reserving material at the time of creating the Order because it is due sometime in the

future, or if you have Specific material that is to be reserved, you must call the Reservations screen and

adjust the Default Reservation accordingly.

The Product Installation Option, NSA=X, allows you to create or not a non-specific Default

Reservations for tagged Order Items.

The Product Installation Option, DFR=X, allows for the creation of Default Reservation for non-

Tagged products when the available inventory is insufficient. Refer to the ‘Non-Tagged Products’

section of this chapter for details.

NOTE: Although this PIO is set on the Sales Order Entry program <orpord>, the same logic

applies to the following programs:

eSTELquote Entry

Sales Order Copying

Rapid Order Release

Invoicing

eSTELman Job Entry

eSTELgateway Sales Order Part Specification

eSTELgateway Sales Order Insertion

When using the Sales Order Entry program, there is no Default Reservation for any other Order Type.

However, if eSTELspec is installed on your system and you are using the Rapid Order Release program to

create Release Type Orders, a Default Reservation is created the same way as in Normal Type Sales Orders.

Refer to the eSTELspec manual for details.

Restriction

Interface with the Production Sequence Code: The Default Reservations depend on the Default Allocation

field of the Production Sequence Reference table. If this field is set to Y-Yes, then the Default Reservation

is created. If the field is set to N-No, then no Default Reservation is created for the Order Item. This applies

to all product types, regardless of their Inventory Organization.

Depending on the source of the Product Item being sold, a Default Reservation may or may not be required

at Order Entry time. The Production Sequence code can be used to control the creation of the default

Inventory Reservation on the Sales Order Item.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 93

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Floor Stock – Default Reservation is required:

When an Item is sourced from Floor Stock, a reservation for the floor stock dimension to be used to

fulfill the Item is required.

Rolling Schedule – Default Reservation not required

When an Item is sourced from a rolling schedule, a Default Reservation should not be created as

this over-reserves the existing floor stock.

Transfer Orders

For Transfer Orders, the Inventory Reservations default the same way as for Normal Type Sales Orders.

However, Transfer Orders have a Specific function to allow you to move an Inventory Reservation that is

on a Sales Order to the Transfer Order so that it can be shipped to the Branch that made the reservation.

You can use a Production Sequence code that has Default Allocation set to N-No on the Transfer Item

screen, to prevent the automatic creation of Default Reservations for Transfer Orders. This allows you to

selectively enter the products and de-allocate them from the Sales Order. The Transfer Order Item then

shows as an Incoming Material record to the destination Branch and an Incoming Reservation is created

automatically for the Sales Order it was reserved against.

Invoice Entry

For Direct Invoices, the Inventory Reservations default as in Sales Order Entry. However, there is no

Default Reservation for Tagged Products as the non-Specific Reservation is not allowed on the Invoice

Entry.

For Sales Order Invoices, the Inventory Reservations are copied from the Sales Order Item. If it is

subsequently modified or deleted from the Invoice Entry, the corresponding Order Item Balance Quantity

is verified. If it is zero, the material is returned to the inventory, otherwise, the balance of the reservation

is put back onto the Order Item.

For Bill of Lading Invoices, the Inventory Reservations are copied from the Bill of Lading if any exist, or

from the Sales Order if the Bill of Lading has no associated Inventory Reservations. As the BL Item is

completed once it is invoiced, Inventory Reservations copied from the BL cannot be modified or deleted.

If any modification is required, you must delete the Invoice Entry, change the BL and regenerate the

Invoice Entry.

If no Inventory Reservations exist on the Bill of Lading, the reservations copied from the Sales Order can

be modified as required. As for Sales Order Invoices, the balance of the reservation is either returned to

the inventory or put back onto the Order Item.

Bill of Lading

There are no Default Reservations created for Bill of Lading Items. You must call the Inventory

Reservations screen and add the Specific Reservations manually.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 94

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Outside Processing Purchase Orders

There are no Default Reservations created for Outside Processing Purchase Orders. You must call the

Inventory Reservations screen and add the reservations, Specific or non-Specific, manually.

Outside Processing Receipts

The ALC=X Product Installation Option controls the defaulting of Reservations on Outside Processing

Receipts. If ALC=Y, all of the Reservations from the Purchase Order Item are defaulted to the Receiver.

Otherwise, you must call the Inventory Reservations screen and manually add the Specific Reservations.

eSTELquote

For Quotations, the Inventory Reservations default as in Normal Sales Order Entry. However, no ‘real’

Inventory Reservation is done until the Quote is converted into a Sales Order.

eSTELman

Default reservations for Production Steps are created for eSTELman based on the Consumed product and

Estimated Consumption minus Actual Consumption. You can call the Inventory Reservations screen and

add the Specific Reservations manually. You cannot manually modify non-Specific Reservations.

Default Reservations Product Item

The Inventory Reservations default based on the Inventory Organization of the Item Product.

Tag Master Required Products

The Default Reservation is a non-Specific Reservation with the same Product as the Product sold. If the

product sold is a Gauge Required product, the Gauge of the reservation is created under the Nominal

Gauge of the Product sold so that the correct Product Master Balance record can be updated for the

reservation quantities. The Pieces and Quantity are defaulted to the Ordered quantities.

A Product Installation Option, CAV=X, controls the validation of the non-Specific Reservations against

the available inventory. If the option is installed, a message is displayed to warn you if there is an

insufficient Inventory quantity or if there is no matching Product Master Balance record.

No verification is performed if the non-Specific Reservation is created for a non-Standard Dimension

Product Item.

NOTE: It is not recommended to add a non-Specific Reservation on a Blanket Order Item, as this

Reservation is not automatically moved to the Release Order Item.

Tagged (non-Tag Master) Products

The Default Reservation is a Specific reservation under a blank Tag if there is enough quantity to cover

4. Inventory Reservation Page 95

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

the sold quantity, otherwise a non-Specific Reservation is created.

Non-Tagged Products

For non-Tagged Products, the Default Reservation is a Specific Reservation with the same Product,

Pieces and Quantity as the product sold.

If there is insufficient inventory on-hand, or if a Product Item matching the Ordered product is not found,

the cursor is positioned on the reservation screen and you must enter the Specific Reservation manually.

However, the Product Installation Option, DFR=X, can be used to control the creation of the Default

Reservation for non-tagged products when the available inventory is insufficient.

When DFR is set to Y-Yes:

o The Default Reservation is created even if no available inventory exists for the material and the

message “Insufficient Inventory available; Verify Reservations” is not displayed.

o The Default Reservation is not created if there is no Product Item record for the ordered material.

Under this condition, the warning message “Insufficient Inventory Available; Verify

Reservations” is displayed.

When DFR is set to N-No:

o the Default Reservation is not created if there is insufficient available inventory and the warning

message is displayed.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

NOTE: it is not recommended to add a Specific Reservation for a non-Tagged product on a Blanket

Order Item, as this Reservation is not automatically moved to the Release Order Item.

Restriction

Interface with the Production Sequence Code: When DFR=Y, the creation of Default Reservations for

non-tagged products still depends on the Default Allocation field of the Production Sequence Reference

table.

If this field is set to Y-Yes, or if no Production Sequence code is set up, then the Default Reservation is

created.

However, if the Default Allocation field is set to N-No, then the Default Reservation is not created but

the “Insufficient Inventory available; Verify Reservations” message is not displayed.

Interface with eSTELspec

If eSTELspec is installed on your system, and you copy a Part Specification to create the Order or Quote

Item, then the Inventory Reservation Pieces, Quantity and Weight default based on the Part Specifications

record. Refer to the eSTELspec manual for details.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 96

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Default Reservation Pieces, Quantity and Weight

The Default Reservation quantity is computed as follows:

Reserved Weight = Order Balance Weight - Incoming Reservation Weight (if any)

The Reserved Weight is used to compute Reserved Pieces

The Pieces are rounded-up and the Measure and Weight are recomputed.

If the Order Item Charge Quantity type is E-Enhanced, then the Default Reservation weight is the

Theoretical Weight based on the Order Balance Pieces.

Default Reservation Warehouse

The Default Reservations are created in either the default Allocation Warehouse for the Shipping Branch

or the Item Shipping Warehouse based on the Product Installation Option WHS=X set for the Sales Order

Entry program.

Restrictions

If you change the Group, Size, Grade, Dimension or the Balance fields on the Item, a question is

displayed allowing you to delete all Specific and non-Specific Reservations and re-default the

Reservation as in ‘Add’ mode.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 97

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

STANDARD RESERVATION ENTRY SCREEN

The Standard Reservation Entry screen is used when selecting the Res action bar option from the

following transactions:

Order Entry – Sales or Transfer Order

Bill of Lading Entry – Entry Mode = S-Summary or D-Detail

Invoice Entry

Quote Entry

Outside Processing Purchase Order

Outside Processing Office Receipt

eSTELman – Step Entry

The Standard Reservation Entry screen is displayed below:

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST SO Item - Reservation SO No PHI- 830- 2

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY Due 12Dec04 Cus N Chg Typ A

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 Bal Pcs 1 1000LBS

Product PCS Quantity Wgt LBS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 3 PPR 1 1,000 LBS 1000 M

Total Res 1 1,000 LBS

1-Specific 2-Non-Spec 3-Remarks 4-Tfr Req 5-Prod 6-Consume

Inventory Reservation screen

4. Inventory Reservation Page 98

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Header Fields Description

Field Description

Type Transaction Type.

Options are:

For Sales Order: N-Normal, R-Release, B-Blanket

For Transfer Order: T-Transfer

For Quote: Q-Quote

For Bill of Lading: S-Sales Order, T-Transfer Order

For Invoice: D-Direct, S-Sale Order, B-Bill of Lading, E-Entire BL, C-Credit Note.

For Purchase Order: O-Outside Processing

Cus/Ven Name Based on the transaction Type, the Customer or the Vendor Look-up Name is displayed

next to the Type.

PX Reference Prefix of the transaction.

Valid Prefixes are:

SO Sales Order

TO Transfer Order

BL Bill of Lading

PO Outside Processing

IE Invoice Entry

QT Quote

RC Office Receipt

MN eSTELman

Prefix No Denotes the calling transaction Branch, Number and Item number.

When called from eSTELman, denotes the Branch, Job number, Item number, Release

number and Step number.

Ship-to Name Based on the transaction Type, the first 30 characters of the Ship-To Name or

Warehouse are displayed.

Due Item Due Date if applicable.

Cus Displayed based on the Item for Sales Order and Invoice transactions. Defaults based

on the Header for Purchase Order and Transfer Order transactions. A Y-Yes is

displayed for Customer-Owned, else the Cus field is set to N-No.

Chg Typ Denotes the Item Charge Quantity Type. The Charge Quantity Type is blank if the

calling transaction is a Purchase Order, and is set to A-Actual for Transfer Order

transactions.

Product Based on the Item transaction, the Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Gauge and Gauge

Type are compressed and up to 36 characters are displayed.

Bal The Item Balance Pieces, Quantity, Quantity Unit of Measure, Weight and Weight Unit

of Measure are displayed for reference.

Adding a Specific Reservation

When you first access the Reservations screen, if no reservation exists, the Entry window is

displayed. The cursor is positioned based on the Product of the calling transaction:

o If the Product is a Tag Master Required, the cursor is positioned at the Tag field.

o If the Product is not a Tag Master Required, the cursor is positioned at the Grp field.

When called from eSTELman, the cursor is positioned based on the Default Product Access field in

the Installation Options table.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 99

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Req RT/112109/513/20' Pcs

Grp RT Size 112109 Grd 513 Dim 20' Ga

Tag CA1067 Whs PPR 10 PCS 200 ' 324 LBS

1-Stk Avl 2-Rdy Shp 3-Rpd Res

Reservation Entry window

Action Bar Action

Stk Avl Based on the Item Specifications and the non-Specific Reservation, calls either the

eSTELview Stock Available Inquiry or the Stock Available window.

When the Stock Available screen is called from this action bar option, no Rapid

Reservation can be made (the 9-Res action bar option is dimmed). You can only

reserve one Tag at a time using the 6-Return action bar option.

Rdy Shp For Sales Orders, this action bar option is available only for Release Orders. When

selected, the Ready-to-Ship Tags screen is displayed showing the Ready-to-Ship

Product Items reserved to the Blanket of the Release Order. You can then select the

Product Items for shipment and automatically return them to the Release Order.

For Bills of Lading, calls the Ready-to-Ship function for the Order Item being

shipped to allow you to select all Product Items to be shipped on the BL Item.

Rpd Res Calls the Stock Available screen where you can use the Rapid Reservation function by

selecting the 9-Res action bar option. This allows you to reserve several Tags

without re-typing the Group, Size, Grade and Dimensions. You cannot reserve using

the 6-Return action bar option.

The Up/Down arrow keys flip the cursor position from the Tag to Group, or from the Group to Tag

fields.

All fields default to spaces, with the exception of the Warehouse field, which defaults as explained

below. You can press <Insert> from the Grp field to default the Group, Size, Grade, Dimension from

the transaction Item.

Defaulting the Reservation Warehouse

Based on the calling transaction the reservation Warehouse defaults as follows:

To the Item Shipping Warehouse or the default Allocation Warehouse based on the WHS Product

Installation Option defined for the corresponding Entry program when called from the following

programs:

o Invoice

o Quote

o Sales Orders

o Transfer Orders

To the Item Shipping Warehouse or the default Allocation Warehouse based on the WHS Product

Installation Option defined for the Bill of Lading Entry program when called from the BL.

To the default Allocation Warehouse in the Branch Option table when called from the following

transactions:

o Outside Processing Purchase Order

o eSTELman

For Tag Master Required Products, once you enter a Tag number, to the Warehouse of the first

matching Product Item record, regardless of the calling transaction

4. Inventory Reservation Page 100

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Refer to the Product Installation Guide for details.

Stock Available Window

The Stock Available window allows you to select the default Product Item to be used when calling the

eSTELview Stock Available screen.

Stock Avl

1. Order Item

2. Order Spec

3. NS Res

Option Description

Order Item Calls the Stock Available Inquiry using the sold Product Item and the Reservation

Warehouse. The Specifications and Tolerances on the Order Item are not taken into

account.

Order Spec Calls the Stock Available Inquiry using the Sold Product Item with the Specifications

or/and Tolerances to select the available stock to be displayed.

The Gauge is set as the sold Product Item Gauge plus and minus the Gauge Tolerance,

within the standard gauge range of the Product Item’s Size.

The Physical Test Specifications (if any) are passed to the Stock Available Inquiry.

The Shipping Warehouse is set as the default warehouse in the inquiry.

The Customer number is passed to the eSTELview selections if the Item Sales Category

is Type C — Customer-Owned.

The Source code is passed to the Stk Avl inquiry if Distinction of Origin is

required.

The selection is dimmed if no Specifications exist for the Order Item.

NS Res (Non-

Specific Res)

Calls the Stock Available inquiry using the non-Specific Reservation and the

Reservation Warehouse. If the Item is copied from a Part Specification, it is

possible that the Non-Specific reservation is different than the sold product

indicating that production is required.

The selection is dimmed if no non-Specific Reservation exists or if the non-Specific

Reservation matches the Sales Order Product Item.

If the Order Item and the Order Spec selections are not applicable, then the window is bypassed and the

eSTELview Stock Available screen is automatically displayed using the sold Product Item.

Displaying the On-Hand/Available

The following window is displayed for reference once the Product Item is entered and the cursor is at the

Pieces field in the Entry window:

On Hand Available

100 2,000 ' 3238 LBS 50 1,000 ' 1619 LBS

4. Inventory Reservation Page 101

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Onhand Pcs The On-Hand pieces for the Product Item being reserved.

Msr The On-Hand Measure for the Product Item being reserved.

Wgt The On-Hand Weight for the Product Item being reserved.

Avl Pcs The Available fields = Product Item On-hand - Product Item Reserved.

When reserving to a Release Sales Order, the Available fields include the quantity

reserved to the corresponding Blanket Order if any.

The Available Pieces for the Product Item being reserved.

Msr The Available Measure for the Product Item being shipped.

Wgt The Available Weight for the Product Item being shipped.

Exiting the Entry Window

To accept a Reservation Entry, press <Enter> through the fields or press <F1>. Once the reservation

is validated, it is displayed in the scrolling area, the On-Hand window is cleared out and the cursor is

positioned in the Entry window to accept a new Reservation Entry.

To cancel the Reservation Entry, press <F4> from any field, the Reservation Entry as well as the On-

Hand windows are cleared out and the cursor is positioned back at:

o The Transaction Item screen action bar if no reservation exists.

o On the last reservation line if any exists.

Reservation Validations

You can reserve any product against an Order Item in any combination. However, in order to provide

a verification of the quantity reserved compared to the quantity ordered, reservations of different base

Units of Measure are converted to their equivalent weight and the weight is totaled and compared to

the total weight of the product ordered.

o If you have not entered Theoretical weight factors for each product, the verification of weight

sold versus weight reserved is incorrect. A warning message is displayed alerting you to a

discrepancy that may exist.

A total line is provided showing the reservation totals. This includes the total Pieces, Quantity and

Weight of both Specific and non-Specific Reservations. If you mixed products with different

Inventory Logic Control codes, then the QTY total reservation fields are not shown. The Pieces and

Weight fields display the total pieces and weight equivalent of all products reserved to the Item.

When you exit the Reservations page, if the Quantity Reserved is less than the Order Balance, the

warning message “Quantity Reserved is Less than Balance on Order; Change Reservations?” is

displayed. Enter Y-Yes to continue adding or modifying Reservations. Enter N-No to exit the

reservation screen.

A warning message is displayed if you reserve material that is outside the decimal thickness of the

Order Item Gauge +/- the tolerance entered in the Order Specifications. This applies to all Gauge

Required material. For example, if a customer orders sheets, a salesperson can reserve sheet or coil.

The warning is displayed if the Gauge is out of range for either type of material.

Interface with the Sales Category

The following checks are performed when you add an Inventory Reservation on a Sales Order, Invoice

4. Inventory Reservation Page 102

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Entry, Quote Entry:

If the Sales Category Reservation Type is I-Inventory, only owned tags can be reserved, as well as

any Specific Reservation for non-tagged products.

If the Sales Category Reservation Type is C–Customer-Owned, only tags owned by the Order

Customer can be reserved to the Item.

Once a reservation exists (Specific or non-Specific), you cannot change the Sales Category Reservation

Type for the Order Item. You must first delete all reservations if you wish to change the Sales Category

Reservation Type.

Adding a Reservation on a Transfer Order

The following validations are performed when you add an Inventory Reservation on a Transfer Order:

If the Destination Warehouse Type is not C–Customer-Owned, only owned tags can be reserved, as

well as any Specific Reservation for non-tagged products.

If the Destination Warehouse Type is C–Customer-Owned, only Customer-Owned tags can be

reserved. However, you can mix tags that are owned by different customers on a Transfer Order.

Adding a Reservation on an Outside Processing PO or an Inventory Receipt

The following validations are performed when you add an Inventory Reservation on an Outside

Processing Purchase Order and Inventory Receipt:

If the Customer-Owned field is Zero on the Purchase Order Header, only owned tags can be reserved,

as well as any Specific Reservation for non-tagged products.

If the Customer-Owned field is not Zero on the Purchase Order Header, only tags owned by that

customer can be reserved to the Item.

Adding a Reservation on a Bill of Lading

If the Sales Category Reservation Type for the Order Item being shipped is I-Inventory, only owned

tags can be reserved, as well as any Specific Reservation for non-tagged products.

If the Sales Category Reservation Type for the Order Item being shipped is C–Customer-Owned, only

tags owned by the Order Customer can be reserved to the Item.

Adding a Non-Specific Reservation

If no non-Specific Reservation exists on an Item, it can be added in one of the following ways:

Using the Non-Spec action bar option.

Using the entry window and entering a ‘ZZZZZZZ’ tag number.

Restriction

You cannot add a non-Specific Reservation:

4. Inventory Reservation Page 103

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

when the NSA=X Product Installation Option is set to Z

when you are reserving material to be consumed on an Outside PO Receipt.

Remarks Entry Window

The following window is displayed once the Remarks action bar option is selected, to allow you to enter

up to 5 remark lines for the selected reservation.

Reservation Remarks

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 50 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Restriction

Remarks are not allowed for eSTELman jobs.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 104

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Completed Reservation Entry screen

The following screen is displayed once you call the Reservation Entry screen and Reservations exist. The

existing reservations are displayed in the scrolling area and the cursor is positioned on the first reservation

line.

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST SO Item - Reservation SO No PHI- 550- 1

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY Due 12Dec04 Cus N Chg Typ T

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 Bal Pcs 5 10000LBS

Product PCS Quantity Wgt LBS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 1566 PPR 1 1,450 LBS 1450 M

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 1567 PPR 1 550 LBS 550 M

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 1571 PPR 1 4,000 LBS 4000 M

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 AL1591 PPR 1 2,400 LBS 2400 M

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 AL1609 PPR 1 1,600 LBS 1600 M

Total Res 5 10,000 LBS

1-Specific 2-Non-Spec 3-Remarks 4-Tfr Req 5-Prod 6-Consume

Completed Reservation screen

Action Bar Action

Specific Calls the Reservation Entry window to allow you to add a new Specific Reservation.

Non-Spec Displays the non-Specific Reservation in the Entry window and allows you to change it

as required. If no non-Specific Reservation exists, displays the Entry window to

allow you to add a non-Specific Reservation. This allows fast access to the non-

Specific Reservation without the need to use the Up arrow key.

Restriction: The action bar is dimmed and not accessible if NSA=Z or, for an Outside

PO Receipt, when you are in the RC Item - Reservation screen.

Remarks Allows you to enter 5 lines of Remarks for the selected Reservation. This option is

not allowed for non-Specific Reservation.

Tfr Req Displays the Transfer Request window if applicable.

Prod Calls the Inventory Processing screen.

Consume Only available when called from the eSTELman reservation screen.

<F11> from the scrolling area displays the Entry window to allow you to enter more reservations if

required.

<F2> and <Shift F2> are used for Page Forward and Page Backward.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 105

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Scrolling Area Display

Each Inventory Reservation record is displayed on one line as follows.

The reserved Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Gauge and Gauge Type are compressed and displayed

based on the Reserved Product Item:

o Up to 39 characters are displayed if the Tag field is blank

o Up to 30 characters are displayed if the Tag field is not blank

The Tag (if not Blank)

The Reservation Warehouse

The reserved Pieces, Quantity, Quantity Unit of Measure and Weight

The applicable displayed codes

Non-Specific Reservation Display

The non-Specific reservation is always displayed on the first line of every screen. This allows you to

review the non-Specific Reservation when adding, changing or deleting Specific Reservations.

When a non-Specific Reservation is reduced to zero, it is not displayed on the Reservation screen.

For Sales Order and Quote Items, the non-Specific Reservation Warehouse Type must match the

Sales Category type.

Displayed Codes

For your reference the following codes are displayed on the right-hand side of the screen for each Specific

Reservation line where applicable:

R – Reservation Remarks exist

X – Transfer Request exists

M, F, W, D – Product Item Status code

T – Product Item is Transient

NS – Non-Specific Reservation

S – Short (only for non-Tag Master Required Products)

4. Inventory Reservation Page 106

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Changing a Reservation

To change any Reservation, highlight the corresponding line and press <Enter>. The selected reservation

is displayed in the Reservation Entry window. Reservations are automatically balanced by the program

so that if they were initially copied from another transaction, the leftover portion is returned to that

transaction rather than leave it under-reserved.

In Normal, Blanket Sales Orders and Direct Invoices, reservations can be changed as required. The

balance of the reservation is returned to stock.

For Release Type Orders, the Inventory Reservations can be changed as required. If the reservation was

copied from a Blanket Order Item using the Rdy Ship action bar, the balance of the change returns to the

Blanket Order Item, else it returns to stock.

In Transfer Orders, Outside Processing Purchase Orders, Bills of Lading and Sales Order Invoices, the

Inventory Reservations can be called down and changed as required. If the reservation was copied from

an Order Item, the balance of the change returns to the Order Item, else it returns to stock.

In Bill of Lading Invoices, the Inventory Reservations that are copied from a Bill of Lading to the Invoice

Entry cannot be modified. As the Bill of Lading Item is considered complete as soon as it is on an

Invoice Entry, the balance of any change done to the reservations cannot be returned to the BL Item.

Once you accept the changes or <F4> to cancel the change, the Entry window is cleared and the cursor is

positioned at the selected Reservation.

Deleting a Reservation

To delete a reservation, highlight the corresponding line and press <F6>. A confirmation message is

displayed before the reservation is deleted.

In Sales Order, Transfer Order, Direct Invoice and Outside Processing Purchase Order Entry, reservations

can be deleted as required. The reservation returns to stock.

NOTE: If the reservation came from an Incoming Reservation (ICR) against a Purchase Order

allocated to the Sales Order at receiving time, the following occurs:

If the specific reservation is deleted from the Order Item before the Purchase Order is

completed (the Receiver may or may not be updated yet), the ICR is reinstated.

If the specific reservation is deleted from the Order Item after the Purchase Order has

been completed, the ICR cannot be reinstated. For Tagged products, non-Specific

allocations are reinstated.

In Sales Order Invoices and Bills of Lading, the Inventory Reservations can be deleted as required. If the

reservation was copied from the Order Item, it returns to the Order Item, else it returns to stock.

In Bill of Lading Invoices, the Inventory Reservations that are copied from a Bill of Lading to the Invoice

Entry cannot be deleted. As the Bill of Lading Item is considered complete as soon as it is on an Invoice

Entry, any deleted reservations cannot be returned to the Bill of Lading Item.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 107

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RETURNS-TO-STOCK

A Return-to-Stock is created when an existing Product Item is cut and a piece of it is returned to

inventory under a different Group, Size, Grade, Dimension or Warehouse and that quantity is deducted

from the original reservation. The Return is indicated by entering Pieces or Quantity as a negative

number. On the Sales Order and Work Order form, the letters RS are printed next to the Inventory

Reservation line to facilitate the identification of Return-to-Stock Reservations.

Example: The Order Item is for 1 piece of 28' angle.

The Specific Inventory Reservation is made for 1 piece, 40'. When the invoice is created, a

Return-to-Stock of 1 piece, 12' is entered.

The net weight of the reservation and, therefore, the Item cost is the weight of the 40' - 12'

returned.

Entering a Return-to-Stock reservation calls the ‘Return to Stock Item’ window which allows you to cost

the Product Item returned to stock as well as to enter the location and remarks. Refer to the ‘Credit Note’

chapter of the Invoicing manual for more details.

Restrictions

You cannot enter Returns-to-Stock on Transfer Orders, Bills of Lading, Outside Processing Purchase

Orders, Office Receipts and eSTELman jobs.

The Return-to-Stock Branch must match the transaction Branch.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 108

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BILLING WEIGHT

When creating an Inventory Reservation for a Quote/Order, the Billing Weight is computed based on the

Item Charge Quantity Type and the Product Item being reserved. The Billing Weight is then used to

compute the Bill of Lading and Invoice Shipping Weight when the Reservation is shipped on the BL.

Reviewing Billing Weight

You can review or modify the Billing Weight once the Reserved Pieces, Measure and Weight fields are

entered and a Reservation record is about to be created. The following window containing the Charge

Quantity Type and the Billing Weight is displayed:

Chg Typ T Blg Wgt 7000 LBS

The window is displayed if the following conditions are satisfied:

If the reservation being created is for a SO-Sales Order, TO-Transfer Order, or a QT-Quote and is for

a ‘Finished’ Product Item.

o A ‘Finished’ Reservation is a reservation whereby the reserved Product Item matches the Order

Item Group, Size, Grade, Dimension and Gauge (within the specified Tolerances).

o A Product Installation Option, FIN=X, determines whether the Product Items must be selected

from Finished and/or Outside Processing Warehouses.

o A Product Installation Option, ARL=X, determines whether a ‘Finished’ Product Item must

match the Order Item Dimension and Gauge.

A Product Installation Option, GBW=X, allows you to suppress the display of the Billing Weight

window. The PIO can be set for the following eSTELPLAN programs:

o Inventory Reservation Entry

o Inventory Processing

o eSTELpro

o eSTELman

o eSTELbarcodes

Refer to the appropriate manual for details. All other eSTELPLAN programs that create an

Inventory Reservation for a Quote, Order or Bill of Lading Item compute the Billing Weight

internally.

The Billing Weight window is not displayed if the Charge Quantity Type=A-Actual, as in this case

the reserved Weight and Billing Weight always match.

Billing Weight Computation

The Billing Weight computation is based on the Reserved Product Item Inventory Organization.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 109

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Inventory Organization Not WT

Charge Quantity Type Billing Weight

A – Actual Reserved Weight

E – Enhanced Theoretical Weight X Enhanced Factor

G – Gross Reserved Weight + Tare Weight

H – Higher of Theo/Actual Greater of Theoretical or Actual Weight

T – Theoretical Theoretical

Inventory Organization = WT

Charge Quantity Type Billing Weight

A – Actual Reserved Weight

E – Enhanced Reserved X Enhanced Factor

G – Gross Reserved Weight + Tare Weight

H – Higher of Theo / Actual Reserved

T – Theoretical Reserved

Enhanced Weight Factor

To retrieve the Enhanced Weight factor, the Branch Standard Dimensions table is verified as follows:

If a matching Branch Standard Dimensions record exists, its Enhanced Weight factor is used.

If no matching Branch Standard Dimensions record exists, the factor defaults to 1.00. This is

controlled by the MBG=X Product Installation Option for SCSGBW.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 110

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BRANCH TRANSFER REQUEST

The Branch Transfer Request is used to inform a Stocking Branch that material is requested to fulfill a

customer’s Order, material that must be shipped from the Selling Branch. With the information, the

Stocking Branch creates a Transfer Order.

However, if the Selling Branch is allowed to generate Transfer Orders for the Stocking Branch and if

Transfer Orders are usually entered for only one specific Sales Order, then, instead of the Transfer

Request, it is recommended to use the Transfer Requisition described in the ‘Transfer Requisition from

Quote & Sales Orders’ chapter. The main advantage of the Transfer Requisition function is that it

incorporates the automatic creation of the Transfer Order within the Sales Order entry process.

The Branch Transfer Request provides a window with the Product reserved displayed. You can then add

remarks concerning the Item and use the Print Screen function to keep a record for future follow-up or to

send the request to the person responsible for approving transfer requests at the Stocking Branch.

Restriction

The Branch Transfer Request function is only applicable in Sales Order Entry.

Only one Transfer Request can be sent for each Order Item.

Displaying Branch Transfer Request

When the DSR=X Product Installation Option is set, the Branch Transfer Request window is displayed as

follows:

Once the Order Item is committed if the Item Shipping Branch is different than the Order Reference

branch.

Once the Inventory Reservation is added if the reservation warehouse does not match the default

warehouse

Branch Sales Transfer Request

Sell Br PHI Order 1741- 1 ACME FAB

Slspsn KS 14Dec04 14:29

Stock Br CHI Item Due Dt 30Dec04

Transmit To Reply To Bobby

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality

.0350 X 48.0000" X 96.0000"

1 Pcs Qty Weight 46

Remark

Branch Transfer window

4. Inventory Reservation Page 111

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The following fields are defaulted from the Order Item and cannot be changed.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Sell Br Header The Selling Branch from the Order Header. Cannot

be overridden.

Order-Itm Item The Sales Order number and Item number. Cannot be

overridden.

Customer Header The Sold-To Customer name. Cannot be overridden.

Slspsn Header The Inside Salesperson. Cannot be overridden.

Date & Time System The System Date and Time of request. Cannot be

overridden.

Stock Brh Item The Stocking Branch. Cannot be overridden.

Itm Due Date Item The Item Due Date. Cannot be overridden.

Prod Desc Item The two lines of Product Description. Cannot be

overridden.

Pcs, Qty & Wgt Item The Order Item Pieces, Quantity and Weight Balance

on Order. Cannot be overridden.

Send To Valid User The Login ID of the person at the Stocking Branch

responsible for approving Inter-Branch Transfer

shipments.

Reply To your Login Valid User The Login ID of the person entering the Sales

Order.

Remarks Optional Used to enter comments about the Order Item

requirements.

When the Transfer Request is sent, the Order Item record is flagged with a ‘Requested’ code (an ‘X’ on

the right of the reservation line), so that those Items are identified and can be tracked when changed or

deleted.

If the Reservation is changed or deleted, you have the opportunity to re-send a Transfer Request to the

Stocking Branch. This updated request shows the new total Pieces and Quantity reserved to the Sales

Order so the Stocking Branch can change its Transfer Order to the new quantities.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 112

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

INVENTORY DE-ALLOCATION FUNCTION

The Inventory De-Allocation function is used when the Product Item reserved to a Sales Order requires to

be transferred from a different Branch or requires to be sent to an outside processor vendor for further

processing.

The Inventory De-Allocation function is available when adding a Specific Reservation to one of the

following transactions:

Transfer Order

Transfer Bill of Lading

Outside Processing Purchase Order

The verifications performed as well as the restrictions applied to the de-allocation window are based on

the calling transaction.

De-Allocating in Transfer Order

If the material to be transferred is already reserved to a Sales Order, then you have the option to de-

allocate it from that Order and move the reservation to the Transfer Order. This allows the Stocking

Branch to print the Specific Reservations and processing instructions for the Items on the Work Order

form.

If the Product Item being reserved to the Transfer Order is reserved to a Sales Order that has a Reference

Branch that matches the Transfer Order Destination Branch, the de-allocation window is displayed listing

the reservations and you can selectively de-allocate the material to make it available for the Transfer.

There can be multiple reservations that meet these conditions. In this case, you de-allocate those that will

be filled from this Transfer Order and leave the rest.

Inventory De-Allocation

HOT ROLLED PLATE, A-36 10 Pcs

1/4" X 48" X 96" 3267 LBS

Brh Order-Item Customer Pcs Allocated Qty Allocated Dealloc?

CHI 851236-023 AMERICAN IRON 10 3,267 N

CHI 854125-101 STEVENS PROD 100 9,305 Y

1-Set all Y/N 2-Select

Inventory De-Allocation window

When the Sales Order Reservation is removed, the Reservation Update program transfers the Reservation

record from the Destination Branch’s Sales Order and moves it to the Transfer Order, then it replaces the

Sales Order Specific Reservation with an Incoming material reservation against the Transfer Order. This

ensures that the Sales Order Item is covered by enough material and users in the Destination Branch can

see the reservation against the Incoming material. If N-No is entered, the reservation is not removed from

the Sales Order Item.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 113

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If the Transfer Order reservation is deleted for any reason and the Sales Order that it came from is still on

file, then the reservation is automatically returned to the Sales Order so that the Order is protected from

being under reserved.

Example:

Branch A reserves product XYZ to Sales Order A-100 from Branch B.

Branch B accepts the reservations and enters a Transfer Order. Product XYZ is de-allocated from the

Sales Order and moved to Transfer Order B-150. Incoming material Transfer Order B-150 is created

and an Incoming Reservation for Sales Order A-100 is generated.

Branch A now sees Incoming Transfer B-150 with 0 available. The reservations against incoming

displays a reservation for Sales Order A-100.

The Order Inquiry for Sales Order A-100 displays an Incoming Reservation against the Transfer

Order B-150.

De-Allocating in Transfer Bill of Lading

If the material to be shipped is already reserved to a Sales Order, then you have the option to de-allocate it

from that Order and move the reservation to the Transfer BL. This allows the Stocking Branch to print

the Bill of Lading Details to prepare and verify the truck load.

The Inventory De-Allocation window is displayed if the Product Item being reserved to the Transfer BL

is either:

Reserved to a Sales Order that has a Reference Branch that matches the Transfer BL Destination

Branch

Reserved more than once to the Transfer Order being shipped on the BL.

There can be multiple reservations that meet these conditions. In this case, you de-allocate those that will

be filled from this Transfer Order and leave the rest.

When the Sales Order Reservation is removed, the Reservation Update program transfers the Reservation

record from the Destination Branch’s Sales Order and moves it to the Transfer BL, then it replaces the

Sales Order Specific Reservation with an Incoming material reservation against the Transfer BL. This

ensures that the Sales Order Item is covered by enough material and users in the Destination Branch can

see the reservation against the Incoming BL. If N-No is entered, the reservation is not removed from the

Sales Order Item.

If the Transfer BL reservation is deleted for any reason and the Sales Order that it came from is still on

file, then the reservation is automatically returned to the Sales Order so that the Order is protected from

being under reserved.

Example 1:

Branch A reserves product XYZ to Sales Order A-100 from Branch B.

Branch B enters a Transfer Order and does not add the Inventory Reservation.

Branch B ships the Transfer Order on a Transfer Bill of Lading and reserves XYZ to the BL. Product

XYZ is de-allocated from the Sales Order and moved to Transfer BL B-150. Incoming material

Transfer BL B-150 is created and an Incoming Reservation for Sales Order A-100 is generated.

Branch A now sees Incoming Transfer BL B-150 with 0 available. The reservations against incoming

4. Inventory Reservation Page 114

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

displays a reservation for Sales Order A-100.

The Order Inquiry for Sales Order A-100 displays an Incoming Reservation against the Transfer BL

Order B-150.

Example 2:

Branch A reserves product XYZ to Sales Order A-100 from Branch B.

Branch B accepts the reservations and enters a Transfer Order. Product XYZ is de-allocated from the

Sales Order and moved to Transfer Order B-150. Incoming material Transfer Order B-150 is created

and an Incoming Reservation for Sales Order A-100 is generated.

Branch A now sees Incoming Transfer B-150 with 0 available. The reservations against incoming

displays a reservation for Sales Order A-100.

Branch B ships the Transfer Order on a Transfer Bill of Lading and reserves XYZ to the BL. Product

XYZ is de-allocated from the TO and moved to Transfer BL B-250. Incoming material Transfer BL

B-250 is created and an Incoming Reservation for Sales Order A-100 is generated.

Branch A now sees 2 Incoming:

o Transfer Order B-150: 0 Incoming and 0 Available.

o Transfer BL B-250 with 0 available.

The reservations against incoming is moved from the TO to the Transfer BL.

The Order Inquiry for Sales Order A-100 displays an Incoming Reservation against the Transfer BL

Order B-250.

De-allocating in Outside Processing Purchase Order

If the material to be processed is already reserved to a Sales Order, then you have the option to de-allocate

it from that Order and move the reservation to the Purchase Order Item. This provides an audit trail for

the movement of the material to the outside processor.

If the Product Item being reserved to the Outside Processing Purchase Order is reserved to a Sales Order,

the de-allocation window is displayed listing the reservations and you can selectively de-allocate the

material to make it available for the Purchase Order.

Restrictions

For Tag Master Required Products, only one de-allocation is allowed for each Purchase Order Item.

Example:

Reserve tag XYZ to SO-100

Reserve tag XYZ to PO-200. The reservation is moved from the SO to the PO, an Incoming

Reservation is created to cover the SO by the Incoming PO.

Reserve tag XYZ to TO-100 to transfer the tag to the outside processing Warehouse. The reservation

is moved from the PO to the TO, an Incoming Reservation is created to cover the PO by the Incoming

TO.

Update the Transfer, the tag is reserved back to the Purchase Order in the Outside processing

Warehouse.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 115

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

De-Allocation from Quote

In Transfer Order Entry and Transfer Bill of Lading, you can also de-allocate the material already

reserved to a Quote Item. When de-allocating it, an Incoming Reservation record is created to cover the

Quote Item. This record is similar to the one created when de-allocating from a Sales Order Item with the

exception that it is not a ‘real’ reservation.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 116

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

TRANSFER ORDER REQUEST CONFIRMATION

The Transfer Confirmation lets the Selling Branch know that the requested material was de-allocated

from the Sales Order and assigned on a Transfer Order or a Transfer Bill of Lading to be transferred, or

on an outside processing Purchase Order to be processed. It indicates the transaction number, Due Date,

Product and Quantity allocated.

You can cancel the confirmation by pressing <F4> if it is not required.

Transfer Confirmation

DDMmmYY HH:MM

Transfer No CHI 528566-025 From CHICAGO

Item Due Date 220Sep04 To PHILADELPHIA

For Order No CHI- 25362-002 To FEDERAL WIRE ROPE

Transmit To steven__ Reply To larry___

Allocated Product:

HOT ROLLED PLATE, A-36

1/4" X 48" X 96"

10 Pcs Qty 3200 SFT Weight 3,267 LBS

Remarks PLATE BURNING AND SHEAR REQUIRED

When the information is complete, you can print your screen and fax it to the Selling Branch.

You cannot delete a transaction Item if any open Items have a confirmation against it as, along with the

Confirmation, an Incoming Reservation was created. You must delete the reservation that triggers the

confirmation window and Incoming transaction record. This is used to alert the Selling Branch that the

reservation has been canceled and they must find another source for the material.

NOTE: The Transfer Confirmation is independent from the DRS=X Product Installation Option

required for the Branch Transfer Request.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 117

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RESERVATIONS UPDATE

The Reservations History table works in conjunction with the Inventory Reservations and Incoming

Reservations files. The Reservations History table is updated whenever a reservation is moved from one

transaction to another, allowing the reservation to be reinstated to its origin if the new transaction is

changed or deleted.

Major Features Provided

Reinstating a Reservation

Inventory and Incoming Reservations are reinstated to their original source transaction after being moved

to more than one transaction.

Example 1:

Specific Reservation added to a Sales Order

Same Reservation shipped on a Bill of Lading

Invoiced the Bill of Lading, Reservation moved to the Invoice Entry

Delete the Invoice Entry: Specific Reservation is reinstated to the Bill of Lading

If the Bill of Lading is changed or deleted, the balance is reinstated to the Sales Order.

Example 2:

Specific Reservation added to a Blanket Order

Same Reservation moved to a Release Order

De-allocated from the Release Order to be consumed on an Inventory Processing job

Changed or deleted from the Inventory Processing, balance is reinstated to the Release Order

Changed or deleted from the Release Order, balance is reinstated to the Blanket Order.

Example 3:

Direct Ship Incoming Reservation added to a Sales Order

Partially Ship the Sales Order, and adjust the Invoice Entry Incoming Reservation quantities

accordingly

The Balance of the Incoming Reservation is reinstated to the Sales Order.

Updating Non-Specific

A Specific Reservation can point to two sources allowing the transaction's non-Specific Reservation to be

updated in conjunction with the reservation source.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 118

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Example 1:

Specific Reservation added to a Blanket Order

Release Order created with a non-Specific Reservation

Shipped the Blanket Specific Reservation on a Bill of Lading for the Release Order

The Specific Reservation is copied from the Blanket to the Bill of Lading, and the Release non-

Specific Reservation is reduced

If the Specific Reservation is changed or deleted, the balance is reinstated back to the Blanket Order

and the Release non-Specific Reservation.

Handling Outside Processing Purchase Order

Sold Product Items that need processing at an outside processor vendor can be easily traced back as

follows:

Reserve the Product Item to the Sales Order.

De-allocate the Product Item from the Sales Order and reserve it to an Outside Processing Purchase

Order.

An Incoming Reservation is created to cover the Sales Order by the Incoming Purchase Order.

Enter a Transfer Order Item to transfer the Product Item to an Outside Processing Warehouse. De-

allocate the Product Item from the Purchase Order and reserve it to the Transfer Order.

An Incoming Reservation is created to cover the Purchase Order by the incoming Transfer Order.

Finalize the Transfer Order, the Product Item is moved to the Outside Processing Warehouse and is

automatically reserved to the Outside Processing Purchase Order.

When the Outside Processing Purchase Order is received, a message is displayed warning you that an

Incoming Reservation exists for the Purchase Order being received.

Shipping a Transfer Order on a Bill of Lading

In most cases, if a Transfer Order Specific Reservation linked to an Incoming Reservation is shipped on a

BL, the Incoming Reservation is automatically moved from the Transfer Order to the BL.

Example:

Tag US50 in Branch A is reserved to a Sales Order in Branch B.

Tag US50 is de-allocated from the Sales Order and reserved to a Transfer Order in Branch A.

An Incoming Reservation is created to cover the Branch B Sales Order by the Transfer Order.

Tag US50 is shipped on a Transfer Bill of Lading. The Incoming Reservation is moved from the TO

to the BL.

Finalize the Transfer Bill of Lading, tag US50 is moved to Branch B and, depending on the Product

Installation Option ARS=X and the procedure followed, is or is not reserved to the Sales Order.

If the Bill of Lading is deleted prior to finalizing it, the reservation is reinstated back to the Transfer Order

and the Incoming Reservation is reinstated back for the Transfer Order.

Refer to the ‘Shipping a Transfer Order’ chapter and Appendix B in the Transfer Orders manual for

details.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 119

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RAPID RESERVATION

The Rapid Reservation function allows you to select multiple Product Items from the eSTELview – Stock

Available screen and automatically reserve them to the calling transaction. For each selected Product

Item, you can enter the Pieces, Quantity and Weight to be reserved. The same rules and verifications

applied in the standard Reservation Entry program are applicable in the Rapid Reservation function.

The Rapid Reservation function is available if the Stock Available screen is called from the standard

Inventory Reservation Entry program, using the Rpd Res action bar option.

To speed up the Reservation Entry process in eSTELquote, a Product Installation Option CSA=X allows

you to automatically call the eSTELview Stock Available screen allowing the Rapid Reservation once a

Quote Item is added.

Rapid Reservation Entry

eSTELquote

-Right after Item entry

(PIO)

-Rapid screen

- Uniquote

Transaction Entry

- SO, TO, BL, IE, QT

- Outside Processing PO

- Outside Processing RCT

- eSTELman - Step Entry

Invt Res Entry Pop-up

Window

- Rpd Res Action Bar

eSTELview

Stock Available

Reserve Action Bar

Rapid Reservation window

-Displays Required Product

-Accepts Pcs, Msr, Wgt

-Creates a Reservation

SO Item - Reservation

4. Inventory Reservation Page 120

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Interface with Stock Available

The Rapid Reservation function is initiated from the Stock Available screen when it is called by the Rpd

Res action bar option in the Invt Reservation window. This function allows you to reserve selected

Product Items to the calling transaction. Once selected, a window is displayed to accept the Pieces,

Quantity and Weight to be reserved for the required Product Item.

You can press <F4> to cancel the Rapid Reservation window and go back to the Stock Available scrolling

section.

Once you accept the Rapid Reservation window using <Enter> or <F1>, an Inventory Reservation record

is created for the calling transaction and the cursor is positioned on the Stock Available scrolling section

to allow you to select the next Product Item to be reserved.

The Rapid Reservation window is formatted differently based on where the Stock Available is called.

Rapid Reservation Window – Standard Mode

The following window is displayed when eSTELview is called from one of the following programs:

Reservation Entry if called from:

o Order Entry – Sales or Transfer Order

o Bill of Lading Entry – Entry Mode = S-Summary or D-Detail

o Invoice Entry – Reference Prefix IE

o Quote Entry

o Outside Processing Purchase Order

o Outside Processing Office Receipt

o eSTELman – Step Entry

eSTELquote – Rapid Quote and Uniquote screen

Rapid Reservation SO No PHI- 4- 6

Req CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478 Pcs

Grp CRC Size 18 Grd CQ Dim 48.0000" GaN 0.0478

Tag LT503 Whs PPR 1 PCS 2500 LBS

Field Name Default Validation Description

Req Calling

Trans-

action

Display The Required Product Item, Pieces, Quantity and

Weight of the calling transaction.

The Required Pieces, Quantity and Weight equal the

Order Item balance – the total reserved pieces,

Quantity and Weight including the non-Specific

Reservation.

Grp, Size, Grd, Dim, Ga,

Tag, Whs

Selected

Product

Item

Display Displayed based on the selected Product Item and

cannot be changed.

Pcs, Qty and Wgt Zero Standard Allows you to enter the Pieces, Quantity and

Weight to be reserved. Same verifications as in

the standard Reservation Entry program.

4. Inventory Reservation Page 121

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Rapid Reservation Window – Bill of Lading Reserve Mode

When calling the Stock Available using the Rpd Res action bar option from the Bill of Lading Entry

program for an R-Reserve Entry mode, the Rapid Reservation window is formatted based on the Product

being shipped.

Tag Master Required: The following window is displayed if the BL Item is for a Tag Master Required

Product and the Entry mode is R-Reserve.

Rapid Reservation BL No PHI- 92- 1

Req CRS/18/CQ/48.0000"X96.0000"/N.0478 Pcs 10 624 LBS

Tag AR567 Whs PPR 150 PCS 4800.00 SFT 9360 LBS Tare

Mill ARM Heat 2134543 Desc

Field Name Default Validation Description

Req Calling

Trans-

action

Display The Required Product Item, Pieces, Quantity and

Weight of the calling transaction.

The Required Pieces, Quantity and Weight equal the

Order Item balance - the total reserved pieces,

Quantity and Weight.

Tag, Whs Selected

Product

Item

Display Displayed based on the selected Product Item and

cannot be changed.

Pcs, Qty, Tare and Wgt SO/TO Res

Zero

Standard Allows you to enter the Pieces, Quantity and

Weight to be reserved. Same verifications as in

the standard Reservation Entry program.

Defaults from the Order Item Reservation if the

selected tag is reserved to the Order Item being

shipped.

Defaults to the available if the selected Product

Item is not reserved to the Order Item being

shipped.

Mill, Heat Selected

Product

Item

Mill/Heat

Ref

Default based on the selected Product Item. The

AMH=X Product Installation Option determines if

you can or cannot overwrite it.

Desc Optional Shipping Description.

Non-Tag Master Required: The following window is displayed if the BL Item is for a non-Tag Master

Required Product and the Entry Mode is R-Reserve:

Rapid Reservation BL No PHI- 194- 3

Req CFR/134/1018/18' Pcs LBS

Grp CFR Size 134 Grd 1018 Dim 18' Ga

Tag AR23 Whs PPR 22 PCS 396 ' 4529 LBS Tare

Mill ARM Heat 99847 Desc

On Hand Available

42 6575 LBS 22 4529 LBS

4. Inventory Reservation Page 122

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Req Calling

Trans-

action

Display The Required Product Item, Pieces, Quantity and

Weight of the calling transaction.

The Required Pieces, Quantity and Weight equal the

Order Item balance - the total reserved Pieces,

Quantity and Weight.

Grp, Size, Grd, Dim, Ga,

Tag, Whs

Selected

Product

Item

Display Displayed based on the selected Product Item and

cannot be changed.

Pcs, Qty, Tare and Wgt SO/TO Res

Zero

Standard Allows you to enter the Pieces, Quantity and

Weight to be reserved. Same verifications as in

the standard Reservation Entry program.

Default from the Order Item Reservation if the

selected tag is reserved to the Order Item being

shipped.

Defaults to the Available if the selected Product

Item is not reserved to the Order Item being

shipped.

Mill, Heat Selected

Product

Item

Mill/Heat

Ref

Default based on the selected Product Item. The

AMH=X Product Installation Option determines if

you can or cannot overwrite it.

Desc Optional Shipping Description.

On-Hand and Available Fields

The standard On-Hand and Available window is displayed below the Rapid Reservation window to allow

you to review the updated On-Hand and Available values for the Product Item being reserved.

OnHnd 82 10463 LBSAvl 82 10463 LBS

Restrictions

Rapid Reservation allows the creation of a Reservation from the Product Item Available quantity. As

per the standard Inventory Reservation logic, you can reserve more than the available quantity for

non-Tag Master required Products. However, you cannot de-allocate Product Items when using the

Rapid Reservation function. A warning message, “Insufficient Inventory Available, Verify

Reservations”, is displayed when you allocate more than is available for any non-Tag Master required

Product.

No Return-to-Stock reservations are allowed from the Rapid Reservation function.

Existing Inventory Reservations cannot be changed or deleted from the Rapid Reservation window.

If you select a Product Item that is already reserved to the calling transaction, an error message is

displayed. You must call the standard Inventory Reservation Entry program to change or delete the

existing reservations.

Non-Specific Reservations cannot be created from the Rapid Reservation function.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

5. RESERVATIONS AGAINST INCOMING

MATERIAL

OVERVIEW

Reservations against Incoming Material include Purchase Order, Transfer Order and Transfer Bill of Lading

Reservations. The combinations depend on the transaction being entered and where the reservation is being

called from. You can create as many reservations against the Incoming Material records as required.

From Quote Entry, you use the PO/TO Rsvns selection of the Res action bar option to add the

Incoming Reservation. In this case, no ‘real’ reservation is created. However, the reservation is

converted to a ‘real’ reservation when the quote is transferred into a sales order if enough quantity is

still available.

From an Invoice, you can use the Dir Ship action bar option to create an Incoming Reservation but

the Invoice Item must have a Sales Category with an Allocation Type set as ‘D-Direct Ship’.

From a Purchase Order, you use the action bar option PO Res to reserve the Incoming Material to a

Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order, Direct Ship Invoice or an Outside Processing Purchase Order.

From a Sales or Transfer Order Entry, you use the Icr action bar option to create a reservation against

Incoming Material.

From Outside Processing Purchase Order Entry, you use the Res action bar option to create a

reservation against Incoming Material.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 124

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING NEW INCOMING MATERIAL RESERVATIONS

Depending on whether the reservation is called from the Quote Entry, Sales Order, Transfer Order,

Invoice Entry, Outside Processing Purchase Order or Purchase Order Entry, the top part of the screen is

displayed based on the calling transaction.

You can return to the reservation function at any time until the Invoice Entry is updated to change or

delete the reservations. Also, during inventory receipts you have the option of transferring Purchase

Order Reservations to Inventory Reservations as the material is received.

When you add an Incoming Reservation record to a Quote, Sales Order or Transfer Order Item, the

corresponding non-Specific reservation is reduced by the Quantity of Incoming Material.

Restrictions

If you do not access the Reservation screen before you add an Incoming Reservation record to a Sales

Order or a Transfer Order for the full sold/transferred quantity, there is no non-Specific reservation

created. Therefore, if you later delete the Incoming Reservation, the non-Specific reservation is not

reinstated.

If you do not access the Reservation screen before you add an Incoming Reservation record to a Sales

Order or a Transfer Order for a portion of the sold/transferred quantity, the non-Specific reservation is

created for the difference between the sold/transferred quantity and the ICR quantity. If you later

delete the Incoming Reservation, the non-Specific reservation is not updated.

When you add a reservation against an incoming Transfer Order or Transfer Bill of Lading, a

validation is performed to ensure that the Destination Branch of the Transfer Order or Bill of Lading

matches the transaction’s Shipping Branch.

For Customer-Owned transaction Items, where the Sales Category Allocation Type is C–Customer-

Owned:

o You can only reserve Customer-Owned Transfer Orders or Transfer Bills of Lading where the

Destination Warehouse Type is C–Customer-Owned.

o You can only reserve Customer-Owned Outside Purchase Orders where the Purchase Order

Customer number matches the transaction Customer number.

The Reservations against Incoming window no longer allows you to change the incoming pieces or

weight on Sold Transfer Incoming Reservations. A Sold Transfer is created either when you turn a

Transfer Requisition into a Transfer Order on exit of a Sales Order OR when you reserve a tag to a

Transfer Order by de-allocating it from a Quote or Sales Order. This restriction ensures that the

Incoming and the non-Specific Reservations on the Quote or Order Item are correct.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 125

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING AN INCOMING RESERVATION IN ORDER ENTRY

This function is used to call the Reservations Against Incoming Material from a Quote, Sales Order,

Transfer Order, Invoice Entry or Outside Processing Purchase Order Entry.

When you enter the reservation function, the transaction Item information is shown in the top section for

your reference.

Type N ACME FAB Order Item SO No PHI- 4- 2

Cus Part Specs: 1010-

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214

Grade 36 W Reservations against Incoming

Order ----------------- Order Item --------------------- 1595 LBS

Bal Cus ACME FAB Due Dt 16Sep04 1595 LBS

Sls Cat/Typ WS Bar Angle ASTM A36

Ch Description 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' Amount

1 MATERIAL Bal 25 PCS 1595 LBS 267.16

Alc 25 PCS 1595 LBS

Rqd PCS LBS

---------------- Incoming Item -------------------

Ven Due Dt

3 FREIGHT Ref No - - Drt Shp 35.89

1 *** Net Mat Bal 267.16

Avl 303.05

Status PKG D Res Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh PHI W 1-Res Inqry Sts N

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Icr 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts A-Tr Req B-Sch

Incoming Reservation Screen – Called from Order Entry

Action Bar Action

Res Inqry Calls the Incoming Reservation Inquiry. Refer to the ‘Incoming Reservation Inquiry’

section for details.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Order Item Section:

Cus

Header

Display

Sold-To Customer’s name is displayed from the

Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order or Invoice

Header record. The Purchase Order Vendor’s name

is displayed when called from the Outside

Processing Purchase Order Entry program.

Due Dt Item Display Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order, Invoice or

Outside Processing Purchase Order Item’s Due Date.

Product Description Item Display Sold Product Item description or the Outside

Processing purchase Order Item description.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 126

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Bal Item Display Balance Pieces, Quantity and Weight from the

Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order, Invoice or

Outside Processing Purchase Order Item.

Alc Item Total Display Pieces, Quantity and Weight for the total

Inventory Reservations. It includes specific and

non-Specific Reservations for that Item. It does

not include any reservation against incoming.

Rqd Bal - Res

- Inc Rsv

Display Required Pieces, Quantity and Weight. They are

computed as follows: Transaction Balance -

Inventory Reservations - Displayed Incoming

Reservation record if applicable.

Incoming Item Section

Ven

PO/TO/BL

Header

Display

The Purchase Order Vendor or the Transfer Order or

Transfer Bill of Lading Reference Branch.

Due Dt PO/TO Item Display The Purchase or Transfer Item Due Date.

Product Description PO/TO Item Display Product description from the reserved Purchase

Order, Transfer Order or Transfer Order Item.

Ref Blank PO, TO, BL You must enter a Reference Prefix to add an

Incoming Reservation. Valid Options are:

PO Purchase Order

TO Transfer Order

BL Transfer Bill of Lading

Ref Brh Blank,

Transctn

Ref Brh

Branch

Reference

The Purchase Order, Transfer Order or Transfer

Bill of Lading Reference Branch.

Ref No Corresp

Transctn

table

You must enter a valid Purchase Order, Transfer

Order or Transfer Bill of Lading and Item numbers.

Drt Shp Based on

Sales Cat.

Display The Direct Ship code is displayed based on the

Sales Category Allocation Type for the transaction

Item. Cannot be overridden.

Bal Display Purchase Order, Transfer Order or Transfer Bill of

Lading Balance pieces, quantity and weight.

Avl Display Purchase Order, Transfer Order or Transfer Bill of

Lading available pieces, quantity and weight.

Res You must enter the pieces and quantity to be

reserved for the transaction.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 127

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

A completed Reservations against Incoming screen is shown below.

Type N ACME FAB Order Item SO No PHI- 4- 2

Cus Part Specs: 1010-

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214

Grade 36 W Reservations against Incoming

Order ----------------- Order Item --------------------- 1595 LBS

Bal Cus ACME FAB Due Dt 16Sep04 1595 LBS

Sls Cat/Typ WS Bar Angle ASTM A36

Ch Description 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' Amount

1 MATERIAL Bal 25 PCS 1595 LBS 267.16

Alc 25 PCS 1595 LBS

Rqd 10-PCS 638-LBS

---------------- Incoming Item -------------------

Ven ABC FREIGHT CO Due Dt 12Nov04

Bar Angle ASTM A36

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

3 FREIGHT Ref PO No PHI- 2323- 1 Drt Shp N 35.89

1 *** Net Mat Bal 50 PCS 3190 LBS 267.16

Avl 15 PCS 957 LBS 303.05

Status PKG D Res 15 PCS 957 LBS Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh PHI W Sts N

<ICR>

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Icr 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts A-Tr Req B-Sch

Completed Incoming Reservation – Called from Order Entry

Warning Message

You can create an Incoming Reservation for more than the Incoming Quantity. However a message is

displayed to warn you that the reserved Measure or Weight is greater than the Incoming Pieces, Measure

or Weight: “Reserve should not be greater than available”.

Items Copied From Customer Part Specifications

When a Customer Part Specification, which has a Sales Category of type D-Direct Ship and contains

Purchase Order information, is copied into a Quote or Sales Order Item, an Incoming Reservation is

automatically created for the Purchase Order.

The Pieces, Measure and Weight on the Incoming Reservation are set to the Quote or Order Item

balance.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 128

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING AN INCOMING RESERVATION IN PURCHASE ORDERS

This function is used to reserve a Purchase Order Item to a Quote, Sales or Transfer Order, to an Invoice

Entry or an Outside Processing Purchase Order.

When entering reservations from the Purchase Order Item Entry screen, you are restricted to Adding,

Changing, and Deleting reservations for only that specific Purchase Order Item. Furthermore, when you

call an existing Incoming Reservation, the program prompts to delete the reservation if the SO Item has

already been completed or deleted.

The product information and balance quantities are displayed. You then enter the Pieces and Quantity of

the Purchase Order Item to be reserved against the order or Invoice Item.

Type N Purchase Order Item PO No PHI- 2323- 1

ABC FREIGHT CO

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214

Grade 36 W Reservations against Incoming

Order: --------------- Incoming Item -------------------- 3190 LBS

Bal : Ven ABC FREIGHT CO Due Dt 12Nov04 3190 LBS

Cst Descriptio Bar Angle ASTM A36 Amount

M Material 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' 566.23 USD

Bal 50 PCS 3190 LBS

Avl PCS LBS

----------------- Order Item ---------------------

Cus Due Dt

Ref SO No PHI- - Drt Shp

Bal

Stk Inq Cost Alc 566.23

Stk Inq Y All Rqd /

For Cus No Res Own N

Stk Inq Rmks A 1-Res Inqry Usg N

Source / /

Rolling Wk Prt Modif Y Orig Due Date 11/12/04 Complete N

1-Chng Itm 2-Rmk 3-Cond Cds 4-PO Res 5-Res Incmg 6-Res 7-Hdr 8-Hist

Incoming Reservation – Called from Purchase Order Entry

Action Bar Action

Res Inqry Calls the Incoming Reservation Inquiry. Refer to the ‘Incoming Reservation Inquiry’

section for details.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Incoming Item Section:

Ven

Header

Display

Purchase Order Vendor’s Name.

Due Dt Item Display Purchase Order Item due date.

Product Description Item Display Purchased Product description from the Purchase

Order Item record.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 129

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Bal Item Display Purchase Order Balance pieces, quantity and

weight.

Avl Item Display Purchase Order available pieces, quantity and

weight.

Order Item Section

Cus

SO, TO,

QT, IE, PO

header

Display Sold-To Customer’s name is displayed from the

Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order or Invoice

Header record. The Purchase Order Vendor’s name

is displayed when reserving to an Outside

Processing Purchase Order Entry program.

Due Dt SO, TO,

QT, PO

Item

Display Quote, Sales Order, Transfer Order, Invoice or

Outside Processing Purchase Order Item Due Date.

Product Description SO, TO,

QT, PO

Item

Display Sold Product Item description or the Outside

Processing Purchase Order Item description.

Ref SO PO, TO,

QT, PO

You can change the Reference Prefix using <Esc>

from the Reference Branch field. Valid Options

are:

QT Quote Entry

SO Sales Order

TO Transfer Order

PO Outside Processing Purchase Order

Ref Brh PO Brh Branch

Reference

You can change the Reference Branch using <Esc>

from the Reference number field.

Ref No Corresp

Trans

table

You must enter a valid Quote, Sales Order,

Transfer Order, Invoice Entry or Outside Service

Order number and Item number.

Drc Ship Based on

Sales Cat

Display The Direct Ship Code is displayed based on the

Sales Category Allocation Type for the transaction

Item.

Bal Item Display Balance Pieces, Quantity and Weight from the Sales

Order, Transfer Order, Quote, Invoice or Outside

Purchase Order Item.

Alc Item Total Display Pieces, Quantity and Weight for the total

Inventory Reservation. It includes specific and

non-Specific reservations for that Item. It does

not include any reservation against incoming.

Rqd Bal -

Alloc -

Inc Rsv

Display Required Pieces, Quantity and Weight. They are

computed as follows: Transaction Balance -

Inventory Reservations - Displayed Incoming

Reservation record if applicable.

Res You must enter the pieces and quantity to be

reserved for the transaction.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 130

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

A completed sample is shown below.

Type N Purchase Order Item PO No PHI- 2323- 1

ABC FREIGHT CO

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214

Grade 36 W Reservations against Incoming

Order: --------------- Incoming Item -------------------- 3190 LBS

Bal : Ven ABC FREIGHT CO Due Dt 12Nov04 3190 LBS

Cst Descriptio Bar Angle ASTM A36 Amount

M Material 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' 566.23 USD

Bal 50 PCS 3190 LBS

Avl 15 PCS 957 LBS

------------------ Order Item ---------------------

Cus ACME FAB Due Dt 16Sep04

Bar Angle ASTM A36

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Ref SO No PHI- 4- 2 Drt Shp N

Bal 25 PCS 1595 LBS

Stk Inq Cost Alc 25 PCS 1595 LBS 566.23

Stk Inq Y All Rqd 10-PCS 638-LBS /

For Cus No Res 15 PCS 957 LBS s Own N

Stk Inq Rmks A d Usg N

Source t / /

Rolling Wk Prt Modif Y Orig Due Date 11/12/04 Complete N

1-Chng Itm 2-Rmk 3-Cond Cds 4-PO Res 5-Res Incmg 6-Res 7-Hdr 8-Hist

Completed Incoming Reservation – Called from Purchase Order

Incoming Reservation Inquiry

The Res Inqry action bar option allows you to verify whether any Incoming Reservations exist against

the transaction Item. When you press the Res Inqry option:

If no Incoming Reservations exist for the transaction Item, a message is displayed: Inquiry not

available - No reservations exist for this item.

If Incoming Reservations exist, they are displayed in the Incoming Reservations window.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 131

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Type N Purchase Order Item PO No PHI- 2323- 1

ABC FREIGHT CO

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214 f

Grade 36 W Reservations against Incoming

Order: --------------- Incoming Item ------------------- 3190 LBS

Bal : Ven ABC FREIGHT CO Due Dt 12Nov04 3190 LBS

Cst Descriptio Bar Angle ASTM A36 Amount

M Material 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' 566.23 USD

Bal 50 PCS 3190 LBS

Avl PCS LBS

Incoming Reservations

Brh Ref-Itm Due Dt L Sts Quantity Weight

PHI SO 4-002 16Sep04 ENT 15 PCS 957 LBS 957

PHI TO 543-001 11Nov04 ENT 35 PCS 2,233 LBS 2,233

1-Chng Itm 2-Rmk 3-Cond Cds 4-PO Res 5-Res Incmg 6-Res 7-Hdr 8-Hist

Incoming Reservation Inquiry

Form/Report Field Name Description

Brh The Incoming Reservation’s Transaction Branch

Ref The Incoming Reservation’s Prefix

Ref-Itm The Incoming Reservation’s Reference number and Item number

Due Date The PO/TO Item Due Date or The BL Header Ship Date

Shipment Code The BL Header Shipment Code (L or S)

Sts The Status code from the PO/TO Item or from the BL Header

Pcs/Qty/Wgt The Incoming Reservation Pcs/Qty/Wgt

Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the Incoming Reservation that you need to review and press

<Enter> to return your selection to the Incoming Reservation screen. Press <F4> to exit the Incoming

Reservation screen.

5. Reservations Against Incoming Material Page 132

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

6. TRANSFER REQUISITION FROM QUOTE &

SALES ORDERS

OVERVIEW

During the quoting (or selling) process, salespeople often verify the inventory availability in other

branches, confirm the sale and create a Transfer Order to have the material shipped to their location. The

Transfer Requisition function incorporates the creation of a Transfer Order within the Quote or Sales

Order entry process.

Advantages of the Transfer Requisition Function

The advantages of creating a Transfer Order from within a Quote or Sales Order are as follows:

The sold Product Item is still on your screen and, therefore, the customer’s requirements are fresh in

your mind. Thus, less entry errors are likely to be made.

Avoid time-consuming re-entry of information such as Product Item and Description, Header and

Item Remarks, Item Specifications and so on.

Automatic creation of the Incoming Reservations record linking the Transfer Order to the Sales Order

that prompted the TO’s creation.

Automatic transferal of reservations against material in the Transfer Order branch to the newly

created TO.

Provides ability to transfer and print Customer Information from the Sales Order to the Transfer

Order. Controlled by the Product Installation Option TCI=X. See Product Installation Option Guide

for details.

Provides the ability to send a work flow message when the Transfer Order is created.

Restrictions

Transfer Requisitions have no impact on the Costs of a Quote or Sales Order Item.

Transfer Requisitions are not considered when determining whether sufficient reservations exist on a

Sales Order Item.

Transfer Requisitions are not considered when determining whether Quote Items are short.

6. Transfer Requisition from Quote & Sales Orders Page 134

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Calling the Transfer Requisition Function in Sales Order Entry

The Transfer Requisition function can be called after entering a Sales Order Item by selecting the Tr Req

option.

The Tr Req option is dimmed if the Item Sales Category Type is D-Direct Ship.

If the Sales Category is changed from D-Direct Ship Type to a non-Direct Ship Category, the

Transfer Requisition option is highlighted.

o The Sales Category cannot be changed from a non-Direct Ship to a Direct Ship Category if a

Transfer Requisition exists for the Item. To change the Sales Category to a Direct Ship Type, you

must delete the Transfer Requisition.

Adding a Transfer Requisition

The Transfer Requisition window allows you to enter the information pertaining to the Transfer Order

that is created. When you access the Transfer Requisition window, the cursor is positioned at the

Transfer Order Branch field.

30Jan97 10:41 Transfer Requisition QT No PHI- 74011- 12 TO No CHI-701153

Dest Brh PHI Whs PPR Reason SLD Due 09 30 97 WKO Dt 09 30 97 Promise ***ASAP***

Sales Cat ST Status ENT Shp Whs CPR Copy: Hdr Rmk Y Itm Rmk Y Spc N

Group BA Bar Angle ASTM A36

Size 2214 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Grade 36 Width Length 20' " Ga

10 PCS 200 ' 638 LBS

1-Change

Transfer Requisition Window

Action Bar Action

Change Displays a window to allow you to change different sections of the Transfer

Requisition Window. Refer to the ‘Changing the Transfer Requisition’ section for

details.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Date and Time System

Date

Display The system’s date and time. It is used for

follow-up purposes, if the Quote Item is not

immediately converted into a Sales Order.

Ref Prefix, Ref Branch,

Transaction and Item

numbers.

Item Display The Quote or Sales Order Branch, number and Item

number for which the Transfer Requisition is being

created. This is used for follow-up purposes if

the screen is printed and kept as a trace of the

created Transfer Requisition.

TO No Branch

Reference

The Transfer Order Branch is the Branch for which

the TO is created. Access to the TO Branch field

is controlled by the Product Installation Option

BRH=X.

The Transfer Order number is the number that is

6. Transfer Requisition from Quote & Sales Orders Page 135

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

assigned to the TO upon creation. You may control

access to the TO number field by setting up the

MTN=X Product Installation option. You cannot

enter the same number as an existing TO. Refer to

the ‘Manual Numbering’ section for details.

Dest Brh Quote or

SO Branch

Display The Destination Branch defaults to the Quote or

Sales Order branch and cannot be changed.

Dest Whs Alloc. Whs

of the

Item Ship.

Branch

Warehouse

Reference

Specifies the Destination Warehouse of the

Transfer Order.

Reason Reason

reference,

Reason

Type TF

Specifies the reason that prompted the Transfer

Order. It is passed to the Transfer Order Header

when the TO is created.

Due QT or SO

Item due

date (if

any)

Valid Date Specifies the Transfer Order Item due date.

WKO Dt User

Defaults -

Type T

Valid Date Specifies the TO Work Order Date. If the Work

Order Date at time of TO creation is less that the

System Date, the System Date is moved to the Work

Order Date in the created TO.

Promise Dt Optional This field is used when there is no specific Due

Date. It is carried forward to the TO Header when

the TO is created.

Sales Cat User

Defaults -

Type T

Sales

Category

reference

Specifies the Sales Category under which the

Transfer Order is recorded. Has to be of Sales

Category Allocation Type T-Transfer Orders.

Status User

Defaults -

Type T

Order

Status

reference

Specifies the Status Code of the Transfer. Passed

to the TO Header when the TO is created.

Shp Whs Ship Whs

of TO Brh

Warehouse

Reference

Specifies the shipping warehouse of the Transfer

Order.

Copy: Hdr Rmk Y or

PIO RMK=X

N, Y Specifies whether the Quote or Sales Order Header

Remarks are to be copied to the Transfer Order

upon TO creation. The Product Installation Option

RMK=X defaults the flag:

Options are:

N None of the Quote or Sales Order Header

Remarks is passed to the created Transfer

Order.

Y All the Quote or Sales Order Header Remarks

are passed to the created Transfer Order.

If Y is selected, the Header Remarks associated

with the warehouse customer number are ignored

when the TO Header is created.

Itm Rmk Y or

PIO RMK=X

N, Y Specifies whether Remarks from the Quote or Sales

Order Item are to be copied to the Transfer Order

Item upon TO creation. The Product Installation

Option RMK=X defaults the flag:

Options are:

N None of the Quote or Sales Order Item Remarks

is passed to the created Transfer Order Item.

Y The following Remarks are passed from the

Quote or Sales Order Item to the created

6. Transfer Requisition from Quote & Sales Orders Page 136

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Transfer Order Item:

D Description

O Order

P Production

T Tag

W Work Order

Spc Y N, Y Specifies whether the Specifications on the Quote

or Sales Order Item are to be passed to the

Transfer Order Item upon TO creation.

Group, Size/Gauge, Grade,

Dimension

Item

Gr/Sz/Grd/

Dim

Valid

Product

Master

Represent the material to be transferred from the

TO Branch to fulfill the Transfer Requisition.

Pieces, Measure and

Weight

Item Represent the quantity to be transferred from the

TO Branch to fulfill the Transfer Requisition.

Product Description Item Formatted as per the Transfer Requisition Product

and can be overridden. This description is moved

to the Transfer Order Item when the TO is created.

Changing a Transfer Requisition

To change an existing Transfer Requisition, call the Transfer Requisition window. If a Transfer

Requisition was previously entered for the Item, the cursor is placed on the Change action bar option.

The action bar option displays a window, which allows you to change all Transfer Requisition fields.

Enter the number for the area that needs to be modified and the cursor moves to the first field in that

section.

1. Dest Whs

2. Sales Cat

3. Product

4. Quantity

To change the Branch on the Transfer Requisition, press <Esc> from the Destination Warehouse

field.

Deleting a Transfer Requisition

You can delete a Transfer Requisition on a Quote or Sales Order Item by calling the Transfer Requisition

window and pressing <F6>.

The Transfer Requisition is automatically deleted if you delete the associated Quote or Sales Order.

The Transfer Requisition is automatically deleted once you invoice a Sales Order which has Back

Order set to N-No. Therefore, the Transfer Requisition is not reinstated if you deleted the Invoice.

Manual Numbering of Transfer Orders

When an entire Quote or a Quote Item is deleted, the related Transfer Requisition records are

immediately deleted.

6. Transfer Requisition from Quote & Sales Orders Page 137

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

When using manual numbering, if the Transfer Order number that you assigned already exists at time

of TO creation (this may happen if someone entered a Transfer Order after you created the Transfer

Requisition), an error message is displayed and the following occurs:

o The Transfer Requisition is not converted into a Transfer Order. You must call the Transfer

Requisition, change the TO number to a unique number and convert the Transfer Requisition

again.

Creating the Transfer Order

The Transfer Order can be created when you exit the Header of a Sales Order that carries a Transfer

Requisition. A question is displayed to remind you that a Transfer Requisition exists for one or more of

the Order Items and a Product Installation Option, CTO=X, controls the default answer to this question.

Answer Y-Yes or P-Print to confirm that you accept that a Transfer Order is being created as specified on

the Transfer Requisition.

o If you answer N-No to the confirmation question, the Transfer Order is not created, and the

Transfer Requisition remains on the Sales Order Item. If you call and exit the Sales Order again,

the same confirmation question is displayed.

o If you chose never to answer Y-Yes to the confirmation question, the Transfer Order is not

created and the Transfer Requisition is deleted when the Sales Order Item is deleted.

o If you answer Y-Yes to create the Transfer Order, and then later on you go back and delete the

Sales Order, the corresponding Transfer Order is not automatically deleted. You would need to

delete the Transfer Order manually.

o If you answer P-Print, the Transfer Order is created and the Transfer Order forms are printed

when you exit the Sales Order entry program. If the Product Installation Option PWK is set to Y-

Yes on the Transfer Order Entry program, the Transfer Production Work Order prints in addition

to the Transfer Order forms.

NOTE: When the P-Print option is selected, the Product Installation Options PRT=X and DLT=X set

on the Transfer Order Entry program are ignored. Consequently, the Transfer Order forms

print all the time and you cannot define primary and secondary printers to print the Transfer

Shipping and Transfer Work Order forms.

Transfer Order Defaults

The Transfer Order is created with the same defaults as regular Transfer Order Entry.

Charges and Costs on the Quote or Sales Order Item

No Charges or Costs are copied from the Item to a Transfer Order created using the Transfer Requisition

function. Only automatically created Costs are applied to the created Transfer Order.

Transfer Order Freight Information

The Freight conditions applied to the Transfer Order created by a Transfer Requisition are defaulted

based on the Customer associated with the Destination Warehouse.

6. Transfer Requisition from Quote & Sales Orders Page 138

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Specific Inventory Reservations

If any Specific Inventory Reservations exist on the Quote or Sales Order Item and if the Inventory

Reservation Branch is the same as the Transfer Order Branch on the Transfer Requisition, then

the material is automatically de-allocated from the Quote or Order Item and reserved to the Transfer

Order Item, when the Transfer Order is created.

When the Transfer Order is finalized, the transferred Product Items can be automatically allocated to the

Quote or Sales Order depending on some conditions described in the ‘Shipping a Transfer Order’ chapter

of the Transfer Orders manual.

Automatic Creation of an Incoming Reservation

An Incoming Reservation is created for the Transfer Order and linked to the Sales Order Item. The full

Transfer Order Quantity is used on the Incoming Reservation even if it causes the Sales Order to become

over-reserved.

Combining Transfer Requisitions from Different Order Items

For a given Sales Order, if you use automatic Transfer Order numbering, or enter the same TO number on

multiple Transfer Requisitions, then:

If any of the Transfer Requisitions have the same Transfer Order Branch and Destination Warehouse,

they are combined and created as separate Items on a single Transfer Order, when the Transfer Order

is created.

When Transfer Requisitions are combined to create a Transfer Order, Header-specific fields (e.g.,

Promise and Work Order dates) default from the first Transfer Requisition.

o If the First Transfer Requisition has Copy Header Remarks set to Y, the Quote or Sales Order

Header Remarks are passed to the combined Transfer Order Header.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

7. FREIGHT CHARGES AND COSTING

OVERVIEW

The method of entering the Freight related fields and applying the Freight Charges and Costs on each Item

is a standard function shared by Quotation, Sales Order, Transfer Order, Bill of Lading and Invoice Entry

programs. However some differences may exist based on the transaction type.

This chapter covers the standard Freight function as well as the special cases by transaction type.

The main features provided are:

The Freight Responsibility code allows you to determine how the Freight Charge should be applied

on the Items.

The Delivery Method allows you to determine whether the Freight Cost is an Internal or External

Cost, using a Common Carrier.

Ability to enter a common Freight Charge Rate on the transaction Header and automatically apply it,

in conjunction with each Item weight, to create an Included or External Freight Charge line.

Ability to enter a common Freight Cost Rate on the transaction Header and automatically apply it, in

conjunction with each Item weight, to create an Internal or External Cost Attribution.

Ability to use the Outbound Freight Table to get a Cost Rate based on the transaction weight if no

Freight Cost is entered on the transaction Header.

In Quotation Entry, you have the ability to use the Outbound Freight Table to get a Charge and a Cost

Rate based on a selected weight bracket, if no Freight Rates are entered on the Quotation Header.

Ability to add a LOT Freight Charge and/or cost on a transaction and apply on each shipment.

A change done to any of the following fields causes the Freight action bar option to blink on the

transaction Header:

o Ship-To Zip code

o Shipping Branch on the transaction Header

o Any Freight related field on the transaction Header

o Transaction weight

The Freight action bar option blinks to indicate that the new Freight has not been applied to the

transaction yet. You can trigger the Freight re-calculation by selecting the Freight action bar option.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 140

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Freight is automatically re-calculated each time you exit the transaction, if the Freight option

from the action bar is blinking.

Restrictions

Charge code 3 is strictly reserved by the system for the automatic Freight calculation. You must use a

different Freight Charge code to add any other Freight Charge and cost.

Outbound Freight Table

The Outbound Freight Table is optional. In Quotation Entry, the Outbound Freight Table can be used to

compute both Freight Costs and Charges. In Order or Invoice Entry, it is only used to calculate Freight

Costs based upon shipping and destination points, if the Cost Rate is not manually entered. These Freight

Costs are displayed in the Cost Attributions screens of Order and Invoice Entry and finalized at the time

of Invoice Update. You may wish to establish records for some Shipping Warehouses and destination

points and not for others (refer to the Reference manual for details on how to set up the records).

Freight Responsibility

The Freight Responsibility code is used to specify which party is responsible for paying the Freight. It

provides the ability to create an External Charge that appears on the external documentation sent to the customer

or an internal breakdown of revenue for internal accounting.

The code is validated against the Freight Responsibility table. The description is printed on forms for

customer reference.

Each Freight Responsibility code is user-defined. It includes a Freight Charge code used to determine the

type and cost of Freight to be applied to the transaction:

PPD - Prepaid

CHG - Charge

COL - Collect

CPU - Customer Pick-up

INC - Included

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 141

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Charge Freight

The Freight Responsibility Charge code of CHG generates a Freight External Charge based on the rate

entered on the Header screen. If a Charge Rate is not manually entered on the Header, no External

Charge is calculated.

In Quotation, Sales Order and Invoice Entry, the balance weight is used in conjunction with the Freight

Charge Rate to create External Charge.

You cannot enter a Freight Responsibility code of CHG on Transfer Orders.

Freight Included

The Freight Responsibility Charge code of INC generates a Freight Internal Charge based on the rate

entered on the Header screen. If a Charge Rate is not manually entered on the Header, no Internal Charge

is calculated.

In Quotation, Sales Order and Invoice Entry, the balance weight is used in conjunction with the Freight

Charge Rate to create Internal Charge.

No Internal Freight Charge can be entered for Transfer Orders.

You cannot enter a Freight Responsibility code of INC on Transfer Orders.

Delivery Method

The Delivery Method works in conjunction with the Freight Responsibility to indicate how

the material is to be shipped to the customer. It provides the ability to create an External Cost Attribution

if a material is to be delivered by a Common Carrier or an Internal Cost Attribution to allow for accurate

profitability calculations.

Valid Delivery Method codes are:

CC - Common Carrier

CP - Customer Pick-up, default for CPU Freight Responsibility

OT - Our Truck

Common Carrier

Freight Responsibility codes of CHG, INC, and PPD with CC as the Delivery Method code generate

External Cost Attributions based on the rate entered on the Header screen or the Outbound Freight Table.

If a Cost Rate is not manually entered and no matching record exists on the Outbound Freight Table, then

no external Freight Costs are calculated.

In Quotation, Sales Order and Invoice Entry, the balance weight is used in conjunction with the Freight

Cost Rate to create the Internal Cost Attribution.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 142

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

In Transfer Order Entry, the Total Reserved Weight is used in conjunction with the Freight Cost Rate to

create the Internal Cost Attribution.

Our Truck

Freight Responsibility Charge codes of CHG, INC, and PPD with OT as the Delivery Method generate

Internal Cost Attributions based on the Outbound Freight Table or based on the rate entered on the

Header screen. If a Cost Rate is not manually entered and no matching record exists on the Outbound

Freight Table, then no Internal Freight Costs are calculated.

In Quotation, Sales Order and Invoice Entry, the balance weight is used in conjunction with the Freight

Cost Rate to create the Internal Cost Attribution.

In Transfer Order Entry, the Total Reserved Weight is used in conjunction with the Freight Cost Rate to

create the Internal Cost Attribution.

The following Table serves as a quick reference regarding how these Freight factors interact:

Frt Charge Delivery Cost

Resp Table Methods Attributions

CHG External CC External

OT Internal

COL None CC None

OT None

CPU None CP None

INC Internal CC External

OT Internal

PPD None CC External

OT Internal

Freight Charge and Cost Combinations

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 143

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING FREIGHT CHARGES AND COSTS

The standard Freight Defaults window is used to enter and review the Freight related fields. The Freight

Defaults window is displayed in the following cases:

Sales Order Entry – Add mode

Bill of Lading Entry – Add mode

Invoice Entry – Add mode

Quote Entry – When converting the Quote to a Sales Order

The fields displayed in the Freight Defaults window default based on the transaction being created.

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp G CHG Dlv Mth OT

Frt Charge /CWT

Frt Cost /CWT

Vendor No

Ship Via OUR TRUCK

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt

Probill No

Freight window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Frt Resp Ship-To/

Customer

Freight

Responsibi

lity Ref.

In Order Entry and Direct Invoice Entry, the

Freight Responsibility defaults based on the Ship-

To/Customer table.

For Transfer Orders, you cannot enter a Freight

Responsibility code of CHG or INC.

In Bill of Lading Entry, the Freight

Responsibility defaults based on the Sales Order.

In Invoice Generation, the Freight Responsibility

defaults as follows:

Based on the Sales Order Header when

invoicing a Sales Order.

Based on the Bill of Lading Header when

invoicing a Bill of Lading.

When converting a Quote to a Sales Order, it

defaults based on the Quote Header.

Dlv Mth Ship-To/

Customer

OT, CC, CP In Order Entry and Direct Invoice, the Delivery

Method defaults based on the Ship-To/Customer

table.

In Invoice Generation, the Delivery Method

defaults as follows:

Based on the Sales Order Header when

invoicing a Sales Order.

Based on the Bill of Lading Header when

invoicing a Bill of Lading.

When converting a Quote to a Sales Order, it

defaults based on the Quote Header.

In all cases, it can be changed to any valid

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 144

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Delivery Method.

Frt Charge, UM Wgt based

UM or LOT

Can only be accessed if the Freight Responsibility

Code is CHG or INC. Freight Charges are always

entered in the Customer's currency.

Automatically cleared out if Frt Res is changed to

be different than CHG or INC.

If entered, used to compute the Freight Charge on

all Items.

Frt Cost, UM Frt Charge

(unless

Frt Resp

is PP)

Wgt based

UM or LOT

Can only be accessed if the Freight Responsibility

code is PP, CHG or INC.

Automatically cleared out if the Freight

Responsibility is changed to be different than PP,

CHG or INC.

If entered, used to compute the Freight Cost on

all Items.

If the Freight Vendor’s currency is different than

your base currency, the Freight Costs must be

entered in the currency of the Freight Vendor.

Vendor No (Lookup Name) Ship-To/

Customer

Vendor

Reference

Can only be accessed if the Delivery Method is CC-

Common Carrier and the Vendor number is blank.

Allows you to select a valid Vendor from the

Vendor Look-Up window by entering the first

characters from the Vendor Name followed by *.

Press <Esc> to enter the Vendor number.

In Order Entry and Direct Invoice, the Freight

Vendor defaults based on the Ship-To/Customer

table.

In Invoice Generation, the Freight Vendor defaults

as follows:

Based on the Sales Order Header when

invoicing a Sales Order.

Based on the Bill of Lading Header when

invoicing a Bill of Lading.

When converting a Quote to a Sales Order, it

defaults based the Ship-To/Customer table.

In all cases, it can be changed to any valid

Vendor.

Frt Ex Rt Vendor Vendor

Reference

If the Vendor’s currency is different than the

base currency, the following information is

displayed:

Currency Code - display only

Currency Type:

V-Variable, exchange rate is updated each

time the transaction is re-costed.

F-Fixed, exchange rate is not replaced from

the currency table at re-cost time.

Exchange Rate: defaults from the Currency table,

based on the Vendor. When the Type is V-

Variable, if the Exchange Rate is overridden,

the Exchange Type is automatically changed to F

and the Order must be re-costed.

Look-up Name Vendor

Reference

Can only be accessed if the Delivery Method is CC-

Common Carrier.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 145

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Allows you to select the Vendor from the Vendor

Look-Up window by entering the first characters

from the Vendor Name followed by ‘*’.

Ship Via Vendor Defaults to the Vendor Look-Up name if you enter

or change the Vendor number.

Can be overridden as required.

FOB Pt Ship-To/

Customer

In Order Entry and Direct Invoice, the FOB

defaults based on the Ship-To/Customer table.

In Invoice Generation, the FOB Point defaults as

follows:

Based on the Sales Order Header when

invoicing a Sales Order.

Based on the Bill of Lading Header when

invoicing a Bill of Lading.

When converting a Quote to a Sales Order, it

defaults based the Ship-To/Customer table.

In all cases it can be overridden.

Probill No Blank or

Bill of

Lading

Header

Not accessible in Order Entry and when converting

a Quote into a Sales Order.

Accessed in Direct Invoice Entry.

Defaults from the Bill of Lading Header when

generating an Invoice from a Bill of Lading.

If you enter a Probill No. on the Invoice Header,

it prints on the invoice form and is updated to

the Sales and Cost Journal Header. If, in

addition, the Freight Delivery Method is CC

(Common Carrier), the Probill is passed to the

Vendor Reference field of the External Cost

Attribution, then saved in the Cost Reconciliation

table to help reconciling when you receive the

Common Carrier voucher.

Once the Transaction Header is created, the Freight fields on the Header can be changed using the Chg

Hdr option from the action bar.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 146

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Freight Responsibility Included

If the Header Freight Charge code type field is INC, and a Freight Charge Rate is entered on the Header,

then a Charge is created with a Rate equal to the Freight Charge Rate, a Rate UM of the Header Freight

Charge UM and an Internal type charge. The weight is determined based on the weight of the transaction

Item. The Freight Charge is calculated and appears on line 8 of the Charge Table any time the Freight

computation takes place.

Example:

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp IN INC Dlv Mth OT

Frt Charge 2.0000/CWT

Frt Cost /CWT

Vendor No

Ship Via

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt Destination

Probill No

Freight Defaults – Included Frt Res

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 24.0000 CWT E 319 LBS 76.56

3 FREIGHT 2.0000 CWT I 319 LBS 6.38

1 *** Net Material *** 22.0000 CWT I 319 LBS 70.18

Taxes 13.95 Total 90.51

Item screen – Charges section

Restrictions

If you enter a Freight Rate on the Header that makes the Internal Type Charges greater than the

External Type Charges, an error message is displayed and the Freight is not computed. You must

change the Freight Rate or the Item Charge to be able to exit the transaction.

Freight Responsibility Charge

If the Header Freight Charge code type field is CHG, and a Freight Charge Rate is entered on the Header,

then a Charge is created with a Rate equal to the Freight Charge Rate, a Rate Unit of Measure of the

Header Freight Charge UM. The weight is determined based on the weight of the transaction Item. The

Freight Charge is calculated and appears on line 8 on the charge Table any time the Freight computation

takes place.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 147

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Example:

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth CC

Frt Charge 2.0000/CWT

Frt Cost 2.0000/CWT

Vendor No 1060 ABC FREIGHT

Ship Via ABC FREIGHT

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt Prepaid to destination

Probill No

Freight Defaults – Charge Frt Resp

Sls Cat/Typ BS-3 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 24.0000 CWT E 319 LBS 76.56

3 FREIGHT 2.0000 CWT E 319 LBS 6.38

1 *** Net Material *** 24.0000 CWT I 319 LBS 76.56

Taxes 13.95 Total 90.51

Item screen – Charges section

Delivery Method OT

If the Header Delivery Method is OT-Our Truck, and the Freight Responsibility is CHG, INC or PPD and

a Freight Cost Rate is entered on the Header, then an Internal Cost Attribution is created with a Rate equal

to the Freight Cost Rate, a Rate UM of the Header Freight Cost UM. In Transfer Order, the weight is

determined based on the Total Weight Reserved. In all other transaction types, the weight is determined

based on the Billing Weight.

The Freight Cost is calculated and appears on the Internal Cost Attribution screen any time the Freight

computation takes place.

Example:

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp PP PPD Dlv Mth OT

Frt Charge /

Frt Cost 2.0000/CWT

Vendor No

Ship Via Our Trucks

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt Prepaid to destination

Probill No

Freight Defaults – Charge Frt Resp

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 148

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST Internal Costs SO No PHI- 1605- 1

Bar Angle ASTM A36 Sls Cat WS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Bal 10 PCS Msr 200 ' Wgt 638 LBS

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount

1 20.3700 CWT 638 LBS 129.99

3 2.0000 CWT 638 LBS 12.76

Internal Costs

Delivery Method CC

If the Header Delivery Method is CC-Common Carrier, and the Freight Responsibility is CHG, INC or

PPD and no Freight Cost Rate is entered on the Header, then the Outbound Freight Table is used to get a

Freight Cost Rate.

The External Cost Attribution is created with an Outbound Freight Table Rate and a Rate Unit of

Measure. In Transfer Order, the weight is determined based on the Total Weight reserved. In all other

transaction types, the weight is determined based on the Billing Weight.

The Freight Cost is calculated and appears on the External Cost Attribution screen any time the Freight

computation takes place. It also creates a Cost Reconciliation record when the Invoice is updated.

If no matching Outbound Freight Table exists, no Freight Cost is computed.

Example:

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth CC

Frt Charge /CWT

Frt Cost /

Vendor No 1060 ABC FREIGHT

Ship Via ABC FREIGHT

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt Charge to destination

Probill No

Freight Defaults – Charge Frt Resp

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST External Costs SO No PHI- 548- 1

Bar Angle ASTM A36 Sls Cat WS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Bal 5 PCS Msr 100 ' Wgt 319 LBS

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount Vendor Ex Rt

Brh-PO No Rcvr No Vendor Ref No Desc

3 0.7500 CWT 1595 LBS 11.96 1060

External Costs

The preceding Cost Attribution is based on a total ordered weight of 1595 LBS and an Outbound Freight

Rate of .75/CWT.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 149

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Foreign Currency’s Freight Vendor

When the Delivery Method is CC and the Freight Vendor’s currency is different than your base currency,

the Freight Costs must be entered in the currency of the Freight Vendor on the transaction Header. At the

Item level, the External Cost Attribution is created in the Vendor’s Currency.

Example:

The Customer’s currency is in US$, same as your base currency. The Order has the following Freight

Information:

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth CC

Frt Charge 12/CWT

Frt Cost 10/CWT

Vendor No 5036 NORTHEAST

Ship Via NORTHEAST

Frt Ex Rt CAD V 0.73000000

FOB Pt

Probill No

Freight Defaults

The Freight Charge is 12 US$ per CWT (Customer’s currency). The Cost Rate is 10 CAD per CWT

(Freight Vendor’s currency).

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST External Costs SO No PHI- 1606- 1

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Drawing Quality Sls Cat WS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Bal 1 PCS Msr Wgt 3000 LBS

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount Vendor Ex Rt

Brh-PO No Rcvr No Vendor Ref No Desc

3 10.0000 CWT 3000 LBS 300.00 5036 V .73000000 CD

PHI

External Costs

The External Cost Attribution is created in CAD.

Use of Outbound Freight Table

When calculating the Freight Cost and no Freight Cost Rate is entered on the transaction Header, the

system uses the Outbound Freight Table to get a Cost Rate.

To determine which Outbound Freight Table to use, the system uses the following sequence: Ship-To Zip

code and the Shipping Warehouse from the Transaction Header:

If no matching record is found, the system looks for a record using the first 5 digits of the Zip code.

If no matching record is found, the system uses the first 3 digits.

If no matching Outbound Freight Table is found, no Freight calculation takes place.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 150

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Based on the Delivery Method on the transaction Header, the system determines whether to use the Our

Truck or the Common Carrier column.

Based on the total transaction Billing Weight or the reserved weight for Transfer Orders, the system

determines the transaction bracket and therefore the rate to be used.

In Quotation, the Outbound Freight Table may also be used to determine the Freight Charge. In this case

the system multiplies the specified Cost Rate by the corresponding Charge Profit % to get the Freight

Charge. If the Charge Profit % is not entered, the Charge Rate equals the Cost Rate.

When the Outbound Freight Table is used to determine the Freight Rate, the Freight value is compared to

the corresponding Minimum and Maximum Freight Amounts. If the Value is greater than the maximum

amount or less than the minimum amount, then the maximum/minimum amounts are applied to the

transaction and the Freight Rate Unit of Measure changes to LOT.

Outbound Freight Rates

1. Shipping Whs........ PFS

2. Postal/Zip Code..... 19021

3. Min Frt Cost Amt.... 50.00 6. Min Frt Charge Amt.. 50.00

4. Max Frt Cost Amt.... 400.00 7. Max Frt Charge Amt.. 400.00

5. Freight Cost U/M.... CWT 8. Frt Charge U/M...... CWT

9. Usage Status........ A

10. Freight Weight Cost Rate Cost Rate Charge

Weight Limit Our Truck Com Carrier Profit %

1000 0.7500 1.0000

10000 .5000 .7500

250000 .3500 .6000

999999 .2500 .5000

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Outbound Freight Rates screen

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 151

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHANGING THE FREIGHT RESPONSIBILITY CODE

The Freight Responsibility code on the Header can be changed to one of the other available codes. The

changes then involve one of these four conditions:

Case 1: CHG to COL

The following happens if you change the Freight Responsibility from a code that normally defaults a

charge (INC or CHG), to one that normally does not (COL, PPD or CPU):

The Freight Charge Rate is cleared out.

The Freight action bar option blinks.

Example: You enter a Sales Order with a Freight Charge code of CHG, with one Item and the following

Item Charge Table.

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 1595 LBS 398.75

2 PROCESSING INS 1.0000 CWT E 1595 LBS 15.95

3 FREIGHT 1.0000 CWT E 1595 LBS 15.95

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 1595 LBS 398.75

Taxes 77.82 Total 508.47

If you then change the Freight Charge code to COL and you exit the transaction or select the blinking

Freight action bar option, the Item Charge Table looks as follows.

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 1595 LBS 398.75

2 PROCESSING INS 1.0000 CWT E 1595 LBS 15.95

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 1595 LBS 398.75

Taxes 74.91 Total 489.61

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 152

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Case 2: COL to CHG

The following happens if you change the Freight Responsibility from a Freight Charge code that normally

does not default a Freight Charge (COL, PPD or CPU), to one that normally does (INC or CHG):

The Freight action bar option blinks. If you also add a Freight Rate, the system adds the appropriate

Freight Charge on all of the related Items and re-computes the Material Internal Charge.

Example: You enter a Sales Order with a Freight Charge code of COL, with one Item and the following

Item Charge Table.

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ A

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 12760.00

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 51040 LBS 12760.00

Taxes Total 12,760.00

If you change the Freight Charge code to CHG, enter a Freight Charge Rate of $1.00, and exit the

Transaction or select the Freight action bar option, the Item Charge Table is automatically changed to

look as follows:

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ A

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 12760.00

3 FREIGHT 1.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 510.40

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 51040 LBS 12760.00

Taxes Total 13,270.40

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 153

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Case 3: INC to CHG

The following happens if you change the Freight Responsibility from a Freight Charge code that normally

defaults a Freight Charge, to another that also normally defaults a Freight Charge (INC to CHG or vice

versa):

The Freight action bar option blinks.

Example: You enter a Sales Order with a Freight Charge code of INC, with one Item and the following

Item Charge Table.

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ A

Ch Description PWC Rate UM I/E Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 12760.00

3 FREIGHT 1.0000 CWT I 51040 LBS 510.40

1 *** Net Material *** 24.0000 CWT I 51040 LBS 12249.60

Taxes Total 13,270.40

You then change the Freight Charge to CHG and the Charge Table looks as follows:

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ A

Ch Description PWC Rate UM I/E Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 12760.00

3 FREIGHT 1.0000 CWT E 51040 LBS 510.40

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 51040 LBS 12760.00

Taxes Total 13,270.40

The Internal Code has changed to External.

Case 4: COL to CP

No changes occur if you change from a Freight Charge code that normally does not default a Freight

Charge (COL, PPD or CPU), to one that also normally does not default a Freight Charge (COL, PPD or

CPU).

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 154

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHANGING THE DELIVERY METHOD

A change in the Delivery Method may trigger a change in the Internal and/or External Cost Attribution

even within the same Freight Responsibility code. For example, you may have a charged Order entered

with a Delivery Method of CC. This would generate an External Cost Attribution based on the rate for

common carrier on the Outbound Freight Table or on the manually entered Cost Rate. Changing the

Delivery Method to OT would reverse the External Cost Attribution and automatically create an Internal

Cost Attribution based on the Outbound Freight Rate for Our Truck or on the manually entered Cost Rate.

As no Freight Cost is calculated when the Freight Responsibility code is COL or CP, no change occurs

when changing the Delivery Method from OT to CC or vise versa.

Example: The Order below is for 20000 LBS of coil, with a Delivery Method of CC. This triggers an

External Cost Attribution with a rate of $1.00 based on the Outbound Freight Table below

(since there is no manually entered Freight Cost Rate).

Freight Defaults

Frt Resp PP PPD Dlv Mth CC

Frt Charge /

Frt Cost /

Vendor No 1060 ABC FREIGHT

Ship Via ABC FREIGHT

Frt Ex Rt

FOB Pt Prepaid to destination

Probill No

Freight Defaults

If you change the Delivery Method to OT, the External Cost Attribution is cleared out, an Internal Cost

Attribution is calculated based on a new rate of $ .75 (as per the Outbound Freight Table below) once the

Freight calculation is performed. Note that, in this case, the freight vendor is no longer applicable.

Consequently, it is automatically cleared out.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 155

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Outbound Freight Rates

1. Shipping Whs........ PFS

2. Postal/Zip Code..... 19021

3. Min Frt Cost Amt.... 10.00 6. Min Frt Charge Amt.. 25.00

4. Max Frt Cost Amt.... 300.00 7. Max Frt Charge Amt.. 500.00

5. Freight Cost U/M.... CWT 8. Frt Charge U/M...... CWT

9. Usage Status........ A

10. Freight Weight Cost Rate Cost Rate Charge

Weight Limit Our Truck Com Carrier Profit %

1000 2.0000 2.5000

10000 1.0000 1.5000

250000 .7500 1.0000

999999 .5000 .7500

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Outbound Freight Rates screen

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 156

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHANGING THE FREIGHT RATES AND UNIT OF MEASURE

The Freight Charge Rate and the Freight Cost Rate can be changed as well as the related Unit of Measure.

The Unit of Measure must be weight based or LOT.

Change the Freight Charge Rate on the Header

If you change the Freight Charge Rate on the Header the Freight action bar option blinks, indicating that

the Freight must be re-computed. Once the Freight re-computation is triggered, the system scans all Items

and adjusts the type 3 Freight Charges to reflect the new rate and re-computes the internal material

charge.

With such a change, however, there is the possibility of encountering the problem where you enter a

Freight Rate on the Header that, if accepted, would make the Internal type charges greater than the

External type charges. This triggers an error message: “Total Internal Charges > Total External

Charges - Verify Charges Item ###.” You must change the Header Freight Rate to be able to exit the

transaction. If the new rate is at a level which does not make the Internal Charges greater than the

External Charges, the Freight is appropriately calculated.

Change the Freight Cost Rate on the Header

If you change the Freight Cost Rate on the Header, the Freight action bar option blinks indicating that the

Freight must be re-computed. Once the Freight re-computation is triggered, the system scans all Items

and adjusts the type 3 Cost Attribution to reflect the new rate.

Change the Unit of Measure on the Header

You may change Freight Charge or Freight Cost Unit of Measure on the Header to any weight controlled

Unit of Measure (example CWT, TON, etc.) or LOT. However, you can only use a weight based Unit of

Measure because the Freight calculation is based on weight. If you change one of the weight based units,

the Charge Table is changed to reflect the new Unit of Measure on all Items and, similarly, the Cost

Attributions are changed to reflect the new Unit of Measure once the Freight is re-computed.

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 157

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

LOT FREIGHT RATE

You can enter a LOT Freight Rate on the Header at time of Quotation Entry, Order Entry, Bill of Lading

Entry, Transfer Order Entry and Invoice Entry. Once the Freight computation is triggered, the LOT rate

is applied to each Item using a pro-rated calculation of the weight of the Item divided by the total entry

weight times the LOT Charge amount.

If a LOT rate is entered in the Sales Order, it is carried to each shipment done for the Order such as Bill of

Lading or Invoice Entry. Refer to the Quote, Order and Invoice Charge Chapter for details.

If a LOT rate is entered in the BL and several Invoices are created from this BL using the Auto BL

Invoice Generation, the LOT rate is applied to each Invoice using a pro-rated calculation. Refer to the

Auto Invoice Generation Chapter of the Invoicing manual for details.

Example: You enter a Sales Order with the following 3 Items. You have a Freight Charge Code of CHG

and Unit of Measure of LOT with a Freight Rate of $100.00:

Item Product: PCS Wgt Pro-rate Cal Frt Chg

1 Bar Angle

2”x2”x1/4”x20’ 50 3,190LBS (3190/14826)x100 $21.52

2 Cold Rolled Coil

.0359x48” 1 10,000LBS (10000/14826)x100 $67.45

3 CF Round Bar

1 3/4”x20’ 10 1,636LBS (1636/14826)x100 $11.03

--------------- ----------

TOTAL: 14,826LBS $100.00

If you were to delete Item 1, the balance of the Items would get a pro-rated Freight Charge as follows:

Item Product: PCS Wgt Pro-rate Cal Frt Chg

2 Cold Rolled Coil

.0359x48” 1 10,000LBS (10000/11636)x100 $85.94

3 CF Round Bar

1 3/4”x20’ 10 1,636LBS (1636/11636)x100 $14.06

--------------- ----------

TOTAL: 11,636LBS $100.00

7. Freight Charges and Costing Page 158

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If you add an Item, the system would pro-rate the LOT Charge based on the new weight.

As with the other cases discussed, there is the possibility whereby the Freight Rate entered on the Header

makes the Internal type charges greater than the External type charges.

In this case, you get an error message and you must either change the Freight Rate or the Item Charge to

be able to exit the transaction.

Example: You enter a Sales Order with the above 3 Items. You have a Freight Charge Code of INC and

Unit of Measure of LOT with a Freight Rate of $100.00. However, Item 1, if accepted, would

make the Material Internal Charge to be less than zero. Therefore, an error message is

displayed, and you must either change the Freight or the Item 1 Charges to be able to commit

the Order Header.

Freight-In Charges and Costs

eSTELquote provides for the entry of Freight-In Charge and Cost lines, which are then maintained by the

system throughout the Sales Order cycle. Refer to the eSTELquote manual for further details.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

8. ADD-ON AND AUTOMATIC COSTS

OVERVIEW

Cost Attributions are used to cost a transaction Item. Each Billing Item can have up to 99 costs set as

Internal and/or External Costs.

Internal Costs are used to record various types of inventory, administration, production, sales or warehouse

costs against Orders so that Order profitability can be determined.

External Costs are used to record out of pocket expenses incurred in the purchase of material or services

required to fulfill a customer’s Order requirements.

Add-on Costs

When the Order is entered, some costs are already known or anticipated based on the Salesperson’s

negotiation with the customer or suppliers, or by the material selected for reservation to the Order. These

costs can be manually added to the Order so that Order profitability can be estimated.

Until the Order is invoiced, no accounting transaction for Order costs takes place. When the Order Item is

invoiced, the Add-On Costs are copied to the Invoice where you can change them based on the invoiced

quantities, so that the true profitability of the Order can be calculated. These Costs are then used to update

the costing for the Order and to create Inventory Cost Reconciliation records for those costs that are

External.

Billing Item

Internal Costs

(calculated automatically and

entered manually)

External Costs

(entered manually -

created automatically for Freight)

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 160

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Restrictions

You cannot use Charge Code 3 for Add-On Costs as it is reserved by the system for the automatic

Freight calculation.

You cannot use Charge codes 1 to 9 on the Internal Attribution as they are reserved by the system for

the Automatic Costing.

Automatic Costs

Automatic Costing creates Attribution records without the need for calling up the Cost Attribution Entry

screen. You can view the results of both the Internal and External Costing, by calling up the

corresponding Cost Attribution screen. All External Costs create Inventory Cost Reconciliation records.

You can restrict access to the Cost Attribution screen in Sales Order Entry through the Display Cost field

in the User Group Information table.

In Quotation and Order Entry, the Product Installation Option CST=X controls whether the Average,

Corporate Average or Specific Cost is used by the Automatic Costing function.

In Transfer Order and Invoice Entry, the costs are always based on actual Inventory Costs.

Restriction

You can view the Costs Attributions created by the Automatic Costing function but you cannot access

and modify them.

Product Installation Options

The Product Installation Options, CNT=X, allows you to cost Invoice Entries for non-Tag Master

Required products when the reserved Product Item On-Hand Quantity is zero, using the Average Cost

(retrieved based on the CST=X PIO).

o If the reserved Product Item On-Hand Quantity is zero, the Inventory Reservations table is

scanned for the first Return-to-Stock Reservation for the Product Item and the cost of that Return-

to-Stock Reservation is used.

If no Return-to-Stock Reservation exists in the Inventory Reservations table, then the Average

Cost is used (retrieved based on the CST=X PIO Option).

o If the reserved Product Item On-Hand Quantity is zero, the Invoice Item is costed using the

Average Cost (retrieved based on the CST=X PIO). The Sales Profit and the Inventory Cost to

be relieved are then computed using the same Cost.

The Product Installation Option WHS=X controls the Warehouse to be used for the Average Cost

calculation.

The Product Installation Option UBC=X controls the use of the Product Master Balance table to cost

the Unallocated Balance on an Order Item.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 161

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Product Installation Option CST=X controls the method of costing used for Specific Inventory

Reservations.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 162

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

COST ATTRIBUTION ENTRY SCREEN

Add-On Costs are entered using the Cost Attribution standard program that allows you to review the

automatically created costs as well as add and change Add-On Costs. It is called from Quote Entry, Sales

and Transfer Order Entry, Invoice Entry and the Invoice Cost Adjustment program.

The Cost Attribution Entry screen is accessed using the action bar option Cost, when called from within

the transaction, or as a stand-alone program when entering an Invoice Cost Adjustment.

The entry screen always defaults to the External Cost Entry format. You can switch the screen to access

the Internal Costs by pressing <F8>. This displays the Internal Cost Entry format at which point the

action bar option is changed to External allowing you to toggle between the two using the <F8> key.

External Cost Attribution Entry

Type N ACME FAB External Costs SO No PHI- 618- 1

Bar Angle ASTM A36 Sls Cat WS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Bal 25 PCS Msr 500 ' Wgt 1595 LBS

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount Vendor Ex Rt

Brh-PO No Rcvr No Vendor Ref No Desc

3 1.2858 CWT 1595 LBS 20.51 3040 V .77770000 CD

PHI

2 CTL 1.0000 CWT 1595 LBS 15.95 1030

PHI- 150- 1 69000- 1 RCTY-167890-950615-152 Cut to length Cost

4 .2000 CWT 1595 LBS 3.19 1010

PHI- 1030- 1 889424 Invoice CT-15893 Packing Cost

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount Vendor Ex Rt

PO No Rcvr No Vendor Ref No Desc

1-Internal

External Cost Attribution Entry screen

Action Bar Action

Internal Switches the display to show the Internal Costs calculated automatically and/or

entered manually.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 163

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Ch Item Sales

Category

The Charge number for the Cost Attribution.

PWC Processing

Work

Center Ref

If the entered Charge number has a Charge Type of

P-Processing then you must enter a valid

Processing Center.

Cost Rate The Attribution Cost Rate.

Rate U/M Based on

the

Product

Valid UM The Attribution Cost Rate UM.

Quantity Item The Cost Quantity against which the Rate is

applied to compute the Cost Amount. This defaults

to the balance of the Billing Quantity from the

Billing Item screen. For LOT costs, no Quantity

or Qty UM can be entered.

Qty U/M Item The Cost Quantity Unit of Measure. This defaults

to the inventory quantity Unit of Measure

applicable to the product sold.

Cost Amount Display The Cost Amount for the attribution based on the

current Balance of Quantity on Order. This is

calculated from the Rate, Quantity and Unit of

Measure fields.

Vendor Vendor Ref The Vendor number to whom the cost is to be paid

for External Cost Attributions. A Vendor Look-Up

is provided in this field.

The Exchange Type and the Exchange Rate are

displayed next to the Vendor’s number if his

Currency is different than the Base Currency.

The Exchange Rate defaults from the Currency

table, and the Type defaults to V-Variable. You

can change it to F-Fixed if you wish to modify the

rate.

Brh Item Shp

Brh

Branch Ref The Purchasing Branch to which the Cost

Attribution applies. The Purchasing Branch is

passed to the Cost Reconciliation record at time

of update.

PO-Itm Optional The Purchase Order number and Item number to which

the Cost Attribution applies. They are passed to

the Cost Reconciliation record at time of update.

The <F9> Look-Up key is available to view the

Purchase Order numbers and Item numbers.

Rcvr-Itm Optional The Receiver number and Item number on which

processed or purchased material was received.

This is provided to cross-reference the Inventory

Cost Reconciliation records for the transaction.

For Direct Shipment Purchase Order Reservations, a

Receiver reference number is assigned in Invoice

Update so that this number can be used to

reference the Vendor’s Invoice.

Vendor Ref No. Optional The Vendor’s reference number (Probill) on which

the material was shipped or the service rendered.

This is used to cross-reference Inventory Cost

Reconciliation records. Refer to the ‘Invoice

Update’ chapter of the Invoicing manual for

details.

Cost Description Optional A user-entered description of the cost for cross-

reference purposes.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 164

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Internal Cost Attribution Entry

Type N ACME FAB Internal Costs SO No PHI- 618- 1

Bar Angle ASTM A36 Sls Cat WS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Bal 25 PCS Msr 500 ' Wgt 1595 LBS

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount

1 16.0000 CWT 1595 LBS 255.20

10 1.0000 CWT 1595 LBS 15.95

12 PO 65.0000 HRS 3 HRS 65.00

Ch PWC Cost Rate U/M Quantity U/M Cost Amount

1-External

Internal Cost Attribution Entry Screen

Action Bar Action

External Switches the display to show the External Costs calculated automatically and/or

entered manually.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Ch Item Sales

Category

The Charge code for the Cost Attribution.

PWC Processing

Work

Center Ref

If the entered Charge number has a Charge Type of

P-Processing then you must enter a valid

Processing Center.

Cost Rate The Cost Rate for the Attribution. If a

Processing Work Center is entered, the Cost rate

defaults from the Processing Work Center Rate and

can be overridden.

Rate U/M Based on

the

Product

The Cost Rate UM for the Attribution. If a

Processing Work Center is entered, the Cost rate

Unit of Measure defaults from the Processing Work

Center Rate Unit of Measure and can be overridden.

Quantity Item The Cost Quantity against which the Rate is

applied to compute the Cost Amount. This defaults

to the balance of the Billing Quantity from the

Billing Item screen. For LOT costs, no Quantity

or Qty UM can be entered.

Qty U/M Item The Cost Quantity Unit of Measure. This defaults

to the inventory quantity Unit of Measure

applicable to the product sold.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 165

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Cost Amount Display The Cost Amount for the attribution based on the

current Balance of Quantity on Order. This is

calculated from the Rate, Quantity and Unit of

Measure fields.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 166

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

AUTOMATIC COSTING

The basic costing of Quotations, Orders and Invoice entries is automatic, based on the Charge codes and

Reservations made on the transaction. To these automatically calculated costs you can add the additional

External and Internal Cost Attribution costs described in the Cost Attribution section.

The various types of automatic costs created for Material, Processing, Freight and Administration Costs

are created as Internal Costs under pre-determined Charge numbers.

The following is a list of the Charges numbers reserved by the system to create the Internal Attribution:

Chg Type of Cost

Total Material Costs

Based on Specific or Average Costs

1 Inventory Material Cost

6 Inventory Processing Cost

7 Inventory Freight Cost

8 Inventory Other Cost

Value Added Costs

2 Processing Work Center Cost

3 Freight Cost computed from OBF or from cost rate on Header

4 Administrative Cost

Invoicing Costs

5 Invoice Late Charge

9 Direct Shipment Other Cost

The main features provided are:

If a transaction Item is modified (Product Item Pieces, Quantity or Weight are changed), new costs

are automatically computed and saved with the Item. This provides on-going information about the

profitability of the Item and the total transaction. If the costs have changed to such an extent that the

profit on the Order is no longer satisfactory, then the Salesperson can take steps to either refuse the

change or modify the selling price so that the Order profitability is maintained.

No re-cost takes place when you call the Transaction Header or Item unless a change that affects the

cost was done.

The Automatic Costing function can be triggered at any time using the Recost action bar option from

the Transaction Header screen. This allows you to review the transaction profits based on the most

up to date Inventory Costs.

The Automatic Costing function can be triggered to re-cost the open Invoices using a selection entry

program or, based on the CST=X Product Installation Option, while running the Invoice Edit Reports.

This ensures that the Invoices have the most up to date Inventory Costs at update time.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 167

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The changes to the cost are reflected on the Order Bookings report in the Changed Orders section.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 168

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

MATERIAL COSTS

The costs of Inventory Reservations are normally the largest components of cost on any Order Item.

However, they are subject to frequent changes based on new receipts and inventory production.

Material Costs are created as Internal Costs on the Item’s Cost Attribution record and contain the Charge

code, the Quantity, the Cost Rate UM and the Amount of the cost.

When costing the Material, the system uses Charge line 1, 6, 7 and 8 to represent the different Inventory

Costs. The Break Out option set at Inventory Receiving time affects the different Inventory Costs as

follows:

If the Break Out option is No at receiving time then:

o Charge code 1 represents the Material Landed Cost. This is the costs incurred at time of material

receipt. It includes the cost of the material as well as any other costs, such as Processing, Freight

and Other costs at receiving time.

o Charge codes 6, 7, and 8 represent the Processing, Freight and Other costs added to the material

after it has been received.

If the Break Out option is Yes at receiving time then:

o Charge code 1 represents the Material Cost portion only.

o Charge codes 6, 7 and 8 represent the Processing, Freight and Other costs incurred before and

after receiving the material.

The Cost Rate represents the pro-rated cost per unit of quantity to be billed to the customer so that the

effect of scrap and over/under reservations are taken into account.

The Material Costs are broken down and stored by the Cost Attribution calculation program into the

components of the different types of possible Cost Allocation:

Specific Inventory Reservations

Non-Specific Reservations

Buyout Costs (eSTELquote only)

Purchase Order Reservations

Unallocated Balance (the difference between the Billed quantity and all

other types of reservations entered for the Item)

These components allow for more accurate costing based on the type of Cost Allocation, and provide the

ability to analyze these costs for management reporting.

The objective of the Automatic Costing is to provide a meaningful cost that represents the mixture of

material that can be applied to the Order and recognizes that although an Order can be over or under

reserved, there must always be a cost that represents the quantity of material sold.

Specific Inventory Reservations Cost

The costs of any and all Specific Inventory Reservations are added together and a Cost Attribution under

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 169

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Charges 1, 6, 7 and 8 are created. The method of costing is controlled by the Product Installation Option

CST=X.

All Specific Inventory Reservations are costed in the same way for all Orders depending on the option

chosen.

Average Costing

The Average Cost of the reserved product is obtained from the Product Master Balance table. The

reserved Dimension is matched to the appropriate Standard Dimension to find the corresponding Product

Master Balance record.

Example: Sold BA 2214 36 15’, Reserved BA 2214 CQ 40’ in Whs 99 – the cost of the reservation

would be based on the Average Cost of the BA 2214 CQ Product Master Balance for the 40’

Standard Dimension.

Average Costs are only used in Quotation, Sales Orders and Transfer Orders and, based on the Product

Installation Option CNT=X, may be used at Invoice Entry for non-Tag Master Required Product.

Corporate Average Costing

The Corporate Average Cost of the reserved product is obtained from the Company Standard Dimension

table. The reserved Dimension is matched to the appropriate Standard Dimension to find the

corresponding Company Standard Dimension record.

Example: Sold BA 2214 36 15’, Reserved BA 2214 CQ 40’ in Whs 99 – the cost of the reservation

would be based on the Corporate Average Cost field of the BA 2214 CQ 40’ Company

Standard Dimension record.

Corporate Average Costs are only used in Quotation, Sales Orders and Transfer Orders.

Specific Costing

The Specific Cost of the reserved Items is obtained by totaling the Value of the Specific Inventory

Reservations made, and dividing by the Quantity reserved to obtain the Specific Cost of the reservations.

Example: Sold BA 2214 36 15’, Reserved BA 2214 CQ 30’ in Whs 99 – the cost of the reservation

would be the cost of the BA 2214 36 30’ Whs 99 Product Detail record.

If there is a mix of Product Groups, Sizes, Dimensions and Warehouses reserved to the same Item, the

Cost Allocation is obtained for each product individually and then the Total Reservation Cost is divided

by the Total Reserved Quantity to arrive at the Material Cost per Unit of Measure.

Example: A billing quantity of 10,000 LBS is entered and a mixture of non-Specific (5,000 LBS) and

Specific Reservations (3,000 LBS) is made that total 8,000 LBS. Since this is insufficient to

meet the Order requirement, a calculation is done to determine the Average Cost of the 5,000

LBS plus the Average Cost of the 3,000 LBS reserved then the difference of 2,000 LBS is

costed at the Branch Average Cost for the product sold. The three Values are calculated and

then divided by the total Quantity Ordered to get an Average Cost per Quantity Ordered.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 170

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

This calculated Average Cost is then used for Order valuation and costing purposes until the

Order is billed.

Non-Specific Inventory Reservations

If you set the CST=X Product Installation Option to A-Average or S-Specific, then the cost of non-

Specific Reservations is obtained from the Product Master Balance table for the Group, Size, Grade,

Gauge, Dimension and Warehouse of the reservation.

Example: Sold CRC .0454 Ga CQ 2.5”, Reserved non-Specific CRC 18 Ga, 48”, DQ material – the cost

of the reservation would be based on the Average Cost of the CRC 18 Ga 48” DQ product.

If you set the CST=X Product Installation Option to C-Corporate, then the cost of the non-Specific is

obtained from the Corporate Standard Dimension table for the Group, Size, Grade, Dimensions of the

reservation.

Example: Sold CRC .0454 Ga CQ 2.5”, Reserved non-Specific CRC 18 Ga, 48”, DQ material – the cost

of the reservation would be based on the Corporate Average Cost field of the CRC 18 Ga 48”

DQ Company Standard Dimensions record.

Purchase Order Reservation Costs

The Purchase Order Costs are used at Invoice Entry for Direct Shipment Items.

When a Sales Order is invoiced and it has a Direct Shipment Purchase Order Reservation against it, the

Purchase Order costs are re-valued based on the current Exchange Rate and External Cost Attribution

records are created.

If the Purchase Order Header Exchange Rate Type is F-Fixed, then the Purchase Order Exchange Rate is

used. If the Purchase Order Exchange Rate is V-Variable, then the Currency code is obtained from the

Vendor table and the Currency’s current Exchange Rate is used instead.

The Exchange Rate is stored in the Cost Attribution record and is transferred to the Inventory Cost

Reconciliation records when the Invoice Entry is updated.

For each Purchase Order Cost, an External Cost Attribution is created. The External Cost Attributions are

created using Charge code 1 for Material, 2 for Processing, 3 for Freight and 9 for Other costs. The

Purchase Order number, Item number, Vendor number, Cost type, Rate and Rate Unit of Measure are

copied from the Purchase Order to the Invoice Entry Cost Attributions. The Quantity of the Direct

Shipment Reservation is moved to the Attribution along with the current Exchange Rate and then the cost

of the Attribution is calculated, converted to Base Currency and added to the Order Totals. You can then

add additional reference information about the cost such as Vendor Reference numbers, Receiver number

and Description to the Attribution record as required.

When the Invoice is updated, these costs are passed to the Inventory Cost Reconciliation table (if that

function is used) and to the General Ledger.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 171

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Buyout Costs

Buyout Costs are applicable only to eSTELquote. Buyout Costs are used where Material needs to be

purchased but since the customer has not approved the quotation, no Purchase Order has been created yet.

If only part of the Item is to be bought outside, then the Order or Quote Item cost is pro-rated based on the

amount of the Buyout quantity in relation to the other Reservation or Purchase Reservation quantities.

Example: A Quotation for 10,000 LBS of High Strength Plate requires the purchase of 4,000 LBS of

Plate. A Buyout Cost of 35.00/CWT is entered and a Specific Reservation of 6,000 LBS of

plate with an Average Cost of 33.50/CWT is made from inventory. The Total cost of the

Quote Item would be a Specific Reservation cost of 2,010.00 (6,000 X 33.50) + a Buyout

cost of 1,400.00 (4,000 X 35.00) for a total of 3,410.00.

The Buyout costs are replaced with Purchase Order Reservation costs when the quotation is approved if

the Buyout reservation is converted to a Purchase Order. If the Buyout is not converted to a Purchase

Order when the Sales Order is created from the Quotation, the Sales Order is costed using the Average,

Corporate Average or Specific Costs.

Un-Reserved Orders

If there are no Inventory Reservations of any kind on the Order Item, the Item is costed automatically

based on the Product Balance Average or the Corporate Average Cost of the product sold depending on

the CST=X Product Installation Option.

Example: Sold PLT, 6”, A-36, 36” X 72” but made no reservation on the Item.

If CST=A-Average, the cost of the Item would be calculated from the Average Cost of the

6” PLT A-36 Product Master Balance table for the Branch that sold the Item and using the

Standard Dimension that matches the Dimension sold.

If CST=C-Corporate, then the cost of the Item would be based on the Corporate Average

Cost field of the 6’ PLT A-36x72 Corporate Standard Dimension record.

The UBC=X Product Installation Option allows you to suppress the costing of the un-reserved balance if

required.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 172

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PROCESSING COSTS

Processing Costs are automatically applied to each Item that has Processing Charges.

If there is a Processing Charge entered in the Charge Table for the Item (either an External or Included

Charge), then an Internal Cost Attribution is automatically created for Processing using the same Charge

code used for the Processing Charge. The costs are based on the Processing Work Center’s Setup Cost

plus the Rate per Unit of Measure for the quantity processed.

The Processing Costs are carried to the Invoice Entry based on the Inv Costing Req’d field of the

Processing Work Center. If the field is set to Y-Yes, the cost is carried to the Invoice. If the field is N-

No, the Cost Attribution is only used to cost the Quotation and Order Item.

If the Order Item Pieces, Quantity or Weight are changed after initial entry, or if any of the Charges are

changed, the Processing Cost is re-computed.

If the Processing Work Center has a Setup cost (this is a LOT amount) plus a Rate per Unit of Measure,

the Cost Attribution is created as a LOT Charge so that there is no discrepancy between the Amount of

the Charge and the Cost Rate and Quantity shown.

Example: A PWC is set up with a 150.00 Setup Cost plus a variable rate of 0.25/CWT. For a costing

quantity of 15,000 LBS, the Cost Attribution would be calculated as 150.00 + 15,000 x .025

but is shown on the Cost Attribution as a Charge Rate of 525.00/LOT and an amount of

525.00.

A second PWC is set up with no Setup Cost but a variable rate of 0.25/CWT. For a costing

quantity off 15,000 LBS, the Cost Attribution would be calculated and shown on the screen

as 15,000 LBS @ 0.25/CWT for an amount of 375.00.

The two Product Installation Options, PCN=X and PCT=X allow you to avoid the automatic generation

of a Cost Attribution line when you add a Processing Charge line to a Credit Note or a Transfer Order.

PWC Processing Cost Per Theoretical Weight

The Sales Order cycle standard costing program has the ability to compare the Cost Rate of the

Production Work Center with a pre-defined Cost per Theoretical Weight and apply the higher of the two

when costing a PWC charge on a Quote, Sales or Transfer Order or Invoice Item.

Procedure to Calculate PWC Cost

When a PWC processing charge is entered on a Quote, Sales Order or Invoice Item, the equivalent

processing cost value is calculated as follows:

The Product’s theoretical weight is multiplied by the Cost per Theoretical Weight in the PWC

reference table, to yield the Theoretical Processing Cost per Unit.

The Theoretical Processing Cost per Unit is then compared to the Cost Rate/UM in the PWC table.

The higher of the two becomes the cost rate of the PWC. The cost rate unit of measure remains the

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 173

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

same one as the Cost Rate/UM field in the PWC.

The PWC cost rate is then multiplied by the applicable cost Quantity.

Finally, the Setup Cost (if any) is added to get the processing cost value.

Example

Consider the following setup:

(i) Theoretical Weight of Pipe : $1.50 LBS/FT

(ii) PWC Cost per Theo Wgt : $1.00 / [LBS/FT]

(iii) PWC Cost Rate/UM : $1.25 / CUT

The PWC cost rate is found as follows:

Multiply (i) and (ii) to get the Theoretical Processing Cost per Unit:

1.50 LBS/FT * $1.00 / [LBS/FT] = $1.50

Compare the Theoretical Processing Cost per Unit to (iii) to get the PWC cost rate that will

be used:

PWC cost rate = $1.50 / CUT

Changing the Item

If you make a change to the Product Item or to the Charge table, the re-costing function updates the PWC

cost based on the new information (e.g., new Theoretical Weight, Unit of Measure, PWC Cost Quantity).

Applicability of the Cost per Theoretical Weight Feature

The Cost per Theoretical Weight feature is only applicable when a rate greater than zero is set as the Cost

per Theoretical Weight in the PWC.

Packaging and Skid Costing

Product Installation Options PKA=ZZ and SKA=ZZ control the Packaging and Skid costing in the Sales

Order Cycle.

The assumption is that the reserved Product Item costs do not include the Packaging and/or Skid costs,

and, therefore, the Packaging and Skid reference files are used to compute an added cost. If the Skid

and/or Packaging costs are added to the Product Items at production time, you should not set these

Product Installation Options to avoid double costing.

NOTE: If a Tag’s Skid or Packaging code is changed after it has been reserved to an Invoice, then

the Invoice Costing must be triggered by calling up the Invoice Entry or using the Invoice

Edit ‘Recost’ function, for the new cost to take effect.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 174

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Packaging Cost

If the Product Installation Option is set, a Packaging Cost is created for each Item as follows:

The Packaging code is verified for each reserved Product Item:

o If a packaging code exists, then the corresponding packaging cost amount is computed based on

the Packaging Cost Basis code:

G – the reserved Product Item Gauge is used

N – the reserved Item Pcs, Qty, Wgt, Cost and Cost UM are used

The total Packaging cost amounts for all reserved Product Items are added to create an Internal Cost

Attribution record with the total amount and a LOT cost UM.

The Cost Attribution record is created using the Sales Allocation Charge code defined by the Product

Installation Option.

The Packaging Cost Attribution cannot be changed manually. It is updated whenever the reservations

are changed and the transaction is re-costed.

Skid Cost

If the Product Installation Option is set, a Skid Cost is created for each Item as follows:

The Skid Type is verified for each reserved Product Item:

o If a Skid Type exists, then the skid cost is computed based on the reserved Item Qty, Wgt and the

corresponding skid cost, Cost UM.

The total Skid cost amount for all reserved Product Items are added to create an Internal Cost

Attribution record with the total amount and a LOT cost UM.

The Cost Attribution is created using the Sales Allocation defined by the Product Installation Option.

The Skid Cost Attribution cannot be changed. It is updated whenever the reservation records are changed

and the transaction is re-costed.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 175

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FREIGHT COSTS

Refer to the ‘Freight Charges and Costing’ chapter for details.

8. Add-On and Automatic Costs Page 176

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS

An Administration Cost is automatically computed when the Adm Cost Reqd field of the eSTELPLAN

Company file is set to A, R or V or when there are records in the Branch Administrative Cost file. The

Sales & Costing Info chapter of the Reference manual details how the Quotation, Order and Invoicing

Costing programs use the Branch Administrative Cost file vs the eSTELPLAN Company file to create the

Administrative Cost. In all cases, the Administrative Cost is created as Other Internal Cost using Charge

code 4.

If the Administration Cost Required is set to A-Amount/CWT Shipped, the costing program uses the

Administration Cost Rate and Rate Unit of Measure from the Company eSTELPLAN table or the Branch

Administrative Cost file and the Item Weight to create the Administration Cost Attribution record.

If the Administration Cost is set to R-% Rate of Total Cost, the costing program uses Administration Cost

Rate % from the Company eSTELPLAN table or the Branch Administrative Cost file and the Total Item

Cost to create the Administration Cost Attribution. In this case the Administration Cost Rate Unit of

Measure is LOT.

If the Administration Cost is set to V-% of Total Sales, the costing program uses Administration Cost

Rate % from the Company eSTELPLAN table or the Branch Administrative Cost file and the Total Item

Sales (internal amount) to create the Administration Cost Attribution. In this case the Administration

Cost Rate Unit of Measure is LOT.

If the Administration Cost is set to N-No, no Administration Cost is computed.

If the transaction Item Weight changes after initial entry, the Administration Cost is automatically re-

computed.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

9. REMARKS PROCESSING

OVERVIEW

There are a number of different types of Remarks that can be added to Quotes, Sales Orders, Transfer

Orders, Bills of Lading and Invoices. These Remarks can be defaulted from the Customer/Ship-To

Remarks or the Material Specification Standards Remarks files. They can also be copied in using Remark

Templates. Finally, they can be entered manually as individual lines of Remarks.

Each type of Remark is designated for a specific purpose on the transaction to which it is copied/entered and

the Remarks are printed or displayed selectively according to the form, report or inquiry that uses them.

The function draws on the Customer/Ship-To Remarks, the Material Specification Remarks and the

Remark Templates table to copy these base Remarks to the transaction. The Remarks can be used as is,

or modified for processing reference on a particular transaction.

Access to the different Remarks functions is provided at the Header and Item levels. The Remarks are

grouped into three different classes.

Marketing Remarks (Header level – Only in Quote Entry)

Header Remarks (Header level)

Item Remarks (Item level)

Each type of Remark within each function has 99 lines available. The Remarks are displayed in lines of 50

characters within a window of 20 lines for ease of entry and review.

The Remarks are entered and edited using the standard Remarks Entry functions described in the User’s

Guide.

Restrictions

The ‘Print screen’ function with <Shift 11> cannot be used when in a Remark or Remark Template

Entry screen.

The following page shows a flowchart of all the Header and Item Remark Types and specifies where they

can be entered or modified, and on which forms they are printed.

9. Remarks Processing Page 178

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Header and Item Remark Types flowchart

Printed on

Quote

Int

Quote

Ext

SO/TO

Order

Sales

Ack

Work

Order

Prod

Wk Ord

BLLoad

Ship

Shpg

Order

Entered in

Cus Rmks

file

Order

EntryBL Invoice InvoiceQuote

Entry

A. Global

E. Test Cert

H. Header

M. Marketing

R. Pricing

S. Shipping

H

E

A

D

E

R

R

E

M

A

R

K

S

Q. Quote

I

T

E

M

R

E

M

A

R

K

S

I. Invoicing

D. Description

O. Order

P. Production

T. Tag

W. Wrk Ord

Prod

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y

Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

Y Y Y/N

Y

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

SO/TO

YY/N

Y

B. BL Detail

F. BL Summary

BL

Summary

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

Y

9. Remarks Processing Page 179

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

MARKETING REMARKS

The Marketing Remarks are used for reference only in situations where a salesperson or entry person

requires additional reference information about the Customer’s special needs. They are not copied to the

transaction but are available as an inquiry as the transaction is entered.

The Marketing and Pricing Remarks are only available in eSTELquote using the Rmks action bar option.

They are used in conjunction with the eSTELprice Material Price Book and Customer Pricing information

to provide price related information about the customer and their products.

9. Remarks Processing Page 180

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

HEADER REMARKS

These Remarks are called Header Remarks because they apply only to the entire Order, or Bill of Lading

transaction Header level rather than to the individual Items.

After you have completed the Order Entry Header, the following action bar is displayed:

1-Items 2-Chg Hdr 3-Hdr Rmks 4-Freight 5-Recost 6-Totals 7-Fax

At this point, you have access to the Header Remarks. From Quote Entry, you would also have access to

the Marketing and Pricing Remarks.

The Header Remarks default automatically from the Customer Ship-To or Customer Remarks based on

the Customer or Ship-To entered upon creation of an Order Header. You can edit them or add additional

lines as required. The Header Remarks are saved with the transaction and printed on the form.

There are four types of Header Remarks used in the Quote and Order Header:

A. Global Alc [Y]

E. Test Cert [Y]

H. Header [Y]

S. Shipping [Y]

There are two additional types of Header Remarks used in the Bill of Lading Header:

B. BL Detail [Y]

E. Test Cert [Y]

F. BL Sum [Y]

S. Shipping [Y]

The Shipping and Test Cert Remarks are copied from the Sales Order to its corresponding Bill of Lading.

Restrictions

In Bill of Lading Entry, you can only access the Test Certificate and the Shipping Remarks. The

Global Allocation Remarks and Header Remarks are not available.

The Header Remarks function is not available in Invoice Entry.

The Product Installation Option PSR=X controls the printing of the Shipping Remarks on the

following Work Order forms:

o Work Order

o Production Work Order

o eSTELpro Work Order

o eSTELman Work Order

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

9. Remarks Processing Page 181

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ITEM REMARKS

The Item Remarks are applied at the transaction Item level. They are used to provide additional product

description, specification or processing information about the ordered product.

After the Item Entry is completed, the following action bar line is displayed:

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Icr 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts A-Tr Req B-Sch

Press the Rmks action bar option to access the Item Remarks screen.

Defaulting Item Remarks

When you enter a Quote or Order Item, the Remarks are defaulted based on how you create the Item.

Item Copied from a Customer Part Specification

If you create the Item by copying a Customer Part Specification record, the Remarks on the Customer

Part Specification default as the Item Remarks in Add mode.

Refer to the eSTELspec manual for details.

Item Created Manually

If you manually create the Item without copying a Customer Part Specification, then the following

Remarks default or can be copied into the Item:

Customer Remarks: They are not defaulted automatically to the Item. However, you can use the Copy

Cus action bar option to select the Remarks to be copied to the Item based on their Type.

Material Specification Standards Remarks: Once you enter and save the Item, the Material

Specification Standards Remarks are automatically copied as the Item Remarks. You can access the Item

Remarks screen to review or modify the Remarks.

The following rules and restrictions apply:

If the Group, Grade and Branch on a Quote, Sales or Transfer Order Item match a Material

Specification Standards entry, then all Selling Type Remarks are automatically copied onto the Item.

If the Group, Grade and Branch code on a Direct Invoice or Credit Note match a Material

Specification Standards entry, then any Selling Type D-Product Description Remarks are

automatically copied onto the Item.

When creating a Customer Part Specification record, all Selling Type Remarks are automatically

copied if the following conditions are satisfied:

o the Group and Grade on the Customer Part Specification match those of a Material Specification

9. Remarks Processing Page 182

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Standards entry, and

o the User’s Branch matches the Branch on the Material Specification Standards record.

To avoid duplicating the Material Specification Remarks on an Order Item, they are not copied in the

following cases:

o If the Order or the Item is created using either the Order or Item Copy function

o If the Item is copied from a Customer Part Specification

o If the Order is created through the eSTELgateway Sales Order Insertion function

9. Remarks Processing Page 183

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ITEM REMARK TYPES

There are seven types of Item Remarks used in eSTELPLAN:

D. Description

I. Invoicing

O. Order

P. Production

Q. Quotation

T. Tag

W. Work Order

The Product Description Remarks and, based on the Product Installation Option RMK=X (in

Shipping), the Order Remarks are copied from the Sales Order Item to its corresponding Bill of

Lading Item.

The Production Description and Invoicing Remarks are copied from the Bill of Lading Item and the

Sales Order Item to their corresponding Invoice Item.

The Production and Work Order Remarks can be viewed and maintained in the eSTELpro Production

Entry program.

The Tag Remark Type is moved in the following cases:

o When copying a Part Specification into a Sales Order Item

o When copying an Order Item into another Item

o When copying an Order into another Order

The Tag Remark is printed on the Finished Tags created and allocated to the Order Item through

Inventory Applications ‘Create Tag’, Inventory Processing, eSTELbarcodes, eSTELpro or

eSTELman, when the Product Installation Option TIF is set to P-Partial or F-Full. When the Product

Installation Option TIF is set to N-No, the Tag remark is not copied and printed onto the Finished

Tags.

Restrictions

In Order Entry, Bill of Lading and Invoicing, the Quotation Remark Type is not available.

In Bill of Lading Entry, only the Product Description Remark Type and, based on the Product

Installation Option RMK=X, the Order Remark Type are available.

In Invoice Entry, only the Product Description and Invoicing Remark Types are available.

Only one line of T-Tag Remarks can be entered per Item. This is required as the Tag Remarks are

moved to the Product Item Description field when a Finished Product is reserved to the Order Item.

9. Remarks Processing Page 184

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

REMARKS ENTRY

The Remarks Entry function is a standard eSTELPLAN function used to enter Header as well as Item

Remarks. The available Remark Types depend on the transaction you are entering.

When you call up the Remarks function, all existing Remarks are displayed by Type. The Type code is

shown on the left for reference in separating the types.

Item Remarks

Typ Remarks

P USE CLASS A MATERIAL AT ALL TIMES

P SURFACE FINISH IS CRITICAL, USE PROTECTORS

P CUSTOMER REQUIRES TEST STRIPS WITH ALL MATERIAL

P THE FOLLOWING TO APPEAR ON ALL MATERIAL AND SHIPPING TAGS

P CUSTOMER CONTRACT NO: 92-44334631

P SPECIFICATION 89-423-24217

W Width Tol: +.003 -.005 Length Tol: + -

W Gauge Tol: +.002 -.002 I.D: 18" O.D: 60"

W SEE CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS FOR CUTTING AND MARKING DETAILS

W EDGES ON CUT PLATE MUST BE GROUND - NO BURRS

1-Copy Cus 2-Change Rmk 3-Review Rmk 4-Copy Tmpl

Item Remarks screen

Action Bar Action

Copy Cus Displays a window to specify the type(s) of Remarks to be copied. A Look-Up is

available for each Remark Type to review the available remarks before copying.

Change Rmk Displays a window to select a specific type of Remarks and then displays a window

listing all Remarks of the selected type to allow changes.

Review Rmk Displays a window to select a specific type of Remarks to be reviewed. No changes are

allowed.

Copy Templ Used to copy a standard Remarks Template in any specified Remark Type.

9. Remarks Processing Page 185

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Copying Customer Remarks

The Copy Cus option from the action bar displays a window to allow you to specify which types of

Remarks you want to copy. The default is Y-Yes for each type. Enter N-No for the types you do not

want to copy.

The selection of Remark Types displayed depends on the calling program (for example, that Quotation

Remarks are not a choice in Order Entry.)

D. Product Description [Y]

I. Invoicing Remarks [Y]

O. Order [Y]

P. Production Remarks [Y]

Q. Quotation [Y]

W. Work Order Remarks [N]

You can use the <F9> Look-Up function to review any Remark Type before copying them to the

transaction.

After you have completed your selection, press <F1> to exit and all the Remarks are automatically

copied. To add other Remarks or to modify existing ones, use the Change Rmk action bar option.

Adding and Changing Remarks

Within the Remarks function, the available types for the program are displayed in a window when you

select the Change Rmk function.

D. Description

I. Invoicing

O. Order

P. Production

T. Tag

W. Work Order

You can use the Up () and Down () arrows to select the Remark Type you wish to change.

Reviewing Remarks

If there are already Remarks on the transaction and they total less than 20 lines, they are all displayed on

the screen as soon as you enter the Remarks function.

If there are more than 20 lines of Remarks, you can use the <F2>/<Shift F2> keys to go forward or

backward, or if you wish to review a specific type of Remark only, you must select the Review Rmk

option from the action bar.

9. Remarks Processing Page 186

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Copying Remark Template

If you wish to use one of the pre-defined Remarks Templates as the basis for Remarks of any type, press

the Copy Tmpl action bar option.

A window is displayed in which you enter the Template to be copied. An <F9> Look-Up is available at

the Remark Template field.

Remark Template...

Enter the Remark Template code you wish to copy. The window for available Remarks types is then

displayed so you can specify where the Template is to be copied.

The template Remarks are then copied to the Type specified and the new Remarks for that type are re-

displayed on the screen.

You can use the Change Rmk action bar option to modify the template or add Remarks as required.

Replacing Remark Prompting Characters

All types of Remarks (Customer/Ship-To, Material Specification Standards and Remark Templates) can

include the special prompting characters indicated by the character string ^^^^.

When a Remark is copied to a transaction, these characters are copied as well. To replace the ^^^

characters with the text to be used for the specific transaction, you must call up the Remark using the

Change Rmk action bar option. Refer to the User’s Guide for more details.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

10. PRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

OVERVIEW

The Production Specifications can be entered on Quotes, Sales Orders or Transfer Orders. They are used to

specify material tolerances and packaging requirements for both Customer and Warehouse reference. They

are printed on both Quote forms and on the Sales Acknowledgement, Sales Order, Work Order, Transfer

Order and Production Work Order forms.

The Specifications window is displayed when you press the Rmk/Spc action bar option in eSTELquote, or

the Specs action bar option in the Order Item Entry screen. There is no automatic prompting for entry of

Specifications. If you do not call up the Specifications Entry function, no Specifications record is created

for the Quote or Order Item.

The Tolerances and Packaging requirements in the Specification window are always displayed in the Base

Unit of Measure. If you are an Imperial based site and you create the Specifications for a Metric based

Order, you have to enter the Imperial Dimensions and Weight values. On the Sales Order and Work Order

Forms, however, the Specifications are printed in Metric Unit of Measure.

When eSTELmill or eSTELspec is installed, you can set up a record for each Customer’s Part number in the

Part Specifications table. Then, if you enter a Quote or a Sales Order using the Customer/Product related

Part Specifications number, the associated Specifications are automatically defaulted on the Specifications

window. Refer to the eSTELspec manual for details.

When you reserve material to a Sales Order, you can have its Chemistry and Physical Properties validated

against the Order Specifications when the VCP=X Product Installation Option is set on the Product Item

Match program <inspim>. You can also authorize the reservation of material that failed the validation if the

PSW=XXXXXX Product Installation Option is set on the Order Entry program <orpord>. Refer to the

Product Item Match Function appendix in the Shipping manual for details.

10. Production Specifications Page 188

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SPECIFICATIONS WINDOW

The window is composed of three sets of Specifications: Tolerances, Packaging requirements and Inventory

Specifications.

When creating Specifications for an Item, the cursor is positioned at the action bar.

While entering the information, you can cancel and exit the Specifications by pressing <F4> or accept it

with <F1>. Each section is accepted individually but when you exit the Specifications window, all sections

are saved.

After each section has been entered, the cursor is positioned at the action bar at the bottom of the screen and

you are in Change mode. You can then modify the Specifications by calling up the section to be modified,

entering the change and accepting the new values by pressing <F1>.

Specifications

Tolerances --- Weight ---

I.D Min OD Max OD Min Max Tolerance

Ga + -

Wdth + -

Lgth + -

Packaging Pcs/Tag 100 Max Skd Wt Skid Type

Specs Min Max Min Max

ROCKB OLSEN

TENS ELONG

YIELD

1-Tolerance 2-Packaging 3-Specs

Specifications Entry window

Action Bar Action

Tolerance Positions the cursor in the Tolerance section and allow to add and change the

applicable fields.

Packaging Positions the cursor in the Packaging section and allow to add and change the

packaging fields.

Specs Positions the cursor in the Specifications section and allow to add and change the

applicable fields.

Tolerances

These fields can be entered based on the type of product being sold. The cursor is positioned on the first

field that is applicable to the product being entered.

10. Production Specifications Page 189

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Tolerances --- Weight ---

I.D Min OD Max OD Min Max Tolerance

20.0000 27.8298 64.3815 1000 10000 Ga + .0030 - .0001

Wdth + -

Lgth + -

You can enter one or two sets of ID/OD Specifications. At least one of the Coil ID’s must match the ID

on the Production Job Header.

Field Name Default Validation Description

I.D Optional The Inner Diameter of the Finished coil. If

entered, it is used in the calculation of the

Min/Max OD and Weight.

Min OD Optional The minimum Outer Diameter of the Finished coil.

The Min OD is used to calculate the Min Weight.

However, you can leave the field empty and allow

it to be calculated based on the Min Weight.

Max OD Optional The maximum Outer Diameter of the Finished coil.

The Max OD is used to calculate the Max Weight.

However, you can leave the field empty and allow

it to be calculated based on the Max Weight.

Min Weight Calculated The minimum weight of the Finished coil.

You can leave the field empty and allow it to be

calculated based on the Min OD.

Max Weight Calculated The maximum weight of the Finished coil. You can

leave the field empty and allow it to be

calculated based on the Max OD.

Ga +/- Optional Gauge Tolerance

Wdth +/- Optional Width Tolerance

Lgth +/- Optional Length Tolerance

If you enter the ID and OD, the corresponding weight is computed.

If you enter the OD only, the weight is computed based on a zero ID.

If you enter the OD and the corresponding weight, the ID is computed.

In other words, the system always computes the field that was left blank. The computation is done as soon

as the line is accepted.

Restrictions

ID, OD and Min/Max can only be entered if the Inventory Organization of the product sold is WT,

such as coil. This information is entered in the Base Unit of Measure.

Gauge Tolerance can only be entered for Gauge Required products.

Width Tolerance can only be entered for Width or Width and Length controlled products (Inventory

Organization WT, WL and WLT).

Length Tolerance can only be entered for Length or Width and Length controlled products (Inventory

Organization L, LT, WL and WLT).

10. Production Specifications Page 190

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Formula Used

The following formula is used to compute the WGT and OD if your base Unit of Measure is Imperial,

based on the corresponding TMW factor from the Group/Grade or Group record.

PIW OD x OD ID x ID x TMW x 0.7854

Where PIW stands for Pound per Inch of width

WGT OD x OD ID x ID x WDTH x TMW x 0.7854

ODPIW

TMW xID x ID

0 7854.

Where OD and ID are in Inches and 0.7854 is a constant.

The following formulas are used to compute the WGT and OD if your base Unit of Measure is Metric,

based on the TMW factor of the corresponding Group/Grade or Group record.

KCW

OD x OD ID x IDx TMW x

1000 7854.

Where KCW stands for Kilogram per Centimeter of width

WGT

OD x OD ID x IDx WDTH x TMW x

1000 7854.

ODKCW x

TMW xID x ID

100

0 7854.

Where OD and ID are in mm and 0.7854 is a constant.

10. Production Specifications Page 191

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Packaging

These fields can be accessed for any product.

Upon selecting this section, the cursor goes to the Packaging field: you MUST enter a valid code or exit

the section with <F4>. The Packaging code is validated against the Packaging table. For eSTELpro, this

code defaults to each Tag produced for the order.

Packaging PC Pcs/Tag 25 Max Skd Wt 2500 Skid Type CFL

Pcs/Tag

The Pieces per Tag is used in eSTELpro and is printed on the forms.

If the balance of pieces on the order is not equal to zero, then the Pieces/Tag field defaults to the

pieces on balance.

If the balance of pieces on the order is equal to zero and the weight on balance is not equal to zero,

then the Pieces/Tag defaults based on the Theoretical Weight per piece. If the Theoretical Weight per

piece cannot be computed, (i.e., ‘WT’ Inventory Organization), then the Pieces/Tag field defaults to

1.

If a Max Skid Weight is entered, the Pieces/Tag is recomputed in one of the following ways:

o Using the Maximum Skid Weight and the On Balance Weight per Piece if the On Balance Pieces

is not equal to zero as follows:

Max Skid Weight / (Balance of Billing Weight / Balance of Pieces ordered).

NOTE: Max Skid Weight and Balance of Billing Weight are in Base Unit of Measure. For a

Metric Order Item when the site is Imperial based, the computation uses the Imperial

equivalent of the Billing Weight entered in a Metric UM. The Max Skid Weight is

assumed to have been entered in an Imperial UM.

Example:

Order for 100 Pcs, 10,000 LBS.

Max Skid Weight, 2,500 LBS.

Pieces per Tag = 2,500 / (10,000 / 100)

= 2,500 / 100

= 25

o Using the Maximum Skid Weight and the Theoretical Weight per piece if the On Balance pieces

are equal to zero.

o Then, the result is compared to the Pieces/Tag value that has been entered and the lower of the

two values is used. If the Pieces/Tag cannot be computed (i.e., ‘WT’ Inventory Organization),

then the Pieces/Tag is left as it has been entered, or if it is zero, then a 1 is used.

If you leave the Pieces/Tag as zero, once you accept the Maximum Skid Weight, a message is

displayed “Do you wish to re-compute Pcs/Tag?” Enter Y if you want the Pieces/Weight field to be

10. Production Specifications Page 192

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

recomputed and updated as per the result or as 1.

When copying a Part Specification into a Sales Order Item or a Material Processing Order, the

Pieces/Tag is recomputed if the Part Specification Type is V-Variable and the Pieces/Tag is not equal

to zero.

o The Product Installation Option RPT=X can be used to control the recomputation of the Pcs/Tag

field when a Customer Part Specification is copied to the item level of the transaction. However,

this option is only applicable if the Customer Part Specification Pcs/Tag field is zero.

Max Skd Wgt

When you enter the Maximum Skid Weight, a check is performed to ensure that it is not less than the

Maximum Weight. If the Maximum Skid Weight is less than the Max Weight a warning message is

displayed “Warning: Max weight exceeds Max Skid Weight”. You can either change the Weight or

continue.

Skid Type

The ‘Skid Type’ defaults based on the Product Installation Option SKD=XXX, but can be overridden

through the Packaging action bar option. If there is no Product Installation Option set up, you must enter

a valid Skid Type. The Skid Type code is validated against the Skid Type table.

10. Production Specifications Page 193

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Specifications

The Specifications are defaulted based on the Specification Template of the Product Group being sold.

The Specification Abbreviation codes from the Template are shown on the screen and you can enter the

Minimum and Maximum range required by the Customer. These Specifications can be out of range of the

Standard Physical Properties as no validation is done.

Specs Min Max Min Max

ROCKB .23 82.00 OLSEN 325.00 350.00

TENS .20 ELONG

YIELD

The Min and Max can both be zero.

The Min or Max can be zero if the other is entered.

If the Specification is neither a Min nor Max, but is simply a reference, it must be entered in the Min

field. The forms printing programs that print Specifications suppress the printing of the heading Min or

Max for Specifications that have only one value entered.

If only some (or none) of the Specification Abbreviations are used for an Order Item, the Abbreviations

are still stored for the Order Item. If additional Specifications need to be added at a later time, they can

be added in Quote or Order Item maintenance or during eSTELpro Production Job Entry. They are

validated against the Specifications table.

If a Specification abbreviation is deleted from the Item and is added back, the Spec Abbreviation is

validated against the Specification Template for the Group to ensure it is a valid Specification for the

Group.

10. Production Specifications Page 194

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

DELETING A PRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS RECORD

You can delete an Item Production Specifications record using <F6>.

A verification is performed to ensure that the Order Item is not on an eSTELpro job. If the Order Item is

on an eSTELpro job, an error message is displayed and the Item Production Specifications record cannot

be deleted.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

11. ORDER LOOK-UP AND INQUIRIES

OVERVIEW

The Order Look-Up and Open Order Inquiry functions are used to provide information about Open as well

as Completed and Manually Deleted Orders.

The following features are provided in the Order Inquiry:

Ability to look up the Orders through a variety of selections

Multiple access methods such as By Customer by Product, By Customer Purchase Order number

Ability to save the Selections by User to allow you to set the selections based on your requirements

and not have to change them every time you access the Inquiry

Ability to modify a selected Sales Order. Access to this function is controlled by User Group.

Order Look-Ups are available within the Order Entry programs at the Header page and Item page.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 196

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER LOOK-UP

The Order Look-Up function <F9> is built into the Order Entry programs. Two Look-Ups are available: a

Header page and a Detail page. These functions provide a listing of Open Orders for the Branch to help in

selecting an Order when the number is not known.

Header Page Look-Up

Order Lookup

Order Customer Name Customer P/O Number IS OS Ty

3 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 2126 AG SH N

7 METAL WORKS INC 92-8695 AG UN N

8 METAL WORKS INC 92-8675 AG UN N

9 METAL WORKS INC 92-8675 AG UN N

10 METAL WORKS INC 92-8926 AG UN N

13 ACME FABRICATION INC VERBAL - JACK AG SH N

17 ACME FABRICATION INC 8459 AG SH N

18 METAL WORKS INC 3136 AG UN B

19 METAL WORKS INC 3136 AG UN R

20 ACME FABRICATION INC 82653 AG SH N

1-Search

Header page Look-Up

Access to the Header page Look-Up is by Selling Branch and Order number. The sequence of Order

Numbers is controlled by the SEQ=X Product Installation Option.

You can select an Order using the Up () or Down () arrows, and then return that number to the Order

Header page to access the Order.

Action Bar Action

Search Used to select a starting Order number for the Look-Up.

The Header Page Look-Up lists Open Orders only. In Order Entry, if you enter a completed or deleted

Order Number, the message “Cannot access completed/deleted order” is displayed. In Order Inquiry, if

you enter a completed or deleted Order Number that hasn’t yet been purged by the system, you get the

Order information as it was prior to the completion or deletion.

The Header Page Look-Up displays the Orders based on the Order Inquiry Option selected and the Order

Types:

Order Inquiry Option Order Types displayed:

SO No S, N, R, B

TO No T

Blnk/Rel B

Order S, N, R, B, T

Item Sts S, N, R, B, T

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 197

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Detail Page Look-Up

The Detail Page Look-Up is available at the Item number field on the Detail Item page and provides a list

in sequence of Item numbers. In Order Entry, it only lists the Order Items that are not completed and not

deleted. If you enter a completed or deleted Order Item number, the message “Cannot access

completed/deleted order item” is displayed. In Order Inquiry, all Order Items are displayed in the Detail

Look-Up, even those that are completed or deleted. Refer to the ‘Completed and Deleted Order Items’

section of this chapter for more details.

Order Item Lookup

Itm Product Description Pieces Quantity Sts

1 Carbon Steel Plate ASTM A36 12 ENT

3/16" (.1875) X 48.0000" X 96.0000" 2941 LBS

2 Expanded Metal ASTM A36 25 HLD

1 1/2" - #16 Flattened X 48.0000" X 96.0000" 800.00 SFT

3 Bar Angle ASTM A36 20 ENT

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 18' 6.75" 1184 LBS

4 Cold Rolled Steel Sheet Commercial Quality 250 RUN

.0359 Nom X 26.7500" X 32.7505" 2228 LBS

1-Search

Detail Page Look-Up

You can select an Item using the Up () or Down () arrows, and then return the Item number to the

Order Detail page to call up the Item.

Action Bar Action

Search Used to select a starting Item number for the Look-Up.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 198

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

OPEN ORDER INQUIRIES

The Open Order Inquiries are used to find Order information using one of the various Order Index access

methods, depending on what information is already known about the Order or Customer.

Order Inquiry Menu

SUMMARY INQUIRY

- by Cus PO

- by IS/Cus

- OS/Cus

- by Cus/Type

ITEM INQUIRY

- by Cus/Prod

- by Cus/Part

- by Product

- by Order

Credit

Hold

Header/Item

Order Detail

- SO No

- TO No

Blanket

Releases

Rdy-to-Ship

Item Status

Cross-Reference

Menu and Program Structure Flowchart

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 199

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Access to Other Branches

Access to other Branches is available by pressing <F7> if you are set up accordingly. You can activate

the <F7> window in the first level of the order inquiries as well as in lower levels where alternate access

options are available.

When pressing <F7>, a window appears on the screen that allows you to change your default Branch (if

you have access to other Branches.) You also have the option of entering an ‘*’. This gives you an

inquiry for all of the Branches subject to other selections made on the alternate access area of the inquiry.

If you opt to change your default Branch, this new Branch remains active, within the different levels of

the individual inquiries, until you exit the current inquiry. Upon doing so, the Branch is reset to your

default Branch.

If you change your default Branch to ‘*’ and the All Branches selection is not appropriate for the inquiry,

you get one of the following error messages: “Cannot enter a wildcard Branch if querying on product” or

“Branch code is invalid or inactive”.

When selecting ‘Blnkt/Rels’ from the Order Inquiry menu, the Branch is the first field but the cursor

defaults to the second field. Use <F7>, as described above, if you need to change the Branch. On the

other hand, when selecting the Brh/Cus action bar option in the Credit Hold Inquiry, the cursor defaults

to the Branch field where you can change the Branch.

Product Installation Option

The PRC=X option set on the Order Entry program <orpord> determines which Price Rate is displayed in

the Order Item Inquiries. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 200

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER INQUIRY MENU

When you select Order Inquiries from the Order Processing menu, the following window is displayed,

showing the available Inquiries. The highlight bar is positioned on the first option. You can pick any

other inquiry by pressing the number or letter beside it, or use the Up () or Down () arrows to select the

inquiry desired.

Order Inquiry

Orders

1. Cus/PO

2. IS/Cus

3. OS/Cus

4. Cus/Type

5. SO No

6. TO No

7. Credit Hld

Items

8. Cus/Prod

9. Cus/Part

A. Blnkt/Rel

B. Product

C. Order

D. Rdy to Shp

E. Item Sts

History

F. Cross Ref

Order Inquiry Menu window

The Inquiry options are described in this chapter except for the three following:

Credit Hld: The Credit Hold Inquiry displays the Orders that are on Credit Hold. For details on

the screen contents and usage, refer to the Customer Inquiries section of the

Accounts Receivable manual.

Rdy to Shp: The Ready-to-Ship Inquiry enables the Shipping department to review the Order

Items to determine which ones can be scheduled for shipment. For more details,

refer to the Shipping manual.

Cross Ref: The Cross Ref Inquiry allows you to cross reference an Invoice number, a Bill of

Lading number, a Sales Order number and the Customer Purchase Order number.

Refer to the ‘Cross-Reference Inquiry’ chapter of this manual for details.

Order Selections

The Order Header Inquiries provide the ability to search for Open Orders using different access methods

depending on the information given by the Customer. Access is provided through a multi-key Order

Index that permits you to browse through the active orders to find and select the order to be viewed.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 201

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

These inquiries are used heavily by Sales and Customer Service personnel to find and then give

Customers a status of their orders.

Item Selections

The Item Inquiries are used to find the details about individual Open Order Items for a customer Order,

using any one of the available Indexes.

Order Indexes

The Order Index and the Order Item Indexes are built dynamically as Orders and Order Items are entered

and processed. These Indexes capture the changes and transactions for an Order or an Order Item. They

are kept on file as long as they are active, for a period of up to 99 days after the last Item has been

completed, so that requests for recent Order information can be handled without having to go through

manual files.

The following options and Order information are accessible through the standard Order Inquiry functions.

Index 1

Branch

Order

Index 2

Customer

Customer PO

Branch

Order

Index 4

Customer

Order Type

Branch

Order

Index 3

Salesperson

Customer

Follow-Up Dt

Branch

Order

Open OrderInquiries

Order Index

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 202

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Index

Inquiry Information

In all cases, the Order Header Inquiry includes the following information:

Order Header detail

Header Remarks

Order Totals

In all cases, the Order Detail Inquiry includes the following information:

Billing Detail

Charge Table

Item Remarks

Production Specifications

Purchase Order Reservations

Inventory Reservations

Cost Attributions

Order Totals

Index 1

Branch

Order No

Item No

Index 2

Customer

Group, Size,

Grade, Gauge.

Dimension

Branch

Order

Index 4

Branch

Blanket Order

Blanket Item

Branch

Release Order

Release Item

Index 3

Customer

Customer Part

Branch

Order

Open Order Item Inquiries

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 203

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SUMMARY INQUIRY SCREEN

From the Order Inquiry menu, each one of the following options calls the Summary Inquiry screen:

Cus/PO

IS/Cus

OS/Cus

Cus/Type

The Summary Inquiry screen is composed of the following three sections:

Heading: Displays the screen title and headings for the fields displayed.

Scrolling Area: Displays the selected Order Headers that match the criteria entered.

Selection: Used to enter the information necessary to scan the Order files.

Summary Inquiry – Blank screen

Following is a sample of the Summary Inquiry screen, this one is accessed from the Cus/PO Inquiry:

Summary Inquiry

Brh Ref No Customer IS OS Ty Cat Src Sts Prt Frt Del Hld

Customer PO Number Customer Rel No Ref Date Total Amount

Cus PO No Rel No

1-Select

Summary Inquiry – blank screen

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 204

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Select Calls the Inquiry Selection window to allow you to specify any exception criteria for

the inquiry.

Order Selections

When you choose the Select action bar option from the Summary Inquiry, the following window is

displayed to allow additional criteria in the search function.

Inquiry Selections

SO Type [Y] N R T

IS [N]

Active/Closed [Y] A

Sales Cat [N]

Source [N]

Job Number [N]

Credit Hold [N]

Production Hold [N]

Shipping Hold [N]

Order Date [N] From To

Due Date [N] From To

Completed Date [N] From To

1-Save

Action Bar Action

Save Allows you to save the Selections you made. The Selections are saved on a User

level, so different Users can set their default Inquiry Selections based on their own

requirements.

You can change the Selections and SAVE them using the Save action bar option. The

scrolling section of the Inquiry is refreshed based on the new Selections. The new

Selections then apply whenever you access the Inquiry, until you change them again.

You can change the Selections but NOT SAVE them. To do so, use <F1> or press

<Enter> to exit the Inquiry Selections window. The Selections are then applied

only to the current session.

Field Name Default Validation Description

SO Type Y-Yes

N, T, R

N, Y Used to select up to four Order Types. By

default, the field is Y-Yes with default Order

Types:

N Normal

R Release

T Transfer

Other valid Types are:

B Blanket

S Standard

If you enter N-No, all Order Types are selected,

regardless of Type.

IS

(Inside Salesperson)

N N, Y To select one Salesperson, enter Y-Yes followed by

the Salesperson code.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 205

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Active/Closed Y-Yes,

A

N, Y Used to select the Order status.

Valid options:

A Only Active Orders are displayed

C Only Completed Orders are displayed (Ord Del

Code = C-Completed or A-Automatically deleted)

M Only Manually Deleted Orders are displayed

(Ord Del Code = M-Manually deleted)

If you enter N-No, Orders are selected regardless

of their Active/Closed code.

Sales Cat N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their Sales

Category. To select a Sales Category, enter Y-Yes

followed by the Sales Category Code.

Source N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their Source

code. To select a Source code, enter Y-Yes

followed by the Source Code.

Job Number N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their Job

number. To select a Job number, enter Y-Yes

followed by the Job number.

Credit Hold N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their Credit

Hold Status. To select a Credit Status, enter Y-

Yes followed by the credit status code.

Valid Options:

A Automatically Released

B Both Automatically and Manually Released

H Credit Held

M Manually Released

N Not reviewed yet

Production Hold N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their

Production Hold Status. To display only the

Production held orders, enter Y-Yes.

Shipping Hold N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their Shipping

Hold Status. To display only the Shipping held

orders, enter Y-Yes.

Order Date N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their entry

date. To select the orders based on their entry

date or a range of entry dates, enter Y. If you

enter a From or To Order Date less than the System

Date and Save the Inquiry Selections, then the

From or To Date is set to System Date the next

time you access the Inquiry.

Due Date N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of their due date.

To select the orders based on their Due Date or a

range of Due Dates, enter Y. If you enter a From

or To Due Date less than the System Date and Save

the Inquiry Selections, then the From or To Date

is set to System Date the next time you access the

Inquiry.

Completed Date N N, Y Orders are displayed regardless of the date they

were completed. To select the orders based on

their Completed Date or a range of Completed

Dates, enter Y. If you enter a From or To

Completed Date less than the System Date and Save

the Inquiry Selections, then the From or To Date

is set to System Date the next time you access the

inquiry.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 206

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Selection Area

Once you access the Summary Inquiry screen from the Order Inquiry menu, the Entry area at the bottom

of the screen is automatically formatted based on your selection.

The Branch defaults to your User Branch but can be changed using <F7>.

You can use the * to match any alphanumerical field. If you do so, you do not have access to the

remaining fields.

If you press <Enter> through a field, the program looks for the records with a blank in this field.

Each option selected from the Order Inquiry menu has a different set of criteria that can be used to select

the Order information to be viewed.

Cus/PO

This option allows you to scan through all Orders for a customer, based on the Customer Purchase Order

number. You can specify one PO No or enter an * for all. If you select one PO No, you can specify one

Release No or enter an * for all.

Cus 1010 PO No * Rel No

1-Select

You can also bypass the Customer number field and enter the required Purchase Order number and

Release number. This is particularly useful when the carrier transporting the shipment knows the

Purchase Order number but not the Company Name.

IS/Cus

This option allows you to scan through all Orders based on one Inside Salesperson code and one

Customer number. You can press <Enter> at the Customer field and see Orders for all Customers. You

cannot use the * in either of these fields.

IS Slspsn DG Customer 1010

1-Select

OS/Cus

This option allows you to scan through all Orders based on one Outside Salesperson code and one

Customer number. You can press <Enter> at the Customer field and see Orders for all Customers. You

cannot use the * in neither of these fields.

OS Slspsn SH Customer 1010

1-Select

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 207

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Cus/Type

This option allows you to view all Orders of a specific type for one Customer. You can press <Enter> at

the Type field and see Orders for all Types. You cannot use the * in either of these fields.

Cus 1020 Order Type B

Order Summary – Completed Sample

Each of the options described above uses a different set of search criteria but provide the same

information about the orders selected.

If no Items are found for the criteria you specified, the following message is displayed: “No records exist

for your selection”. The cursor returns to the first field.

Each order is displayed in a two-line format giving basic information about the Order, the Status Codes

and the current Open Order Amount, including all Charges and Sales Taxes.

Summary Inquiry

Brh Ref No Customer IS OS Ty Cat Src Sts Prt Frt Del Hld

Customer PO Number Customer Rel No Ref Date Total Amount

PHI 20 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AB UN N RA D E Y PP

AS221 25Aug04 12,615.79

PHI 120 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AG UN N WS D E Y PP C

99-2235 15Sep04 8,211.18

PHI 126 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AG UN N WS D E Y PP C

6117901 17Nov04 10,561.97

PHI 128 METAL WORKS AB UN N PS D Y PP

66522-FL 21May04 9,198.70

PHI 366 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AB UN N WS Y PP

MW 654654 30Oct04 75.75

PHI 394 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AG UN N WS D E N PP C

99-2235 30Sep04 12,619.26

PHI 395 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AG UN N WS D E N PP C

6117901 2Aug04 7,708.72

PHI 410 PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY AB UN N DS D N PP C

MW536454 14Jul04 1,008.01

Cus 1050 Order Type N

1-Select 2-Zoom 3-View Items 4-Cross Ref 5-Order 6-CmplSts

Summary Inquiry – completed screen

Action Bar Action

Select Calls the Selection Entry screen to specify any exception criteria for the inquiry.

Zoom Calls the Order Entry Header page in Inquiry mode and displays all the Header page

information. You can also view the Header Remarks, the Order Total and proceed to the

Item screen.

View Items Calls the Sales Order Item Inquiry and displays a list of the Items for the selected

Order.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 208

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Cross Ref Calls the Cross-Reference Inquiry by Order number for the selected Order.

Order Calls the Order Entry program for a selected Order and allows you to change it as

required. Once you exit the Order Entry program, the Order Summary Inquiry screen is

redisplayed and the cursor is positioned at the last selected Order. This allows you

to sequentially maintain multiple Orders based on your selection.

This action bar option is available based on the Order Entry from Inq setup in the

User Group reference table.

ComplSts Calls the Completion Status window and displays any completion/deletion errors

encountered by the Order Completion and Deletion utility for the selected Order.

NOTE: If a completion/deletion error has been recorded in the Order Completion

table for an Order Item, the CmplSts action bar option is also enabled for

this Order in the Order Header Summary Inquiries. The Completion window

displays the “No Header completion/deletion error. Check Items” condition.

To get more details, you have to review the conditions of each Order Item in

the Item Summary Inquiries.

This action bar option is dimmed if there is no completion/deletion error in the Order

Completion table for the selected Order.

When you choose the CmplSts action bar option, the Completion Status window displays the

completion/deletion error recorded in the Order Completion table.

Date: 06/01/2005 Prs Mode: D

Open Invoice exists.

Completion Status window – with Deletion error

Field Description

Date The date the Order Completion and Deletion utility processed the Order.

Process Mode A code to indicate if the Order Header/Item was processed for C-Completion or D-

Deletion.

Condition The completion/deletion error recorded by the Completion and Deletion utility in the

Completion table.

The following fields are displayed in the Summary Inquiry screen:

Field Description

FIRST LINE:

Brh Denotes the Order Branch

Ref No The Order number

Customer The Customer Name

IS The Inside Salesperson

OS The Outside Salesperson

Ty Order Type: N-Normal, B-Blanket, R-Release, T-Transfer, S-Standard.

Cat The Sales Category code for the Order

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 209

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Description

Src The Source code for the Order

Sts The Order Status

Prt A Y/N code to indicate if the Order has been printed or not

Frt The Freight Responsibility code: CG-Charge, CL-Collect, CP-Customer Pick-Up, IN-

Included, PP-Prepaid.

Del A code to indicate if the order has been deleted: A-Automatically deleted by the

Order Deletion Utility (Auto Purge), C-Completed through shipments and invoices, M-

Manually deleted by User, Spaces-Open Order.

Hld A code to indicate the Order Credit, Production and/or Shipping Hold status:

C Order is on Credit Hold

P Order is on Production Hold

S Order is on Shipment Hold

No codes are displayed if the order is not held.

SECOND LINE:

Customer PO

Number

The Purchase Order number given by the Customer at the time of Order Entry, if entered

onto the Order

Customer Rel No The customer’s Release number for this order

Ref Date The date the order was taken

Total Amount The Order Total Amount including taxes

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 210

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES ORDER HEADER INQUIRY SCREEN

The SO No option from the Order Inquiry menu calls the Sales Order Header. This screen is in the same

format as the Order Entry Header screen and includes all screens that are used in the Order Entry function

itself where you can review all related Order Header as well as Item screens. One difference, however, is

the Status Date displayed next to the Status Code. The Status Date indicates when the Order Header

Status was last changed.

The action bar options Chg Hdr, Freight, Recost and Fax are dimmed to prevent access to any of the

fields.

For a Release Order, the corresponding Blanket Order number is displayed on the second line.

Type R Sales Order Header SO No PHI- 132

Blanket: Brh PHI Order No 131

Sold-to 1050 Ship-to 1

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY

242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 2222 rue St-Denis

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19022

Slspsn IS-SW OS-SW Frt Resp CG CHG Dlv Mth CC

Trm Pymt 3 Cry V 1.00000000 Frt Charge 2.0000/CWT

Sts ENT 10/28/04 Due Date 11/11/04 Frt Cost 2.0000/CWT

Prn Hold N Order Date 10/28/04 Vendor 1070 V 1.00000000

Ship Hold N Wrk Ord Dt 10/28/04 Ship Via ALCOA

Cr Hold N- Promise Dt asap Route-Stop 9- 2

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS FOB Pt OUR WHSE

Cus PO No 233 Tx Rgn Apl Licence No

Release No 21 1 IN E R423524634

Job Number 2 CAQUE E

Sales Cat WS Source ST 3 NT3 E

Bko Alwd Y Metric N Mail Y 4 ILCKCH A

Test Cert Chem Y Phy Y Typ O Shp 3 Inv 3 Frm Prt N Ack Prt N

1-Items 2-Chg Hdr 3-Hdr Rmks 4-Freight 5-Recost 6-Totals 7-Fax/Eml/Eml

Sales Order Header Inquiry screen

Action Bar Action

Items Displays the Item screen where you can call up an existing Item.

Hdr Rmks Displays all Header Remarks entered for the Order. The action bar options Copy Cus,

Change Rmk and Copy Tmpl are dimmed. You can only review the Remarks.

Totals Calls the Order Totals window and displays the totals for the Order. The action bar

is dimmed and not available if there are no items on the Order.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Status Date N N The Date the Order Header Status was last changed.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 211

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ITEM INQUIRY SCREEN

Each of the following options from the Order Inquiry menu calls the Item Inquiry screen.

Cus/Prod

Cus/Part

Product

Order

The screen is divided into the following three sections:

Heading: Displays the screen title and headings for the fields displayed.

Scrolling Area: Displays the selected Order Items that match the criteria entered.

Selection: Used to enter the information necessary to scan the Order Item files.

Item Inquiry – Blank Screen

Following is a sample of the Item Inquiry screen, this one called from the Cus/Prod Inquiry:

Item Inquiry

Cust/Prod Part Pcs Qty T Sts B SC Due/Amt

Cus Grp Size Grd Dim

1-Select

Item Inquiry – blank screen

Action Bar Action

Select Calls the Order Item Selections window to allow you to specify any exception criteria

for the inquiry.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 212

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Selections

Once you choose the Select action bar option, the following Order Item Selections window is displayed to

provide additional criteria to the search function.

Order Item Selections

Order Type [Y] N R T

IS [N]

Active/Closed [Y] A

Sales Cat [N]

Source [N]

Unprt BKO only [N]

Due Date [N] From To

Completed Date [N] From To

1-Save

Order Item Selections window

Action Bar Action

Save Allows you to save the Selections you made. The Selections are saved on a User

level, so different Users can set their default Inquiry Selections based on their own

requirements.

You can change the Selections and SAVE them using the Save action bar option. The

scrolling section is refreshed based on the new Selections. The new Selections

then apply whenever you access the inquiry, until you change them again.

You can change the Selections but NOT SAVE them. To do so, use <F1> or press

<Enter> to exit the Inquiry Selections window. The Selections are then applied

only to the current session.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Unprt Backorder only N N, Y Allows you to review only the Back Orders that

have not been printed. We suggest you review all

unprinted Back Orders at the end of each day using

this option. You can then print the outstanding

Back Orders.

For details on the other selections, refer to the Summary Inquiry section of this chapter.

Selection Area

Once you access the Item Inquiry screen from the Order Inquiry menu, the entry area at the bottom of the

screen is automatically formatted based on your selection.

The Branch defaults to your User Branch but can be changed using <F7>.

You can use the ‘*’ to match any alphanumeric field. When you do so, you do not have access to the

remaining fields. If you press <Enter> through a field, the program looks for the records with a blank in

this field.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 213

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Each option selected from the Order Inquiry menu has a different set of criteria that can be entered to

select the Order Items to be viewed.

Cus/Prod

This option allows you to scan through all Orders for a Customer for a given Group, Size, Grade,

Dimension and Gauge. This gives you a list of Order Items that contain the selected product. From that

list, you can then select the Order or Order Item to be viewed in detail.

Cus 1010 Grp CRC Size 18 Grd CQ Dim 12 "

1-Select

You can use the ‘*’ in the Grp, Size, or Grd fields. If you press <Enter> at the Dim field, all dimensions

ordered will be listed for the Product.

Cus/Part

This option allows you to scan through all Orders for a customer, based on a specific Part number. This

gives you a list of Orders that contain the same product and you can then select the Order or Order Item to

be viewed in detail.

Customer 1010 Part No CE1121448

1-Select

You can use the * in the Part No field.

Product

The Product option allows you to inquire into Open Orders by Product and review all Items, regardless of

the Customer.

Grp CRC Size 18 Grd CQ Dim 12.0000" Ga 0.0438

1-Select

You can use the wildcard ‘*’ in the Size or Grd field.

NOTE: If the Product Group is Gauge Required, then the Gauge field must be entered.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 214

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order

This selection allows you to specify an Order number to view all of its corresponding Items.

After you enter the Order number, the Reference Prefix SO (Sales Order) or TO (Transfer Order) is

automatically displayed.

Ref SO 499- 2

1-Select

All the Items for the selected Order are displayed starting with the selected Item number. If no Item

number is entered, then all Items for the selected Order are displayed.

Item Inquiry – Completed Sample

The following screen illustrates the information provided for the Inquiry By Cus/Prod, By Cus/Part No

and By Product. Despite the various access methods, the screen displays the same information about the

Orders and Order Items.

If no Items are found for the criteria you specified, the following message is displayed: “No records exist

for your selection”. The cursor returns to the first field.

Each Order Item is displayed in a three-line format giving summary information about both the Order and

the Item such as the Customer short name, the Part number, the Product, the Item balance and the charge.

Item Inquiry

Cust/Prod Part Pcs Qty T Sts B SC Due/Amt

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 637- 1 N FAX Y WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 300 T CWT B

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 0 LBS

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 638- 1 N FAX N WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 300 T 25.0000 CWT

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 1 300 LBS 75.75

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 639- 1 N FAX N WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 300 T 25.0000 CWT

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 1 300 LBS 75.75

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 640- 1 N FAX N WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 300 T 25.0000 CWT

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 1 300 LBS 75.75

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 641- 2 N FAX Y WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 1000 T 25.0000 CWT B

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 2 LBS .51

PHILADELPHIA ST PHI 649- 2 N FAX Y WS 8Aug04

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality O 1 750 T 25.0000 CWT I

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" B 600 LBS 151.50

Cus 1050 Grp CRC Size 18 Grd CQ Dim 48.0000"

1-Select 2-Header 3-Zoom 4-Item Sts 5-Cross Ref 6-Rdy to Shp 7-CmplSts

Item Inquiry screen – completed sample

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 215

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Select Calls the Order Item Selections window to allow you to specify any exception criteria

for the inquiry

Header Displays the Order Header for the selected Item

Zoom Displays the Order Item Detail screen for the selected Item

Item Sts Calls the Order Item Status screen

Cross Ref Calls the Cross-Reference Inquiry screen by Order number for the selected Order Item

number

Rdy to Shp Displays an extra line for each displayed Item with the Ready-to-Ship Pieces and

Quantity. Select this option a second time for the line to be removed from display.

This Option is not available in the Blanket/Release Order item Inquiry.

ComplSts Calls the Completion Status window and displays any completion/deletion errors

encountered by the Order Completion and Deletion Utility for the selected Order.

This Option is dimmed if there is no completion/deletion error in the Order Completion

table for the selected Order.

The following fields are displayed on the Item Inquiry screen:

Field Description

FIRST LINE:

Cust The Customer Look-Up Name.

Part The Customer Part number, if any.

The Order Branch.

The Order and Item numbers.

T The Type of Order (B-Blanket, N-Normal, R-Release, S-Standard, T-Transfer).

Sts The Order Item Status.

B The Back Order code (Y/N)

The field displays Y-Yes if the Order Item shipped quantity is greater than zero and

the Back Order Allowed field is set to Y-Yes on the Order. Otherwise, the field

displays N-No.

SC The Sales Category code.

Due The Order Item Due Date.

SECOND LINE:

Prod The Product Description (first line).

Pcs The Pieces and/or Quantity ordered.

NOTE: Two codes, O-Ordered Pcs/Qty and B-Balance on Order, are respectively displayed

on the second and third line before the Pcs field.

The Charge Quantity Type (A-Actual, T-Theoretical or H-Higher of A or T).

The Material Price and Unit of Measure.

The Order Item Processing status displayed in a two character code, as follows:

Left Character: Space Open Item

C Completed Item

D Automatically Completed or Manually Deleted Item

Right Character: B Item on an Open Bill of Lading

I Item on an Open Invoice

U Item on an Updated Invoice

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 216

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Description

NOTE: If the Item is on multiple Invoices at the same time, a ‘U’ is displayed in the

right character if any one of those Invoices is updated. An ‘I’ is displayed

if all Invoices for the Order Item are not updated yet.

THIRD LINE:

The Product Description (second line).

The Order Balance (Pieces and Quantity).

Amt The amount due.

Blanket and Release Items Inquiry screen

The Blanket Order Item screen allows you to view the individual Release Items associated with the

Blanket. The screen displays the Release Items for any Blanket Order Item. It can be called directly from

the Item Summary if the Order number is known, or you can select a Blanket Order Item from the

Summary and call the Release Items for it.

Branch PHI Blanket Order 467 Item 1

1- Select

This option shows a different inquiry display format from the Item Inquiry screen as it relates the Blanket

Order Item to each of its corresponding Release Order Items.

Blanket and Release Items

METAL WORKS INC ( 1050) IS-AB OS-SH Job

Cold Rolled Steel Sheet Commercial Quality Ord 250 Pcs 15600 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000" X 96.0000" Bal 220 Pcs 10920 LBS

Brh Order Itm Due Dt Sts Bal Pieces Bal Quantity U/M Total Amount

PHI 468- 1 2Dec04 SHP LBS 585.78

PHI 519- 1 12Dec04 SHP LBS 585.78

PHI 531- 1 14Dec04 HLD 10 1560 LBS 585.78

Branch PHI Blanket Order 467 Item 1

1-Select 2-Header 3-Zoom 4-Item Sts 5-Cross Ref 6-Rdy to Shp

Blanket and Release Items Inquiry screen

All Release Order Items for the Blanket are shown. You can choose to view specific Items based on the

Order Item Selection screen options.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 217

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Customer Look-Up Name and number and the Product description are displayed in the Heading

section.

Field Description

IS The Inside Salesperson.

OS The Outside Salesperson.

Job The Customer Job number linked to the Blanket Order, if any.

Ord The Pieces and Quantity ordered on the Blanket Order.

Bal The Balance of Pieces and Quantity on the Blanket Order.

Brh The Release Order Branch.

Order The Release Order number.

Itm The Release Order Item number.

Due Dt The Release Item Due Date.

Sts The Release Item Status.

Bal Pieces The Release Item balance of pieces to be shipped.

Bal Quantity The Release Item Quantity balance to be shipped.

U/M The Release Item Unit of Measure.

Total Amount The Release Item Total Amount.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 218

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES ORDER ITEM INQUIRY SCREEN

The Order Detail Page Inquiry uses the Order Item entry screen with the addition of the Header Status

Date next to the Status code, to display all the Order Item Information. You can review all the screens

related to the displayed Item. The Change Itm option from the action bar is dimmed.

The Order Detail Inquiry can be called from different eSTELPLAN programs in one of the following

ways:

By Order number, you must enter the Item number you want to review. You can use the Look-Up

function to review all open Items for the Sales Order. Once the Item number is entered, you can

review the Item Charges, Remarks, Specifications, Reservations and Costs. When you press <F4> to

exist, the cursor is positioned at the Item number field and you can enter another Item number or

press <F4> again to exit the Order Detail Inquiry screen.

The Order Detail Inquiry is called by Order number when called from the Order Header Inquiry.

By Order number and Item number, the Item information is displayed and the cursor is positioned at

the action bar. You can only review this Item Charges, Remarks, Specifications, Reservations and

Costs. When you press <F4> to exit the Item, the screen displays back the calling program.

You can then use the Zoom option to see further detail of the selected item.

Completed and Deleted Order Items

When you try to view an Order Item that has been Completed by the End of Day or Manually deleted,

depending on the value of the DCO=X Product Installation Option on the Order Inquiry program, a

warning or an error message “Order Item is Completed/Deleted” is issued. When this is a warning

message, you can press <Enter> to continue, the Order Item is displayed with the word ‘Completed’ or

‘Deleted’ on the top right of the screen. The Order Item is shown as it was prior to the completion or

deletion.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 219

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Type N PHILADELPHIA ST Order Item SO No PHI- 765- 2

Cus Part Specs: 1050-

Group CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality

Size 18 .0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Grade CQ Width 48.0000" Length GaN 0.0478

Order 2 PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Bal 2 PCS Msr Wgt 20000 LBS

Sls Cat/Typ WS-1 Chg Qty Typ A

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 25.0000 CWT E 20000 LBS 5000.00

2 PROCESSING INS 4.0000 CWT E 20000 LBS 800.00

4 ADMINISTRATION COSTS 1.0000 CWT E 20000 LBS 200.00

3 FREIGHT 2.0000 CWT E 20000 LBS 400.00

1 *** Net Material *** 25.0000 CWT I 20000 LBS 5000.00

Taxes 108.00 Total 6,508.00

Sts ENT 10/28/04 Due 11/11/04 Prn Seq CTL CTL MPO N WKO Y Upd Usg Y

Ship Brh PHI Whs PFS Source ST Stk/NST S Org Due Dt 11/11/04 BKO Sts N

End Use

1-Res 2-Change 3-Rmks 4-Incm 5-Specs 6-Cost 7-Hdr 8-Total 9-Sts

Order Detail Page Inquiry screen

Action Bar Action

Alloc Displays Inventory Reservation page.

Chg Itm Not applicable in Inquiry mode.

Rmks Displays Order Item Remarks.

Incm Displays Incoming Reservations.

Specs Displays Production Specifications.

Cost Displays Cost Attributions.

Hdr Returns to the Order Header screen.

Totals Displays the Order Item Total screen.

Sts Calls the Order Item Status Inquiry.

Field Name Default Validation Description

Status Date N N The Header Status Date. Note that it indicates

when the Order Header Status was last changed. It

doesn’t get updated when the Order Item Status is

modified.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 220

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER ITEM STATUS INQUIRY SCREEN

The Item Status Inquiry is used to answer Sales and Customer requests for information about their open

Orders and to determine what additional material must be run on Production Jobs to meet the

requirements.

The Order Item Status Inquiry can be called as follows:

As a stand-alone inquiry where you must enter the Order and Item numbers.

Using the Item Sts option from the action bar from different inquiries in which case the Order

Branch, Order number and Item number are passed from the calling inquiry. If the Item number is

not available, the Order Branch and Order number are passed and the cursor is positioned at the Item

number field.

Completed and Deleted Orders

When the Order has been Completed by the End of Day or Manually deleted, you can still view the Order

Item Status Information if the Product Installation Option DCO=X is set to W-Warning. In this case, the

“Order Item is completed/deleted” warning message is issued. If you press <Enter> to continue, the

Order Items Status Information is displayed with the word ‘Completed’ or ‘Deleted’ on the top Left of the

screen. Note that the inquiry shows the Item Status prior to the Completion or Deletion, therefore a

‘Balance To Produce’ can be displayed for a Deleted Order Item.

When the Product Installation Option DCO=X is set to E-Error, the Order Item Status information is only

displayed for Open Order Items. The “Order Item is completed/deleted” error message is issued for Order

Items that have been Completed or Deleted

Blanket Order Items

When you access a Blanket Order a warning message “Blanket Order Totals: ‘Rls BL-IV’ = Release

Orders on open BL or invoiced” and, in the Total section, the ‘Invoiced’ heading is replaced with the ‘Rls

BL-IV’ heading.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 221

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Status Inquiry Screen

The following screen is displayed if you select the inquiry from the menu:

Order Item Status No PHI -

SLP IS OS Due Hld: C- P- S-

Ship By - Sts

Orig Pcs Wgt

Part No Alc Wgt:NS Csm Fin

1-Cross Ref

Order Item Status Inquiry – blank screen

Action Bar Action

Cross Ref Calls the Cross-Reference Inquiry. You can call the Cross-Reference at this point if

you do not know the Order number you need to inquire about, but you know the Bill of

Lading or Invoice number.

Once the Order Branch, Order number and Item number are entered or passed from the calling program,

the following screen is displayed:

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 222

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Status SO No PHI 4- 1

ACME FABRICATION INC SLP IS AG OS SH Due 12Dec04 Hld: C-M P-N S-N

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality Ship By PHI-PFS Sts ENT <ICR>

.0350 Nom X 48.0000" X Coil Orig Pcs 37 Wgt 336710 LBS

Part No 137781-C Alc Wgt:NS Csm Fin

---- Production Status ---- Pln/Open In Pro/WIP Fin/Act

Reference Due Dt Sts Pcs Wgt Pcs Wgt Pcs Wgt

M PHI 4- 1- 3 16Jul98 SCH STD

P*CHI 1500 16Jul98 SCH CTL

C 2000 PHI TM6 1 -01-000100 15Nov 100 3000

---- Shipping Status ---- More

Brh B/L No Load Dt Ship Dt Time Carrier Sts Pcs Wgt

PHI 41 12Apr04 *************** ENT 1 200

PHI 46 18Apr04 *************** FAX 1 999

PHI 48 18Apr04 *************** ENT 2 16499

---- Manifest Status ---- More

Brh B/L No Est Dt Ship Dt Manfst Carrier Rte Seq Sts Pcs Wgt

PHI 46 28Nov03 51 999-003 HLD 999

* 27Jul02 2 AMERICAN STEEL 012-003 ENT 172300

* 28Nov03 51 999-002 HLD 172300

Invoiced Planned Open B/L Order Bal Finished In Process To Produce

Pcs 26 34 11 1

Qty 90554 247912 15001 15001-

1-Itm Zoom 2-Specs 3-Alloc 4-Production 5-Shipping 6-Manifest 7-Cross Ref 8-ICR

Order Item Status Inquiry – completed screen

Action Bar Action

Itm Zoom Calls the Sales Order Item Detail inquiry for the Item and displays the Order Item

information.

Specs Displays the Order Item Specifications window for reference to the specific

requirements of the Item.

Alloc Calls the SO Item - Reservation Inquiry screen and allows you to view the Sales Order

Reservation Details.

Production This places the cursor in the Production Status section and allows you to select a

line for detailed Production Schedule Inquiry using the Zoom action bar option. For

Inventory Processing and eSTELbarcodes, the Zoom action bar option is not available.

Shipping This places the cursor in the Shipment Status section and allows you to select a line

for detailed Bill of Lading Inquiry.

Manifest This places the cursor in the Manifest Status section and allows you to select a line

for detailed Delivery Manifest Inquiry.

Cross Ref Calls the Cross-Reference Inquiry by Order number. The Order and Item number are

passed to the inquiry. Refer to the ‘Cross-Reference Inquiry’ chapter for details.

ICR Enabled when <ICR> is displayed next to the Item ‘Sts’ (top right of screen). Allows

you to view the Order Item Incoming Reservations.

The Order Item Status Inquiry screen is composed of five sections, each of which gives summary

information about the Order Item and open transactions against it:

Order Item section: details from the Sales Order

Production Status section: summary of all open production jobs

Shipping Status section: summary of open Bills of Lading

Manifest Status section: summary of Manifest Shipping Schedule

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 223

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Balance section: totals for the Sales Order Item

These sections are each of a fixed length so that you can see all components of the status at once.

However, if there are more than three open Jobs, Bills of Lading, or Manifests, a message “more…” is

shown above the section.

To view the remaining Items, if any, use the action bar options Production, Shipping or Manifest to

move to that section and scroll through the additional Items with <Page Up>, <Page Down>, <F2> or

<Shift F2>.

Order Item Section

This section displays information about the Order Item and its current status.

Order Item Status SO No PHI 4- 1

ACME FABRICATION INC SLP IS AG OS SH Due 12Dec04 Hld: C-M P-N S-N

Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality Ship By PHI-PFS Sts ENT <ICR>

.0350 Nom X 48.0000" X Coil Orig Pcs 37 Wgt 336710 LBS

Part No 146122 Alc Wgt:NS Csm Fin

Field Name Description

The Customer Name.

SLP IS The Inside Salesperson.

OS The Outside Salesperson.

Due The Item Due Date.

Hld: C The Credit Hold Code.

P The Production Hold Code.

S The Shipping Hold Code.

The 2 lines of Product Description.

Ship By The Shipping Branch and Warehouse.

Sts The Item Status code.

<ICR> Displayed if there are Incoming Reservations for the Order Item.

Orig Pcs Ordered Pieces.

Wgt Ordered Weight.

Alc Wgt: NS Non-Specific Reservation weight.

Csm This field displays the total Consumption weight reserved to the Sales Order Item.

This is the portion of the total Sales Order Reservation that is not Finished (ready-

to-ship) nor is on a processing job.

Fin * This field displays the total weight reserved to the Sales Order that is ready to be

shipped and is not on a Processing job. See below for a definition of a ‘Finished’

Reservation.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 224

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Finished Reservation

The Product Installation Option FIN=X controls the definition of the Finished Reservation. If the Option

is set to Y, the Order Item section of the Inquiry displays, in the Fin field, only a reserved product that

meets one of the following conditions:

For inventory reservations, the reserved Product Item that matches the Order Item including the

Gauge, Gauge Type and specified Tolerances.

For Owned Product Items, the reserved Product Item that is in a Finished Goods Warehouse Type.

For Customer-Owned Product Items, the reserved Product Item with a Status F-Finished.

The Product Installation Option ARL=X determines if the verification of the Dimension and Gauge will

be bypassed when selecting a Finished Item.

Restriction

It is possible for the Finished quantity in the Order Item Status Inquiry to be different from the

quantity displayed in the Ready-to-Ship inquiry when the option FIN=Y and material is located in an

Outside Processing Warehouse (type ‘O’).

Production Status Section

The Production Status section provides the following information about the Open Production Jobs for the

Item:

Open eSTELpro Production jobs, listed as individual detail lines, if eSTELpro is installed.

Open Material Processing Orders (MPOs), listed as individual detail lines, if eSTELman is installed.

Open Capacity Plan Items, listed as individual Mill Order line items if eSTEL/Cap-Plan is installed.

One total line for all open Inventory Processing jobs.

One total line for open eSTELbarcodes transactions applicable to Tag Master Required, if

eSTELbarcodes is installed.

One total line for open Scheduled Production.

Open Capacity Plan Items, listed as individual Mill Order line items if eSTEL/Cap-Plan is installed.

You can access this area using the Production action bar option from the Order Item Status screen. The

cursor is positioned on the first Production line and the following action bar options are available.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 225

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

---- Production Status ---- Pln/Open In Pro/WIP Fin/Act

Reference Due Dt Sts Pcs Wgt Pcs Wgt Pcs Wgt

M PHI 4- 1- 3 16Jul98 SCH STD

P*CHI 1500 16Jul98 SCH CTL

STELbarcodes 100 3120

1-Zoom 2-Schedule

Action Bar Action

Zoom P eSTELpro Job. Calls the eSTELpro Job Entry screen.

M eSTELman Job. Calls the MPO Production Status Inquiry to show the status of the

individual steps of the job. From the Production Status Inquiry, you can view:

a list of all Steps for the MPO and their associated production statistics;

each individual MPO Step Header with the associated settings and

specifications;

the Production History Inquiry (if there are updated transactions);

the Production Schedule. (The Production Schedule is accessible both from the

Order Item Status Inquiry and the Production Status Inquiry screens. This

feature can be available in ‘Production’ mode based on your User Group.)

C eSTEL/Cap-Plan. Calls the Mill Order Schedule inquiry screen.

NOTE: This option is not available for Inventory Processing or STELbarcodes.

Schedule Calls the Production Schedule window and displays detailed scheduling information for

the Scheduled Item.

Following is a brief description of the fields displayed in the Production Status section of the inquiry.

Field Name Description

(First code) Denotes the Job Type being displayed.

Options are:

C eSTEL/Cap-Plan Schedule

P eSTELpro job

M eSTELman job

An * is displayed next to the eSTELman or eSTELpro Job Type, if the job is on a

Production Schedule.

The Job Type field is left blank for all other Production being displayed.

Reference Denotes the Production Reference number or Description being displayed.

eSTELpro jobs: the Branch and Reference number.

eSTELman jobs: the Branch, Reference number, Reference Item and Release number.

eSTEL/Cap-Plan: the Year, Branch, Mill Line code, Schedule Sequence code, Mill

OD/Gauge Sequence code, Mill Order Sequence, Start Date, Mill Pieces and Weight.

A title description is displayed in the Reference field for the following

transactions:

Inventory Processing

Production Schedule

eSTELbarcodes

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 226

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Description

Due Dt Inventory Processing: Not applicable

eSTELbarcodes: Not applicable

eSTELman or eSTELpro: The Job Header Due Date indicating when the material is

required to be completed to allow for finishing and packaging prior to shipment.

Production Schedule: Not applicable

Sts Inventory Processing: Not applicable

eSTELbarcodes: Not applicable

eSTELman or eSTELpro: The Job Header Status code

Production Schedule: Not applicable

(Pieces/Weight)

Pln/Open

Based on the Production job the Planned Pieces and Weight are displayed as follows:

Inventory Processing - Not applicable

eSTELbarcodes: Not applicable

eSTELman: MPO Spec Estimated production minus MPO Spec Actual Production if WIP=N

and Next Step=0.

eSTELpro: Pieces and Weight produced for that Order Item for which the

corresponding Tag has not yet been printed.

Production Schedule: Total Pieces and Weight scheduled for that Order Item.

(Pieces/Weight)

In Pro/WIP

The total Pieces and Weight produced by eSTELman or Inventory Processing for the Sales

Order Item that either do not match the Order Item Group, Size, Grade, Gauge and

Dimensions (within the specified tolerance), or ARE NOT in a Finished Goods Warehouse.

eSTELman: MPO Spec Actual production if WIP=Y minus MPO Spec Actual Consumption

of Next Step.

Also included are WIP tags produced for that Order Item through eSTELbarcodes.

(Pieces/Weight)

Fin/Act

The total Pieces and Weight produced by eSTELman, eSTELpro, Inventory Processing or

eSTELbarcodes that match the Order Item Group, Size, Grade, Gauge and Dimensions

(within the specified tolerance), and that are in a Finished Goods Warehouse.

For Customer-Owned material, the Finished field represents the total Pieces and Weight

produced by eSTELman, eSTELpro, Inventory Processing or eSTELbarcodes that match the

Order Item Group, Size, Grade, Gauge and Dimensions (within the specified Tolerance),

and that have a Tag Status of F-Finished.

NOTE: In addition to the above criteria, Tag Master Required products must be printed

in order to be considered Finished Tags.

eSTELman: MPO Spec Actual Production if WIP=N and Next Step=0.

Production Display

The Schedule action bar option in the Production Status section calls the following window:

Production Schedule XXX-ZZZZZZ-ZZZ-ZZZ

St PWC Sch Dt Sh Sts Description Time Pcs Wgt

1 SLT 14Dec03 1 IP MW 1.75" & 4.348" :30 1 45000

1 CTL 15Dec03 1 SCH SHEARING @ 4.348" 1:30 45 45000

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 227

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Description

At the top right corner:

For an eSTELpro job, the Job Branch and number are displayed on the first line for

reference.

For an eSTELman job, the Job Branch, number, Item number and Release number are

displayed on the first line for reference.

For a Sales Order, the Branch, Order and Item are shown.

ST eSTELman Step number if Production is for an MPO.

PWC Production Schedule Processing Work Center.

Sch Dt Production Schedule Date.

SH Production Schedule Shift.

Sts Production Schedule Status.

Description Description of the scheduled Item.

Time Production Schedule Hours and Minutes.

Pcs and Wgt Production Schedule Pieces and Weight.

Shipping Status Section

This section contains information from the Bill of Lading table if there is an open Bill of Lading for the

Item.

The section has a variable number of lines depending on the number of open Bills of Lading for the Item.

---- Shipping Status ---- More

Brh B/L No Load Dt Ship Dt Time Carrier Sts Pcs Wgt

PHI 41 12Jan03 ABC FREIGHT HLD 1 200

PHI 46 14Jan03 *************** HLD 1 999

PHI 48 15Jan03 OUR TRUCK ENT 2 16499

1-Zoom

Action Bar Action

Zoom Calls the Bill of Lading screen. For more details, refer to the Shipping manual.

Field Description

Brh Shipping Branch.

B/L No The Bill of Lading number for this Item.

Load Dt The Loading Date. This Date is displayed if the Bill of Lading Shipment code is L.

Ship Dt Time The Shipping Date. This Date and Time is displayed if the Bill of Lading Shipment

code is S.

Carrier Carrier name identified on the Bill of Lading.

Sts Item Status.

Pcs Number of Item Pieces on the Bill of Lading.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 228

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Description

Wgt Item Quantity on the Bill of Lading.

Manifest Status Section

This section contains information from the Manifest Schedule table if there is an open Shipping Manifest

that contains the Item. Both Pick-Up and Delivery Manifest Types are displayed on the inquiry.

The Manifest Status section contains a variable number of lines depending on the number of open

Manifests for the Item. The section includes the following Manifests:

Manifests created by scheduling an Order Item. In this case, the B/L No field is blank.

Manifests created by scheduling an entire Order. In this case, an * is displayed in the B/L No field

denoting that the scheduled Pieces and Weight are for the entire Order.

Manifests created by scheduling the Bill of Lading that was used to ship the Order Item. The Bill of

Lading Branch and number are displayed on the Manifest line.

If there are more than three open Manifests, “more...” is displayed and you must use the action bar option

and scroll through the details.

---- Manifest Status ----

Brh B/L No Est Dt Ship Dt Manfst Carrier Rte Seq Sts Pcs Wgt

PHI 5Oct04 15 001-001 BRK 5 100

PHI 27Sep03 45 001-001 SHP 1 1500

1-Zoom

Action Bar Action

Zoom Calls the Manifest Schedule Inquiry screen to allow you to review more information

about the Manifest such as other shipments scheduled on the same Manifest. From the

Manifest Detail Inquiry, an action bar option is available to review the Manifest

Header fields.

Field Description

Brh Manifest Branch.

B/L No Bill of Lading number created to ship the Order Item.

Est Dt The Estimated Shipping Date. Only this date is shown if the Manifest has not been

shipped.

Shp Dt Actual Shipping Date displayed if the Manifest has been shipped.

Manfst Manifest number.

Carrier Carrier Name.

Rte Route

Seq Sequence number of the Item on the Manifest.

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 229

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Description

Sts Manifest Item Status.

Pcs Number of Pieces entered on the Manifest for the Item.

Wgt Item Weight entered on the Manifest for the Item.

Order Balance Section

This section provides a recap of the Order Item Pieces and Quantities and indicates the type of

transactions on which the quantities are contained.

Invoiced Planned Open B/L Order Bal Finished In Process To Produce

Pcs 1 9 5 23 18-

Qty 14999 245156 5555 39000 33445-

Field Name Description

Invoiced The total Pieces and Weight that have already been shipped and invoiced to date

against the Item. It is taken from the Order Item fields and excludes the weight of

current open Bills of Lading.

Planned The Planned total for all open MPO and eSTELpro jobs. This excludes MPOs coded as

Work-in-Process (WIP).

Open B/L The Order Item Balance of Pieces and Weight left to be shipped.

Order Bal The Order Item Balance of Pieces and Weight left to be shipped.

Finished The total Finished Weight for all MPOs, eSTELpro, Inventory Processing, eSTELbarcodes,

and Finished Sales Order Item reservations. This excludes MPOs coded as Work-in-

Process (WIP).

In Process The total In Process Weight for all MPOs, Inventory Processing and eSTELbarcodes.

This excludes MPOs coded as Work-in-Process (WIP).

To Produce This is the computed balance of Pieces and Weight that must still be produced to meet

the Balance on Order. It is computed as follows:

To be Produced:

Order Balance - (Finished + In Process)

11. Order Look-Up and Inquiries Page 230

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

12. CROSS-REFERENCE INQUIRY

OVERVIEW

The Cross-Reference Inquiry allows you to trace a Sales Order and its related Bills of Lading, Invoices

and/or Credit Notes as well as Transfer Orders and their related Bills of Lading and shipments. The

Cross-Reference Inquiry allows the following access methods:

Invoice/Credit Note/Transfer Update number

Order number

Bill of Lading number

Customer and Customer’s Purchase Order number

Customer and Customer’s Part number

Customer and Product

The Cross-Reference Inquiry is designed to help you quickly answer Customer’s questions regarding

shipment and invoice status such as the following cases:

A Customer’s inquiry about a shipment received in reference to a Bill of Lading number or an Invoice

number

A Customer’s follow-up on a specific Order Status: quantities shipped and billed

A Customer’s inquiry by Part number, Purchase Order number or Product Item

The Cross-Reference Inquiry is integrated with the Invoice Archiving function and eSTELfax to allow

you to review and fax archived Invoices.

The Cross-Reference Inquiry also incorporates the eSTELimage features, provided eSTELimage is

installed. This allows you to review and print scanned documents on table for the Bill of Lading, Invoice

or Sales Order.

Restrictions

Access to Archived Invoices (Inv Arc action bar) within the Cross-Reference Inquiry is controlled by

User Group access rights.

The Cross-Reference Inquiry program uses the Cross-Reference table created and maintained by the Bill

of Lading Entry, the Invoice Update and the Transfer Update programs. Therefore:

any Order Item that does not have any shipment is not displayed on the Inquiry.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 232

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

the Invoice Entry transactions are not displayed on the Cross-Reference Inquiry although the Order

Balance fields are reduced by the Invoice Entry amounts. Therefore, the Order Balance Quantity

displayed on the Order Item may not match the Ordered quantity (the total Invoiced + Bill of Lading

Shipped Quantities) displayed on the Cross-Reference Inquiry if an open Sales Order type Invoice

exists.

Cross-Reference Inquiry Window

When you first call the Inquiry, the following menu is displayed. You must specify the way you need to

access the inquiry.

Cross Ref Inq

1. Inv/Trf

2. Order

3. B/L

4. Cus/PO/Rel

5. Cus/Part

6. Cus/Prod

Cross-Reference window

Options are:

Inv/Trf To inquire by Invoice, Credit Note, Transfer Update number and Item number.

If you apply Late Charges, you can inquire by Late Charge Invoice number. This allows

you to view, fax and print the archived Late Charge Invoice forms through the Inv Arc

option.

If you have eSTELtoll installed, you can inquire by Toll Invoice number. This allows

you to view, fax or print archived Toll Invoice forms through the Inv Arc option.

Order To inquire by Sales Order number by Item number

B/L To inquire by Bill of Lading number by Item number

Cus/PO/Rel To inquire by Customer by Customer Purchase Order number

Cus/Part To inquire by Customer by Customer Part number

Cus/Prod To inquire by Customer by Product

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 233

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

GENERAL RULES ON HOW TO USE THE INQUIRY

* Access by Order * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1050 PHILADELPHIA ST

Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

C 1 IV- 133- 1 1 5,000 LBS

P 19Feb04 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

Ref 520-

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

The Session Branch defaults from your User’s Branch. You can change it using <F7> if you have multiple

Branch Access Rights.

All the information is displayed from the Order Cross-Reference table based on the Bill of Lading or the

Invoice if applicable.

If no transactions exist in the Cross-Reference table for the transaction number you entered, an error

message is displayed: “No open transaction for this selection.”

All the Items for the selected transaction are displayed starting with the selected Item number. If no Item

number is entered, then all Items for the selected transaction are displayed.

Each Transaction is displayed on two lines. The Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Gauge and Gauge Type

are displayed on the second line in a compressed format (fields are separated by ‘/’).

Once the transactions are displayed, the first transaction is highlighted. <F2> (Page Forward) and <Shift

F2> (Page Backward) are available to scan through the transactions if there are more than one page. You

can also arrow down and up through the information displayed on the screen.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 234

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Displayed Codes

A ‘C’ is displayed at the beginning of the detail line on all inquiry screens if there is a Credit Note

associated with the Invoice.

An ‘I’ is displayed at the beginning of the detail line on all inquiry screens if there is an Invoice

associated with the Credit Note.

If eSTELimage is installed, a ‘P’ is displayed on the detail line if there is a scanned Delivery Receipt

on file for the Bill of Lading, Invoice or Sales Order.

For details, refer to the eSTELimage manual.

Action Bar Options

A set of action bar options allows you to see more details for a selected transaction.

Action Bar Action

Sls Dtl Calls the Invoice Sales Detail Inquiry. The Accounting Period, Branch, Reference

Prefix (IV/CN), Invoice number and Invoice Item number are passed to the Inquiry.

Order Calls the Order Detail Page Inquiry. The Order Branch, number and Item number are

passed to the Inquiry. All action bar options are available as in Inquiry mode. If

the Order is no longer on file, an error message is displayed.

B/L Calls the Bill of Lading Item Inquiry. The Bill of Lading Branch, number and Item

number are passed to the Inquiry. If there is no Bill of Lading number for the

transaction (Invoice of a Sales Order), the message “Sales order was directly invoiced

- no bill of lading number” is displayed. If the Bill of Lading is no longer on file

an error message is displayed.

Extend Displays a window with more information about the Transaction. The Customer Purchase

Order, Release number and Part number are displayed in the window. The window is

positioned under the transaction from where it is called.

Inv Arc Calls the Archived Invoice window allowing you to view, fax or print an Archived

Invoice.

Crd/Inv Calls the Invoice Credits window to display the linked transactions for the selected

Invoice or Credit Note.

Prf If eSTELimage is installed, allows you to review index information for scanned Proof

of Delivery documents.

Inv Trs Provides access to the Inventory Transaction Detail screen.

Extend Action Bar Option

From all inquiry screens, the action bar option Extend allows you to see more information about the

Transaction. When selected, it calls the following window showing the Customer Purchase Order, the

Release number as well as the Part number. The window is positioned under the transaction from where

it is called.

PO C1030

Rel R1030

Part PCS124-112466

Extend Window from the Action Bar

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 235

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Inv Arc Action Bar Option

Access to this action bar option is controlled by the field Access to Inv Arc, in the User Group Information

table. This option must be set to Y-Yes and, at the same time, the Product Installation Option ARC=X

must be set to R or Y. The Inv Arc action bar option calls the following window.

Archived Invoice

1. Display Arc

2. Fax/Eml Arc

3. Print Arc

Options for Archived Invoices

Display Archived Invoice: From all inquiry screens, this selection allows you to view the Archived Invoice

form if it exists.

I N V O I C E No: PHI IV-000143

Date:12Jan05

Due:15Jan05

Sold To: ( 1030) Shipped To: (001)

FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD MOTOR COMPANY

2343 FORD DRIVE SOUTH CHICAGO ENGINE PLANT

DEARBORN, MI 48101 52634 ROUTE 15

SOUTH CHICAGO, IL 19012

================================================================================

Order No: WS-000502 Ordered:02Dec04 Shipped: 12Jan05 B/L No : 100097

Terms : DUE 20TH FOLLOWING MONTH Via : CUSTOMER PICK UP

Your PO : 12 F.O.B. : 1030-1 FOB POINT -

Release : Freight: CUSTOMER PICK-UP

================================================================================

F3 Help F4 Exit F5 SrchFd ShF5 SrchBk Page: 1 (LAST PAGE) Go to page:

Refer to the ‘View 80 Column’ section of the eSTEL/SCOPE Controller in the eSTEL/SCOPE manual

for more details on how to use the Archive display screen.

Fax/Eml Arc: This selection allows you to fax/email the Archived Invoice if eSTELfax is installed.

When this option is selected, the following window is called:

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 236

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Open Fax

To: Type: C Cus No: 1010 Ship-To:000

ACME FABRICATION INC

Attn STEVE HENDERSON

Tel 215 639 3265

Server

Dialing Code

Fax 215 639-9760

From: eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY

supportl

Tel 610 325-0301

Fax 610 356-4320

A Product Installation Option, ATN=X, controls the value of the Attn field when faxing an Archived

Invoice from the Cross-Reference Inquiry. Depending on the setting of the Option, the Customer

Information Accounts Payable Contact name or the Purchasing Contact name is defaulted to the Attn

field.

NOTE: When the ATN Product Installation Option is set up, the setting of the Cus Cntc (Customer

Contact) field in the eSTELfax User Defaults record is ignored.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Print Archived Invoices: From all inquiry screens, this selection allows you to print an Archived Invoice.

Once you select it, the following window is displayed:

Printer XXXXXXXX

No of Copies 1

Field Name Default Validation Description

Printer User

Default

Printer

Ref

The field defaults to the User’s default printer

but can be changed to any valid Printer.

No of Copies 1 1 to 9 The default is 1 but it can be overridden.

Restrictions:

The Archived Invoice is printed as an exact copy of the original Invoice form. There is no Re-print or

Archive indication on the form.

The Print Archived Invoice function is only available from the Cross-Reference Inquiry, which means

that you can print the Archived Invoice as long as the corresponding Cross-Reference record is still

on file. Refer to the Periodic Procedures section of this manual for more information about the Cross-

Reference table cleanup.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 237

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Crd/Inv Action Bar Option

This action bar option calls the Invoice Credits window to display the linked transactions for the selected

Invoice or Credit Note.

Invoice Credits

IV- 133- 1 CN- 2- 1 19Feb04 252.50

Tot Inv Amt 1,313.00 Tot Crd Amt 252.50

Invoice Credits window

If there is no linked Credit Note, the message “No Credit Note linked to invoice” is displayed.

If there is no linked Invoice, the message “This action is not available” is displayed.

Prf Action Bar Option

This action bar option calls the Proof of Delivery Index Inquiry window where you can review the

scanned Proof of Delivery documents on file for a selected transaction.

Viewing Index Information: To view the index information, highlight the desired record and use the Prf

action bar option. A window displays all index entries on file associated to the Sales Order, Bill of

Lading and Invoice.

Proof of Delivery Index Inquiry

Image No Wstn Ref Number Entry Dt LogID

1 001 PHI BL 72418 12Jun04 georgem

2 001 PHI BL 72473 17Jun04 georgem

PHI IV 35664 19Jun04 georgem

PHI SO 20344 19Jun04 georgem

PO Ack / FAX and original Work Order attached.

3 001 PHI SO 20344 20Jun04 georgem

. . . . . . . . .

1-Print

Proof of Delivery Index Inquiry Screen

Action Bar Action

Print Calls the Proof of Delivery Printing window to display the default printer and allow

you to specify the number of copies to be printed.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 238

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Print action bar option: To print an image, highlight the required record and use the Print action bar

option to call the following window.

Proof of Delivery Printing

Cpy 1 Printer PHI IPS2

Proof of Delivery Printing window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Cpy 1 1 to 9 The default is 1 but it can be overridden.

Printer User

Default

Printer

Ref

The field defaults to the User’s default printer

but can be changed to any valid Printer.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 239

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY INVOICE/TRANSFER NUMBER

Access by Invoice/Transfer number allows you to cross-reference an Invoice number to the corresponding

Order and Bill of Lading.

Once you select to access the information by Invoice/Transfer, the following screen is displayed.

* Access by Inv/Trf * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

Acc Period Upd Date

Itm Order No B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

Ref IV -

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Invoice – blank screen

The Reference Prefix defaults to IV (Invoice), unless the TYP=X Product Installation Option is set to T,

then it defaults to TI (Toll Invoice). Use <Esc> from the Reference number field to change the Reference

Prefix to CN (Credit Note), XO (Transfer Update), LC (Late Charge Invoice) when applicable.

You must then specify an Invoice, Credit Note, Transfer Update, Late Charge Invoice or Toll Invoice

number. You can then either enter an Item number or press <Enter> to select all Items.

Once you press <Enter> from the Item number, the Customer number and Look-Up Name are displayed

for reference at the top of the screen.

* Access by Inv/Trf * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1050 PHILADELPHIA ST Acc Period 0408 Upd Date 22Oct04

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 240

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sort Sequence: Item number

* Access by Inv/Trf * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1010 ACME FAB Acc Period 0409 Upd Date 6Nov04

Itm Order No B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

1 556- 1 10 383 LBS

BA/2214/36/12'

2 556- 2 10 383 LBS

BA/2214/36/12'

3 556- 3 1 1,000 LBS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

4 556- 4 20 937 LBS

CRS/20/CQ/48.0000"X96.0000"/N.0359

C 5 556- 5 20 937 LBS

CRS/20/CQ/48.0000"X96.0000"/N.0359

6 556- 6 15 150 FT

RT/112109/513/10'

C 7 556- 7 15 150 FT

RT/112109/513/10'

8 556- 8 15 150 FT

P/11240/53S/10'

9 556- 9 15 150 FT

P/11240/53S/10'

Ref IV 204-

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Invoice

NOTES:

The Invoice/Transfer Update Accounting Period and Date are displayed next to the Customer name.

The Bill of Lading Branch is displayed before the Bill of Lading number if it is different than the

Session Branch.

If the selected transaction is an Invoice, then:

o A ‘C’ is displayed at the beginning of the detail line if the Invoice is linked to a Credit Note. Use

the Crd/Inv action bar option to call the Invoice Credits window for the selected Item. For

details, see the ‘Action Bar Options’ section of this chapter.

If the selected transaction is a Credit Note, then:

o An ‘I’ is displayed at the beginning of the detail line if the Credit Note is linked to an Invoice.

Use the Crd/Inv action bar option to call the Invoice Credits window for the selected Item. For

details, see the ‘Action Bar Options’ section of this chapter.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 241

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY ORDER NUMBER

Access by Order number allows you to cross-reference a Sales Order to the corresponding Invoices and

Bills of Lading as well as cross-reference a Transfer Order to its corresponding Bills of Lading and

Shipment Update.

Once you select to access the information by Order number, the following screen is displayed.

* Access by Order * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

Ref -

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Order – blank screen

You must specify an Order number. You can then either enter an Item number or press <Enter> to select

all Items.

Once you press <Enter> from the Order Item number, the Customer number and Look-Up Name are

displayed for reference at the top of the screen.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 242

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sort Sequence: Chronologically by Item number

* Access by Order * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1050 PHILADELPHIA ST

Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

1 IV- 161- 1 10 638 LBS

3Oct04 BA/2214/36/20'

2 IV- 161- 2 10 574 LBS

3Oct04 BA/2214/36/18'

3 IV- 161- 3 1 250 LBS

3Oct04 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

4 IV- 161- 4 1 100 LBS

3Oct04 CRC/18/CQ/36.0000"/N.0478

5 IV- 161- 5 1 10 FT

3Oct04 RT/112109/513/10'

6 IV- 161- 6 2 20 FT

3Oct04 DOM/112120/1018/10'

Ref 656-

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Order

NOTES:

The Bill of Lading Branch is displayed before the Bill of Lading number if it is different than the

Session Branch.

If the selected transaction is a Sales Order, then the Invoice Date is displayed below the Invoice

number.

If the selected transaction is a Transfer Order, then the Transfer Update Date is displayed below the

Transfer Update number.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 243

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY BILL OF LADING

Access by Bill of Lading number allows you to cross-reference a Bill of Lading to the corresponding

Order, Invoice or Transfer Update.

Once you select to access by Bill of Lading number, the following screen is displayed.

* Access by B/L * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

B/L Date

Itm Order No Inv/Trf Pcs Qty

Ref BL -

Cross-Reference Inquiry – By Bill of Lading – blank screen

The Reference Prefix defaults to BL (Bill of Lading) and cannot be changed. You must specify a Bill of

Lading number. You can then either enter an Item number or press <Enter> to select all Items.

Once you <Enter> from the Bill of Lading Item number, the Customer number and Look-Up Name are

displayed for reference.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 244

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sort Sequence: Chronologically by Item number

* Access by B/L * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1050 PHILADELPHIA ST B/L Date 6Dec04

Itm Order No Inv/Trf Pcs Qty

1 870- 1 10 638 LBS

BA/2214/36/20'

2 870- 2 1 5,000 LBS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

Ref BL 201-

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Bill of Lading

NOTES:

The action bar options Sls Dtl, and Inv Arc are not applicable if the Bill of Lading Item has not been

invoiced yet.

The Order Branch is displayed before the Order number if it is different than the Session Branch.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 245

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER NO.

Access by Customer by Customer’s Purchase Order number displays Bills of Lading and Invoiced

Transactions by Customer, by Customer’s Purchase Order number.

Once you select to access by Customer by Customer Purchase Order No, the following screen is

displayed.

* Access by Cus PO * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

Cust PO No Rel

Cross-Reference Inquiry –

Access by Customer/Purchase Order/Release Number

You must enter a valid Customer number. You can either specify a Customer’s Purchase Order number

or use the wildcard ‘*’ in the Customer Purchase Order field.

NOTE: If you use the wildcard, the program scans the Cross-Reference table and displays a window

with all existing Customers’ Purchase Order number/Release number combinations. You

can either arrow down to the desired combination and press <F1> or <Enter> to return your

selection, or press <F4> to exit the window without making any selection.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 246

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Cus PO No Rel No Order No

357- 1

CP12M-12 R1-1 414- 1

CP12M-12 R1-2 414- 1

CP12M-13 R100-01 448- 1

CP12M-13 R100-05 448- 1

CTM125ST R122 448- 1

RST180-CQ MR450 484- 1

ST20TM1 ST150 504- 4

ST20TM1 ST160 543- 1

ST20TM1 ST170 568- 1

Customer Number/Release Number/Order Number window

Once you select the Purchase Order and Release numbers, the following screen is displayed.

Sort Sequence: Chronologically by Ship Date by Order number

* Access by Cus PO * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1050 PHILADELPHIA ST

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

624- 2 170- 2 18Nov04 4 510 LBS

BA/2214/36/40'

624- 2 IV- 301- 2 - 170- 2 18Nov04 4 510 LBS

18Nov04 BA/2214/36/40'

650- 1 IV- 302- 1 1 10,000 LBS

23Nov04 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

651- 1 IV- 154- 1 1 10,000 LBS

23Nov04 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

652- 1 IV- 155- 1 171- 1 23Nov04 1 10,000 LBS

23Nov04 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

661- 1 174- 1 15Dec04 10 1,276 LBS

BA/2214/36/40'

661- 2 174- 2 15Dec04 1 998 LBS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000"/N.0478

668- 1 176- 1 15Dec04 10 1,276 LBS

BA/2214/36/40'

675- 1 184- 1 15Dec04 10 624 LBS

CRS/18/CQ/48.0000"X96.0000"/N.0478

Cust 1050 PO No Rel

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry –

Access by Customer/Purchase Order/Release Number

NOTE: The Bill of Lading Branch is displayed before the Bill of Lading number if it is different to

the Session Branch.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 247

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY CUSTOMER PART NUMBER

Access by Customer by Customer’s Part number displays Bills of Lading, Invoiced and Transfer Update

Transactions by Customer by Customer’s Part number.

Once you select to access the information by Customer by Customer Part number, the following screen is

displayed.

* Access by Cus Part No * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

Cust Part No

Cross-Reference Inquiry –

By Customer by Customer Part Number – blank screen

You must enter a valid Customer number. You can either specify a Part number or use the wildcard ‘*’ in

the Part number field.

NOTE: If you use the wildcard, the program scans the Cross-Reference table and displays a window

with all existing Order numbers with or without Part numbers.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 248

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Part Number Order No

CA2214340 543- 1

CA2214C20 493- 3

CP11240S20 493- 1

CP11240S20 494- 1

CP11240S20 495- 1

CP11240S20 496- 1

CP11240S20 497- 1

SPECS TEST 4- 5

Part Number window

You can either arrow down to the desired combination and press <F1> or <Enter> to return your

selection, or press <F4> to exit the window without making any selection and enter another Purchase

Order number.

Sort Sequence: Chronologically by Ship Date by Order number by Invoice number

* Access by Cus Part No * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1010 ACME FAB

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

377- 1 IV- 90- 1 120 7,656 LBS

24Aug04 BA/2214/36/20'

377- 5 IV- 90- 5 240 5,328 LBS

24Aug04 6061A/2214/6/20'

377- 9 IV- 90- 9 120 7,488 LBS

24Aug04 CRS/18/DQ/48.0000"X96.0000"/N.0478

377- 12 IV- 90- 12 30 1,200 FT

24Aug04 REC/42250/500/40'

377- 16 IV- 90- 16 10,500 LBS

24Aug04 SC/14/316/24.0000"

IV- 75- 1 300 6,660 LBS

26Aug04 6061A/2214/6/20'

IV- 75- 2 200 4,000 FT

26Aug04 REC/42188/500/20'

IV- 75- 3 50 2,000 FT

26Aug04 REC/42188/500/40'

377- 6 IV- 91- 1 21,000 LBS

7Sep04 5052C/063/H32/48.0000"/N.0630

Cust 1010 Part No

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Customer/Part Number

NOTE: The Bill of Lading Branch is displayed before the Bill of Lading number if it is different to the

Session Branch.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 249

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ACCESS BY CUSTOMER BY PRODUCT

Access by Customer by Product allows you to display Bills of Lading, Invoiced and Transfer Update

Transactions by Customer by Product.

Once you select to access the information by Customer by Product, the following screen is displayed.

* Access by Product * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

Cust Grp Size Grd Dim

Cross-Reference Inquiry – By Customer by Product – blank screen

You must enter a valid Customer number.

You can specify the Group/Size/Grade/Dim of the product you want to inquire about or you can use the

wildcard ‘*’ in the Group field, all Product Groups for this Customer are then displayed. The wildcard

‘*’ can also be used in the Size or Grade fields.

NOTE: When you use the wildcard, you have no access to the remaining fields.

12. Cross-Reference Inquiry Page 250

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sort Sequence: By Product, chronologically by Ship Date

* Access by Product * Cross Reference Inquiry Brh PHI

1010 ACME FAB

Order Itm Inv/Trf B/L No B/L Dt Pcs Qty

4- 1 38- 1 15Mar99 0 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0350

1- 1 84- 1 10Dec02 0 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

79- 1 98- 2 16Jul03 1 2,000 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

IV- 187- 1 1 12,000 LBS

16Jul03 CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

79- 1 IV- 296- 1 - 98- 2 16Jul03 1 2,000 LBS

16Jul03 CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

98- 1 101- 1 12Aug03 4 260,008 LBS

P CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

98- 1 108- 1 25Aug03 1 33 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

1246- 1 MTL- 3- 1 10May04 1 100 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

1- 1 304- 1 17May04 0 LBS

CRC/20/CQ/48.0000"/N.0359

Cust 1010 Grp CRC Size 20 Grd CQ Dim 48.0000"

1-Sls Dtl 2-Order 3-B/L 4-Extend 5-Inv Arc 6-Crd/Inv 7-Prf 8-Inv Trs

Cross-Reference Inquiry – Access by Product

NOTE: The Bill of Lading Branch is displayed before the Bill of Lading number if it is different than

the Session Branch.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

13. SELECTION ENTRIES

The following report and form printing selections are provided for functions in the Order Processing cycle.

Not all selections are available in all reports.

The following describes the selection fields.

Ack Printed Date ..................... [_] From: To:

Allows you to select Orders based on a range of Acknowledgement Printed Date.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Acknowledgement Printed Date.

Y - Enter a valid range of dates. Only those Orders having an Order Acknowledgment Printed

Date within the selected range are printed.

NOTE: The Acknowledgement Printed Date is not shown on the report.

Auto Send Document .............. [_]

Allows you to segregate the forms that are automatically emailed from the ones that need to be printed to

be sent by mail.

Options are:

M - Mail. Forms are only generated for the Customers that require a copy mailed to them.

These Customers have no record in the Customer/Vendor Document Distribution table or a

record with the Distribution Method N-No.

N - (Default.) All Forms are generated. They are NOT emailed, even if the Customers have a

record set up for emailing in the Customer/Vendor Document Distribution.

Y - Forms are only generated for the Customers that require an email. In addition to being

generated, the forms are automatically emailed to the email addresses entered in the

Customer/Vendor Document Distribution.

Branch ........................................ [_] XXX

Allows you to select one or all Shipping Branches.

13. Selection Entries Page 252

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Options are:

N - All Branches are selected.

Y - (Default.) Your User’s Branch is automatically displayed. You can override the Branch

code if you have multi-Branch access.

If you do not have access to other Branches, your User’s Branch is displayed and the field

is skipped.

In the selection entry of the Bookings report, you have access to the Branch code only, if in

addition to the multi-Branch access, the Booking Inq/Reports field of the User Group

information table is set to Y-Yes.

Up to five Branches at a time can be selected in the Executive Overview report. If no

Branch selection is made and there are more than four branches, the report prints another

page with the next one to four branches.

Branch Direct ........................... [_]

Allows you to select Order Items that have a Branch Direct Shipment Requisition open against any of the

Items on the Order.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Order Items are selected whether a Branch Direct Shipment Requisition exists

against any of the Items on the Order.

Y - Only Items that have a Branch Direct Shipment Requisition against any of the Items on the

Order are selected.

Charges-Processing ................. [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Processing Charge codes to be included when accumulating the cost to calculate

the Processing field.

Options are:

N - All Processing Charges are included.

Y - (Default.) You can enter up to ten valid Charges. At least one Charge number must be

entered.

Charges-Prs Op Pft ................. [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Processing Charge codes to be included when accumulating the cost (to be

reduced from the Processing figure) in order to calculate the Processing Operating Profit field.

Options are:

13. Selection Entries Page 253

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

N - No Charges are included.

Y - (Default.) You can enter up to ten valid Charges. At least one Charge number must be

entered.

Chg Typ-Brkg/Srpls ............... [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Charge Types to be included when calculating the value of the

Brokerage/Surplus fields.

Options are:

N - The Material, Processing, Freight and Other Charge Types are included.

Y - (Default.) You can enter up to four Charge Types. At least one Charge Type must be

entered.

NOTE: This selection allows you to track Sales and Operating Profit for a group of one or more

Sales Categories and Charge Types that are different than the ones selected using the Sls

Cat - Sls, Op Pft and Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft Selection Entry Options.

The results for this second group are printed in the Brkg/Srpls Sale and Brkg/Srpls

Profit/Loss fields of the report.

Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft ................ [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Charge Types to be included when calculating the value of the Sales and

Operating Profit fields.

Options are:

N - The Material, Processing, Freight and Other Charge Types are included.

Y - (Default.) You can enter up to four valid Charge Types. At least one Charge Type must be

specified.

Credit Hold ............................... [_]

Used to select Orders based on their Credit Hold status.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Orders are selected regardless of their Credit Hold status.

Y - Only Orders on Credit Hold are selected for the report.

Customer Name ........................ [_] From: To:

You can select the information to be printed based on a range of Customer Look-Up Names.

13. Selection Entries Page 254

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Customers are selected.

Y - You must specify a range of Customer Look-Ups

Customer Number ................... [_] From: To:

You can select the information to be printed based on a range of Customer numbers.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Customers are selected.

Y - You must specify a range of Customer numbers. In some cases, as in the Order Item

Expediting Report, the selection is for one specific Customer number rather than a range.

Delivery Method ...................... [_] __

Allows you to select Orders/Items based on a specific Delivery Method.

N - (Default.) Orders/Items are selected regardless of their Delivery Method.

Y - Allows you to specify one valid Delivery Method. Only Orders/Items having the specified

Delivery Method are selected.

Delivery Sequence by .............. [_]

This selection allows you to sequence the report by either Order Ship-To Postal/Zip code or by Order

Header Route and Stop.

Options are:

A - (Default.) By Postal/Zip Code

B - By Route and Stop.

Both codes are stored in the Order Header so that they allow for overrides made to the default Customer

and/or Customer Ship-To number.

Detail/Summary ...................... [_]

Used to select the format of the report.

Options are:

D - (Default.) Detail report.

S - Summary.

In the Booking Analysis report, this Selection Entry Option is only available when you select a report by

Management Summary Group.

13. Selection Entries Page 255

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Direct Shipment ........................ [_]

This is used to select Order Items that have a Purchase Order Reservation that has been flagged as a

Direct Shipment.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Order Items are selected whether they have a Purchase Order Reservation

flagged as a Direct Shipment or not.

Y - Only Order Items that have a Purchase Order Reservation flagged as a Direct Shipment are

selected.

Due Date .................................... [_] From: To:

Identifies the Order Header Due Date for reports that use the Order Header for report information, such as

Order Audit.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of the Order Header Due Date.

Y - You must specify a range of dates. Only Orders with an Order Header Due Date within the

specified range are selected.

Restriction: In the Order Fulfillment Report, this selection may restrict the printing of certain Items and

the Net Product Quantity is calculated using only the Items selected.

Entry Date ................................. [_] From: To: / /

This identifies the date the Order was physically entered on the computer. It is used to pick up Orders

that were entered on a specific day for daily activity reports.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Entry Date.

Y - Enter a date range. The default is the System Date. You should only enter the current

business date since some or all of a previous business day’s Orders may have already been

partially shipped or deleted and would lead to an inaccurate report.

Exclude Customer Owned Inventory [_] (Daily Operating Report)

Allows you to include or exclude Customer-Owned Inventory.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Customer-Owned material is included in the Inventory section of the report.

Y - Customer-Owned material is excluded from the Inventory section of the report.

13. Selection Entries Page 256

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Exclude Warehouse Type ....... [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select Warehouse Types to be excluded when selecting inventory.

Options are:

N - Inventory from all Warehouse Types is included.

Y - Default). You can enter up to seven Warehouse Types to be excluded. At least one

Warehouse Type must be specified.

Grp/Mgmt Summary Grp ...... [_]

Allows you to generate the report by Product Group or Management Summary Group.

Options are:

G - (Default.) Group.

M - Management Summary Group.

Include Non-Specific ............... [_]

This selection controls the printing of non-Specific Reservations and the calculation of the Insufficient

Reservations.

Options are:

N - (Default.)

Y - The option controls the following:

The non-Specific Reservations are printed in the detail reservation section (if Detail is

selected).

The non-Specific Reservation Quantities are included in the Consump column.

The non-Specific Reservations are included in the calculation of Insufficient Alloc.

Include Transient .................... [_] (Executive Overview Report)

This selection defaults to N-No and has no effect on the report. The Total Inventory and 4-Month

Inventory fields are printed based on the On-Hand Total Value from the Product Item file. If material is

transient, it has no On-Hand Total Value and is not included in the report.

Include Incoming Material [_] (Daily Operating Report)

Controls the printing of Incoming POs and Open Receivers next to the Inventory section of the report.

Options are:

N - (Default). The Incoming Purchase Orders and Open Receivers are not printed.

Y - Incoming Purchase Orders–weight and costs, and Open Receivers–weight, are printed.

13. Selection Entries Page 257

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Incoming Material ................... [_]

Used to select Order Items that have Incoming Material against them.

Options are:

N - (Default.)

Y - Only Order Items that have Incoming Material reserved against them are printed.

Incoming material can come from 3 sources:

- Reservations against Purchase Orders

- Service Orders

- Transfers from other Branches

Insufficient Allocation/Res ..... [_]

Allows you to select Order Items that have an insufficient quantity reserved to the Order Item.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Items are selected.

Y - Only Items with insufficient reservation are selected.

The formula for determining insufficient Reservations takes into account Specific and non-Specific

reservations, as well as Incoming Reservations. It is Balance of Order Quantity/Weight (if the

reservations are mixed ILC codes) minus non-Specific Reservations, minus Specific Reservations, minus

PO Reservations:

Insufficient Res = Balance of Order Quantity – Specific Reservations – Incoming Reservations

It is the Order Item Total field Unallocated Quantity.

Insufficient Finish .................... [_]

This selection allows you to select Order Items that have an insufficient Finished Quantity reserved to the

Order.

Insufficient Finish = Balance of Order Quantity - Finished Reservation.

Finished Reservations are any Specific Reservation where the Group, Size, Grade, Dimensions and Gauge

match the Production Product Item within the allowable tolerances.

Item Due Date ........................... [_] From: To:

Allows you to select Order Items based on their Due Date.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Due Dates are selected

Y - Order Items are only printed if their Due Date is within the selected range.

13. Selection Entries Page 258

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Item Status ................................ [_] XXX

Used to select Order Items that have a specific Status code.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Items are selected regardless of their Item Status code.

Y - You must specify one Status code.

In the Order Expediting Report, options are:

N - (Default.) All Items are selected regardless of their Item Status.

Y - You can specify a table of up to five Status codes.

Job Number .............................. [_] From: To:

Used to select Orders that are for a range of Job numbers.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Job number.

Y - You must enter a range of Job numbers. Only Orders with a Job number within the

selected range are selected.

One-Time/Permanent .............. [_]

This is used for all Selection Entry Programs, except for Forms printing. It identifies whether the

selection is a One-Time selection, that is, processed once and then deleted after the execution, or a

Permanent Selection, that is, a selection retained on file to be used mainly for repetitive functions, end of

period (daily, weekly or monthly), until it is selectively deleted.

Options are:

O - (Default.) One-Time

P - Permanent

Open/Complete ......................... [_]

Options are:

O - Open (default.) This prints any Order that is not Complete and that has a balance of

quantity on the Order not equal to 0.

C - Complete. This prints completed Orders.

13. Selection Entries Page 259

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Date ................................ [_] From: To:

Identifies the date that a customer placed his Order.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All dates are selected.

Y - You must select a range of dates.

Order Not Printed .................... [_]

Used to select Orders that have not had the Work Order form printed yet.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are printed whether the Work Order form is printed or not.

Y - Only Orders that have a Printed status of N are selected.

Order Number .......................... [_] From: To:

Used to specify a range of Order numbers for the report.

Options are:

N - No (default.) All Order numbers are selected.

Y - You must select a specific range.

Order Shipping Whs ................ [_]

Allows you to select orders by Shipping Warehouse.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders for all Warehouses are selected.

Y - Enter a specific Warehouse. Orders for the specified Warehouse are selected.

Order Type ................................ [_]

You can select up to five Order Types for a single selection.

Options are:

N - (Default.) The defaults are:

N - Normal

R - Release

T - Transfer

13. Selection Entries Page 260

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Y - If you enter Yes, options are:

B - Blanket

N - Normal

R - Release

S - Standard

Q - Quotation (used in the Sales Order Audit Report and in the Quotation reporting for

eSTELquote users only)

T - Transfer

NOTE: For printing of forms, there is no One-Time/Permanent selection field as each batch of Orders

can only be printed once and a Permanent selection is not applicable.

If an Order is to be shipped from another Branch, or from another Warehouse under the Selling

Branch, the printing of the forms is initiated only when the Selling Branch prints the Order

forms.

Original/Reprint....................... [_]

Allows you to select whether to print the Original or the Reprint forms.

Options are:

O - Original. (Default)

R - Reprint.

P/O Type .................................... [_] _ _ _ _ (Daily Operating Report)

Used to select a specific Purchase Order Type. Only used if the Include Incoming selection entry option is

set to Y-Yes.

Options are:

N - (Default.) The following Purchase Order Types are selected by default:

B - Blanket

N - Normal

R - Release

Y - Allows you to add a Purchase Order Type or change the defaults.

Print Allocations ...................... [_]

This option allows you to specify whether or not to print the Order Item Reservations.

Options are:

N - (Default.) The Inventory Reservations are not printed on the report.

Y - The Inventory Reservations and their related Remarks are printed on the report.

13. Selection Entries Page 261

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Print BackOrders ..................... [_]

This option allows you to print the Back Order, an Order Item that has been partially shipped either on a

Bill of Lading or on a Sales Order Invoice within a specific time period.

Options are:

N - (Default.)

Y - Print Back Orders.

NOTES:

By Default, only partially shipped Order Items are considered as Backorders. This means that if Item 1

is partially shipped on day 1, and Item 2 is partially shipped on day 2, then a Back Order exists for

Item 1 on day 1 and for Item 2 on day 2. If you print a Back Order after the first day, then on day 2

only Item 2 should print as a Back Order. If you do not print a Back Order on day 1, then on day 2

both Item 1 and Item 2 print as Back Orders.

The PDB=X Product Installation Option allows you to extend the Back Order status to other items of

the Order and have them printed on the Back Order form.

If Back Orders are to be printed, they should always be printed at the same time of day. This should

be after all shipments and adjustments or deletions to shipments have taken place for the day.

When selecting Back Orders it is recommended to also select a range of Orders by entering a Work

Order Prt Date range or a range/table of Order numbers.

When setting Print BackOrders to Yes, ALL orders within the selected range are first Credit Checked,

and then the Backorder Status is verified to determine if the form will be printed.

Print Remarks .......................... [_]

Allows you to print all the Order Item Remarks on the report.

Options are:

N - (Default.) No remarks are printed on the report

Y - All the Sales Order Item Remarks are printed under the sales line, before the reservation

line is printed if any.

Print Reservations .................... [_]

This option allows you to specify whether or not to print the Order Item Reservations.

Options are:

N - (Default.) The Inventory Reservations are not printed on the report.

Y - The Inventory Reservations and their related Remarks are printed on the report.

13. Selection Entries Page 262

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Process ....................................... [_] XXX

Used to select Order Items that have a specific Process code.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Items are selected regardless of their Process code.

Y - You must enter a Process code. Only Items that have the specified Process code are

selected.

Production Hold ....................... [_]

Used to select Orders that are on Production Hold.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of the Production Hold code.

Y - Only Orders that are on Production Hold are selected.

Production Sequence ............... [_]

Used to select Order Items that have a specific Production Sequence code.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Order Items are selected regardless of the Production Sequence code.

Y - You must specify a Production Sequence code. Only Order Items that have the specified

Production Sequence code are selected.

Product Selections .................... [_]

This option provides a pop-up window with a number of product specific selections that can be used to

select product-based information for the report.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All products are selected.

Y - Allows you to make a set of selections to be applied. Refer to the User’s Guide Inventory

Handling for more information on the selections provided.

NOTE: Except in the Ready-to-Ship report, the Warehouse selection (and Warehouse Type) is not used

in Order Entry reports. If a report contains a Warehouse, it is always the Shipping Warehouse.

Therefore, this selection is skipped in Order Entry reports.

In the Ready-to-Ship report, the Warehouse Type selection defaults to F-Finished and cannot

be accessed. The Warehouse selection allows you to enter a table of five different

Warehouses. A validation is done to ensure all entered Warehouses are of type F.

13. Selection Entries Page 263

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Profit Above .............................. [_]

Used to select Orders or Order Items that have a profit above a given percentage.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders/Order Items are selected regardless their profit percentage.

Y - You must specify a percentage. Only Orders/Order Items that have a profit above the

given percentage are selected.

Profit Below ............................... [_]

Used to select Orders or Order Items that have a profit below a given percentage.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders/Order Items are selected regardless their profit percentage.

Y - You must specify a percentage. Only Orders/Order Items that have a profit below the

given percentage are selected.

Profit Type ................................ [_]

Used to indicate the type of Profit to be used for selections.

Options are:

G - Gross (default).

N - Net.

Range/Table .............................. [_]

Order Number .......................... From: To:

Table of Order Nos .................

Allows you to select the Orders based on their numbers.

Options are:

R - Range (default). Allows you to enter a range of Orders to be included on the report.

T - Table. Allows you to enter a table of up to five Orders Manifests to be included on the

report.

Resp For/Sold By ...................... [_]

This relates to the selection of Branch and Salespersons. You must enter one of 2 options.

Options are:

13. Selection Entries Page 264

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

R - Responsible For (default):

In this case the Branch from the Customer table is used when making the Branch selection.

The system flags the Items for the customers selected, based on the Branch in the Customer

table. When making the selection for Salesperson, the system uses the Inside/Outside

Salesperson defined in the Customer table.

S - Sold By:

In this case, the Branch in the Order Entry Header table is used when making the Branch

selection. The Salesperson (Inside/Outside) on the Open Item Header is used.

Route .......................................... [_] ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Allows you to select the Sales Orders based on their Route.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All sales Orders are selected.

Y - You can specify up to five Routes. Only Sales Orders with one of the specified Routes are

selected.

Sales Allocation ........................ [_] XX

You can select one Sales Allocation or all.

Options are:

N - (Default.) No selection.

Y - If you enter Yes, you must specify a single Allocation code.

Sales Category .......................... [_] XX

Allows you to select Order Items for a specific Sales Category.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Order Items are selected regardless of their Sales Category.

Y - You must specify a Sales Category code. Only Items that have that Sales Category code

are selected.

Salesperson................................ [_] From: To:

Provides a selection of the Orders based on a range of Inside or Outside Salespersons.

Options are:

13. Selection Entries Page 265

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

I - Inside (default)

O - Outside

Sales Territory .......................... [_] From: To:

Allows you to select a specific Sales Territory or all Territories.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Information is printed regardless of the Sales Territory.

Y - You must enter a range of Territories.

Sale Type ................................... [_]

Used to select Order Items based on the Sale Type.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Order Items are selected regardless of their Sale Type.

Y - You must enter a Sale Type code. Only Items that have that Sale Type code are selected.

Selling Branch ........................... [_]

This identifies the Branch that took the Order. The defaults are the same as for Branch.

Shipment Status ........................ [_]

This allows you to specify Orders or Order Items on which there has been no activity or some activity.

Options are:

N - (Default.) This prints any Order that is not Complete and that has a Balance of Quantity on

Order not equal to zero.

Y - If you enter Y-Yes, options are:

N - (Default.) No Shipment. (Shipped to Date Quantities are zero.)

A - All Orders regardless of shipment status.

P - Partial Shipment (where the Shipped to Date Quantity is not zero and the Back Order

code is Y).

O - Over Shipped (where the Shipped to Date is greater than the Order Quantity).

Shipped Date ............................. [_] From: To:

Identifies the date that an Order is to be shipped.

Options are:

13. Selection Entries Page 266

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Shipping Date.

Y - You must select a range of dates. Only Orders shipped on a date within the specified range

are selected.

Shipping Branch ...................... [_]

This identifies the Branch that is shipping the Order Item. The defaults are the same as for Branch.

Shipping Hold ........................... [_]

Used to select Orders that are on Shipping Hold.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Shipping Hold code.

Y - Only Orders that are on Shipping Hold are selected.

Shipping Warehouse ............... [_]

Used to select Orders that are to be shipped from a specific Warehouse.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Header Shipping Warehouse.

Y - You must specify a Header Shipping Warehouse. Only Orders shipped from the specified

Warehouse are selected.

In the Executive Overview Report, the option allows you to select the Warehouses to be included in the

calculation of the value of the Produced not Shipped field.

Options are:

N - All Warehouses are selected.

Y - (Default). You can enter up to ten Warehouses. At least one Shipping Warehouse must be

entered.

Ship-To Postal/Zip ................... [_] From: To:

This allows you to select a range of Postal codes for Orders based on the Ship-To Postal/Zip code on each

Order.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Ship-To Postal/Zip code.

Y - You must select a range of Ship-To Postal/Zip codes.

13. Selection Entries Page 267

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Ship-To Route ........................... [_] From: To:

This allows you to select a range of Routes for delivery purposes. The Route includes all Stops within the

Route.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of the Ship-To Route.

Y - You must select a range of Routes. Only Orders that have a Route within the specified

range are selected.

Sls Cat-Brkg/Srpls .................. [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Sales Categories to be included when calculating the value of the

Brokerage/Surplus fields.

Options are:

N - All Sales Categories are included.

Y - (Default). You can enter up to ten Sales Categories. At least one Sales Category must be

entered.

NOTE: This selection allows you to track Sales and Operating Profit for a group of one or more

Sales Categories and Charge Types that are different than the ones selected using the Sls

Cat - Sls, Op Pft and Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft Selection Entry Options.

The results for this second group are printed in the Brkg/Srpls Sale and Brkg/Srpls

Profit/Loss fields of the report.

Sls Cat-Scrap Pft ..................... [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Sales Categories to be included when calculating the value of the Scrap Profit

field.

Options are:

N - All Sales Categories are included.

Y - (Default). You can enter up to ten Sales Categories. At least one Sales Category must be

entered.

Sls Cat-Sls, Op Pft ................... [_] (Executive Overview Report)

Allows you to select the Sales Categories to be included when calculating the value of the Sales and

Operating Profit fields.

Options are:

N - All Sales Categories are included.

13. Selection Entries Page 268

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Y - (Default). You can enter up to ten Sales Categories. At least one Sales Category must be

entered.

Sold Vs Reserved ..................... [_]

Allows you to select Order Items for which there is a mismatch between the Sold and the Reserved

Quantities.

Options are:

N - (Default.) All Order Items are selected regardless of the Reservation status.

G - Sold Quantity is greater than the Reserved Quantity.

L - Sold Quantity is lower than the Reserved Quantity.

When G or L are selected, the Ordered Pieces, Measure and Weight from the Order Detail

are compared against the Pieces, Quantity and Measure in the Order Invoice Totals to

select the Under and Over Reserved Order Items.

Source ........................................ [_]

This allows you to select one Source code or all.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected regardless of their Source code.

Y - You must specify a single Source code.

Starting Item Due Date ........... [_]

Used to select the starting Due Date for reports list transactions as at a specific Item Due Date (i.e., Order

Shipment Forecast).

Options are:

N - (Default.) Items are selected regardless of the Starting Item Due Date.

Y - You must specify a date.

Stock Type ................................. [_]

This allows you to select Order Items according to one of the following codes.

Options are:

S - Stock (default)

N - Non-Stock

W - Windfall

13. Selection Entries Page 269

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Transfer Requisition ................ [_]

Allows you to select Order Items that have a Transfer Requisition opened against any of the Specific

Reservations on the Order.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Items are selected whether or not they have a Transfer Requisition opened

against any of the Specific Reservations on the Order.

Y - Only Order Items that have a Transfer Requisition opened against any of the Specific

Reservations on the Order are selected.

Warehouse Type ....................... [_]

Used to indicate the Warehouse Types to include in the Inventory Position.

Options are:

D - Drops

F - Finished

P - Prime

O - Outside Processors

Weight U/M ............................... XXX

Used to indicate a valid Unit of Measure to be used as the conversion factor for the reports.

This allows all products to be converted to a uniform or equivalent weight (including non-weight

controlled) for comparison purposes. The field defaults from the ‘Printing Weight UM’ stored in the

Installation Option table but can be overridden by any valid Unit of Measure. However, if your Base

Measure is metric, then only a metric based Unit of Measure can be entered.

Work Order Not Prtd .............. [_]

Used to select Orders that have not had the Work Order form printed yet.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Orders are selected whether or not they had the Work Order form printed.

Y - Only Orders that have a Printed status of N are selected.

13. Selection Entries Page 270

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

14. PRINTING ORDER FORMS

OVERVIEW

This function handles printing of Sales Acknowledgement, Sales Order, Shipping Order, and Work Order

forms as well as the Product Picking Ticket. Each of these documents has slightly different printing

characteristics but they all involve the printing of Order information in a form presentation.

Each form has a certain format and set of standardized information. Each one accommodates a pre-

printed company logo and address or can be printed on a generic form on which the computer prints all

information. The sequence of printing the different forms and the ticket is the following:

Order Forms

o Sales Order

o Shipping Order

o Work Order

Production Work Order

Sales Acknowledgement (optional by Customer)

Product Picking Ticket

All the Order forms can be initiated as follows:

From the Order Entry program using the PRT Product Installation Option. Refer to the ‘Order Entry’

chapter for more details.

From a selection entry program. Details are discussed in this chapter.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 272

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sold To Name and Address

The name and address printed in the ‘Sold To’ section of the order forms default from the Order Header.

It is the Customer Name and Address from the Customer Information table or the alternate Name and

Address from the Customer Ship-To Override Name/Address table. For more details, refer to the

‘Adding a New Sales Order’ section of the ‘Order Entry’ chapter of this manual.

Automated Emailing of Sales Acknowledgements

This function allows you to automatically email Sales Acknowledgements to selected customers. The

automated email is generated either from the automatic or selective printing of Sales Acknowledgements

in Order Entry or from the Sales Acknowledgement Print/Reprint program. To use this function, you

must first determine which customers requiring Sales Acknowledgements also want these forms to be

automatically emailed to them, and then create records for each of these customers in the

Customer/Vendor Document Distribution table.

Refer to the ‘Reference Information’ and ‘Automated Emailing & Faxing of Business Forms’ chapters of

the eSTELfax manual for details.

Branch Used to Verify the Product Installation Options

The Order Form Printing program uses the Transaction (Selling) Branch to verify the Product Installation

Options, determine if the forms must be printed or not, and how they should be printed. This is intended

to accommodate different form printing settings for each Branch when the orders are processed by a

corporate Sales and Credit Department. This feature, however, is specific to Order Printing functions.

Non-Printing Order functions and all other eSTELPLAN modules, e.g., Purchasing or Receiving, check

for Product Installation Options based on the User Branch.

Example: A Sales Order has a Selling Branch PHI. The request to print the order forms is made by a

User in Branch CHI:

To determine which forms to print, the Product Installation Options controlling the

printing of order forms are verified for the Branch PHI.

To determine how the forms should be printed, i.e. with/without Contact information,

the Product Installation Options for Order Forms Printing are verified for the Branch

PHI.

This feature applies to the following forms:

Quote

Sales Order

Transfer Order

Shipping Order

Transfer Shipping Order

Work Order

Transfer Work Order

Sales Acknowledgement

Production Work Order

14. Printing Order Forms Page 273

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Bill of Lading

Product Installation Options Controlling the Printing of the Order Forms

The following options SHF=X, SHO=X, SLO=X, SOF=X, WKO=X and WOF=X, control which forms

are printed. The default is to print all forms: Sales Order, Work Order and Shipping Order.

Print Shipping Order Form

The SHF option controls the printing of the Shipping Order Form. This option can be set on the

following programs:

Order Entry <orpord>

Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

From Order Entry <orpord>

SHF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Order Entry <orpord>, and SHO=X set on the Order

Form Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Shipping Order Form does not print regardless of the other

options’ values.

If PRT=Y/S, then SHO=X is verified. If SHO=N, the Shipping Order Form does not print regardless

of the value of SHF=X.

If SHO=Y, then SHF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Shipping Order Form is printed.

From Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

SHF=X works in conjunction with SHO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>:

If SHO=N, the Shipping Order Form does not print regardless of the value of SHF=X.

If SHO=Y, SHF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Shipping Order Form is printed.

From Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

SHF=X works in conjunction with PFS=X and SHO=X set on the Order Form Printing program

<orford>.

PFS=X is verified. If PFS=Y, the other Product Installation Options are not checked.

If PFS=N, then SHO=X is checked. If SHO=N, the Shipping Order Form doesn’t print regardless of

the value of SHF=X.

If SHO=Y, SHF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Shipping Order Form is printed.

From Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

SHF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Credit Release <arpocr> and the Profit Release

<arpopr> programs, and SHO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Shipping Order Form does not print regardless of the other

options’ values.

If PRT=Y/S, then SHO=X is verified. If SHO=N, the Shipping Order Form does not print regardless

14. Printing Order Forms Page 274

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

of the value of SHF=X.

If SHO=Y, then SHF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Shipping Order Form is printed.

Print Order Form

The SOF option controls the printing of the Order Form. This option is set on the following programs:

Order Entry <orpord>

Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

From Order Entry <orpord>

SOF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Order Entry <orpord>, and SLO=X set on the Order

Form Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the other options’ values.

If PRT=Y/S, then SLO=X is verified. If SLO=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the

value of SOF=X.

If SLO=Y, then SOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Order Form is printed.

From Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

SOF=X works in conjunction with SLO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>:

If SLO=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the value of SOF=X.

If SLO=Y, SOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Order Form is printed.

From Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

SOF=X works in conjunction with PFS=X and SLO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>.

PFS=X is verified. If PFS=Y, the other Product Installation Options are not checked.

If PFS=N, then SLO=X is checked. If SLO=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the value

of SOF=X.

If SLO=Y, SOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Order Form is printed.

From Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

SOF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Credit Release <arpocr> and Profit Release

<arpopr> programs, and SLO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the other options’ values.

If PRT=Y/S, then SLO=X is verified. If SLO=N, the Order Form does not print regardless of the

value of SOF=X.

If SLO=Y, then SOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Order Form is printed.

Print Work Order Form

The WOF option controls the printing of the Work Order Form. This option is set on the following

programs:

14. Printing Order Forms Page 275

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Entry <orpord>

Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

From Order Entry <orpord>

WOF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Order Entry and WKO=X set on the Order Form

Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless of the other options’

values.

If PRT=Y/S, then WKO=X is verified. If WKO=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless

of the value of WOF=X.

If WKO=Y, then WOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Work Order Form is printed.

From Print/Reprint Order Forms <oreord>

WOF=X works in conjunction with WKO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>:

If WKO=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless of the value of WOF=X.

If WKO=Y, WOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Work Order Form is printed.

From Selective Order Form Reprint <orerof>

WOF=X works in conjunction with PFS=X and WKO=X set on the Order Form Printing program

<orford>.

PFS=X is verified. If PFS=Y, the other Product Installation Options are not checked.

If PFS=N, then WKO=X is checked. If WKO=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless of

the value of WOF=X.

If WKO=Y, then WOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Work Order Form is printed.

From Credit/Profit Release <orsocr>

WOF=X works in conjunction with PRT=X set on the Credit Release <arpocr> and Profit Release

<arpopr> programs and WKO=X set on the Order Form Printing program <orford>.

PRT=X is verified. If PRT=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless of the other options’

values.

If PRT=Y/S, then WKO=X is verified. If WKO=N, the Work Order Form does not print regardless

of the value of WOF=X.

If WKO=Y, then WOF=X is verified to determine whether or not the Work Order Form is printed.

Product Installation Options for the Order Forms Printing

The following options are available to control the Order forms printing. The Order form generates the

Sales Order, Work Order and Shipping Order. In Transfer Order Entry, it generates the Transfer Order,

the Transfer Work Order and the Transfer Shipping Order forms.

Barcoding

The option BAR=X is provided to print the Sales Order number and Item number in barcode on the Work

Order and Shipping Order forms. The Option works in conjunction with eSTELbarcodes to allow the

14. Printing Order Forms Page 276

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

production and the shipping department to scan the Order and Item number at time of production and

shipping.

Number of Copies to Print

The BLC=99 option allows the printing of multiple copies of Sales Order, Shipping Order, and Work

Order forms on a laser printer.

Contact Information

The option CON=X controls the printing of the Contact Information on the Order forms.

Job Number, Name and Address on Shipping Order

The option DLT=X, set on program <orford>, controls the Job number, name and address printing on the

Shipping Order form.

Primary and Secondary Printers

The option DLT=X, set on program <orpord>, allows you to choose whether to allow a Look-Up for the

Primary and Secondary Printer fields on the Order Print window.

Item Due

The IDD=X controls the printing of the Item Due Date on the detail section of the Form.

Company Name and Address

The option FRM=X is available to control the Name and Address information or logo printed in the top

left corner of the form.

Ship-From Address Printing

The FRW=X option controls the printing of the Ship-From address on the Sales Order form. This enables

you to have the Warehouse Ship-From Address printed instead of the Branch Ship-From.

Fuel Surcharge

The option FSC=X determines whether the words Freight or Fuel SurChg print in the Totals section of

the Shipping Order form when the order’s Terms of Payment is COD.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 277

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Heat Number on Shipping Order

The option HET=X allows you to control the printing of the ‘Heat No’ title on the Shipping Order form.

Printing Tax and Exempt License Number on the Shipping Form

The LIC=X option controls the printing of the Tax and Exempt License numbers on the Shipping Form if

the Sales Order Term of Payment is C.O.D.

Credit Log Printing

If you are using Automatic Credit Hold, the option LOG=X is available to suppress the printing of the

Credit Hold Log if it is not required.

Back Order Printing based on Balance Quantity and Value

Two options, MIN=9999 and QTY=9999, similar to those used by the End of Day Order Clean-up

utility, are available to control the printing of the Back Orders based on the Order Item Balance Quantity

and Value.

Restriction: These two options, MIN and QTY, work together and should not be set if the Option

MWT is set.

Back Order Printing based on the Order Item Balance Weight

The option MWT=X controls Back Order printing based on the Order Item balance weight.

NOTE: This option is not designed to work in conjunction with the MIN and/or QTY options.

Therefore, if it is set, it supersedes the other PIO’s, MIN and QTY.

Note Printing

The option NTE=X allows you to print the Note Remark entered in eSTELquote and/or Sales Order.

Extended Description

The PED=X option controls the printing of the Extended Product Master Description on the Order Item

section of the forms.

Printing Certificate Remarks

The option PER=X is provided to control the printing of the E-Certificate Type Remark on all order

forms.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 278

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Back Order Printing by Item Due Date

The option PDB=X is provided to control the Back Order printing.

Printing a Specific Type of Order Form

The option PFS=X is provided to control the verification of the SHO, SLO, STO and WKO Product

Installation Options when using the Selective Order Forms Reprint function. This option enables you to

print any of the Order forms regardless of the setting for the SHO, SLO, STO and WKO Product Installation

Options.

Restriction: The option is only used for forms printed through the Selective Order Forms Reprint

function.

Profitability Section

The option PFT=X is provided to completely or partially suppress the printing of the Internal Charges

and the Profitability sections for those companies that do not require this detail on the form.

Printing Inventory Reservations Information

Several options control the printing of the Inventory Reservations on the various Order Forms:

PIS=X is used for the Sales Order Form.

PIR=X is used for Shipping Order Form.

PIW=X is used for the Work Order Form.

Profit Hold Log Printing

If you are using the Profit Verification function, the PLG=X option indicates whether or not the Profit

Hold Log is printed each time a Sales Order goes on Profit Hold.

Order Value

The option POV=X is provided to control the printing of the Order Value on the Shipping Order form

regardless of the Order Terms of Payment.

On-Hand Tag Weight Printing

The POW=X option allows you to print the On-Hand Tag Weight next to the Heat Number in the

Inventory Reservations section of the Work Order form. This option requires the PIW=X Product

Installation Option to be Y-Yes.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 279

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Item Remarks Printing on the Work Order Form

The PRK=X option controls the printing of the Product Item Remarks on the Work Order form. When

set to Y-Yes, the information is defaulted from the Product Item Remarks field for the reserved product.

Printing the Measure

The option PRM=X is available to control the printing of the Measure regardless of the Order Item

Charge Unit of Measure.

Shipping Remarks on Work Order Form

The option PSR=X is available to control the printing of the Shipping Remarks on the Work Order forms.

Printing the Theoretical Weight

The option PTW=X is available to control the printing of the Theoretical Weight on the Order form.

Printing an equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure

The option PWB=X allows you to print the entered Sales Order Item Material Charge and Unit of

Measure as well as an equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure for Material Charge code 1.

Printing the Work Order Required Message

The option PWR=X is provided to control the printing of the ‘Work Order Required’ Message on the

Sales Order and Transfer Order forms.

Header Remarks on Work Order Form

The option RHR=X is available to control the reprinting of Header Remarks on every page of the Work

Order form when the WKF PIO is set to M-Multiple.

Important: If this option is set, the Header Remarks are printed at the beginning of every page, even

if an item is split on two pages.

Decimal Gauge and Gauge Range Printing

The RNG=X option controls the printing of the decimal gauge and gauge range on the Work Order Form.

Salesperson Name

The option SLP=X is provided to select whether the Inside, Outside or both Salesperson name(s), or none

are printed on the form for customer reference.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 280

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Status

The option STS=X controls the printing of the Order Item Status code and description on some Order

Forms (option W–Work Order form, or option B–Work Order and Shipping Order forms).

Weight Printing on Shipping Order

The option WGT=X is provided to control the printing of the Weight on the Shipping Order Form.

Range of Work Order Printing Dates

The option WKD=ZZ is available to prevent Work Orders from being printed too many days in advance.

Single/Multiple Items per Work Order Form

The option WKF=X is provided to print either a single Item per Work Order or multiple items per Work

Order. The choice depends on how much processing is required and whether the work to be done is

spread across more than one work area or warehouse bay.

NOTE: When WKF is set to S-Single and the Order has multiple Items, ‘Page 1…Last’ prints on

each page of the form. If one Item has too many lines to print, ‘Page 1…Continued’ prints,

followed by ‘Page 2…Last’. The notation indicates where to tear off an Item to split the

form into several Work Orders.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 281

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Installation Options for Production Work Order Forms Printing

Barcoding

The BAR=X option is provided to print the Sales Order and Item numbers in barcodes on the Production

Work Order form. The option works in conjunction with eSTELbarcodes to allow the production and the

shipping department to scan the Order and Item number at time of production and shipping.

Number of Copies to Print

The BLC=99 option allows the printing of multiple copies of the Production Work Order form on a laser

printer.

Printing the Contact Information

The option CON=X is provided to control the printing of the Contact Information on the Production

Work Order forms.

Printing the Job Number

The option DLT=X is available to control the Job number, name and address printing on the Production

Work Order form.

Print/Reprint function

The option FPF=X is available to determine if the print/reprint function uses the Printed flag at the Sales

Order Header level or at the Detail level.

Name and Address Printing on the Form

The option FRM=X is available to control the printing of the Branch or Company name and address on

the form, a logo or to not print any name and address.

Minimum Amount Required for Printing an Item

The option MIN=9999 is available to determine the minimum amount that must remain on an Item in

Order for the Item to be printed.

Print blank lines

The option, PBL=9, is available to control the printing of up to 9 blank lines after the WO Remarks of

each Item on the Production Work Order Form.

Extended Description

The PED=X option controls the printing of the Extended Product Master Description on the Item section

of the Production Work Order form.

Printing Certificate Remarks

The option PER=X is provided to control the printing of the E-Certificate Type Remarks on all Order

forms.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 282

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Printing of Incoming Product Information

The PIP=X option controls the printing of the Group, Size, Grade and Dimensions of the Incoming

Product on the Production Work Order Form.

Printing of Inventory Location for Non-Specific Allocations

The PLC=X controls the printing of actual inventory locations for the non-Specific Allocations on the

Production Work Order Form.

On-Hand Tag Weight Printing

The POW=X option allows you to print the On-Hand Tag Weight next to the Heat Number in the

Inventory Reservations section of the Production Work Order form.

Printing of non-Specific Reservations

The option PNS=X is provided to control the printing of the non-Specific Reservations on the Production

Work Order form.

Printing the Measure

The option PRM=X is available to control the printing of the Measure regardless of the Order Item

Charge Unit of Measure.

Order Item Shipping Branch and Production Sequence (PSQ) code

The option PSH=X is provided to print either the Items by Branch, Work Order number and PSQ code, or

generate a Production Work Order form for each Branch/PSQ combination.

Shipping Remarks Printing

The option PSR=X is available to control the printing of the Shipping Remarks on the Work Order form.

Percentage of Original Ordered Quantity for Printing and Item

An option QTY=9999 is available to determine the percentage of the original Ordered Quantity, below

which an Item is not printed.

Salesperson Name

The option SLP=X is provided to select whether the Inside, Outside Salesperson’s name(s), both or none

will be printed on the form.

Single/Multiple Items per Production Work Order Form

The option WKF=X is provided to print either a single Item per Production Work Order or multiple items

per Production Work Order. The choice depends on how much processing is required and whether the

work to be done is spread across more than one work area or warehouse bay.

NOTE: When WKF is set to S-Single and the Order has multiple Items, ‘Page 1…Last’ prints on

each page of the form. If one Item has too many lines to print, ‘Page 1…Continued’ prints,

14. Printing Order Forms Page 283

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

followed by ‘Page 2…Last’. The notation indicates where to tear off an Item to split the

form into several Production Work Orders.

Product Installation Options for Sales Acknowledgement Forms Printing

Number of Copies to Print

The BLC=99 option allows the printing of multiple copies of the Sales Acknowledgement form on a laser

printer.

Printing the Color and Location of a Product

The option COL=X controls the printing of the Color code description, the Standard Product Item

Locations and the Login ID.

Customer Currency Symbol

The CRY=X option controls whether or not to print the Customer Currency Symbol in the Total area.

Fuel Surcharge printing

The FSC=X option determines whether the words Freight or Fuel SurChg print in the Totals section of

the Acknowledgement when the order’s Terms of Payment is COD.

Printing the Company Name and Address

The option FRM=X controls the printing of the Branch or Company name and address or logo on the top

left corner of the form or the printing of the Order number on the top right corner of each page.

Note Printing

The option NTE=X allows you to print the Note Remark entered in eSTELquote and/or Sales Orders.

Extended Description

The PED=X option controls the printing of the Extended Product Master Description on the Item section

of the Acknowledgement.

Printing the Item Production Remarks

The option PPR=X allows you to control the printing of the Item Production Remarks.

Printing the Measure

The option PRM=X controls the printing of the Measure regardless of the Order Item Charge Unit of

Measure.

Printing an Equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure

The option PWB=X allows you to print the entered Sales Order Item Material Charge and Unit of

Measure as well as an equivalent Charge and Unit of Measure for Material Charge code 1.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 284

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Printing the Salesperson Name

The option SLP=X is provided to select whether the Inside or Outside Salesperson name, both

Salesperson’s name, or none, is printed on the Sales Acknowledgement form.

Printing the Specification

The option SPC=X controls the printing of the Specification information on the Sales Acknowledgement

form.

Printing the Order Amount

An option VAL=X controls the printing of the Order Amount fields on the Order Acknowledgement

form.

Printing the Sales Acknowledgement

The option VCH=X controls the printing of the Sales Order Acknowledgement based on the Credit Hold

code. When VCH is set to Y-Yes, the sequence of the Sales Acknowledgement and Order Forms printing

is reversed, allowing you to credit check the Order prior to printing the Acknowledgement.

Product Installation Options for Product Picking Ticket Printing

Selecting the Zebra Printer Model

The option STR=X controls the template file used during the printing of the Product Picking Tickets.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for a complete and detailed listing of the Product

Installation Options.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 285

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FORMS DESIGNATION AND USAGE

Each form has a particular set of Order information, a specific usage and a recommended number of

copies to be distributed.

NOTE: A dashed line is shown between sections where required.

Sales Acknowledgement

Usage This form is printed after a Sales Order has been entered (or created from eSTELquote) and

is used to confirm the products, prices, specifications and conditions for material or services

that have been ordered by a customer.

Based on the Acknowledgement Required field in the Customer account table, the form can

be selectively printed, automatically emailed, or emailed/faxed directly to a customer if

eSTELfax is installed.

Once the form has been printed, a code in the Order table is set so that the

Acknowledgement cannot be printed again unless a controlled ‘reprint’ is done.

Contents Name and Address of Customer and Ship-To Address

Order reference information

-----------------------------

Form Title

Test Cert Info

Header Remarks

-----------------------------

Products and quantities sold

Description, Order, Invoicing Remarks

Customer Part no, if present

End Use Description

Production Specifications

All external prices

-----------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Standard Acknowledgement messages

Order Weight Totals

Order Amount and Tax Totals

14. Printing Order Forms Page 286

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Order

Usage This form is printed after a Sales Order has been entered (or created from eSTELquote) and

is used as an office control copy of all Order information regarding the products, prices,

specifications and conditions for material or services that have been ordered by a customer.

It also contains order costing and profitability information so it can be reviewed by the

Sales Department in case of errors or low profitability.

The form is printed only if the Order has passed Profit Verification (if enabled) and Credit

Verification, unless the CRD=X option is set to N or O.

Once the form has been printed, a code is set in the Order table so that it cannot be printed

again unless a controlled ‘reprint’ is done, or a Back Order is generated that requires a new

form to be printed for the balance to be shipped.

Contents Name and Address of Customer and Ship-To Address

Order Reference Information

-----------------------------

Form Title

Test Cert Info

Test Certificate Remarks

Header Remarks

Global Allocation Remarks

-----------------------------

Products and quantities sold

Description, Order, Invoicing, Production Remarks

Cust Part no, if present

End Use Description

------ Specifications ------

Product Specifications

All External Prices

Internal Prices (except Chg 1-Internal), Costs and Profit

------ Inventory Reservations ----

Non-Specific Reservations

Specific Reservations

PO Reservations

Order Item Work Order Remarks

-----------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Order Weight Totals

C.O.D. Amount (If Terms of Payment code is 91-99)

14. Printing Order Forms Page 287

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Shipping Order

Usage This form is printed after a Sales Order has been entered (or created from eSTELquote) and is

used in two ways:

1. As a Warehouse control form used by the Production Manager to review orders that are in

production and to be shipped.

2. As a Shipping Order that is sent with the driver when the Order is delivered.

If the Bill of Lading functions are used to ship Orders, this form is not required. The Product

Installation Option SHO=X controls whether it is printed or not.

The form is printed only if the Order has passed the Profit Verification (if enabled) and Credit

Verification, unless the CRD=X option is set to N.

Once the form has been printed, a code is set in the Order table so that it cannot be printed

again unless a controlled ‘reprint’ is done, or a Back Order is generated that requires a new

form to be printed for the balance to be shipped.

Contents Name and Address of Customer and Ship-To Address

Order Reference Information

NOTE: If an Order has an associated Job, the Job number and Name print on the Shipping

form. If the Product Installation Option DLT=X is set on the Order Forms

program, the third Address Line of the Job Information also prints on the Orders.

-----------------------------

Form Title

Test Cert Info

Test Certificate Remarks

Header Remarks

-----------------------------

Products and quantities sold

Description and Order Remarks

Customer Part no, if present

Quantities shipped

-----------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Standard Bill of Lading messages

Order Weight Totals

C.O.D. Amount (If Terms of Payment code is 91-99)

14. Printing Order Forms Page 288

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production Work Order and Work Order

Usage This form is printed after a Shipping Order has been printed and is used in the Warehouse to

pick, process and prepare material for shipment.

The form is printed only if the Order has passed the Profit Verification (if enabled) and the

Credit Verification.

The form is not printed if the Sales Order is on Production Hold. This ensures that no actual

production starts unintentionally.

NOTE: If the Sales Order is printed while the Order is on Production Hold, the Order is

flagged as printed, but when the Work Order is printed later on, the Work Order

form is flagged as a Reprint.

The Work Order prints as a multiple Item or single Item per form based on the Product

Installation Option WKF=X. The Work Order option allows the Warehouse to pick and/or

process each Order Item together or separately from the other Items, depending on how the

Warehouse bays are laid out.

Once the form has been printed, a code is set in the Order table so that it cannot be printed

again unless a controlled ‘reprint’ is done, or a Back Order is generated requiring a new form

to be printed for the balance to be shipped.

Contents Name and Address of Customer and Ship-To Address

Order reference information

-----------------------------

Form Title

Test Cert Info

Header Remarks

Global Allocation Remarks

-----------------------------

Products and quantities sold

Description, Order Remarks

Customer Part no, if present

End Use description

------ Specifications ------

Product Specifications

Production Remarks

------ Inventory Reservations ------

Non-Specific Reservations

Specific Reservations

Product Detail Remarks

Reservation Remarks

PO Reservations

Work Order Remarks

-----------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Standard Work Order messages

Order Weight Totals

14. Printing Order Forms Page 289

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Picking Ticket

Usage These forms are used to initiate the staging of material for customer pick-up or delivery.

The Product Picking Ticket reference table allows you to define the Product Items for which a

Product Picking Ticket is to be printed.

The Product Picking Ticket can only be printed on a Zebra Printer (Printer Type

ZEBMULT). The Product Installation Option, STR=X, controls the template file used

during the printing of the Product Picking Tickets. Refer to the Product Installation Options

Guide for details.

The Product Picking Ticket has dimensions of 8.5” x 3.5” and includes a 2” x 3.5” tear-off

stub. The body of the ticket is printed in landscape format while the stub information is

printed in portrait format.

Contents of Product Picking Ticket:

Main Body of Ticket

Customer Sold-To Name

Order Reference Information

Customer Purchase Order and Release numbers

Note Remark

Item Due Date

Product and quantity sold

Four lines of remarks (types D and O)

------------------------------------------

First two Inventory Reservations

NOTE: The word DELETED is printed instead of the word REPRINT when the Order Item is

deleted and a Product Picking Ticket had originally been printed.

Date and Time the Product Picking Ticket is printed

First three lines of Order Item Type W (Work Order) Remarks (if any)

Small dashed line, enabling operators to sign the ticket upon completion of their duties

------------------------------------------

Ticket Stub Section

Order Reference Information

Sales Order and Item numbers in barcoded format (based on the BAR PIO)

Customer Sold-To Name

Ship-To Address

Customer Purchase Order and Release numbers in compressed format and printed in the same field,

separated by a ‘/’

Product and quantity sold

14. Printing Order Forms Page 290

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Combinations of Forms that can be Printed

The following combinations can be printed if the product pre-requisites have been met and the Product

Installation Options entered for the forms program.

Order Entry Sales Acknowledgement (optional)

Sales Order + Shipping Order + Work Order

Sales Order + Work Order + Bill of Lading (optional)

Sales Order + Production Work Order + Shipping Order

Sales Order + Product Picking Ticket + Shipping Order

NOTE: The Bill of Lading form requires entry of a specific transaction to record the material shipped.

It is recommended when the majority of shipments are via third party freight carriers. Refer to

the Shipping manual for more details.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 291

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRINTER ASSIGNMENT

Sales Acknowledgements

Sales Acknowledgements are printed on a daily basis, usually at the end of the day, and are mailed to the

customer. Selections for printing are made through the Selection Entry program. The Sales

Acknowledgement can be printed at any printer on the system. When a print is initiated from within the

Sales Order Entry program, the Acknowledgement form is printed on the Acknowledgement printer from

the Branch Options table.

Sales, Shipping and Work Orders

The Sales Order, Shipping Order and Work Order forms are printed under controlled circumstances and

are generally initiated as each Order is entered or released from Credit. As a result, the printer assignment

is determined by the printers designated in the Branch Options table so that the forms can be printed

continually as they are available.

The Product Picking Ticket printer is specified in the Product Picking Ticket Reference table. See the

Product Picking Ticket section for details.

If an Order is held for Credit or Profit, the Credit Hold or Profit Hold Logs are printed automatically at a

printer designated for each Branch. For details of the Credit and Profit Verification procedures, refer to

the Accounts Receivable manual.

Order Forms Printer Assignment and Display in CS/IRIS

From Selection Entry or Selective Form Reprint

Forms are printed on the printer selected in the Report Distribution section of the CS/IRIS Execution

screen. They are displayed in CS/IRIS under the Branch and Login ID that were selected in the Report

Distribution section of the CS/IRIS Execution screen.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 293

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

From Order Entry

FORM PRINTING VIEWING IN CS/IRIS

Printer Assignment Printer Branch # of Form Branch Login Id # of Spool File

Acknowled. Acknowledgement Prtr in the Branch

Options

Order Selling Branch One form Order Selling Branch User generating form One spool file

Sales Order Sales Order Prtr in the Branch Options Order Selling Branch One form Order Selling Branch User generating form One spool file

Shipping Order 1. User selected printer in pop-up

window if DLT=Y on <orpord>

(PRT must be S)

2. Shipping Order Prtr in the Branch

Options.

Item’s Shipping Branch One form printed per

Shipping Branch

Item’s Shipping Branch User generating form One spool file generated

per Shipping Branch.

Work Order 1. User selected printer in pop-up

window if DLT=Y on <orpord>

(PRT must be S)

2. Printer defined in the Sales

Category Work Order Printing

(orrslc_rec) for the Sales

Category/Shipping Branch. If no

match is found, the SWO PIO on

<orford> is verified. If SWO is not

set or SWO=B (default), the Work

Order Prtr in the Branch Options

is used.

3. Imm. Ship Printer defined in the

Product Picking Ticket

(orrppt_rec) for the Item Sold

Product and Shipping Branch if

SWO=P on <orford>. If no match

is found or SWO=B (default), the

Work Order Prtr in the Branch

Options is used.

4. Work Order Prtr in the Branch

Options.

Item’s Shipping Branch. One form printed

Per Shipping

Branch or

Per Sales Category

and Shipping

Branch (printer

assignment 2) or

Per Product and

Shipping Branch

(printer assignment

3)

Per Sales

Category/ Product/

Shipping Branch

(mixed printer

assignments)

Item’s Shipping Branch User generating form One spool file generated

per printer assigned,

i.e., if two Sales

Category/ Shipping

Branches have the same

printer assigned, one

spool file is generated

to print the two forms

(for each Sales

Category).

Production Work

Order

1. PWC Ticket Printer in the

Processing Work Center

(scrpwc_rec) if PSH=Y and the 1st

Process code from the Order

Item’s PSQ record is linked to a

PWC in the PWC/PRS Cross-

Reference (scrwcp_rec). If no

PWC Ticket Printer is defined or

Item’s Shipping Branch If PSH=N on

<orfpwk>, one

form generated per

order, with a page

break for each

Shipping Branch

and for each PSQ.

NOTE: One copy

Order Selling Branch User generating form If PSH=N, one

spool file

generated per

order, or

If PSH=Y, one

spool file

generated for each

Shipping Branch

14. Printing Order Forms Page 294

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FORM PRINTING VIEWING IN CS/IRIS

Printer Assignment Printer Branch # of Form Branch Login Id # of Spool File

PSH=N, the Prod. Wrk Order Prtr

in the Branch Options is used.

2. Prod. Wrk Order Prtr in the

Branch Options.

printed per

Shipping Branch,

but all copies are

printed on same

printer.

If PSH=Y, one

form generated and

printed for each

Shipping Branch

and PSQ

combination.

and PSQ

combination.

From Transfer Order Entry

FORM PRINTING VIEWING IN CS/IRIS

Printer Assignment Printer Branch # of Form Branch Login Id # of Spool File

Transfer Order Sales Order Prtr in the Branch Options Transfer Order

(Stocking) Branch

One form Transfer Order Branch User generating form One spool file

Transfer Shipping

Order

1. User selected printer in pop-up

window if DLT=Y on <orpotf>

(PRT must be S)

2. Shipping Order Prtr in the Branch

Options.

Transfer Order

(Stocking) Branch

One form Transfer Order Branch

User generating form One spool file

Transfer Work

Order

1. User selected printer in pop-up

window if DLT=Y on <orpotf>

(PRT must be S)

2. Printer defined in the Sales

Category Work Order Printing

(orrslc_rec) for the Sales

Category/Shipping Branch. If no

match is found, the Work Order

Prtr in the Branch Options is used.

3. Imm. Ship Printer defined in the

Product Picking Ticket

(orrppt_rec) for the Item Sold

(transferred) Product and Shipping

Branch if SWO=P on <orford>. If

no match is found or SWO=B

(default), the Work Order Prtr in

Transfer Order

(Stocking) Branch

One form printed:

Per Sales Category

(printer assignment

2) or

Per Product

(printer assignment

3)

Per Sales

Category/ Product

(mixed printer

assignments).

Transfer Order Branch

User generating form One spool file generated

per printer assigned,

i.e., if two Sales

Categories have the

same printer assigned,

one spool file is

generated to print the

two forms (for each

Sales Category).

14. Printing Order Forms Page 295

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FORM PRINTING VIEWING IN CS/IRIS

Printer Assignment Printer Branch # of Form Branch Login Id # of Spool File

the Branch Options is used.

4. Work Order Prtr in the Branch

Options.

Production Work

Order

1. PWC Ticket Printer in the

Processing Work Center

(scrpwc_rec) if the 1st Process

code from the Order Item’s PSQ

record is linked to a PWC in the

PWC/PRS Cross-Reference

(scrwcp_rec). If no PWC Ticket

Printer is defined, the Prod. Wrk

Order Prtr in the Branch Options

is used.

2. Prod. Wrk Order Prtr in the

Branch Options.

Transfer Order

(Stocking) Branch

One form Transfer Order Branch User generating form One spool file

14. Printing Order Forms Page 296

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Multi-Warehouse, Branch Direct and Transfer Order Shipments

In a Multi-Warehouse shipment, the Order Items are split between two different Warehouses within the

same Branch, and the paperwork to prepare the material must be printed in more than one place.

Other Branch Shipments

There are two types of Orders (Transfer and Branch Direct) where the Selling Branch must deal with

another Branch (or Branches) to provide material to the Selling Branch and/or ship the material directly to

the customer. In both these cases, the material is owned by a different Branch and both the Shipping

Order and Work Order forms must be printed there so the Order can be prepared and shipped from that

Branch.

Branch Direct Shipments

In this case, one or more of the Items on the Order is to be shipped from another Branch.

The Selling Branch prints the Sales Order for all Items, the Shipping Order for the Items it is shipping,

and the Work Order for the Items reserved within its own warehouses.

The Shipping Branch prints the Shipping Order for the Items it is shipping, and the Work Order for the

Items reserved within its own warehouses.

Example: A Sales Order with 3 Items is sold by Philadelphia but Item 2 is to be shipped directly to the

customer by the Chicago Branch, since it is the Branch that carries stock on that Item.

Philadelphia: Prints Sales Acknowledgement

Performs Profit/Credit Verification and Release

Performs Order printing for both Branches:

Sales Order (with all three Items)

Shipping Order (with Items 1 & 3)

Work Order (with Items 1 & 3)

Chicago: Receives – Shipping Order (Item 2 only)

Receives – Work Order (Item 2 only)

Order Item Printing on Separate Printers

You also have the ability to print Work Order Items on different printers depending on the Item Sales

Category and the Item Sold Product. This can be done through the use of the Product Picking Ticket table

and the Sales Category Work Order Printing reference table.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 297

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Category Work Order Printing Reference Table

Reference program Sales Category Work Order Printing enables you to set up different printers for each

combination of Item Shipping Branch and Item Sales Category.

Sales Category Work Order Printing

1. Item Sales Category.......

2. Item Shipping Branch......

3. Printer...................

4. Usage Status..............

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Field Name Default Validation Description

Item Sales Category Sales

Category

table

Verified against the Order Item Sales Category

when printing the Work Order.

Item Shipping Branch User

Branch

Branch

table

Verified against the Order Item Shipping Branch

when printing the Work Order.

Printer Printer

table

Must be a valid Printer for the Branch.

Status A A, I or D Denotes the current record status.

Options are:

A Active. Record is used when printing the Work

Order.

D Deleted. The record is bypassed when printing

the Work Order.

I Inactive. The record is bypassed when

printing the Work Order.

Work Order Printing

Product Installation Option SWO=X is defined to control the printers used to print the Work Order

Forms.

When printing a Work Order, the following verifications are performed when selecting the printer:

14. Printing Order Forms Page 298

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

For each Sales/Transfer Order Item, the Item Shipping Branch and Item Sales Category are used to

find a matching record in the new Sales Category Work Order Printing table.

A spool file is created by printer for each record where a match is found.

If a record is not found, the value of the SWO Product Installation option is verified:

o SWO=B: Those items not having records in the Sales Category Work Order Printing table are

sent to the Work Order printer set in the Branch Options table based on the Item Shipping

Branch.

o SWO=P: The Sold Product and the Shipping Branch are used to find a match in the Product

Picking Ticket table.

A spool file is created by printer for each record where a match is found. The Immediate

Ship Printer is used. The Future Ship Printer is ignored.

Those items without a record are sent to the Work Order printer set in the Branch Options

table based on the Item Shipping Branch.

Work Order Form

The line “TOTAL ITEMS ON ORDER IS ___” is printed at the end of the Work Order Form indicating

the total number of items on the Sales/Transfer Order, regardless of the setting of the SWO Product

Installation Option.

Restrictions

The printing of the Sales and Shipping Order Forms is not affected by this change.

The Sales Category Work Order Printing table is always verified regardless of the setting of the SWO

Product Installation Option.

The changes are applicable to the Work Order and Transfer Work Order Forms printing.

The printers defined in the Sales Category Work Order Printing and Product Picking Ticket files are

used when printing/reprinting the Work Order Forms from the Create Sales Order screen,

Sales/Transfer Order Entry program and the Credit Release program.

When printing Work Orders through the selection entries, multiple spool files are generated based on

the logic explained above. However all the spool files are sent to the printer specified in the

eSTEL/SCOPE Controller.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 299

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FORM PRINTING CHARACTERISTICS

The System Date and Time are printed on the Sales Acknowledgement, the Sales Order and the Work

Order formats.

The Date and Time plus the Heading of the form, e.g., ‘W O R K O R D E R’, and the Reference

number in the top right corner of the form are only printed if the generic forms printing option is used.

For companies that wish to pre-print their own company logo and company or Branch addresses, the first

10 lines are reserved for that purpose. If pre-printed forms are used, no computer-printed information is

printed in these lines.

The different components of the form printing are described by section below:

Sold-By/ Ship-From Name and Address on Generic Forms

On the forms, the Name and Address printed in the Sold-By top left-hand section is based on the Product

Installation Option FRM=X. It can be printed or suppressed as required. Refer to the Forms Printing

standards for details.

The Ship-From information prints as follows:

On the Sales Order, Transfer Order and Sales Acknowledgement forms, the Name and Address are

based on the Order Header Shipping Branch

On the Shipping Order, the Work Order and the Production Work Order forms, the Name and

Address are based on the Order Item Shipping Branch. This is due to the fact that, when printing the

Shipping or the Work Order forms, the Order Items are split on separate forms based on their

Shipping Branch.

If an Order Item is being pulled from another Warehouse within a Branch, it does not affect the Branch

Name and Address printed on the form.

Example: On a 2 Item Order, Branch 1 is the Selling and Shipping Branch for Item 1, and Branch 2 is the

Shipping Branch for Item 2. The Shipping Order for Item 1 would not have a ‘Ship-From’

Name and Address since it is the same as the Selling Branch. The Shipping Order for Item 2

would print ‘Ship-From’ and the Name and Address of Branch 2.

Sold-To/Ship-To Section

Blank lines are suppressed in both the Sold-To and Ship-To fields.

Blank lines are not suppressed on the Order Acknowledgement form as this form may be folded and

mailed in a window envelope.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 300

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Ribbon Line Area

This area is printed under the Customer Sold-To and Ship-To address areas. It gives reference

information (such as the Terms of Payment, the Order Date, the Freight) that are applicable to all Items on

the Order regardless of where it is shipped from and what products are on it.

The Customer Purchase Order and Release numbers are printed in compressed format, using up to 38

characters and separated by a ‘/’ delimiter. If there are no Purchase Order and Release numbers, the

PO/Rel title is suppressed.

Based on the Product Installation Option SLP=X, the Inside, the Outside or both Salesperson names can

be printed. If the Option is not set, no Salesperson name is printed.

The form number, on the right-hand side of the form title line, is as follows:

Form Type (SO), then the Branch followed by a space, then the Sales Category followed by a hyphen

and the transaction number, with no leading spaces.

o Example: SO No PHI WS-1780

A double line is printed under the ribbon section to separate it from the Items on the Order.

Sales Acknowledgement:

The ‘Job’ title is suppressed if the Job number is Zero.

The telephone number defaults from the Customer Pricing table. If it does not exist, it comes from

the Ship-To or from the Customer Information table.

The Con and the PO/Rel titles as well as the third line are suppressed if there is no Contact, PO and

Release numbers to be printed on the form.

o The Contact information defaults from the Contact Information table, if a record exists for the

Sales Order, i.e. was created upon turning the Quote into the Sales Order. Otherwise, the Contact

information is based on the Ship-To record of the SO or defaults from the Customer record if no

Ship-To was specified.

Blank sample:

Trm X----------------------------X Ord DDMmmYY Due DDMmmYY X-—ALPHA-X Job ZZZZZZ

Frt X----------------------------X Via X------------------X FOB X-------------X

Con X----------------------------X PO/Rel XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Slp X----------------------------X Tel X----------X Fax X----------X

X----------------------------X

================================================================================

S A L E S A C K N O W L E D G M E N T XX No XXX XX-ZZZZZZ

14. Printing Order Forms Page 301

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Completed sample:

Trm ½ % 10 DAYS, NET 30 Ord 09Feb04 Due 15Mar04 ASAP Job 154110

Frt PREPAID Via APACHE TRUCKING FOB DESTINATION

Con John Doe PO/Rel 92-P-354634581/Rel 802

Slp Edward Blacksmith Tel 514-654-3210 Fax 514-345-6789

Jake Lansdowne

================================================================================

S A L E S A C K N O W L E D G M E N T SO No PHI WS-1780

Order forms:

The ‘Job’ title is suppressed if the Job number is Zero.

The Salesperson title and the 4th printed line are suppressed if there is no Salesperson’s Name to be

printed. If only one Salesperson’s Name is printed on the form, only the 4th line is suppressed.

If no Salesperson’s Name is printed and if the PO/Rel field is blank, the line is suppressed.

The Product Installation CON=X controls the printing of the Contact information, namely, Contact

Name, Phone and Fax numbers.

o The Contact information defaults from the Contact Information table, if a record exists for the

Sales Order, i.e. was created upon turning the Quote into the Sales Order. Otherwise, the Contact

information is based on the Ship-To record of the SO or defaults from the Customer record if no

Ship-To was specified.

Blank sample:

Trm X----------------------------X Ord DDMmmYY Due DDMmmYY X—ALPHA-X Job ZZZZZZ

Frt X----------------------------X Via X-----------------X FOB X-------------X

Slp X----------------------------X PO/Rel XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

X----------------------------X

Con: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Tel X----------X Fax X----------X

================================================================================================

Completed sample:

Trm 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS Ord 01Mar04 Due 03Mar04 asap

Frt Charge Via OUR TRUCK FOB

Slp DAVE GREEN PO/Rel 123/1

STEVE HENDERSON

Con FRED STEPHENS Tel 215 142 5145 Fax 797 792-9760

================================================================================

S A L E S O R D E R - REPRINT SO No PHI WS-613

The Ribbon Area is only printed on the first page when the Order has more than one page.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 302

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

NOTE: On the Shipping form, the Product Installation Option DLT=X controls the printing of the

Job number, name and address:

Completed Shipping Order form sample:

Trm 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS Ord 01Mar04 Due 03Mar04 asap Rt 142-002

Frt Charge Via OUR TRUCK FOB

Slp DAVE GREEN PO/Rel 123/12

STEVE HENDERSON

Con FRED STEPHENS Tel 215 142 5145 Fax 797 792-9760

Jb 5750 LIBERTY SUITES INNS 3551 WILSON AVE

================================================================================

Production Work Order

The ‘Job’ title is suppressed if the Job number is Zero.

The PSQ prints according to the following logic:

o If the PSQ only has one Process code, then the first 31 out of the 35-character Process code

description from the Process codes table are printed;

o If the PSQ has two or three Process codes, then no description is printed. Only the Process codes

associated with that PSQ are printed as follows: PSQ-Prs Prs Prs.

When the CON Product Installation Option is set to Y-Yes, the Contact information defaults from the

Contact information table, if a record exists for the Sales Order, i.e., was created upon turning the

Quote into the Sales Order. Otherwise, the Contact information is based on the Ship-To record of the

SO or defaults from the Customer record if no Ship-To was specified.

At the beginning of the Title line, the title ‘Blk’ is printed for Blanket Orders.

Blank Production Work Order sample:

Trm X----------------------------X Ord DDMmmYY Due DDMmmYY X--ALPHA-X Job ZZZZZZ

Frt X----------------------------X Via X------------------X FOB X--------------X

PO/Rel XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Slp X----------------------------X

PSQ XXX X------------------------X Sch Dt DDMmmYY X----------------------------X

Con: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Tel X----------X Fax X----------X

================================================================================

Blk PHIZZZZZZ P R O D U C T I O N W O R K O R D E R -REPRINT SO XXX XX-ZZZZZZ

14. Printing Order Forms Page 303

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Completed Production Work Order sample:

Trm ½ % 10, NET 30 DAYS Ord 21Nov04 Due 12Dec04 Job 5750

Frt Charge Via OUR TRUCK FOB

PO/Rel 453-12/A-A8 Slp JOHN NELLING

STEVE HENDERSON

================================================================================

P R O D U C T I O N W O R K O R D E R -REPRINT SO PHI WS-556

Test Certificate Information

This information comes from the Order. It is formatted depending on the information on the Order.

If the Chemical Test Required and Physical Test Required are both N-No, then this line does not print at all.

Test Certs: Chem-X Phys-X Z Original copies with Shipment, Z with Invoice

Chemical Test Required: Prints ‘Chem’- Y-Yes or N-No

Physical Test Required: Prints ‘Phys’- Y-Yes or N-No

Copies with Shipment: Prints the number of Certificate copies to be sent with the Shipment

Type of Certificate: Prints ‘Compliance’, ‘Original’ or ‘Separate’ before ‘copies with

shipment'

Copies with Invoice: Prints the number of Certificate copies to be sent with the Invoice

Order Header Remarks

These remarks (Test Certificate, Header and Global) are printed within the same section as the Test

Certification information. No blank lines are left between the Test Certification information and the Test

Certificate Remarks. The combination of Remarks printed depends on the form type. See Contents of

Forms above.

Restriction: The Product Installation Option PER=X controls the printing of the E-Test Certificate

Type Remarks on all Order forms and on the Production Work Order.

S A L E S O R D E R - REPRINT SO No PHI WS-668

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys N 2 Original copies with Shipment, 1 with Invoice

TEST CERTIFICATE REMARKS

HEADER REMARKS

GLOBAL ALLOCATION REMARKS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

14. Printing Order Forms Page 304

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Information

The Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Gauge and Gauge Type of the ordered product is formatted using the

same 2 x 45 character lines used in the Order Item entry, so that it appears exactly as it was entered.

Pieces and weight print for each Item on the form, on the first line following the first Description line.

However, if the quantity in the Pcs field is ‘0’, then the field and Unit of Measure ‘Pcs’ is suppressed.

The Pcs Unit of Measure defaults from the Installation Option table based on the Company Base Unit of

Measure.

The Item Due Date (if different from the Order Header) and the Measure, if required, print on the second

line, following the second Description line. The Measure prints if, on the Material External Charge, the

Unit of Measure basis code is Length or Area. However, a Product Installation Option, PRM=X, is

available to control the printing of the Measure, regardless of the Order Item Charge Unit of Measure.

The Weight/Measure UM is based on the Imperial or Metric Weight UM in the Installation Options table

depending on the Base Measure of the installation.

ZZZ X----------PRODUCT DESCRIPTION---------------X ZZZ,ZZZ PcsXXX --QTY & UM ----X

X----------PRODUCT DESCRIPTION---------------X DDMmmYY ZZZZ,ZZZ XXX

Part No X------CUSTOMER PART NO------X 18.8100/CWT

For length controlled products priced per CFT, the Pieces and Weight are printed on the first line and

the FT on the second line.

For weight controlled products priced per CWT, the Pieces and Weight are printed on the first line

and no Measure is printed on the second line.

For non-weight controlled products, the Equivalent Weight is always printed.

If the Customer Part number field on the Order is NOT spaces, then the heading ‘Part No’ is printed

in front of the Part number field.

The Production Sequence code and its corresponding Processes are printed on the Part No line for

each Order Item.

7 Bar Angle ASTM A36 10 PCS 638 LBS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20' 200 FT

Part No CA2214320 PSQ UN

o If there is no Part No, the ‘Part No’ title is suppressed.

o If there is no Production Sequence code, the ‘PSQ’ title is suppressed.

o If an Item has no Part number, no PSQ, and if the weight equivalent Price is not printed, the line

is suppressed.

A dashed line is printed before each Order Item in order to separate it from the Test Certificate and

Order Header Remark lines.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 305

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Shipment Quantities

Since the Shipping Order is printed before the Order is picked, processed and prepared for shipment, the

Pieces, Quantities and Weight shipped are subject to change from the Order quantities. As a result, the

Traffic Manager must write in the quantities shipped. A formatted line is provided for this purpose on the

Shipping Order form so that the driver and customer are aware of any difference.

Depending on the product, you manually enter Pieces, Quantity and Weight. The Quantity UM prints

according to the Imperial or Metric Weight UM code.

If the Shipping Warehouse on the Order Item is different from the default Shipping Warehouse on the

Shipping Branch, then ‘Ship from Brh XXX Whs YYY’ is printed to the left one line above the ‘Shipped:

PCS LBS’ headings:

On the Shipping form:

Ship from Brh PHI Whs PPR

Shipped: PCS LBS

On the Work Order form, this information appears as follows:

Shipping From: PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH Whs PPR

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

Production Specifications

Production Specifications are a variable length print area since not all types of Tolerances and

Specifications, nor all fields of each type, are filled in for each Order Item. The Tolerance and

Specification headings and detail are only printed if there are values for the fields entered on the Order.

In the Specification section, if there is only one value in either the Min or the Max field for the

specification, then the specification is printed without the range designation.

Example: If the Rockwell specification is entered as Min 80, Max 85, then it is printed as ROCK:80-85.

However, if the Rockwell is entered as Min 80, then it is printed as ROCK= 80.

Only the Specifications that have values in the Specification abbreviation are printed on the

Work Order to save space and make the specifications easier to read.

For the Gauge, Width and Length tolerance fields, only the first two integer fields are suppressed if the

field is zero. The balance is printed as 0.0000 so that the tolerances are always printed for easier

recognition in the warehouse.

The fields for Min Wgt, Max Wgt, Min/Max ID and Min/Max OD are only printed for products that have

Inventory Organization WT (coil) as these fields only apply to those types of products. Also, the Min

Wgt, Max Wgt, Min/Max ID and Min/Max OD headings are not printed if the Sales Order Item has no

Specifications.

The Production Specification Remarks can be up to 99 lines in length. Only the lines that have been used

14. Printing Order Forms Page 306

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

on an Order Item are printed.

The ID/OD Min/Max fields are formatted according to the Imperial or Metric code of the Order Item

999.99 for Imperial Items, or 99999.99 for Metric Items.

Production Specification Print Layout:

<<<--------------------------- SPECIFICATIONS --------------------------->>>

Ga Tol +ZZ9.9999 -ZZ9.9999 Pc/Tag ZZZZZ ID Mn OD Mx OD Mn Wt Mx Wt

WthTol +ZZ9.9999 -ZZ9.9999 Wt/Skd ZZZZZ ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ

LthTol +ZZ9.9999 -ZZ9.9999 Ty XXX Pkg XXX ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZ.ZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ

XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ

XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ

XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ

XXXXX=ZZZZZZ.ZZ-ZZZZZZ.ZZ

X------------Production Remarks area-------------X

<<<--------------------------- SPECIFICATIONS --------------------------->>>

Ga Tol + 0.0004 - 0.0004 Pc/Tag 2 ID MnOD MxOD MnWgt MxWgt

WthTol + 0.5000 - 0.5000 Wt/Skd 0.30 0.40 15.88 1010

LthTol + 0.0000 - 0.0000 Ty Pk

Production remarks area

MATERIAL 1,000 LBS @ 24.0000 CWT E 240.00

Item Charge Table

The Charge Table is printed or suppressed depending on the format of the form (see above). If it is not to

be printed, then none of these fields are printed. If it is to be printed, then on the Sales Acknowledgement

only the External Charges are printed, while on the Sales Order, both External (Type E) and Internal

charges (Type I) are printed.

Up to 8 charge lines can be printed depending on the number of Charges on the Item (the Charge code 1-

Internal sales breakdown is not printed).

The Charge Quantity and Quantity UM are printed in 19 characters as per the Standard printing routine.

Based on the Product Installation Option PFT=X, the Internal Charges and the detailed Profitability

section may be suppressed.

Unlike the Charge Table in the Item itself, the table is printed with the Billing Quantity before the Rate so

that it is more easily read by customers.

There is no title line. The Charge Table starts immediately after the Production Remarks, if any. If there

are no Production Remarks, the Charge Table follows the Product Description without a blank line.

Charge Table Print Layout

Production Remarks area.

X---CHG DESC-------X X---CHG QTY-----X XXX @ZZZ,ZZ9.99ZZ/XXXZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZ9.99-

X------------------X X---------------X XXX @ZZZ,ZZ9.99ZZ/XXXZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZ9.99-

X------------------X X---------------X XXX @ZZZ,ZZ9.99ZZ/XXXZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZ9.99-

14. Printing Order Forms Page 307

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production remarks area

MATERIAL 1,000 LBS @ 24.0000 CWT E 240.00

PROCESSING 1,000 LBS @ 5.0000 CWT E 50.00

FREIGHT 1,000 LBS @ 3.0000 CWT E 30.00

Profit Analysis

On Quotations and Sales Orders, the Profit Analysis can be printed to allow the Sales Department to

review the profitability of each Item and of the total Order before committing to a final sale, or starting

production of the material. However, based on the Product Installation Option PFT=X, this section can

be suppressed, or only one line of Total order profitability can be printed instead.

The External (Sales) and Internal (Breakdown) Revenue, the Profit Amount and Profit Percentages are

shown. The Material, Processing, Freight and Other revenue is shown individually. The Total fields

show all revenue and profits together. The ‘Gross’ profit is the Material Profit and Profit % alone. The

‘Net’ Profit is the Total Profit and Total Profit %.

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZ.ZZ-

Prs: ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZ.ZZ-

Frt: ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZ.ZZ-

Oth: ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZ.ZZ-

Tot: ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ- ZZZ.ZZ-

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 1,250.00 1,250.00 987.50 262.50 21.00

Prs: 50.00 50.00 25.00 25.00 50.00

Frt: 100.00 100.00 100.00 0.00 0.00

Tot: 1,400.00 1,400.00 1,112.50 287.50 20.54

Sample of an Item complete profitability section

MATERIAL 100 FT @ .9950 FT E 99.50

PROCESSING 100 FT @ .2500 FT E 25.00

FREIGHT 177 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 3.54

Sales Amt 128.04 Profit Amt 18.32 G.P% 18.41 N.P% 14.31

Sample of a one-line summary of the profitability section

This section is variable depending on the types of Charges and Costs on the Order Item. Charge types

that do not have either Sales or Costs are not printed. E.g., it is possible to have Material Charges and

Profit and then have only Freight Cost but no Processing Sale or Cost.

Inventory Reservations and Shop Instructions

Inventory Reservations are composed of non-Specific Reservations, Specific Reservations (with up to 5

lines of Reservation Remarks), a Purchase Order Reservation record, and a variable number of Work

Order Remarks (up to 99 lines).

14. Printing Order Forms Page 308

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If any of the Order Item Inventory Reservation records is being transferred in from another Branch, a

notation is printed immediately prior to that reservation record indicating the Stocking Branch that is

supplying that Item.

Transfer XXX X---------------------------------X

If the Shipping Branch of the Item is different from the Selling Branch of the Order, or if the Shipping

Warehouse of the Item is different from the default Shipping Warehouse of the Shipping Branch, a notation

is printed on the Work Order indicating the Branch and/or Shipping Warehouse where it is shipping from.

Shipping From: XXX X---------------------------------X Whs XXX

The non-Specific Reservations are printed first followed by the Specific Reservations and then all the

Incoming Reservations that exist for the Order Item.

A standard line is used to print both Inventory Reservations: Specific and non-Specific. The standard line

includes the following:

Group/Size/Grade and Dimension in a compressed format up to 36 characters

Tag and Warehouse

Location: Product Detail Location, or Standard Location if the Product Detail Location is blank

Pieces and Quantity (Quantity is rounded to next highest whole unit. Example: 75’5” = 76

o Pieces and Quantity fields are signed to show negative Returns-to-Stock

NOTE: Also printed on the form:

Non-Specific Reservations even if the Reserved Weight is less than one pound

Non-zero Measure

The Alternate Locations, if any, are usually printed immediately below the reservation line and below the

line with the Color code and Heat number, if any. They appear on the Sales Order, Work Order and

Production Work Order forms.

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS----------------------->>>

XXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXX/XXXXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ WHS LOCATIO ZZZZ- PCS X-QTY UM-X

XXXXXX/XXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXX/XXXXXXXXX --TAG—WHS LOCATIO ZZZZZZ-PCS X-QTY UM-X

PO PHI- 2008- 1 LTV STEEL 10Oct04 PPR 0 PCS 1,000 LBS

X-------Product Detail Remarks (50 Characters)---X

X-------Reservation Remark (variable to 5 lines)—X

X-------Reservation Remark (variable to 5 lines)—X

PO XXX-ZZZZZZ-ZZZ X----Vendor---X Due DDmmmYY WHS ZZZZZZ Pcs X------QTY UM-----X

*** Work Order is Required ***

14. Printing Order Forms Page 309

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" ZZZZZZZ PFS BAY1 1 PCS 7000 LBS

Alt Loc: BAY5

Transfer PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH Whs PFS

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT503 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 8000 LBS

Product Detail Remarks (Work Order form)

Reservation Remarks

PO PHI- 2310- 1 ABC FREIGHT 12Aug04 PPR 1 PCS 5,000 LBS

Work Order Remarks

*** Work Order is Required ***

On the Work Order form, if the Specific Reservation has a Color code with a Description that is not

blank, the Color Description is printed immediately after the Specific Reservation Remarks lines. Next to

the Color Description, the Tag’s Heat number is printed. It is followed by the On-Hand Tag Weight when

POW=Y.

The message “*** Work Order is Required ***” is printed on the Sales Order form based on the Product

Installation Option PWR=X.

On the Sales Order and Work Order forms, ‘RS’ is printed next to the Inventory Reservation line to easily

identify Return-to-Stock Reservations.

RS CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT503 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 8000- LBS

Shipping Remarks and Standard Messages

After the Order Item information has been printed, the Shipping Instructions and Standard message

remark lines are printed. A dashed line is printed prior to printing these messages so they are physically

separated from the last Item printed.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

X---Customer/Ship-to Shipping Remarks (Variable)-X

X------------------------------------------------X

X------------------------------------------------X

X------------------------------------------------X

X---Standard Messages (Variable)-----------------X

X------------------------------------------------X

X------------------------------------------------X

Standard Message Types to be printed:

Sales Order form – No message

Work Order form – WKO

Shipping Order form – BOL

14. Printing Order Forms Page 310

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Totals

After all Items have been printed on the form, a total line is printed containing the total number of Items

printed and the total weight of the Items based on the weight (and equivalent weight for non-weight

controlled products) of the Items on the Order.

For Imperial sites, if the Order Header is Metric, then the equivalent weight in KGS is printed as well.

NOTE: If the customer Currency is different from the Base Currency, the customer Currency code is

printed to the right of the amount field.

ZZZZ,ZZZ XXX

Order Totals: ZZZ Items ZZZZ,ZZZ XXX

The weight Unit of Measure depends on the Base Measure and the code entered in the Installation

Options table for the Imperial or Metric Weight UM.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 311

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

C.O.D. Orders

If the Terms of Payment code on the Order Header is from 90 to 99 (indicating a C.O.D. sale), then

additional lines are printed after each Item and after the Order Totals to indicate the Charges for the Items

on the Order. If there have been any changes to the Items shipped, then the totals have to be manually

adjusted as they represent the totals on the Order at the time of printing and may not exactly reflect the

pieces and weights being shipped.

The amount fields are formatted according to the maximum transaction size identified in the Inventory

documentation.

The breakdown of Taxes by Region prints below the Totals line if there is more than one Tax Region and

Sales Tax amount. Otherwise the one Sales Tax Amount is included in the totals line.

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

ZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-Z,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-Z,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-Z,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-Z,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-ZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ.ZZ-

********************************************************************************

Taxes: REGIONZZZ/ZZ9.99- REGIONZZZ/ZZ9.99- REGIONZZZ/ZZ9.99- REGIONZZZ/ZZ9.99-

Restriction

The additional lines with the items and totals Charges are printed if the Terms of Payment is from 90 to

99, regardless of how the Cash Type field is set in the Terms code.

Tax and Exempt License Number Printing on the Shipping Form: When the Product Installation

Option LIC=X is set on <orford>, the Tax and Exempt License numbers, as entered on the Sales Order

Header, are printed on the Shipping form if, and only if, the Order Term of Payment is C.O.D.

Trm C.O.D. Ord 02Dec04 Due 12Dec04 Rt 012-003

Frt Prepaid Via OUR TRUCK FOB PREPAID TO DEST

Slp DAVE GREEN

UNASSIGNED

Con Antoine Lambert-Langlois 12345 Tel 215 233 2324 Fax 215 792-9760

================================================================================

S H I P P I N G O R D E R SO No PHI WS-1438

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys Y 1 Original copies with Shipment, 0 with Invoice

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Bar Angle ASTM A36 14 PCS 1786 LBS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 40'

Shipped: PCS LBS

MATERIAL 1,786 LBS @ 24.0000 CWT E 428.64

================================================================================

Order Totals: 1 Items 1786 LBS

PA R423524634

ILCK R888231-12

NT3 R234567891

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

428.64 0.00 428.64

********************************************************************************

Taxes: PAPH 25.00

14. Printing Order Forms Page 312

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SELECTION ENTRIES

Separate selection entry programs are provided for the following functions and combinations of forms.

Sales Acknowledgement

Order Printing (initial print or reprint of all forms)

Re-Print Selective Order forms (re-print any one or all types of forms)

For details on the usage and criteria applicable to each selection, refer to the ‘Standard Selections’ section

of the ‘Order Reports’ chapter of this manual.

Sales Acknowledgement

This selection entry is used to print the Sales Acknowledgement form only.

It also allows to you to automatically email the Sales Acknowledgement forms to selected customers.

The generation of automated emails is triggered by the Auto Send Document selection option. Refer to

the eSTELfax manual for details.

Only Orders for customers that have the code ‘Acknowledgement Required’ set to Y-Yes in their table

are printed.

Sales Acknowledgement

Report Program: ORFACK

1. Selection Entry No.. 993

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Original/Reprint.... [O]

4. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

5. Entry Date.......... [Y] From: To: / /

6. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: 499 To: 499

Table of Order Nos..

7. Order type.......... [N] N R

8. Auto Send Document.. [ ]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Acknowledgement screen

14. Printing Order Forms Page 313

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

05Aug04 14:45 S A L E S A C K N O W L E D G M E N T No: PHI WS-689

Sold By:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1050) Ship To: (000)

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY

242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Trm 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS Ord 05Aug04 Due 08Aug04 asap

Frt Prepaid Via OUR TRUCK FOB PREPAID TO DEST

Con JEAN LAMBERT PO/Rel 1011/A-31

Slp JOHN NELLING Tel 215 233 2324 Fax 215 792 9760 ID solange

UNASSIGNED

================================================================================

S A L E S A C K N O W L E D G M E N T SO No PHI WS-689

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys Y 1 Separate copies with shipment, 0 with Invoice

Header Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 5,000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Part No CRC18

Green

Description Remarks

Order Remarks

Invoicing Remarks

Production Remarks

MATERIAL 5,000 LBS @ 25.0000 CWT 1,250.00

PROCESSING 5,000 LBS @ 1.0000 CWT 50.00

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Bar Angle ASTM A36 10 PCS 638 LBS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Red

Description Remarks

Order Remarks

MATERIAL 638 LBS @ 24.0000 CWT 153.12

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Thank you for your business.

Order Totals: 2 Items 5,638 LBS

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

1,403.12 50.00 12.50 1,465.62

********************************************************************************

Taxes: PAPH 12.50

Page: 1 .... Last

Sample Sales Acknowledgement

14. Printing Order Forms Page 314

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Printing/Reprinting

These selections are used to print the Sales Order, Shipping Order and Work Order forms if a batch

printing to a specific printer of all the formats is required.

Restrictions

An Order cannot be printed if it is in use. If a user is on an Order or a related Bill of Lading or

Invoice, the Sales Order cannot be printed or re-printed. A session log is generated listing the Orders

that could not be printed.

You can only print one Back Order using the Print Backorders selection program because the code

that triggers the printing is reset after the print.

However, you can reprint the spool file that is in the eSTEL/SCOPE directory, or you can do a straight

reprint of the Order Item using the standard Work Order printing function.

There is no One-Time/Permanent selection field as each batch of Orders can only be printed once and

a Permanent selection is not applicable.

If an Order is to be shipped from another Branch, or from another Warehouse under the Selling

Branch, the printing of the forms is initiated only when the Selling Branch prints the Order forms.

Fully shipped Items are not printed when reprinting an Order. However, a zero balance Item is re-

printed if no shipments have been made against it.

Order Printing

Report Program: ORFORD

1. Selection Entry No.. 387

2. Original/Reprint.... [O]

3. Print Backorders.... [N]

4. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

5. Work Order Prt Date. [N] From: To:

6. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

7. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: 51 To: 56

Table of Order Nos..

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Printing – selection screen

14. Printing Order Forms Page 315

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Selective Order Forms Reprinting

This selection is used only for reprinting of Order forms that have already been printed. You can select

any individual form type from the Order forms set: Sales Order, Production Work Order, Shipping Order

and Work Order forms, excluding the Sales Acknowledgement form.

Selective Order Forms Reprint

Report Program: ORFORD

1. Selection Entry No.. 390

2. Form Type........... [O]

3. Print Backorders.... [N]

4. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

5. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

6. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: 60 To: 63

Table of Order Nos..

7. Order Shipping Whs.. [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Selective Order Forms Reprint – selection screen

All Product Installation Options are the same as for the original print of the forms.

You can print by Range or Table. If you want to reprint a few selected Order Items, select a Table of

Order Items.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 316

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

05Aug04 15:34 S A L E S O R D E R No: PHI WS-690

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 NEWTOWN SQUARE, PA 19073

Trm NET 30 DAYS Ord 05Aug04 Due 09Sep04 asap Job 5750

Frt Charge Via OUR TRUCK FOB

Slp JOHN NELLING PO/Rel 29/-122

STEVE HENDERSON

================================================================================

S A L E S O R D E R SO No PHI WS-690

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys N 2 Original copies with Shipment, 1 with Invoice

Test Certificate

Header Remarks

Global Allocation Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 12000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Description Remarks

Order Remarks

Invoicing Remarks

Production Remarks

MATERIAL 12,000 LBS @ 25.0000 CWT E 3,000.00

PROCESSING 12,000 LBS @ 1.0000 CWT E 120.00

FREIGHT 12,000 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 240.00

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 3,000.00 3,000.00 2,413.00 587.00 19.57

Prs: 120.00 120.00 25.00 95.00 79.17

Frt: 240.00 240.00 240.00 0.00 0.00

Tot: 3,360.00 3,360.00 2,678.00 682.00 20.30

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" ZZZZZZZ PFS BAY1 0 PCS 2000 LBS

Alt Loc: BAY5

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT503 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 10000 LBS

Work Order Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Shipping Remarks

Order Totals: 1 Items 12000 LBS

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 3,000.00 3,000.00 2,413.00 587.00 19.57

Prs: 120.00 120.00 25.00 95.00 79.17

Frt: 240.00 240.00 240.00 0.00 0.00

Tot: 3,360.00 3,360.00 2,678.00 682.00 20.30

Page: 1 .... Last

Sample Sales Order – Single Item

14. Printing Order Forms Page 317

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

06Aug04 09:32 S A L E S O R D E R No: PHI WS-668

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 NEWTOWN SQUARE, PA 19073

Trm C.O.D. Ord 24Jul04 Due 08Aug04 asap Job 5792

Frt Charge Via ABC FREIGHT FOB Destination

Slp JOHN NELLING PO/Rel 10003/12

STEVE HENDERSON

================================================================================

S A L E S O R D E R - REPRINT SO No PHI WS-668

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys N 2 Separate copies with shipment, 1 with Invoice

TEST CERTIFICATE REMARKS

HEADER REMARKS

GLOBAL ALLOCATION REMARKS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 15000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Part No (CRC)

Product Description Remarks

Order Remarks

Invoicing Remarks

Production Remarks

MATERIAL 15,000 LBS @ 25.0000 CWT E 3,750.00

PROCESSING 15,000 LBS @ 1.0000 CWT E 150.00

FREIGHT 15,000 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 300.00

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 3,750.00 3,750.00 2,925.00 825.00 22.00

Prs: 150.00 150.00 25.00 125.00 83.33

Frt: 300.00 300.00 300.00 0.00 0.00

Tot: 4,200.00 4,200.00 3,250.00 950.00 22.62

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT502 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 10000 LBS

PO PHI- 2309- 1 AMERICAN STEEL 28Jul04 PRT 1 PCS 5,000 LBS

Work Order Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Mechanical Tubing - DOM AISI C-1018 5 PCS 177 LBS

1 1/2" OD x .120 Wall X 20' 06Aug04 100 FT

Part No (DOM) PSQ UN

Product Description Remark

Order Remark

Invoicing Remark

OFFICE FURNITURE AND FIXTURES

Production Remark

MATERIAL 100 FT @ .9950 FT E 99.50

PROCESSING 100 FT @ .2500 FT E 25.00

FREIGHT 177 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 3.54

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 99.50 99.50 81.18 18.32 18.41

Prs: 25.00 25.00 25.00 0.00 0.00

Frt: 3.54 3.54 3.54 0.00 0.00

Tot: 128.04 128.04 109.72 18.32 14.31

Page: 1 ....Continued

Sales Order (Reprint) – Multiple Items – page 1

14. Printing Order Forms Page 318

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

06Aug04 09:32 S A L E S O R D E R No: PHI WS-668

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

================================================================================

S A L E S O R D E R - REPRINT SO No PHI WS-668

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

DOM/112120/1018/20' BE1144 PPR B7R3S22 5 PCS 100 FT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3 Expanded Metal Commercial Quality 6 PCS 73 LBS

1 1/2" - #16 Flattened X 48.0000" X 96.0000" 192.00 SFT

Part No (EX)

MATERIAL 192.00 SFT @ 16.0000 CSF E 30.72

FREIGHT 73 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 1.46

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 30.72 30.72 21.94 8.78 28.58

Frt: 1.46 1.46 1.46 0.00 0.00

Tot: 32.18 32.18 23.40 8.78 27.28

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

EX/11216F/CQ/48.0000"X96.0000" PPR 6 PCS 192 SFT

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4 Fitting 40 PCS 64 LBS

2 1/2" Sch 80 Coupling

Part No (F)

Product Description Remark

Order Remarks

Invoicing Remarks

MATERIAL 40 PCS @ .7500 EA E 30.00

FREIGHT 64 LBS @ 2.0000 CWT E 1.28

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 30.00 30.00 26.00 4.00 13.33

Frt: 1.28 1.28 1.28 0.00 0.00

Tot: 31.28 31.28 27.28 4.00 12.79

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

F/21280C// 1219 PPR B3R9S14 40 PCS 40 EA

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SHIPPING REMARKS

Order Totals: 4 Items 15314 LBS

---Sales--- -Sales Brkdown- ----Costs---- ----Profit---- Pft %

Mat: 3,910.22 3,910.22 3,054.12 856.10 21.89

Prs: 175.00 175.00 50.00 125.00 71.43

Frt: 306.28 306.28 306.28 0.00 0.00

Tot: 4,391.50 4,391.50 3,410.40 981.10 22.34

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

3,910.22 175.00 306.28 39.11 4,430.61

********************************************************************************

Taxes: PAPH 39.11

Page: 2 .... Last

Sales Order (Reprint) – Multiple Items – page 2

14. Printing Order Forms Page 319

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

05Aug04 14:44 S H I P P I N G O R D E R No:PHI WS-689

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1050) Ship To: (000)

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY

242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Tel: 215 233 2324 Fax: 215 792 9760

Trm 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS Ord 05Aug04 Due 08Aug04 asap Rt 012-003

Frt Prepaid Via OUR TRUCK FOB PREPAID TO DEST

Slp JOHN NELLING PO/Rel 1011/A-31

UNASSIGNED

================================================================================

S H I P P I N G O R D E R SO No PHI WS-689

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys Y 1 Separate copies with Shipment, 0 with Invoice

Test Cert Remarks

Header Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 5000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Part No CRC18

Shipped: PCS LBS

Description Remarks

Order Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Bar Angle ASTM A36 10 PCS 638 LBS

2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Shipped: PCS LBS

Description Remarks

Order Remarks

================================================================================

Shipping Remarks

Order Totals: 2 Items 5638 LBS

Page: 1 .... Last

Sample Shipping Order

14. Printing Order Forms Page 320

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

06Aug04 10:32 W O R K O R D E R No: PHI WS-668

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 NEWTOWN SQUARE, PA 19073

Tel: 215 142 5145 Fax: 797 792 9760

Trm C.O.D. Ord 24Jul04 Due 08Aug04 asap Rt 142-002

Frt Charge Via ABC FREIGHT FOB Destination

Slp JOHN NELLING PO/Rel 10003/12

STEVE HENDERSON Job 5792

================================================================================

W O R K O R D E R - REPRINT SO No PHI WS-668

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys N 2 Separate copies with Shipment, 1 with Invoice

TEST CERTIFICATE REMARKS

HEADER REMARKS

GLOBAL ALLOCATION REMARKS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 15000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Part No (CRC)

Product Description Remarks

Order Remarks

Production Remarks

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT502 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 10000 LBS

Green

PO PHI- 2309- 1 AMERICAN STEEL 28Jul04 PRT 1 PCS 5,000 L>

Work Order Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Mechanical Tubing - DOM AISI C-1018 5 PCS 177 LBS

1 1/2" OD x .120 Wall X 20' 06Aug04 100 FT

Part No (DOM) PSQ UN

Product Description Remark

Order Remark

OFFICE FURNITURE AND FIXTURES

Production Remark

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

DOM/112120/1018/20' BE1144 PPR B7R3S22 5 PCS 100 FT

White

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3 Fitting 40 PCS 64 LBS

2 1/2" Sch 80 Coupling

Part No (F)

Product Description Remark

Order Remarks

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

F/21280C// 1219 PPR B3R9S14 40 PCS 40 EA

Red

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SHIPPING REMARKS

Order Totals: 3 Items 15241 LBS

Sample Work Order

14. Printing Order Forms Page 321

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRODUCTION WORK ORDER FORM PRINT

This program allows you to selectively print Work Orders. This is used if you do not wish to print a

Work Order at the same time as the Sales Order and the Shipping Order are printed and want to print

them based on the production process.

Printer Assignment

The default is for the production Work Order Form to print on the Branch Options Production Work

Order printer for the Order Item Shipping Branch.

PWC Printer

You have the ability to print the Production Work Order Form to a specific Process Work Center printer,

based on the Production Sequence Code.

Requirements:

You must enter a PSQ code for the Order Item

The first Process Code in the PSQ must be linked to a Process Work Center (scrwpc)

A valid PWC Ticket Printer must be defined in the Process Work Center reference table. If there is

no matching PWC Printer for the first Process Code in the PSQ then the work order form is printed to

the default printer in the Branch Options table.

Checks performed when selecting a printer for the Production Work Order Form:

Get the PSQ code from the Order Item

Get the 1st PRS code from the PSQ record

Get the PWC code from the PWC/PRS Cross Reference table (scrwcp)

Get the printer from the PWC table (scrpwc)

If the program cannot get a printer from the PWC table, then it uses the Production Work Order

printer defined in the Branch Options table (scropt)

Form Printing Characteristics

The Production Work Order prints by Branch, Work Order number, Production Sequence code (each

Production Sequence code generates a new Work Order) and by Item.

For example, Sales Order number 899 has 5 Items on it with the following Production Sequence code:

Item PSQ

1 1

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 1

14. Printing Order Forms Page 322

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Work Order 899 would generate 3 Production Work Orders.

One with Items 1, 2, 5

One with Item 3

One with Item 4

Printing Based on Order Item Shipping Branch

When the Product Installation Option PSH=X is set to Y-Yes, the Production Work Order Items are

printed based on their Shipping Branch and their PSQ code. For each new Branch/PSQ combination, a

new form is generated.

For example, PSH is set to Y-Yes and Sales Order number 899 has 5 Items on it with the following

Production Sequence code and Shipping Branches:

Item Item Shp Brh PSQ

1 PHI 1

2 CHI 1

3 PHI 2

4 CHI 3

5 PHI 1

Work Order 899 would generate 4 Production Work Order forms.

One with Items 1, 5 for Branch PHI and PSQ 1

One with Item 2 for Branch CHI and PSQ 1

One with Item 3 for Branch PHI and PSQ 2

One with Item 4 for Branch CHI and PSQ 3

NOTE: When PSH is N-No, the Production Work Order always prints on the Production Work

Order set in the Branch Option table.

Printing of Order Items

Only the Items with Pieces, Quantity or Weight greater than Zero are printed on the Production Work

Order. Once the form is printed, the Items are flagged as being printed. If you want another copy, you

must do a re-print.

All other conditions that apply to order printing also apply in this program. For example, the Production

Work Order does not print if the Order is on Credit Hold.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 323

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Selection Screen

Production Work Ord Forms Prt

Report Program: ORFPWK

1. Selection Entry No.. 991

2. Original/Reprint.... [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Order Item Due Date. [N] From: To:

5. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: 668 To: 668

Table of Order Nos..

6. Item Status......... [N]

7. Order Shipping Whs.. [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Production Work Order Forms Print – selection screen

You must select 1 Selling Branch as the ‘All Branches’ option is not available. If you have access to other

branches, the cursor is placed on the 1st field of the Selling Branch prompt. If you do not have access, the

Selling Branch is skipped and your default branch is automatically displayed.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 324

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Production Work Order Sample

06Aug04 10:37 P R O D U C T I O N W O R K O R D E R No: PHI WS-668

Sold By: Ship From:

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 NEWTOWN SQUARE, PA 19073

Trm C.O.D. Ord 24Jul04 Due 08Aug04 asap Job 5792

Frt Charge Via ABC FREIGHT FOB Destination

PO/Rel 10003/12 Slp JOHN NELLING Rt 012-003

================================================================================̀

P R O D U C T I O N W O R K O R D E R SO PHI WS-668

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys N 2 Separate copies with shipment, 1 with Invoice

TEST CERTIFICATE REMARKS

HEADER REMARKS

GLOBAL ALLOCATION REMARKS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 15,000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Part No (CRC)

Product Description Remarks

Order Remarks

Production Remarks

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

CRC/18/CQ/48.0000" LT502 PPR BAY4-R1 1 PCS 10,000

Green Heat No: 283920

PO PHI- 2309- 1 AMERICAN STEEL 28Jul04 PRT 1 PCS 5,000 LBS

Work Order Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4 Fitting 40 PCS 64 LBS

2 1/2" Sch 80 Coupling

Part No (F)

Product Description Remark

Order Remarks

<<<------------------------ INVENTORY RESERVATIONS ----------------------->>>

F/21280C// 1219 PPR B3R9S14 40 PCS 40

Red Heat No:121654

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SHIPPING REMARKS

Order Totals: 2 Items 15064 LBS

Page: 1 ....Last

Sample Production Work Order

14. Printing Order Forms Page 325

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRODUCT PICKING TICKET

This form is used to initiate the staging of material for customer pick-up or delivery.

The Product Picking Ticket reference table allows you to define the Product Items for which a Product

Picking Ticket is to be printed.

The Product Picking Tickets can be printed in one of the following ways:

Through the Sales/Transfer Order and Credit Release functions by using a Product Installation

Option.

Using a selection entry program.

The Product Picking Ticket contains Order Item information including the first two Inventory

Reservations and four different types of Remarks for the Order Item. A flag is printed to indicate if more

Inventory Reservations or Remarks exist for the Order Item.

Printer and Stock Characteristics

The Product Picking Ticket must be printed on a Zebra Printer. The printer must support Zebra Fonts R,

S, T and Q or, alternatively Zebra Font A0 (font selection is controlled by the STR=X Product

Installation Option).

The form has dimensions of 8.5” x 3.5” and includes a 2” x 3.5” tear-off stub. The body of the ticket is

printed in landscape format while the stub information is printed in portrait format.

Product Picking Ticket Reference Table

The Product Picking Ticket reference table program allows you to specify the Branch and Product

combinations for which you require a Product Picking Ticket as well as the printer used to print it. Refer

to the Reference manual for details.

Printing Product Picking Tickets

Product Picking Tickets can be printed in the following ways:

Through the Sales/Transfer Order and Credit Release functions by using the Product Installation

Option.

A selection entry program.

Printing Tickets from the Sales/Transfer Order and Credit Release Functions

Product Picking Tickets can be printed from the Sales/Transfer Order and Credit Release functions using

the TKT=X Product Installation Option.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 326

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Selective Printing of Product Picking Tickets

A selection entry program is provided enabling you to selectively print Product Picking Tickets. You can

use this program when:

the TKT Product Installation Option is not set to print the Product Picking Tickets automatically from

the Order Entry program.

you require a reprint, should a problem occur during the original printing of the tickets.

Product Picking Ticket Printing

Report Program: ORFPPT

1. Selection Entry No.. 2469

2. Original/Reprint.... [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

5. Order Type ….. . . . [N] N R T

6. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: 720 To: 732

Table of Order Nos..

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Picking Ticket Printing Selection screen

Conditions for Printing

A Product Picking Ticket is printed for each Order Item if the following conditions are satisfied:

A matching Product Picking Ticket record exists

The selections of the Product Picking Ticket Selection Entry program are met

14. Printing Order Forms Page 327

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Picking Ticket Layout

Body of the Ticket

The following information is printed in the body of the Product Picking Ticket:

Customer Sold-To Name

Branch, Sales Order and Item numbers followed by the total number of Items on the Order

Customer Purchase Order and Release numbers in compressed format and printed in the same field,

separated by a ‘/’

Based on the Product Installation Option BAR=X, printing of the Sales Order and Item numbers in a

barcoded format

Note Remark (entered in eSTELquote)

Item Due date

Sold Product Description

Ordered Pieces, Weight, Weight Unit of Measure, Quantity and Unit of Measure (when applicable)

Customer Part number

First two lines of the Description Remarks and first two lines of the Order Remarks from the Order

Item (if they exist)

o If more than two lines of D-Type or O-Type Remarks exist on the Order Item, then the “---more”

notation is printed next to the second Remark line

Non-Specific Reservation for the Order Item (if it exists and the Weight is greater than 0)

o If there is no non-Specific Reservation on the Item, or if the non-Specific Reserved Weight is

equal to zero, then the first Specific Reservation (if any) is printed.

The following Reservation information is printed:

Product and Dimension in compressed format (up to 36 characters) printed between square brackets

Product’s Standard Location (if any)

Tag Location (if any)

Tag and Warehouse (if any)

Color code description

Reserved Pieces, Weight and Weight Unit of Measure

First Reservation Remark line (if any)

o If more than one line of Reservation Remarks exist for the Reservation, then the notation ‘---

more’ is printed next to the Reservation Remark line

Second Reservation (if any) printed with the same information as mentioned above. If more than two

Reservations exist for the Order Item, then the notation ‘---more’ is printed next to the second

Reservation.

The word REPRINT printed when the Product Picking Ticket is a Reprint

The word DELETED printed instead of the word REPRINT when the Order Item is deleted and a

Product Picking Ticket has originally been printed. Since Reservations are deleted along with the

Order Items, the Reservation section remains blank on tickets that are printed for deleted Items.

The Date and Time the Product Picking Ticket was printed

The first three lines of Order Item Type W (Work Order) Remarks (if any)

o If more than three lines of Order Item Type W (Work Order) Remarks exist for the Order Item,

then the notation “---more” is printed next to the third Remark line

A small dashed line printed to enable operators to sign the ticket upon completion of their duties

14. Printing Order Forms Page 328

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Ticket Stub Section

The following is printed on the tear-off Stub of the ticket:

Branch, Sales Order and Item numbers

Sales Order and Item numbers in barcoded format (based on the BAR Product Installation Option)

Customer Sold-To Name

Ship-To Address

Customer Purchase Order and Release numbers in compressed and printed in the same field,

separated by a ‘/’

Sold Product Description

Ordered Pieces, Weight, Weight Unit of Measure, Quantity and Unit of Measure (when applicable)

Customer Part number

14. Printing Order Forms Page 329

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sample Product Picking Ticket Layout

14. Printing Order Forms Page 330

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Picking Ticket with Barcoded Information

14. Printing Order Forms Page 331

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Product Picking Ticket without Barcoded Information

14. Printing Order Forms Page 332

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

WORK TAGS

This form is used to initiate the production and staging of material for customer pick-up or delivery. The

Work Tag is printed through the Sales/Transfer Order Entry and Credit Release functions by printing the

Sales/Transfer Order.

The Work Tag contains:

Order information including:

o Order Header Shipping Remarks

o Four different types of Order Item Remarks

Reservation Information including:

o The first two Inventory Reservations

o Allocation Remarks for the Specific Order Item Reservations

o The first Incoming Reservation

Printer and Stock Characteristics

The Work Tag is printed on a dot matrix printer. The form has dimensions of 5” x 11”.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 333

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRINTING LARGE-SIZED WORK TAGS

Overview

Work Tags are printed when an order is printed/reprinted through the Sales/Transfer Order Entry and

Credit Release functions, if the PTK=X Product Installation Option is set to W. Additionally, this Work

Tag can be printed from the Print/Reprint Work Tag Selection Entry program.

Conditions for Printing

The Order Item Ticket Printed flag is set to Y-Yes when the Work Tag is printed. This ensures the

following:

o When printing Work Tags, they are coded as Original or Reprint based on the Order Item Ticket

Printed flag and not the Order Header Printed flag. Therefore, new items added to a printed order

are printed as Original.

The Order Item Backorder Flag is verified to control the printing of Backorder Work Tags. These

Work Tags have the word BACKORDER printed on them.

Restrictions

The Work Tag is NOT printed if the Sales Order has not been credit approved. Therefore, at least one of

the Sales Order Forms (Sales, Work Order or Shipping Form) must be printed to trigger the credit

verification prior to printing the Work Tag.

The Production Work Order Form and the Work Tag both update the Order Item Ticket Printed flag. If

one of these forms is generated as an original print, the other form is generated as a reprint although it

may never have previously been printed.

The Work Tag is NOT printed if the order is on Production Hold.

The Work Tag is NOT printed for fully shipped items (the balance pieces, measure, weight are zero

AND the shipped pieces, measure and weight are NOT zero).

The Work Tag is NOT printed if the Order Item is flagged as completed or deleted.

The Work Tag is NOT printed when the Order Forms are printed from the Order Printing and the

Selective Order Form Reprint programs.

One tag is printed per Sales/Transfer Order Item.

Work Tag Printer

The BL Loading printer from the Branch Options record of the Shipping Branch is used.

14. Printing Order Forms Page 334

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

WORK TAG LAYOUT

Body of the Ticket

The following information is printed in the body of the Work Tag:

Sales Order Information

Customer Sold-To Name and number

Customer Ship-To Name and Address

Sales Order Branch, Order number and Item

Inside Salesperson Name

Sales Order Item Due Date

Order Header Freight Information

Order Header Customer Purchase Order number and Release number

Word REPRINT is printed when the Work Tag is a reprint

Date and Time the Work Tag was printed

Remarks

First 3 lines of the Description Remarks from the Order Item (if they exist)

First 3 lines of the Shipping Remarks from the Order Header (if they exist)

First line of the Order Remarks from the Order Item (if it exists)

First 2 lines of the Order Item Work Order Remarks (if they exist)

o If more than 2 Work Order Remark lines exist, then the “---more” notation is printed next to the

second Work Order Remark line.

First 2 lines of the Order Item Production Remarks (if they exist)

o If more than 2 Production Remarks lines exist, then the “---more” notation is printed next to the

second Production Remark line.

Sales Order Item Information

Ordered Pieces, Weight and Measure

Balance Pieces, Weight and Measure

Order Item Customer Part number

Allocation Information

Product and Dimension in compressed format (up to 36 characters) are printed between square

brackets

Product’s Standard Location (if any)

Tag Location (if any)

Tag and Warehouse (if any)

Color code description

Reserved Pieces, Weight and Weight Unit of Measure

First Allocation Remark line (if any)

14. Printing Order Forms Page 335

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

o If more than one line of Allocation Remarks exists for the reservation, then the notation “---

more” is printed next to the Allocation Remark line

A second reservation (if any) is printed with the same information as mentioned above. If more than

two reservations exist for the Order Item, then the notation “---more” is printed next to the second

reservation.

Incoming Reservations

First Incoming Reservation (if any) including Reference Prefix, Branch, Reference number and item,

Vendor Look-Up Name, Incoming Item Due Date, Receiving Warehouse, Balance Pieces and

Balance Quantity.

If more than one Incoming Reservation exists on the Order Item, then the “---more” notation is

printed next to the Incoming Reservation.

Work Tag Sample

Sld To ACME FABRICATORS 1010 (Reprint) ACME FABRICATION

PHI 9842-001 GEORGE BAKER 22Mar04 1254 ROUTE 1

Due Dt 15JUN04 INCLUDED OT SUITE 3423

Cus Po CUSTOMER PO NUMBER ADDRESS LINE 4

Rel No CUSTOMER RELEASE NUMBER PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Carbon Steel Plate ASTM A36 Order 50Pcs 97908Lbs 1,600SFT

1 1/2" (1.500) X 48.0000" X 96.0000" Bal 50Pcs 97908Lbs 1,600SFT

Prt No 1010-CP11234896

FIRST LINE OF ORDER ITEM D REMARK Ship 25Pcs 48954Lbs B/O 25Pcs

SECOND LINE OF ORDER ITEM D REMARK FIRST LINE OF ORDER ITEM S REMARK

THIRD LINE OF ORDER ITEM D REMARK SECOND LINE OF ORDER ITME S REMARK

SECOND LINE OF ORDER ITEM O REMARK THIRD LINE OF ORDER ITEM S REMARK

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[ PL/112/36/48.0000"X96.0000" ] PO PHI 6549-001 AMERICAN METALS

GREEN 6May04 PPR 1000Pcs 200000Lbs - more

Res 50 Pcs 97908 Lbs Std Loc A12-R6 A12-R6 PPR

FIRST LINE OF ALLOCATION REMARKS - more

[ PL/112/36/48.0000"X96.0000" ]

GREEN

Res 50 Pcs 97908 Lbs Std Loc A12-R6 A12-R6 PPR

FIRST LINE OF ALLOCATION REMARKS - more

FIRST LINE OF ORDER ITEM W REMARKS

SECOND LINE OF ORDER ITEM W REMARKS - more

FIRST LINE OF ORDER ITEM P REMARKS

SECOND LINE OF ORDER ITEM P REMARKS - more

14. Printing Order Forms Page 336

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

PRINTING SMALL-SIZED WORK TAGS

When the PTK=X Product Installation Option set on <orswko> is H, the smaller-sized Work Tag format

is generated when printing the Sales Order Form from Order Entry or Credit Release. The Work Tag

details for this format are listed below.

When the PTK option is set to H, and the order is printed from Order Entry or Credit Release, the Work

Tag is printed on the B/L Loading Prtr from the Branch Options record of the Shipping Branch.

Restrictions

The Work Tag is only printed with the original printing of the Sales Order.

The Work Tag is not printed if the Sales Order is on hold.

The Work Tag is not printed when the Order Forms are printed from the Selection Entry programs.

One Work Tag is printed per Sales Order Item.

There are no remarks printed on the Work Tag.

Work Tag Format

The Work Tag is 3 ½” X 6”

Field Name Description

Line 3:

Order Brh

Order No

Item No.

Cus PO No

The Sales Order Branch and Order number followed by the Customer’s Purchase

Order number. The Customer Purchase Order number defaults from the Sales

Order Header.

Lines 5 thru 9 The Ship-To Name and Address lines from the Sales Order header.

Lines 12 and 13 The Order Item number and Product Description

Lines 14 thru 18 Free space for handwritten notes by the warehouse personnel when they pull

the Product Items.

Line 18

Part No

Theo Wgt

The Customer Part number from the Order Item and the Product Master

Theoretical Weight.

Line 20

Release No

The Customer PO Release number from the Order Header

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

15. ORDER REPORTS

OVERVIEW

The Open Order reports apply to Sales Orders that were created from Order Entry or converted from

eSTELquote quotations, as well as to Transfer Orders. They are available at any time after an Order has

been created, up to the point at which the Order has been marked as Complete.

The Order reports include the following:

Sales Order Audit

Open Orders by Branch, by Salesperson, by Customer

Open Orders by Branch, by Salesperson, by Product

Open Orders by Branch, by Product

Order Item Expediting

Order Printing Control

Order Fulfillment

Executive Overview

Material Source Exception Report

Bill Of Lading Mill/Heat Report

NOTE: Details on the following Order reports are available in the Shipping manual:

Shipment Forecast Detail

Shipment Forecast Summary

Delivery Schedule

General Open Order Reporting Standards

The following general rules apply to all Open Order reports.

Orders are only printed if there is a balance on the order. Orders that have a balance to ship that is less than

or equal to zero are not printed as Open Orders.

Revenue and Costs

Reporting of Material Sales Revenue is based on the Internal Material Charges for Charge code 1 on each

Order Item, NOT the External Material charges.

Reporting of Processing, Freight and Other Revenue is based on the Internal Processing, Freight and Other

Charges broken out from Charge code 1-External, plus any External Charges for Processing, Freight and

Other.

15. Order Reports Page 338

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Example: An Order has an External Material charge broken down into Internal charges for Material and

Freight, plus additional External charges for Processing and Other Charges as follows:

1 Material 30.00/CWT E 20,000 LBS 6,000.00

3 Freight 300.00/LOT I 300.00

1 Material 28.50/CWT I 20,000 LBS 5,700.00

2 Processing 50.00/LOT E 50.00

10 Packaging 75.00/LOT E 75.00

Total External Costs = 6,125.00

Total Internal Costs = 6,000.00

The revenue for the Order would show on internal reports as:

Weight Sold Material Processing Freight Other

20,000 LBS 5,700.00 50.00 300.00 75.00

Reporting of Costs is based on the addition of both Internal and External Estimated Costs by type of Cost

for each Item.

Example: In the example used above, the Order has Internal, Estimated Material and Outbound Freight

Costs, plus manually entered costs for Processing and Packaging as follows:

1 Internal Material 20.55/CWT 20,000 LBS 4,110.00

3 Internal Freight 250.00/LOT 250.00

2 Cut to Size 50.00/LOT 50.00

10 Packaging 60.00/LOT 60.00

Total External Costs = 110.00

Total Internal Costs = 4,360.00

The Order costs would show on internal reports as:

Weight Sold Material Processing Freight Other

20,000 LBS 4,110.00 50.00 250.00 60.00

15. Order Reports Page 339

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Profit Calculations

The Gross Profit Amount for Orders is calculated as follows:

Gr Pft = Internal Mat Revenue - (Internal + External Mat Cost)

Example as shown above:

Gr Pft = 5,700.00 - (4,110.00 + 0.00)

= 1,590.00

Gross Profit Percent is calculated as follows:

Gr Pft % = Gross Pft / Internal Material Revenue x 100

Example as shown above:

Gr Pft % = 1,590.00 / 5,700.00 x 100

= 27.89 %

The Net Profit Amount for Orders is calculated as follows:

Net Pft = (Internal: Material + Processing + Freight + Other Revenue) + (External: Processing +

Freight + Other Charges) - (Internal: Material + Processing + Freight + Other Costs) -

(External: Material + Processing + Freight + Other Costs)

Example as shown above:

Net Pft = (5,700.00 + 300.00) + (50.00 + 75.00) - (4,110.00 + 250.00) - (50.00 + 60.00)

= 1,655.00

The Net Profit Percentage for Orders is calculated as:

Net Pft % = [Net Profit Amount / (Internal Material + Processing + Freight + Other Revenue) +

(External Processing + Freight + Other Charges)] x 100

Example as shown above:

Net Pft % = [1,655.00 / 6,125] x 100

= 27.02 %

15. Order Reports Page 340

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES ORDER AUDIT REPORT

The Order Audit report is designed as a summary management report. It lists the Sales Orders in the

system and indicates the status of each order.

The report is especially useful to highlight orders that have not yet been shipped, but are past due.

Selection Screen

Sales Order Audit

Report Program: ORROAU

1. Selection Entry No.. 1158

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Order Number........ [N] From: To:

5. Order Date.......... [N] From: To:

6. Customer Number..... [N] From: To:

7. Customer Name....... [N] From: To:

8. Production Hold..... [N]

9. Shipping Hold....... [N]

10. Credit Hold......... [N]

11. Work Order Not Prtd. [N]

12. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Order Audit Report selection screen

NOTE: The Order Type selection defaults to N-No. Order Types N, R, and T are printed. To review

all of the sequential Order numbers, including those of Type Q (Quote) on the Order Audit

Report, you must change the Order Type to Y-Yes and then add the Type Q (Quote).

15. Order Reports Page 341

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Printing

The report is sequenced by Branch, by Order number with a page break by Branch and before the Grand

Totals.

RUN: 17Sep04 11:39 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orroau000196 PAGE: 2

Sales Order Audit

-- Slp -- ------ Hold ------ --- Items --

Ord No Cus No Customer Name Ty Bkt No Al Src Job IS OS Ord Dt Wko Dt Due Dt Cr Cr Rel Prn Shp Prt Del Bko Ost Nbr Comp Del

Branch: (PHI) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA

4 1010 ACME FAB N 0 WS D AG SH 16Jul04 16Jul04 16Jul04 M 10 N N Y N Y PKG 1 0 0

5 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA N 0 WS D AG SH 16Jul04 16Jul04 23Jul04 M 6 N N Y N Y RUN 1 0 0

6 3070 CARDINALE N 0 WS D AG JN 06May04 06May04 05May04 N 0 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

7 1010 ACME FAB N 0 WS D AG SH 16Jul04 16Jul04 30Jul04 M 2 N N Y N Y RUN 1 0 0

8 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA N 0 WS D LS SH 16Jul04 16Jul04 06Aug04 M 7 N N Y N Y SCH 1 0 0

10 3070 CARDINALE N 0 WS D AG JN 06May04 06May04 03Jun04 N 0 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

11 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA N 0 WS D AG SH 16Jul04 16Jul04 17Jul04 H 0 N N N N Y SCH 2 0 1

12 1010 ACME FAB N 0 WS D DG MG 16Jul04 16Jul04 23Jul04 M 11 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

13 3070 CARDINALE N 0 WS D AG JN 06May04 06May04 30Jun04 N 0 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

14 1010 ACME FAB N 0 WS D AG SH 06Jul04 06Jul04 10Jul04 M 12 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

15 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA N 0 WS D AG SH 06May04 06May04 05May04 M 13 N N N N Y ENT 1 0 0

18 1050 METAL WORKS N 0 WS ST AG UN 15Jul04 15Jul04 14Jul04 N 0 N N N N N FAX 1 0 0

Branch Totals:

Orders 12

Orders Printed 4

Orders Manually Deleted 0

====================================================================================================================================

RUN: 17Sep04 11:39 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orroau000196 PAGE: 3

Sales Order Audit

-- Slp -- ------ Hold ------ --- Items --

Ord No Cus No Customer Name Ty Bkt No Al Src Job IS OS Ord Dt Wko Dt Due Dt Cr Cr Rel Prn Shp Prt Del Bko Ost Nbr Comp Del

Grand Totals:

Orders 12

Orders Printed 4

Orders Manually Deleted 0

Del Code: C-Complete, A-Auto Purge, M-Manual Delete, N-Not Deleted

*** End of Report ***

Sales Order Audit Report

15. Order Reports Page 342

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

OPEN ORDERS BY BRANCH/SALESPERSON/CUSTOMER

This report provides detailed information on each Open Order as a reference report that can be used to

follow-up Orders by Salesperson and Customer. It includes Normal Release Orders by default as well as

an option to print Standard and Blanket Orders that may be open for the customer.

Selection Screens

Report selections are provided to limit the number of orders selected or to group orders by criteria that are

useful for scheduling and planning.

Open Orders by Branch/Slspsn/Cust

Report Program: ORROSC

1. Selection Entry No.. 355

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Customer Number..... [N] From: To:

4. Customer Name....... [N] From: To:

5. Resp For/Sold By.... [R]

6. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

7. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

8. Shipping Branch..... [Y] PHI

9. Order Date.......... [N] From: To:

10. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

11. Product Selections.. [N]

12. Sales Allocation.... [N]

13. Source.............. [N]

14. Item Status......... [N]

15. Sales Territory..... [N] From: To:

16. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Customer –

first selection screen

15. Order Reports Page 343

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Open Orders by Branch/Slspsn/Cust

Report Program: ORROSC

1. Selection Entry No.. 1358

17. Sale Type........... [N]

18. Profit Type......... [G]

19. Profit % Below...... [N]

20. Profit % Above...... [N]

21. Print Allocations... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Customer –

second selection screen

NOTE: To add a permanent selection that selects Orders based on their date, you can enter Y-Yes in

the Order Date or the Item Due Date Selection and leave the From and To fields blank.

Whenever the permanent selection runs, the report will use the system date in the From and To

fields.

Report Printing

The report is sequenced by Branch, Salesperson, Customer, Order Item Due Date, Order number and

Order Item with a page break by Branch and a page break before the Grand Totals.

The report prints only Open Orders. Any order flagged as C-Complete, M-Manual Delete or A-

Automatic Delete is not on the report.

15. Order Reports Page 344

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 17Sep04 13:11 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrosc000201 PAGE: 2

Open Orders by Brh,Slspsn,Cust

Group Size Grade Dimension Ga Intl Chg :Material Processing Freight Other Total

Brh Order-Itm Ty Ord Dt Due Dt Src Al Frt Job Whs Est Cost :

Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %:

Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight/Cus Part No

Branch: (PHI) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA

Salesperson: (UN ) UNASSIGNED

AMERICAN APPLIANCE ( 1020)

PL 14 36 24.0000 48.0000 1,639.73 150.00 102.10 0.00 1,891.83

PHI 5-001 N 16Jul04 23Jul04 D WS COL PPR 679.52 140.42 61.26 2.05 883.25

DD-74125 58.56 6.39 40.00 100.00- 53.31

50 4,084

EX 11216F CQ 423.87 0.00 0.00 0.00 423.87

PHI 11-002 N 16Jul04 17Jul04 D WS COL PPR 336.00 0.00 0.00 0.84 336.84

2W333 20.73 0.00 0.00 100.00- 20.53

50 148.60 SQM 608 RBS8515

Customer Totals: 4,692 2,063.60 150.00 102.10 0.00 2,315.70

1,015.52 140.42 61.26 2.89 1,220.09

50.78 6.38 40.00 999.99- 47.31

Salesperson Totals: 4,692 2,063.60 150.00 102.10 0.00 2,315.70

1,015.52 140.42 61.26 2.89 1,220.09

50.78 6.38 40.00 999.99- 47.31

Branch Totals: 4,692 2,063.60 150.00 102.10 0.00 2,315.70

1,015.52 140.42 61.26 2.89 1,220.09

50.78 6.38 40.00 999.99- 47.31

====================================================================================================================================

RUN: 17Sep04 13:11 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrosc000201 PAGE: 3

Open Orders by Brh,Slspsn,Cust

Group Size Grade Dimension Ga Intl Chg :Material Processing Freight Other Total

Brh Order-Itm Ty Ord Dt Due Dt Src Al Frt Job Whs Est Cost :

Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %:

Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight/Cus Part No

Grand Totals: 4,692 2,063.60 150.00 102.10 0.00 2,315.70

1,015.52 140.42 61.26 2.89 1,220.09

50.78 6.38 40.00 999.99- 47.31

*** End of Report ***

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Customer

15. Order Reports Page 345

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

OPEN ORDERS BY BRANCH/SALESPERSON/PRODUCT

This report provides detailed information on each Open Order as a reference that can be used to follow-up

orders by Salesperson and Product.

Selection Screens

Report selections are provided to limit the number of orders that are selected or to group orders by criteria

that are useful for scheduling and planning.

Open Orders by Branch/Slspsn/Prod

Report Program: ORROSS

1. Selection Entry No.. 356

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Customer Number..... [N] From: To:

4. Customer Name....... [N] From: To:

5. Resp For/Sold By.... [R]

6. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

7. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

8. Shipping Branch..... [Y] PHI

9. Order Date.......... [N] From: To:

10. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

11. Product Selections.. [N]

12. Sales Allocation.... [N]

13. Source.............. [N]

14. Item Status......... [N]

15. Sales Territory..... [N] From: To:

16. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Product – first selection screen

NOTE: If no Order Types are specifically selected, the default is N, R and T types.

15. Order Reports Page 346

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Open Orders by Branch/Slspsn/Prod

Report Program: ORROSS

1. Selection Entry No.. 356

17. Sale Type........... [N]

18. Profit Type......... [G]

19. Profit % Below...... [N]

20. Profit % Above...... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Product – second selection screen

NOTE: To add a permanent selection that selects Orders based on their date, you can enter Y-Yes in

the Order Date or the Item Due Date Selection and leave the From and To fields blank.

Whenever the permanent selection runs, the report will use the system date in the From and To

fields.

Report Printing

The report is sequenced by Branch, by Salesperson, by Product with a page break by Salesperson and a

page break before the Grand Totals.

15. Order Reports Page 347

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 05Mar04 10:50 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orross001495 PAGE: 2 Open Orders by Brh,Slspsn,Prod Brh Order-Itm Customer Name Ty Whs Al Intl Chg : Material Processing Freight Other Total Cus No Ord Dt Due Dt Src SlpIs SlpOs Frt Job Ga Est Cost : Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %: Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight Branch: (PHI) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH Salesperson: (JG ) JOHN GOODMAN Group BA Size 2214 Grade 36 Dimension 3' PHI 503-002 ACME FAB N PFS WS 200.90 0.00 21.54 0.00 222.44 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG 133.75 0.00 17.95 0.00 151.70 11 2 33.42 0.00 16.67 0.00 31.80 75 718 PHI 504-002 ACME FAB N PFS WS 200.90 0.00 21.54 0.00 222.44 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG 133.75 0.00 17.95 0.00 151.70 11 2 33.42 0.00 16.67 0.00 31.80 75 718 Prod Totals: 150 1,436 401.80 0.00 43.08 0.00 444.88 267.50 0.00 35.90 0.00 303.40 33.42 999.99- 16.66 999.99- 31.80 Group CRC Size 18 Grade CQ Dimension 12.0000 PHI 504-003 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 0.00 30.00 0.00 250.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.50 0.00 25.00 0.00 222.50 11 2 10.23 0.00 16.67 0.00 11.00 2 1,000 Group CRC Size 18 Grade DQ Dimension 18.0000 PHI 503-001 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 50.00 30.00 20.00 320.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.63 25.00 25.00 0.00 247.63 11 2 10.17 50.00 16.67 100.00 22.62 2 1,000 PHI 504-001 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 50.00 30.00 20.00 320.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.63 25.00 25.00 0.00 247.63 11 2 10.17 50.00 16.67 100.00 22.62 2 1,000 Prod Totals: 4 2,000 440.00 100.00 60.00 40.00 640.00 395.26 50.00 50.00 0.00 495.26 10.16 50.00 16.66 100.00 22.61 Salesperson Totals: 4,436 1,061.80 100.00 133.08 40.00 1,334.88 860.26 50.00 110.90 0.00 1,021.16 18.98 50.00 16.66 100.00 23.50 Branch Totals: 4,436 1,061.80 100.00 133.08 40.00 1,334.88 860.26 50.00 110.90 0.00 1,021.16 18.98 50.00 16.66 100.00 23.50 ==================================================================================================================================== RUN: 05Mar04 10:50 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orross001495 PAGE: 4 Open Orders by Brh,Slspsn,Prod Brh Order-Itm Customer Name Ty Whs Al Intl Chg : Material Processing Freight Other Total Cus No Ord Dt Due Dt Src SlpIs SlpOs Frt Job Ga Est Cost : Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %: Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight Grand Totals: 4,436 1,061.80 100.00 133.08 40.00 1,334.88 860.26 50.00 110.90 0.00 1,021.16 18.98 50.00 16.66 100.00 23.50

Open Orders by Branch/Salesperson/Product

15. Order Reports Page 348

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

OPEN SALES ORDERS BY PRODUCT

This report lists all open Sales Orders by Branch, by Product and by Sales Order number.

Selection Screens

Open Sales Orders By Product

Report Program: ORROSP

1. Selection Entry No.. 357

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Customer Number..... [N] From: To:

4. Customer Name....... [N] From: To:

5. Resp For/Sold By.... [R]

6. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

7. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

8. Shipping Branch..... [Y] PHI

9. Order Date.......... [N] From: To:

10. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

11. Product Selections.. [N]

12. Sales Allocation.... [N]

13. Source.............. [N]

14. Item Status......... [N]

15. Sales Territory..... [N] From: To:

16. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Sales Orders by Product – first selection screen

15. Order Reports Page 349

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Open Sales Orders By Product

Report Program: ORROSP

1. Selection Entry No.. 357

17. Sale Type........... [N]

18. Profit Type......... [G]

19. Profit % Below...... [N]

20. Profit % Above...... [N]

21. Print Allocations... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Open Sales Orders by Product – second selection screen

NOTE: If no Order Types are specifically selected, the field defaults to N, R and T Order Types.

To add a permanent selection that selects Orders based on their date, you can enter Y-Yes in

the Order Date or the Item Due Date Selection and leave the From and To fields blank.

Whenever the permanent selection runs, the report will use the system date in the From and To

fields.

Report Printing

The report is printed by Branch, by Product Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Order Item number.

If the selection is chosen to print Inventory Allocations, they are printed following the Order Item. The

Allocation Remarks are printed following the Reservation line.

Totals are given at the following levels: Dimensions, Grade, Size and Group, provided there is more than

one Order Item for the product defined.

There is a Branch Totals and a Grand Totals.

15. Order Reports Page 350

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 05Mar04 11:41 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrosp001496 PAGE: 2 Open Sales Orders By Product Brh Order-Itm Customer Name Ty Whs Al Intl Chg : Material Processing Freight Other Total Cus No Ord Dt Due Dt Src SlpIs SlpOs Frt Job Ga Est Cost : Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %: Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight Branch: (PHI) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH Group CRC Size 18 Grade CQ Dimension 12.0000 PHI 504-003 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 0.00 30.00 0.00 250.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.50 0.00 25.00 0.00 222.50 11 2 10.23 0.00 16.67 0.00 11.00 2 1,000 Group CRC Size 18 Grade DQ Dimension 18.0000

PHI 503-001 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 50.00 30.00 20.00 320.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.63 25.00 25.00 0.00 247.63 11 2 10.17 50.00 16.67 100.00 22.62 2 1,000 PHI 504-001 ACME FAB N PFS WS 220.00 50.00 30.00 20.00 320.00 1010 22Feb04 06Jun04 D JG SH CHG .0478N 197.63 25.00 25.00 0.00 247.63 11 2 10.17 50.00 16.67 100.00 22.62 2 1,000 Dim Totals: 4 2,000 440.00 100.00 60.00 40.00 640.00 395.26 50.00 50.00 0.00 495.26 10.16 50.00 16.66 100.00 22.61 Grd Totals: 4 2,000 440.00 100.00 60.00 40.00 640.00 395.26 50.00 50.00 0.00 495.26 10.16 50.00 16.66 100.00 22.61 Size Totals: 6 3,000 660.00 100.00 90.00 40.00 890.00 592.76 50.00 75.00 0.00 717.76

10.18 50.00 16.66 100.00 19.35 Grp Totals: 6 3,000 660.00 100.00 90.00 40.00 890.00 592.76 50.00 75.00 0.00 717.76 10.18 50.00 16.66 100.00 19.35 Branch Totals: 3,000 660.00 100.00 90.00 40.00 890.00 592.76 50.00 75.00 0.00 717.76 10.18 50.00 16.66 100.00 19.35 ==================================================================================================================================== RUN: 05Mar04 11:41 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrosp001496 PAGE: 3 Open Sales Orders By Product Brh Order-Itm Customer Name Ty Whs Al Intl Chg : Material Processing Freight Other Total Cus No Ord Dt Due Dt Src SlpIs SlpOs Frt Job Ga Est Cost : Cus P/O No Cus Release Number Est Pft %: Exch Rt Bal Unts Bal Quantity Weight Grand Totals: 3,000 660.00 100.00 90.00 40.00 890.00

592.76 50.00 75.00 0.00 717.76 10.18 50.00 16.66 100.00 19.35 *** End of Report ***

Open Sales Orders by Product

15. Order Reports Page 351

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER ITEM EXPEDITING REPORT

This report is used to identify those Orders and Order Items that have exceptional conditions that need to

be followed up prior to the Due Date, so that any potential problems with either an insufficient amount of

finished goods or an insufficient inventory reservation, or orders still on Credit, Production or Shipping

holds can be resolved before the Due Date.

Selection Screens

The selections provide for exception criteria to select only those orders that have the specified conditions

for printing. The number of orders can then be limited to only those that require specific action to be

taken.

Order Item Expediting

Report Program: ORROEX

1. Selection Entry No.. 1334

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Shipping Branch..... [Y] PHI

5. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

6. Customer Number..... [N]

7. Sales Category...... [N]

8. Product Selection... [N]

9. Print Reservations.. [N]

10. Include Non-Specific [N]

11. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

12. Transfer Requisition [N]

13. Branch Direct....... [N]

14. Insufficient Finish [N]

15. Insufficient Res.... [N]

16. Direct Shipment..... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Item Expediting – first selection screen

15. Order Reports Page 352

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Item Expediting

Report Program: ORROEX

1. Selection Entry No.. 1332

17. Credit Hold......... [N]

18. Production Hold..... [N]

19. Shipping Hold....... [N]

20. Item Status......... [N]

21. Order Not Prtd...... [N]

22. Incoming Material... [N]

23. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

24. Print Remarks....... [N]

25. Ack Printed Date.... [N] From: To:

26. Sold vs Reserved.... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Item Expediting – second selection screen

If no selections are made, all Order Items are printed with the Expediting codes applicable to each Order

Item.

If any of the exception selections are used, then only orders that match all of the criteria are printed.

To add a permanent selection that selects Orders based on their date, you can enter Y-Yes in the Item Due

Date Selection and leave the From and To fields blank. Whenever the permanent selection runs, the report

will use the system date in the From and To fields.

Non-Specific Reservations Selection

When running the report for this purpose, make sure that the Include Non-Specific Reservations selection

is set to the default NO. The inclusion of non-Specific Reservations causes Order Items that have

insufficient Specific Reservations to appear fully reserved and, therefore, not to be flagged for inclusion

in the report.

Insufficient Finished Goods Selection

To get a report that displays all Sales Order Items for which Finished Goods still need to be produced (if

processing is necessary) or picked and reserved (if stock items), make the Insufficient Finish selection

YES and keep the Insufficient Res as the default NO.

15. Order Reports Page 353

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Insufficient Reservation Selection

To get a report that displays all Sales Order Items for which the existing Specific Reservations are not

sufficient to complete the Order Item, make the Insufficient Res selection YES and keep the Insufficient

Fin as the default NO.

NOTE: Sales Order Items that are flagged as having Insufficient Reservations are automatically

flagged as having Insufficient Finished Goods. Therefore, a report with both selections set to

YES does not provide any additional information.

Report Printing

The report is sorted by Selling Branch, Due Date, Customer number, Order number with a page break by

Branch.

The ‘Finish’, ‘Consump’ and ‘Incming’ columns only include Reservations in the same Unit of Measure

as the sold product.

The Product Installation Option PLN=X can be set in order to control the inclusion or exclusion of

Planned Production Tags in the Finish column. If set to Y, Planned Production Tags are included. The

default is N, to exclude them. Note that a Reservation from a type ‘O’ Purchase Order is considered

Planned Production and not Incoming Quantity.

All Reservations, regardless of their Unit of Measure, are printed in the detail Reservation under the Item,

if the Print Reservations option is ‘Y’.

The Blanket Order Reservations are printed when

o the Print Reservations option is ‘Y’ and

o the Order Type selection is set to Y-Yes and only the B-Blanket Order Type is specified.

The last column, ‘Exped Cd’ prints an appropriate Expediting code for each Order Item printed. The

codes are:

A - Insufficient Reservation:

Balance of Order Quantity - Specific Reservations - Incoming Reservations

B - Branch

C - Credit Hold

D - Direct Shipment

F - Insufficient Finished Goods:

Balance of Order Quantity – Finished Reservations

(Finished Reservation: Any Specific Reservation where the Group, Size, Grade, Dimensions and Gauge

match the Production Product Item within the allowable tolerances.)

K - Order Acknowledgement Printed

P - Product Hold

S - Shipping Hold

M - Mixed Reservation

Mixed Reservation: Any of the Specific or Incoming Reservation that is in a different Unit

of Measure than the sold product’s Unit of Measure.

O - Order not Printed

Z - Zero Balance

Zero Balance: Order Items with a Zero Balance Quantity that still have

15. Order Reports Page 354

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Specific Reservations.

Totals on the report

The report provides Quantity totals on Customer, Due Date and Branch levels for the following columns:

Original Ordered Quantity

Balance on Order

Finished material reserved to the Order

Consumed material reserved to the Order

Incoming material reserved to the Order

At the end of the report, up to four grand totals are printed, depending on the quantity type of the orders

listed in the report. Thus, totals by Weight, Length, Area and Unit are available. If no orders are listed

for a given quantity type, then the total line for the quantity type is suppressed.

15. Order Reports Page 355

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 21Nov04 10:01 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orroex001824 PAGE: 12

Sales Order Expediting

Due Shp SO Typ Pcs/Qty Ord- Pcs/Qty Bal-- Finish Consump Incming Sts Exped Cd

10Oct04

ACME FABRICATION INC ( 1010)

PHI PHI- 539- 1 DOM/112120/1018/20' 10 200 10 200 0 0 0 FA

( 1010) ACME FABRICATION INC Lgth Tot: 200 200 0 0 0

10Oct04 Lgth Tot: 200 200 0 0 0

12Oct04

ACME FABRICATION INC ( 1010)

PHI PHI- 508- 1 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000/.0478N 1 1000 1 1000 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 508- 2 RT/112109/513/8' 40 320 40 320 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 508- 3 DOM/112120/1018/23' 10 230 10 230 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 508- 4 CRS/18/CQ/40.000048.0000/.0478N 10 260 10 260 0 0 0 FA

( 1010) ACME FABRICATION INC Wgt Tot: 1260 1260 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 550 550 0 0 0

12Oct04 Wgt Tot: 1260 1260 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 550 550 0 0 0

19Nov04

ACME FABRICATION INC ( 1010)

PHI PHI- 313- 1 BA/2214/36/20' 78 5000 78 5000 0 0 0 E FA

PHI- 413- 1 DOM/114120/1026/20' 50 1000 50 1000 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 413- 2 DOM/114120/1026/24' 35 840 35 840 0 0 0 FA

( 1010) ACME FABRICATION INC Wgt Tot: 5000 5000 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 1840 1840 0 0 0

19Nov04 Wgt Tot: 5000 5000 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 1840 1840 0 0 0

20Nov04

ACME FABRICATION INC ( 1010)

PHI PHI- 510- 1 CRC/18/CQ/48.0000/.0478N 1 1000 1 1000 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 510- 2 RT/112109/513/8' 40 320 40 320 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 510- 3 DOM/112120/1018/23' 10 230 10 230 0 0 0 FA

PHI- 510- 4 CRS/18/CQ/40.000048.0000/.0478N 10 260 10 260 0 0 0 FA

( 1010) ACME FABRICATION INC Wgt Tot: 1260 1260 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 550 550 0 0 0

20Nov04 Wgt Tot: 1260 1260 0 0 0

Lgth Tot: 550 550 0 0 0

25Nov04

ACME FABRICATION INC ( 1010)

PHI PHI- 314- 1 BA/2214/36/20' 1 64 1 64 0 0 0 E FA

( 1010) ACME FABRICATION INC Wgt Tot: 64 64 0 0 0

25Nov04 Wgt Tot: 64 64 0 0 0

PHI Wgt Tot: 1164167 1084772 20399 102151 16174

Lgth Tot: 16451 16451 737 8200 0 Area Tot:

1867 1867 0 0 0 Expediting Codes: B - Branch Direct C - Credit Hold D - Direct Shipment F -

Insufficient Finished Goods K - Ack Printed Z - Zero Balance P - Product Hold S - Shipping Hold O - Order not Prt'd A -

Insufficient Reservation M - Mixed Reservation *** End of Report ***

Sales Order Expediting Report

15. Order Reports Page 356

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER PRINTING CONTROL

The Order Print Control report is designed as a summary management report. It lists the Sales Orders in

the system and indicates the status of each order. The report is especially useful to highlight orders that

have been printed, where they have been printed, etc.

Selection Screen

Order Printing Control

Report Program: ORROPC

1. Selection Entry No.. 1056

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Entry Date.......... [Y] From: 12/18/04 To: 12/21/04

5. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Print Control selection screen

Report

The report is sequenced by Branch and Order number with a page break between each Branch and a page

break before the Grand Totals.

It shows the following delete codes under the delete header:

C - Complete

A - Auto Purge

M - Manually deleted

N - Not Deleted or Complete

15. Order Reports Page 357

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report

RUN: 12Nov04 10:51 eSTELPLAN orropc000353 PAGE: 2 Order Printing Control --- Cr/Pft Hold ------- Cr/Pft Rel ---- ----------- Print ----------- - Des - Ord No Cus No Customer Name Ent Dt EntTm WKO Dt Cd Date Time Date Time Login Ack Ord Pwk Pri prt Sec prt Del Brh Whs Branch: (PHI) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH 13 3070 CARDINALE 06May03 14:46 06May03 A 0 0 N Y N 14 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 06May03 15:04 06May03 M 06May03 15:25 01Sep03 17:31 farhad N Y N 15 1050 METAL WORKS 15Jul03 16:29 15Jul03 A 0 0 N Y N 16 1050 METAL WORKS 25Nov03 15:39 25Nov03 P 25Nov03 15:39 0 N Y N 17 1050 METAL WORKS 25Nov03 17:06 25Nov03 % 0 0 N Y N 18 1060 ADVANCED 11Jun04 10:44 11Jun04 H 11Jun04 10:44 0 N N N 19 1070 CAPITAL STAMPIN 11Jun04 10:44 11Jun04 H 28Jul04 17:06 0 N N N 20 1010 ACME FAB 18Jul04 14:35 18Jul04 H 18Jul04 14:35 0 N N N M 21 1010 ACME FAB 18Jul04 14:57 18Jul04 H 18Jul04 14:57 0 N N N M

22 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 18Jul04 15:07 18Jul04 N 0 0 N N N 23 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 18Jul04 16:21 18Jul04 H 18Jul04 16:21 0 N N N 24 1010 ACME FAB 18Jul04 15:07 18Jul04 N 0 0 N Y N 25 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 18Jul04 17:48 18Jul04 N 0 0 N N N 26 1010 ACME FAB 19Jul04 11:58 18Jul04 M 19Jul04 11:58 19Jul04 12:02 ed Y Y Y 27 1010 ACME FAB 19Jul04 13:24 19Jul04 N 0 0 N N N M 28 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:18 18Jul04 M 21Jul04 18:18 22Jul04 10:53 ed N Y N 29 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:22 18Jul04 M 21Jul04 18:22 23Jul04 14:33 ed N Y N 30 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:27 21Jul04 M 21Jul04 18:27 28Jul04 15:51 magda N Y N 31 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:29 21Jul04 M 21Jul04 18:29 23Jul04 14:33 ed N Y N 32 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:35 21Jul04 M 22Jul04 11:05 28Jul04 15:51 magda N Y N 33 1010 ACME FAB 21Jul04 18:42 21Jul04 M 22Jul04 11:05 28Jul04 15:51 magda N Y N 34 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 21Jul04 19:14 21Jul04 H 21Jul04 19:14 0 N N N 35 1010 ACME FAB 23Jul04 14:21 18Jul04 M 23Jul04 14:21 28Jul04 15:51 magda N Y N 36 1020 AMERICAN APPLIA 29Jul04 9:08 29Jul04 M 29Jul04 9:08 29Jul04 9:11 magda N N N Branch Totals: Ack Printed 1 Ord Printed 14 Pwk Printed 1 Auto Credit Rel 4 Manual Credit Rel 10 Credit Held 6 Profit Held 1 Pft Rel/No Cr Check 1 No Pft/Cr Check Done 4 ==================================================================================================================================== RUN: 12Nov04 10:51 eSTELPLAN orropc000353 PAGE: 3 Order Printing Control --- Cr/Pft Hold ---- --- Cr/Pft Rel ------- ------ Print ----------- - Des - Ord No Cus No Customer Name Ent Dt EntTm WKO Dt Cd Date Time Date Time Login Ack WKO TKT Primprt Secprt Del Brh Whs Grand Totals: Ack Printed 1 Ord Printed 14 Pwk Printed 1 Auto Credit Rel 4 Manual Credit Rel 10 Credit Held 6 Profit Held 1 Pft Rel/No Cr Check 1 No Pft/Cr Check Done 4

Order Print Control Report

15. Order Reports Page 358

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER FULFILLMENT REPORT

This report is used to highlight products that are in short supply to alert the purchasing department of

inadequate on-hand material levels to fulfill Sales Orders.

The report prints all products that have been over-committed. It scans through inventory and order

transactions to select products based on any of the three following criteria:

An existing Product Detail that has been over-reserved

A product that has been sold but has no inventory reservations against it

A product on an Incoming Material or Outside Processing Purchase Order that has a Sale or Purchase

Order Reservation against it

Order Fulfillment selection screen

Report Program: ORRFUL

1. Selection Entry No.. 363

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Branch.............. [Y] PHI

4. Incoming Material... [Y]

5. Item Due Date....... [N] From: To:

6. Warehouse........... [N] D F P O

7. Sale Type........... [N]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Fulfillment selection screen

Report Detail

Product Lines

If a product is selected because it has been over-reserved, the report prints the pieces and quantity in the

<OHD/INC>, <ALC> and <NET> fields.

If a product is selected because it has been sold but there are insufficient reservations against it, no pieces

and quantity are printed in the <OHD/INC> field. But, the order line, printed below the product line,

shows the ordered pieces and quantity in the <ALC> field and the pieces and quantity still to be reserved

in the <NET> field.

15. Order Reports Page 359

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Lines

For each product selected, ALL Sales Order, Transfer Order, and Purchase Order Items for the Product

Detail are printed, sequenced by Due Date by Transaction Type.

Valid Transaction Types include the following:

PO - Material Purchase Order

SO - Sales Order or Outside Processing Purchase Order

TO - Transfer Order

For each Order Item, the following sets of Pieces and Quantity fields are shown:

<OHD/INC> - On-Hand/Incoming The Pieces/Quantity already in Inventory or expected from

incoming Purchase/Transfer Orders.

<ALC> - Allocated. The Pieces/Quantity reserved for/against the Order Item. If no reservation

was made against the Order, the report shows the material ordered as the reservation and

indicates this with an *.

<NET> - Net Product Qty. The net product availability after the Sales/Transfer/Purchase Order

Items have been satisfied, computed as follows:

Pcs<OHD/INC>Qty minus Pcs<ALC>Qty

If the Sales Order Item Dimension is 15’ and no inventory reservation has been made, the Product line

describes the 15’ product sold and shows 0 Pcs<OHD/INC>Qty. The Order line displays the Sales Order

number and shows a blank in the Pcs<OHD/INC>Qty field, but a Pcs<ALC>Qty negative equal to the

quantity ordered and a Pcs<NET>Qty negative equal to the required quantity to be reserved.

If the Sales Order Item Dimension is 20’ and the reservation is for 40’, the Product line describes the 40’

Item. If there is insufficient reservation, the <ALC> field reflects the quantity reserved against the 40’

but the <NET> field shows the unallocated balance based on the 20’ ordered.

If the Order Item has multiple reservations, then each reservation dimension is checked to see if it is in a

negative position. Again, the balance of unallocated material (if any) is printed under the ordered

dimension.

For all tagged products, the quantity available is determined by the total quantity of all tags of the same

Group, Size, Grade, Dimension and/or Gauge including non-Specific Reservations.

15. Order Reports Page 360

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Examples

Case A

1 Pcs of 1/2” plate, A-36, 48 X 72” weighing 1,000 LBS is sold. An Inventory Reservation is made

against 1 Pcs of 1/2”, A-36 Plate 48 X 96” weighing 1,200 LBS. There is a balance of 200 LBS

remaining in inventory.

This product would not be picked up on the report since the product has a positive quantity on-hand

and the Sales Order Item is fully reserved.

Case B

1 Pcs of 1/2” plate, A-36, 48 X 72” weighing 1,000 LBS is sold. An Inventory Reservation is made

against 1 Pcs of 1/2”, A-36 Plate 48 X 96” weighing 1,200 LBS. There is an existing order

reservation of 500 LBS for this product so the product’s available quantity is 300-LBS.

This product would be picked up on the report since the product has a negative quantity available of

300 LBS.

(The Product line would print as:)

Pcs-<OHD/INC>-Qty Pcs--<ALC>--Qty Pcs--<NET>--Qty UM

PL 12 36 48.0000 96.0000 1 1200 LBS

(The Order lines would print as:)

25Nov04 PHI SO-001111-004 ARMCO 1- 500- 1 700

15Dec04 PHI SO-001220-002 METAL 1- 1,000- 300-

Case C

250 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ, 48 X 72” Sheet weighing 1,000 LBS is sold. A non-Specific Reservation is

made against 250 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ sheet 48 X 72” which creates a negative non-Specific

Reservation with Quantity available of 1000-LBS.

There are Tags in inventory for this product Group, Size, Grade, Dimension and Gauge that total

2,500 LBS so the net available inventory is still 1,500 LBS.

This product would not be printed on the report since the availability of the product is based on the

total quantity of the product, not the individual quantity of a specific Tag.

15. Order Reports Page 361

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Case D

250 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ, 48 X 72” Sheet weighing 1,000 LBS is sold. A non-Specific Reservation is

made against 250 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ sheet 48 X 72” which creates a negative non-Specific

Reservation with Quantity available of 1000 LBS.

There are no Tags in inventory for this product Group, Size, Grade, Dimension and Gauge.

This product would be printed on the report since the availability of the product is based on the total

quantity of the product that is negative.

(The Product line would print as:)

Pcs-<OHD/INC>-Qty Pcs--<ALC>--Qty Pcs--<NET>--Qty UM

CRS 20 CQ 48.0000 72.0000 0 0 LBS

(The Order line would print as:)

5Jan05 PHI SO-002331-001 ARMCO 250- 1,000- 250- 1,000-

Case E

500 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ, 48 X 72” Sheet weighing 2,000 LBS is sold. A non-Specific Reservation is

made against 250 Pcs of 20 Ga, CQ sheet 48 X 72” which creates a negative non-Specific

Reservation with Quantity available of 1000 LBS. The balance of the order is unallocated.

There are no Tags in inventory for this product Group, Size, Grade, Dimension and Gauge.

This product would be printed on the report since the availability of the product is based on the total

quantity of the product that is negative.

(The Product line would print as:)

Pcs-<OHD/INC>-Qty Pcs--<ALC>--Qty Pcs--<NET>--Qty UM

CRS 20 CQ 48.0000 72.0000 250 1,000 LBS

(The Order line would print as:)

5Jan04 PHI SO-002331-001 ARMCO 500- 2,000- 250- 1,000-

15. Order Reports Page 362

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report

The report is printed in the following sequence:

Products: By Branch

By Product Group, Size, Grade, Dimension, Gauge

The product sequence is by Group Sequence number and then by Product Master Sequence

number within a Group.

Dimensions and Gauge are sorted by Width/Length/Gauge combination within a Product

Master.

Orders: By Order Item Due Date

By Selling Branch

By Transaction Types, by Order Item number.

A page break is provided at the Branch level.

NOTE: There are no report totals since the analysis is by individual product.

15. Order Reports Page 363

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 12Nov04 09:34 eSTELPLAN orrful000351 PAGE: 2

Order Fulfillment

Due Dte Brh Ty Order-Item Hld Name Price Pcs-<OHD/INC>-Qty Pcs--<ALC>--Qty Pcs--<NET>--Qty UM

Branch: ( PHI ) eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

BA 22516 36 10' 0 0 LBS

18Jul04 PHI SO-000034-009 H ACME FABRICATION INC 24.5500 CWT 50- 1,960- 50- 1,960-

21Jul04 PHI SO-000048-003 ACME FABRICATION INC 24.5500 CWT 50- 1,960- 100- 3,920-

CRC 20 CQ 48.0000 .0350 1 23,250 LBS

16Jul04 PHI SO-000004-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 28.7500 CWT 23,250- 1 0

05Jul04 PHI SO-000023-001 ADVANCED METALS, INC 42.5000 CWT 24,239- 1 24,239-

31Jul04 PHI SO-000022-001 METAL WORKS INC 40.0000 CWT 12,062- 1 36,301-

31Jul04 PHI SO-000022-002 METAL WORKS INC 38.0000 CWT 3,575- 1 39,876-

CRC 18 DQ 1.5000 .0478 22 12,288 LBS

29Jul04 PHI SO-000073-001 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.5000 CWT 21- 20,000- 1 7,712-

29Aug04 PHI SO-000074-001 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.5000 CWT 20,000- 1 27,712-

28Sep04 PHI SO-000070-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 33.3800 CWT 2- 1,316- 1- 29,028-

29Sep04 PHI SO-000075-001 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.5000 CWT 20,000- 1- 49,028-

29Oct04 PHI SO-000076-001 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.5000 CWT 20,000- 1- 69,028-

CRC 18 DQ 5.0000 .0478 19 43,978 LBS

18Jul04 PHI SO-000034-014 H ACME FABRICATION INC 29.2000 CWT 12- 25,440- 7 18,538

21Jul04 PHI SO-000051-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 29.2000 CWT 1- 25,000- 6 6,462-

29Jul04 PHI SO-000073-002 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 6- 20,000- 26,462-

29Aug04 PHI SO-000074-002 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 46,462-

29Sep04 PHI SO-000075-002 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 66,462-

29Oct04 PHI SO-000076-002 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 86,462-

CRC 18 DQ 10.2500 .0478 5 22,643 LBS

18Jul04 PHI SO-000034-006 H ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 22,000- 5 643

21Jul04 PHI SO-000047-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 2- 22,000- 3 21,357-

28Jul04 PHI SO-000066-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 3- 22,000- 43,357-

29Jul04 PHI SO-000073-003 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 63,357-

18Aug04 PHI SO-000067-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 22,000- 85,357-

28Aug04 PHI SO-000068-001 H ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 22,000- 107,357-

29Aug04 PHI SO-000074-003 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 127,357-

18Sep04 PHI SO-000069-001 H ACME FABRICATION INC 27.1000 CWT 22,000- 149,357-

29Sep04 PHI SO-000075-003 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 169,357-

29Oct04 PHI SO-000076-003 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 33.3500 CWT 20,000- 189,357-

CRS 20 DQ 24.0000 24.0000 .0359 0 0 LBS

25Nov03 PHI PO-002013-002 ARMCO 5000 29,291 5000 29,291

15Dec03 PHI SO-000020-002 METAL WORKS INC 28.0000 CWT 500- 2,929- 4500 26,362

CRS 18 DQ 36.0000 96.0000 .0478 392 -18,346 LBS

15Jul04 PHI PO-002097-003 ARMCO 34,704 392 53,050

17Jul04 PHI PO-002036-003 LTV STEEL COMPANY 11,826 392 64,876

18Jul04 PHI PO-002062-003 LTV STEEL COMPANY 145,000 392 209,876

18Jul04 PHI SO-000034-003 H ACME FABRICATION INC 27.5000 CWT 12,000- 392 197,876

21Jul04 PHI SO-000038-003 H ACME FABRICATION INC 27.5000 CWT 12,000- 392 185,876

21Jul04 PHI SO-000053-011 AMERICAN APPLIANCE 27.5000 CWT 25,000- 392 160,876

10Aug04 CHI TO-000006-006 STELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH 200 9,360 592 170,236

21Aug04 PHI SO-000061-001 ACME FABRICATION INC 27.5000 CWT 12,000- 592 158,236

HRC 14 1010 36.0000 .0747 1 20,500 LBS

17Jul04 PHI PO-002050-001 US STEEL, DIV OF USX 45,000 1 65,500

Order Fulfillment Report

15. Order Reports Page 364

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

EXECUTIVE OVERVIEW REPORT

Overview

The Executive Overview Report is a daily summary of business activity. It is designed to provide

management with a snapshot of the branch and company totals of the daily/monthly/month-to-date

business activity from sales, purchasing, inventory, and accounting.

The report can be tailored to your specific needs through a variety of Selection Entry Options.

Selection Entry Screen

Executive Overview Report

Report Program: ORREOR

1. Selection Entry No.. 1008

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Branch.............. [Y] PHI

4. Sls Cat-Sls, Op Pft. [Y]

5. Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft. [Y]

6. Sls Cat-Brkg/Srpls.. [Y]

7. Chg Typ-Brkg/Srpls.. [Y]

8. Charges-Processing.. [Y]

9. Charges-Prs Op Pft.. [Y]

10. Sls Cat-Scrap Pft... [Y]

11. Exclude Whs Type.... [Y]

12. Include Transient... [N]

13. Shipping Warehouse.. [Y]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Executive Overview Report selection screen

15. Order Reports Page 365

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Sample

RUN: 29Jan01 12:45 STELPLAN METAL COMPANY orreor001540 PAGE: 2

Executive Overview Report

CHI PHI SEA TOTAL

***** OPEN ORDERS *****

Past > 30 Days 24,351 950,629 974,980

Past 1 - 30 Days 2,391 2,391

Due 0 - 30 Days 2,174 2,174

Due 31 - 60 Days

Open Orders 24,351 955,194 979,545

Toll Orders 8,148 395,210 403,358

**** SALES - DAILY ****

Sales

Operating Profit

Percent of Profit

Brkg/Srpls Sale

Brkg/Srpls Profit/Loss

Processing

Processing Op Profit

Scrap Profit

Total Gross Revenue

Total Percentage

**** SALES - MTD ****

Sales 18,280 18,280

Operating Profit 16,055 16,055

Percent of Profit 846 846

Brkg/Srpls Sale 18,200 18,200

Brkg/Srpls Profit/Loss 16,055 16,055

Processing 504 504

Processing Op Profit 504 504

Scrap Profit 7,322 7,322

Total Gross Revenue 42,161 42,161

Total Percentage 10 10

**** PURCHASING ****

Past Due PO 178,281 7,643,830 76,682 7,898,793

30 Day PO Forward

60 Day PO Forward

Total POs 178,281 7,643,830 76,682 7,898,793

**** ACCOUNTING ****

Accounts Receivable 17,458 2,946,477 2,963,935

Accounts Payable - Posted 200,973 670,611 871,584

Accounts Payable - Unposted 58,102 425,331 483,433

**** INVENTORY ****

Total Inventory 1,468,201 4,200,285 55,157 5,723,643

4 Month Old Inventory 1,229,316 3,923,726 50,760 5,203,802

Produced not Shipped 4,088 4,088

Total Finished Goods 106,031 106,031

Net Investment 1,226,584 6,050,820 55,157 7,332,561

*** End of Report ***

Executive Overview Report

15. Order Reports Page 366

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Following is a list and detailed descriptions of the fields printed on the Executive Overview Report.

NOTE: All amounts are converted to the Company’s Base Currency.

Report Field Name Description

Past > 30 Days Total Balance of all non-Toll Open Sales Orders having a Due Date greater

than 30 days where the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

Past 1 - 30 Days Total Balance of all non-Toll Open Sales Orders having a Due Date of 0 to

30 days old where the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

Due 0 - 30 Days Total Balance of all non-Toll Open Sales Orders having a Due Date for 0 to

30 days in the future where the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

Due 31 - 60 Days Total Balance of all non-Toll Open Sales Orders having a Due Date from 31

to 60 days in the future where the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

Open Orders Total Balance of all non-Toll Open Sales Orders where the Order Type is N-

Normal or R-Release.

Toll Orders Total Balance of all Toll Orders regardless of the Due Date.

DAILY/MTD SALES For Daily

A record is selected if the Transaction Date matches the System Date.

For MTD

A record is selected if the Transaction Date is within the first of

the current calendar month up to the System Date.

Sales The total of the Amount and Sales Tax Amount from Sales and Cost Journal

Detail file whereby:

Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Sls, Op Pft selection

Charge Quantity Type matches the Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft selection

Operating Profit

The total of the Amount less Actual Cost fields from the Sales and Cost

Journal Detail file whereby:

The Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Sls, Op Pft selection

The Charge Type matches the Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft selection

Percent of Profit (Operating Profit * 100) / Total of all the Actual cost fields from the

Sales and Cost Journal Detail file whereby:

The Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Sls, Op Pft selection

The Charge Type matches the Chg Typ-Sls, Op Pft selection

Brokerage/Surplus Sale The total of all the Amount and Sales Tax Amount fields from the Sales and

Cost Journal Detail file whereby:

The Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Brkg/Srpls selection

The Charge Type matches the Chg Typ-Brkg/Srpls selection

Brokerage/Surplus

Profit/Loss

The total of all the Amount less Actual Cost fields from the Sales and

Cost Journal Detail file whereby:

The Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Brkg/Srpls selection

The Charge Type matches the Chg Typ-Brkg/Srpls selection

Processing

The total of all the External Processing Amount less Actual Cost fields in

the Sales and Cost Journal Detail file whereby:

The Customer is a Toll Customer

The Billing Type is Toll Shipping or Toll Production

The Actual Costs are for the Charge code(s) in the Charges-Processing

selection

The PIO’s TB1=XXX to TB9=XXX allow you to choose which of the Branches

appearing in the report will be considered for the computation of this

field.

15. Order Reports Page 367

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Field Name Description

Processing Operating Profit Processing Amount less The Sum of Actual Cost fields in the Sales and Cost

Journal Detail file whereby:

The Customer is a Toll Customer

The Billing Type is Toll Shipping or Toll Production

The Actual Costs are for the Charge code(s) in the Charges-Prs Op Pft

selection

The PIO’s TB1=XXX to TB9=XXX allow you to choose which of the Branches

appearing in the report will be considered for the computation of this

field.

Scrap Profit The total of all the External Material amount fields from the Sales and

Cost Journal Detail file whereby:

The Sales Category matches the Sls Cat-Scrap Pft selection

Total Gross Revenue The Total Gross Revenue is calculated as follows:

Operating Profit + Brokerage/Surplus Sale + Processing + Scrap Profit

Total Percentage The Total Percentage is calculated as follows:

((Operating Profit + Brokerage/Surplus Profit +

Processing Operating Profit + Scrap Profit) * 100)

/ The sum of all the costs associated with each of the above profits.

Past Due PO Total Balance of all Purchase Orders for which the Due Date is older than

current date and the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

30 Day PO Forward Total Balance of all Purchase Orders for which the Due Date is from

current to 30 days in the future and the Order Type is N-Normal or R-

Release.

60 Day PO Forward Total Balance of all Purchase Orders for which the Due Date is 31 to 60

days in the future and the Order Type is N-Normal or R-Release.

Total POs Total Balance of all Purchase Orders where the Order Type is N-Normal or

R-Release.

Accounts Receivable Total Accounts Receivable Open Items. Sum of the value of the Balance

field in the Accounts Receivable Header file where the Branch of the Open

Item is the selected Branch.

Accounts Payable - Posted Total Accounts Payable Open Items. Sum of the value of the Voucher Amount

field in the Voucher Header file <aptpyh> where the Branch of the Open

Item is the selected Branch.

Accounts Payable - Unposted Total Balance of all Open payables from the Inventory Reconciliation file.

Sum of the value of the balance field in the Inventory Reconciliation

Header File <irtirh> where the Branch of the open Item is the selected

Branch.

Total Inventory Total Value of Inventory whereby:

Inventory is not in any Warehouse belonging to a Type in the Exclude

Whs Type selection.

The Include Transient selection does not affect the Total Inventory

figure because Transient Material is not costed.

4 Month Old Inventory Total Value of Inventory as per the criteria of the ‘Total Inventory’

field whereby:

The material is greater than or equal to 120 days Old. (Using Original

Date as comparison for age of material or Created Date if Original

Date is zero).

Produced Not Shipped Produced Not Shipped = PRD Cost * QTY Reserved

15. Order Reports Page 368

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Field Name Description

The program scans the Reservations file and for all products reserved to

Sales Orders, scans through the Product Item to select records whereby the

Inventory is:

in the (or one of the) Warehouse(s) specified in the Shipping

Warehouse selection

Type = Blank

Status = ‘F’

Ownership = ‘O’

Total Finished Goods Total Value On Hand (from the Product Item) for all records for which

Type = Blank

Status = ‘F’

Ownership = ‘O’

Net Investment Net Investment is calculated as follows:

Accounts Receivable + Value of Total Inventory - Accounts Payable Posted

Interface with eSTELoemtoll

Restriction

The Open Orders section of the report does not include the value of open Sales Orders created for

Customers whose Toll Customer record has been set to Inactive or Deleted. If the Toll Customer record

for these Customers is subsequently reset to Active, the value of their open Sales Orders will re-appear in

the Toll Orders field.

Other fields are not affected when the Toll Customer record is set to Inactive.

15. Order Reports Page 369

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

MATERIAL SOURCE EXCEPTION REPORT

The Material Source Exception report <inrvrs> (menu node B-E-M-D) lists all transactions with material

that does not meet the Distinction of Material Origin requirements. The report should be run whenever

changes are made to Source codes, Mill codes, and/or Mill/Heat records.

The output identifies the Transaction, its required Source code and a listing of reserved Tags and

Mill/Heats that have failed the check.

RUN: 04Jun14 10:34 STELPLAN METAL COMPANY inrvrs007144 PAGE: 1

Material Source Exception

Brh Pfx RefNo Itm Src Brh Tag No Whs Mill/Heat Src

PHI BL 245 1 D PHI 1761 PPR ARM/846317

PHI IE 328 1 D PHI 623 PFS ALC/545484 CA

PHI IE 328 2 D PHI AL1226 PPR ALC/3546877 CA

PHI IE 615 1 D PHI AR1544 PPR ARM/59874126

PHI IE 616 1 D PHI 869 PFS

PHI IE 617 1 D PHI 1845 PWS

PHI IE 621 1 D PHI AR1546 PPR ARM/7146981

PHI IP 134 1 D PHI AL2163 PPR ALC/545484 CA

PHI QT 1280 1 D PHI IN1041 PPR INL/987454

PHI SO 1193 1 D PHI AR2659 PPR ALL/MAR072005

PHI SO 1281 2 D PHI 1855 PFS

PHI SO 1472 2 D PHI 229 PFS LTV/283919 US

PHI SO 1600 1 D PHI AR2824 PPR

PHI SO 1600 2 D PHI US2827 PPR

PHI SO 1763 1 D PHI 1761 PPR ARM/846317

PHI SO 1763 1 D PHI AS2837 PPR FRA/5669 ST

ARM/3218786 US

PHI TO 1449 1 D PHI 46 PPR ARM/122120

* End of Report: STELPLAN METAL COMPANY *

Field Name Description

Brh Branch.

Pfx Reference Prefix.

Ref No Reference Number.

Itm Item Number.

Src Source code for the transaction.

Brh Tag Branch.

Tag No Tag Number.

Whs Tag Warehouse.

Mill/Heat Mill/Heat from the Tag. If a Tag has two Mill/Heats (System Installation

Option IND is set), both Heats must be verified and displayed if they both do

not meet the transaction’s requirement.

Src Mill/Heat Source code.

Tag reservations are displayed if the transaction has a Distinction of Material Origin requirement and the

Source code on the Tag’s Mill/Heat record does not match.

15. Order Reports Page 370

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The report excludes:

Non-Specific reservations (Tag No ‘ZZZZZZZ’)

Reservations for material that is NOT Tag Master Required.

For eSTELman Jobs the internal 6 digit number is displayed. The user must use the eSTELman Inquiry

to determine the Job No/Itm/Rel/Step.

15. Order Reports Page 371

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BILL OF LADING MILL/HEAT REPORT

Mill/Heat records on a Bill of Lading must also be verified. The Bill of Lading Mill/Heat report <inrvbl>

(menu node B-E-M-E) lists the Bill of Lading Items where an entered Mill/Heat does not meet the Order

Item Material Distinction requirement.

This report includes both Tag Master Required and Non-Tag Master Required Product Items.

RUN: 20May14 11:18 STELPLAN METAL COMPANY inrvbl007080 PAGE: 1

Bills of Lading Mill/Heat

Brh Pfx RefNo Itm Src Brh Tag No Whs Mill/Heat Src

PHI BL 255 2 CA ALC/1477512 ST

PHI BL 255 3 CA ALC/1477512 ST

* End of Report: STELPLAN METAL COMPANY *

Field Name Description

Brh Branch.

Pfx Reference Prefix.

Ref No Reference Number.

Itm Item Number.

Src Source code for the transaction.

Brh Tag Branch.

Tag No Tag Number.

Whs Tag Warehouse.

Mill/Heat Mill/Heat from the Bill of Lading Item.

Src Mill/Heat Source code.

15. Order Reports Page 372

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

16. BOOKINGS

OVERVIEW

The Bookings inquiries and reports assist in the daily and monthly management of Orders entered. They

should be used as a guide to the profitability expected on the Sales Orders and Bookings in relation to Sales

Targets.

Bookings are based on the calendar period. A Booking Calendar table is automatically built by the system.

Holidays and weekends are excluded. You can manually add a date to the Calendar table if you want to use

it as a business day.

Bookings are updated under the current Calendar Day in the Accounts Receivable Company table. The day

is maintained by the Accounts Receivable End of Day function.

Restrictions

Bookings are updated for Normal and Release Type Orders.

Once the Order is entered, the Booking fields are only updated if a change is done to the Item Charge,

Quantity or Cost. Therefore, if the Salesperson is changed after entering the Items, no change is

recorded in the Booking fields and the Booking reports print the original Salesperson.

If an Item is changed after changing the Salesperson, the difference is recorded in the Booking fields

under the new Salesperson.

Refer to the ‘Periodic Procedures’ chapter for the booking periodic procedures.

16. Bookings Page 374

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES TARGET BY PRODUCT GROUP

This program is used to enter monthly Sales Target figures, by Branch, Year and Product Group. The

target figures are used in the reporting to compare actual results to the Target.

The Branch defaults to your User Branch and the year defaults to the current calendar year. You can

change the Branch if you have access to other Branches. You can also change the year to include target

figures for up to 5 years prior to the current year and 5 years into the future.

You can only enter a Sales Target for a valid Product Group.

Sales Target by Product Group

Brh PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA Yr 04

Group BA Bar Angle

Month Sales/LBS

1 Jan 2,556,896

2 Feb 1,554,652

3 Mar 965,231

4 Apr 4,114,415

5 May 2,598,222

6 Jun 7,418,521

7 Jul 1,546,985

8 Aug 1,111,114

9 Sep 987,451

10 Oct 5,465,122

11 Nov 1,141,512

12 Dec 5,440,210

Sales Target by Product Group entry screen

16. Bookings Page 375

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SALES TARGET BY SALESPERSON

This program is used to enter monthly Sales Target figures, by Branch, Salesperson and Sales Type. The

Target Weight, Sales and expected Gross Profit are entered. The target figures are used in the reporting to

compare actual results to the Target.

The Branch defaults to your User Branch and the year defaults to the current calendar year. You can

change the Branch if you have access to other Branches. You can also change the year to include target

figures for up to 5 years prior to the current year and 5 years into the future.

An O for Outside Salesperson defaults in the Salesperson field. You can change this to an ‘I’ for Inside

Salesperson. You must enter a valid Salesperson code in order to continue to the target detail area.

The first 6 months of the year are displayed on the first screen. The second 6 months are accessible by

pressing <F2>. <Shift F2> returns you to the first screen.

Sales Target by Salesperson

Branch PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA Year 04

Salesperson O LS LARRY SMITH

Month Typ Wgt/LBS Sales G.P.

1 Jan 1 1,000,000 250,000 50,000

2 500,000 125,000 25,000

3 250,000 75,000 12,000

2 Feb 1 800,000 160,000 24,000

2 400,000 80,000 12,000

3 10,000 4,000 500-

3 Mar 1

2

3

4 Apr 1

2

3

5 May 1

2

3

6 Jun 1

2

3

Sales Target by Salesperson entry screen

16. Bookings Page 376

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BRANCH SHIPMENTS

The Branch Shipments program is used to enter daily shipments. These Shipments are displayed in the

SCORE inquiry, on-line, as they are entered. The SCORE inquiry also uses this table to calculate the

Month-to-Date shipments.

The Branch defaults to your User Branch and the month defaults to the current calendar month. You may

change the Branch if you have access to other Branches.

The displayed dates default from the Booking Calendar table. If you wish to maintain the number of days

being displayed, you can do this through the Booking Calendar.

It should be noted that if you manually add or delete a calendar day in the Calendar table that is less than

or equal to the current date, the Branch Shipments is out of synch with the corresponding dates. Should

this happen, you must update the Branch Shipments so that they correspond to the appropriate date.

Branch Shipments

Branch PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA Month 04-10

Date Shipments/LBS Date Shipments/LBS

1 1 Oct 04 21,321 16 23 Oct 04

2 2 Oct 04 121,111 17 26 Oct 04

3 5 Oct 04 25,111 18 27 Oct 04

4 6 Oct 04 555,123 19 28 Oct 04

5 7 Oct 04 123,644 20 29 Oct 04

6 8 Oct 04 12,164 21 30 Oct 04

7 9 Oct 04 211,111

8 13 Oct 04 514,996

9 14 Oct 04 1,111,251

10 15 Oct 04 122,354

11 16 Oct 04 11,741

12 19 Oct 04 756,471

13 20 Oct 04 133,000

14 21 Oct 04

15 22 Oct 04

Branch Shipments entry screen

16. Bookings Page 377

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SCORE INQUIRY

The SCORE inquiry function provides an on-line inquiry indicating the Bookings, Shipments and Month-

to-Date Weights for all Branches.

The maximum number of Branches that can be displayed is 16. When 16 Branches are displayed, the

‘Total’ line on the inquiry screen is suppressed.

Shipments are updated with the use of the Branch Shipment Entry program. As the daily shipment

records are maintained, the SCORE inquiry is updated to reflect the new Balances. The Month-to-Date

figures are automatically computed by the system.

New Sales Orders and changes or deletions to existing Sales Orders are reflected in the inquiry on the

date that the change is done.

The Unit of Measure defaults to equivalent LBS and can be changed to another weight-based Unit of

Measure by using the U/M action bar option. To change the default standard LBS Unit of Measure, set

the Product Installation Option UMD=XXX to another weight-based Unit of Measure.

The SCORE Inquiry defaults to the current date. Use the Date action bar option to override the system

date with any other valid previous Business Date within the current Calendar Period.

The Daily fields then show the Bookings and Shipments for the date you selected. The Month-to-Date

fields reflect the Bookings and Shipments up to the date you selected.

If you enter an invalid date, one of the following messages is displayed: “Date entered must be a

Business Date” or “Year and month must be current”

If there are no transactions matching the selected date, the following message is displayed: “No

transactions found for current selection”

You may also wish to refresh the SCORE inquiry screen at a pre-determined interval. The Product

Installation Option TIM=XXX is available to determine the screen refresh frequency.

16. Bookings Page 378

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

U/M LBS SCORE

-------- Bookings -------- -------- Shipments -------

Brh Daily Weight MTD Weight Daily Weight MTD Weight

CHI 15,996 17,451 7,000 464,646

PHI 12,641 61,215 9,000 46,000

Total 28,637 78,666 16,000 510,646

1-U/M 2-Date

SCORE Inquiry screen

16. Bookings Page 379

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

STANDARD SELECTIONS

Report and form printing selections are provided for functions in the Order Processing cycle. For details

on the selections, please refer to the ‘Selection Entries’ chapter of this manual.

16. Bookings Page 380

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BOOKING ANALYSIS

This report is used to keep track of Month-to-Date Booking activity by Branch and Product Group, or

Management Summary Group.

Sales Orders added, deleted or changed in the current calendar month are reflected in the report. This

includes Orders that were entered in previous months.

The number of days completed in the current month and the total business days in the month are shown

next to the report title.

Booking Analysis

Report Program: ORRBAA

1. Selection Entry No.. 277

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Weight U/M.......... LBS

5. Grp/Mgmt Summary Grp [G]

6. Detail/Summary...... [ ]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Booking Analysis – selection screen

The Variance is calculated by taking the Month-to-Date Bookings and deducting the Month-to-Date

target. The target figure is prorated based on the number of days in the month that have passed.

The Booked Daily Average is the Bookings divided by the number of business days that have passed in

the month.

The Target Daily Average is the Target divided by the number of business days that have passed in the

month.

The Month-to-Date Target Average Over/Under represents the Average Daily Sales required, for the

balance of the working days in the month, to achieve your target.

16. Bookings Page 381

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Printing

The Booking Analysis report by Product Group is sequenced by Branch and Product Group with a page

break by Branch. There is a Branch Total.

The Summary Booking Analysis report by Management Summary Group is sequenced by Branch and

Management Summary Group with a page break by Branch. There is a Branch Total.

The Detail Booking Analysis report by Management Summary Group report is sequenced by Branch,

Management Summary Group and Product Group with a page break by Branch. Totals are given at the

following levels: Management Summary Group—provided there is more than one Product Group for the

Management Summary Group defined—and Branch.

16. Bookings Page 382

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Run: DDMmmYY HH:MM eSTELPLAN Company Name Page ZZZZZZ

Booking Analysis - 6 of 21 Days

Product MTD-LBS Target-LBS Variance Booked Target MTD Target ------- Avg Daily Sales -------

Daily Avg Daily Avg Avg Ovr/Und Jul Jun May 6 Month

CHI CHICAGO

Bar Angles 88987 450000 361013- 14831 21428 24067- 15000 11000 15200 13000

Carbon Steel Plate 68457 250000 181543- 11409 11905 12103- 11000 10510 12000 10500

Cold Rolled Steel 96177 200000 103823- 16029 9524 6921- 17000 21000 11000 18500

Fitting 374500 750000 375500- 62517 35714 25033- 13500 14500 10500 11750

Pipe 12834 12000 834 2139 571 57 8010 7000 12000 9500

CHI Totals: 640955 1662000 1021045- 106825 79142 68067- 64510 64010 60700 63250

<Page Break>

====================================================================================================================================

MTL MONTREAL

Fitting 30000 529500 499500- 5000 25214 33330- 25000 27000 25000 23000

Hot Rolled Steel Coil 75560 150000 74440- 12593 71423 4963- 75000 68000 71000 75000

Hot Rolled Steel Coil 102300 150000 47700- 17050 71423 3180- 64000 70500 68000 71500

Pipe 2000 22400 20400- 333 1067 1360- 2000 5000 5500 7500

MTL Totals: 209860 851900 642040- 34976 40567 42803- 166000 170500 169500 177000

<Page Break>

====================================================================================================================================

***

Bar Angles 88987 450000 361013- 14831 21428 24067- 15000 11000 15200 13000

Carbon Steel Plate 68457 250000 181543- 11409 11905 12103- 11000 10510 12000 10500

Cold Rolled Steel 96177 200000 103823- 16029 9524 6921- 17000 21000 11000 18500

Fitting 404500 1279500 875000- 67416 60928 58333- 38500 41500 35500 34750

Pipe 14834 34400 19566- 2472 1638 1303- 10010 12000 17500 17000

*** Totals: 672955 2213900 1540945- 112159 105424 102730- 91510 96010 91200 93750

Booking Analysis Report by Product Group

16. Bookings Page 383

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 02Mar04 14:08 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrbaa003953 PAGE: 2

Booking Analysis Report

Booking Analysis - 16 of Days

Management Summary Group MTD-LBS Target-LBS Variance Booked Target MTD Target -------- Avg Daily Sales --------

Daily Avg Daily Avg Avg Ovr/Und Feb Jan Dec 6 Month

PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

ALUMINUM BAR

Aluminum Angles 6061 4440 0 4440 278 0 278- 0 0 0 0

CARBON BAR

Bar Angle 29986 48000 18014- 1874 3000 1126 0 0 0 1062

GD COIL 25000 0 25000 1563 0 1563- 0 0 0 0

Total 54986 48000 6986 3437 3000 437- 0 0 0 1062

CARBON FLAT ROLLED

Cold Rolled Steel Coil 167360 32000 135360 10460 2000 8460- 0 0 0 4379

Cold Rolled Steel Sheet 3744 51200 47456- 234 3200 2966 0 0 0 108

Total 171104 83200 87904 10694 5200 5494- 0 0 0 4487

CARBON PLATE

Carbon Steel Plate 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 397

PHI Totals: 230530 131200 99330 14409 8200 6209- 0 0 0 5946

*** End of Report ***

Booking Analysis Report by Management Summary Group – Detail Report

RUN: 02Mar04 14:08 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrbaa003953 PAGE: 2

Booking Analysis Report

Booking Analysis - 16 of Days

Management Summary Group MTD-LBS Target-LBS Variance Booked Target MTD Target -------- Avg Daily Sales --------

Daily Avg Daily Avg Avg Ovr/Und Feb Jan Dec 6 Month

PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

ALUMINUM BAR 4440 0 4440 278 0 278- 0 0 0 0

CARBON BAR 54986 48000 6986 3437 3000 437- 0 0 0 1062

CARBON FLAT ROLLED 171104 83200 87904 10694 5200 5494- 0 0 0 4487

CARBON PLATE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 397

PHI Totals: 230530 131200 99330 14409 8200 6209- 0 0 0 5946

*** End of Report ***

Booking Analysis Report by Management Summary Group – Summary Report

16. Bookings Page 384

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BOOKING TREND

This report lists the daily Bookings with their associated Cost and Profit. It is useful in giving

management an indication of the daily Booking trends. The report is sequenced by Branch by Date.

Booking Trend

Report Program: ORRBKR

1. Selection Entry No.. 278

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Weight U/M.......... LBS

5. Profit Type......... [G]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Booking Trend – selection screen

You should note that if an Item is changed, added or deleted to an existing Order, the Order count will not

change since an Order was not added. The Quantity per Order and the Bookings per Order are still

calculated using the actual Order count for that day.

The Average Profit Percentage is calculated by dividing the Profit by the Bookings.

16. Bookings Page 385

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Run: DDMmmYY HH:MM eSTELPLAN Company Name Page 3

Booking Trend Profit Type X

Brh Date Orders Items Qty-TON Bookings Bk/TON Cost Cost/TON Profit Pft/TON Qty/Ord Bk/Ord Pft/Ord AvgPft%

CHI 01Jul04 85 262 147 74224 503.90 63631 431.98 10593 71.91 3459 873 124 14.20

02Jul04 93 252 102 64526 633.23 43855 430.00 20671 212.85 2193 693 221 31.89

03Jul04 87 217 78 45972 587.13 33697 430.35 12275 156.77 1793 528 141 26.70

05Jul04 84 218 140 82505 589.32 61304 437.88 21201 151.65 3333 982 253 25.76

08Jul04 92 184 84 50745 606.28 37456 447.50 13289 158.77 1826 551 144 26.13

09Jul04 72 201 95 60931 641.38 39024 411.65 21907 231.09 2639 743 267 35.93

10Jul04 65 127 75 43385 578.46 32165 428.29 11220 149.40 2308 456 117 25.66

11Jul04 92 194 119 71329 599.40 57090 478.54 14239 119.35 2587 775 154 19.87

12Jul04 84 132 120 76430 636.92 57089 475.74 19341 161.75 2857 910 230 25.27

CHI Totals: 754 1787 960 570047 593.80 425311 443.03 144736 150.77 2546 756 192 25.38

<Page Break>

=================================================================================================================================

CHI 754 1787 960 570047 593.80 425311 443.03 144736 150.77 2546 756 192 25.38

PHI 922 1889 992 585000 589.72 422850 426.26 162150 163.46 2000 590 163 27.63

*** 1676 3676 1952 1155047 591.72 848181 434.52 306886 157.22 4546 689 183 26.56

Booking Trend Report

16. Bookings Page 386

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

BOOKING BY SALESPERSON

This report lists the actual, target and variance-target Bookings, Month-to-Date Quantity and Gross Profit

by Branch, Salesperson and Sales Type. It also compares the actual Bookings to the last month Bookings

(for the same number of business days) and calculates the variances.

The number of business days completed in the current month and the total business days in the month are

shown next to the report title.

You should note that re-costing may take place on an Order Item through the Order Entry program to

reflect the new cost (see the ‘Order Costing’ section of this manual). The re-costing has an impact on the

Profitability of the Booking. This change in the profitability is reflected in the report on the date that the

change took place.

Salesperson Booking

Report Program: ORRBBS

1. Selection Entry No.. 279

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Weight U/M.......... LBS

5. Profit Type......... [G]

6. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

7. Detail/Summary...... [D]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Booking by Salesperson – selection screen

16. Bookings Page 387

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Reports

Var - Target calculates the difference between the Actual Booking and the Target. If the Actual Booking

is less than the Target Booking, the result (variance) is negative.

Var - LM is calculated by taking the MTD less the Last MTD (for the same number of days).

GP/Qty is calculated by taking the MTD Gross Profit Divided by the MTD Qty. It is calculated in

the Weight Unit of Measure entered on the selection screen.

NOTE: Since only Gross Targets are entered, targets are not printed if the report is selected by Net

Profit.

16. Bookings Page 388

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 06Aug04 14:27 eSTELPLAN COMPANY orrbbs004283 PAGE: 2

Salesperson Booking 5 of 17 Days Sales/Profit Type G

Brh Slp Sls --- Quantity - LBS --- ------- Bookings -------- ----------- Gross Profit -----------

Typ MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM GP/Qty

CHI CHICAGO

AG Actual 1 1171 1171 1,798 1,798 409 409 0.35

Target 368 368 294 294 184 183 0.50

Var-Target 803 803 1,504 1,504 225 226 0.15-

Tot Actual 1171 1171 1,798 1,798 409 409 0.35

Target 368 368 294 294 184 183 0.50

Var-Target 803 803 1,504 1,504 225 226 0.15-

HD Actual 1 9772 19819- 14,188 23,100- 2,101 2,015- 0.22

Target 4706 4706 6,336 6,336 631 630 0.13

Var-Target 5066 24525- 7,852 29,436- 1,470 2,645- 0.09

Actual 2 114 24836 182 33,148 50 6,161 0.44

Target 2059 2059 1,340 1,339 356 356 0.17

Var-Target 1945- 22777 1,158- 31,809 306- 5,805 0.27

Tot Actual 9886 5017 14,370 10,048 2,151 4,146 0.22

Target 6765 6765 7,676 7,675 987 986 0.15

Var-Target 3121 1748- 6,694 2,373 1,164 3,160 0.07

MO Actual 1 5318 5318 7,018 7,018 1,097 1,097 0.21

Target 2941 2941 1,471 1,470 356 356 0.12

Var-Target 2377 2377 5,547 5,548 741 741 0.09

Tot Actual 5318 5318 7,018 7,018 1,097 1,097 0.21

Target 2941 2941 1,471 1,470 356 356 0.12

Var-Target 2377 2377 5,547 5,548 741 741 0.09

CHI Tot Actual 16375 11506 23,186 18,864 3,657 5,652 0.22

Target 10074 10074 9,441 9,439 1,527 1,525 0.15

Var-Target 6301 1432 13,745 9,425 2,130 4,127 0.07

*** End of Report ***

Salesperson Booking Report by Gross Profit

16. Bookings Page 389

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 06Aug04 15:02 eSTELPLAN COMPANY orrbbs004287 PAGE: 2

Salesperson Booking 5 of 17 Days Sales/Profit Type N

Brh Slp Sls --- Quantity - LBS --- ------- Bookings -------- ----------- Net Profit -----------

Typ MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM NP/Qty

CHI CHICAGO

AG Actual 1 1171 1171 1,798 1,798 333 333 0.28

Tot Actual 1171 1171 1,798 1,798 333 333 0.28

HD Actual 1 9772 19819- 14,188 23,100- 1,985 1,836- 0.20

Actual 2 114 24836 182 33,148 25 5,889 0.22

Tot Actual 9886 5017 14,370 10,048 2,010 4,053 0.20

MO Actual 1 5318 5318 7,052 7,052 1,053 1,053 0.20

Tot Actual 5318 5318 7,052 7,052 1,053 1,053 0.20

CHI Tot Actual 16375 11506 23,220 18,898 3,396 5,439 0.21

*** End of Report ***

Salesperson Booking Report by Net Profit

16. Bookings Page 390

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 06Aug04 15:07 eSTELPLAN COMPANY orrbbs004288 PAGE: 2

Summary Booking - 5 of 17 Days Sales/Profit Type G

Brh Sls --- Quantity - LBS --- ------- Bookings -------- ----------- Gross Profit -----------

Typ MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM MTD Var-LM GP/Qty

CHI Actual 1 274835 262885- 390,579 494,801- 75,207 87,399- 0.27

Target 8015 8015 8,101 8,101 1,171 1,170 0.15

Var-Target 266820 270900- 382,478 502,902- 74,036 88,569- 0.12

Actual 2 89847 128605 127,632 220,400 18,838 44,342 0.21

Target 2059 2059 1,340 1,339 356 356 0.17

Var-Target 87788 126546 126,292 219,061 18,482 43,986 0.04

Actual 3 0 37- 0 441- 0 209- 0.00

Target 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00

Var-Target 0 37- 0 441- 0 209- 0.00

CHI Tot Actual 364682 134317- 518,211 274,842- 94,045 43,266- 0.26

Target 10074 10074 9,441 9,440 1,527 1,526 0.15

Var-Target 354608 144391- 508,770 284,282- 92,518 44,792- 0.11

*** End of Report ***

Booking by Salesperson – Summary Report

16. Bookings Page 391

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

DETAIL BOOKING

This report is used to keep track of Order Booking activity at the Item detail level by Branch and Entry

Date. Company totals are obtained by totaling all Branch statistics.

The purpose of the report is to provide salespeople and management with a list of Orders entered,

changed or deleted in a day along with details of the product, prices, costs, and estimated profitability.

Detail Booking

Report Program: ORRDBK

1. Selection Entry No.. 280

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Salesperson......... [I] From: To: zzzz

5. Weight U/M.......... LBS

6. Profit Type......... [G]

7. Profit % Below...... [N]

8. Profit % Above...... [N]

9. Entry Date.......... 11/12/04

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Detail Booking – selection screen

Report Layout

The report is sequenced by Branch, by Entry Date, and then broken down into New Orders, Changed

Orders and Deleted Orders.

A page break is provided after each Branch total.

This report can be run in the End of Month directory for the previous month. To allow for this, you can

enter a date belonging to the month prior to the calendar month. Note that this is only applicable in the

End of Month directory. In the Live directory, when entering a date from a previous month, a blank

report is generated since the Bookings files have been rolled to the new month.

16. Bookings Page 392

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

New Orders

The Daily New Order Totals and Branch New Order Totals lines specify respectively the total number of

New Orders and New Items.

NOTE: When an item’s product information is changed, detail lines are printed for the:

original product and quantity, and

modified product and quantity.

Profit Percentage

The profit Percentage is calculated for each line (Order Items and Totals) based on the following formula:

(Booking Amount - Cost Amount) / Booking Amount

NOTE: This formula is used whether the selected report Profit Type is G-Gross or N-Net.

16. Bookings Page 393

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RUN: 27Jan05 17:04 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrdbk003695 PAGE: 2

Detail Booking Profit Type G

Slp Order-Itm Cus Name Al Ty Group/Size/Grade/Dimension Qty-LBS Booking Cost Profit Pft %

Selling Branch: (CHI) eSTELPLAN CHICAGO

Entry Date: 22Oct04

*** New Orders ***

AB 81- 1 ABC Metals Inc BS 3 CRC/18/CQ/36.0000" 5,000 1172.50 495.00 677.50 57.78

Daily New Orders Total: 1 Orders 1 Items 5,000 1172.50 495.00 677.50 57.78

Daily Totals: 5,000 1172.50 495.00 677.50 57.78

Entry Date: 15Dec04

*** New Orders ***

AB 93- 1 ABC Metals Inc BS 3 CRC/18/CQ/36.0000" 2,100 525.00 550.35 25.35- 4.83-

94- 1 ABC Metals Inc BS 3 CRC/18/CQ/36.0000" 2,100 525.00 550.35 25.35- 4.83-

94- 2 ABC Metals Inc BS 3 CRS/18/CQ/36.0000"X96.0000" 2,574 1025.22 753.20 272.02 26.53

Slp Totals New Orders : 6,774 2075.22 1853.90 221.32 10.66

*** Changed Orders ***

AB 86- 1 ABC Metals Inc BS 3 CRC/18/CQ/36.0000" 2,100 525.00 379.86 145.14 27.65

Slp Totals: 8,874 2600.22 2233.76 366.46 14.09

Daily New Orders Total: 2 Orders 3 Items 6,774 2075.22 1853.90 221.32 10.66

Daily Totals: 8,874 2600.22 2233.76 366.46 14.09

Branch New Orders Total: 3 Orders 4 Items 11,774 3247.72 2348.90 898.82 27.68

Branch Totals: 13,874 3772.72 2728.76 1043.96 27.67

*** End of Report ***

Detail Booking Report

16. Bookings Page 394

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

DAILY OPERATING REPORT

The Daily Operating Report is an executive information summary of your company’s key activities

including:

Order Bookings

Sales Statistics

Balance to Ship for Open Orders

Current Inventory Position

Current Purchasing Position (optional)

Open Receivers (optional)

Cash Receipts Position

Open Load and Ship Bill of Ladings

Current AR Position

Daily Operating

Report Program: ORRDOR

1. Selection Entry No.. 1062

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Branch.......................... [ ]

4. Exclude Customer Owned Inventory [ ]

5. Detail/Summary.................. [ ]

6. Include Incoming Material....... [ ]

7. P/O Type ....................... [ ]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Daily Operating Report – selection screen

Features and Functions

A recap for all Branches is printed at the end of the report. If information is printed for only one

Branch, then the recap is suppressed.

Bookings, Sales, Orders and Inventory positions are grouped by Product Line. Totals are provided

where applicable.

Profit figures can be based on Net or Gross depending on the PRF=X Program Installation Option

setting. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

16. Bookings Page 395

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Percentage calculations are rounded to one decimal place. Weight calculations are rounded to the

nearest whole number. Dollar calculations are rounded to the nearest whole dollar in the Bookings,

Sales and Open Orders sections and to one decimal place in the Cash Receipts and Open Receivables

sections. This allows for a compact and condensed format.

The Product Installation Option CSP=X can be used to control the printing of commas to allow for the

maximum field size. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

The report can be executed at any time through the standard eSTELPLAN menu or added to a

CS/IRIS Catalog in CRON to be executed automatically before the End of Day runs.

Gross/Net Profit Calculations

The Product Installation Option PRF=X allows you to select Net or Gross Profit calculations for the

Open Orders, Booking and Sales sections. (Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide.)

If Gross Profit is selected:

GP $ = Material Sales - Material Cost

GP % = [(Material Sales - Material Cost) / Material Sales] x 100

No Freight, Processing or Other Revenue or Costs are included.

If Net Profit is selected:

NP $ = Total Sales - Total Cost

NP % = [(Total Sales - Total Cost) / Total Sales] x 100

Bookings

Order Bookings are summarized by Product Line, and broken down into 3 sections:

Today

Month-to-Date

Year-to-Date

If a Sales Order is added today, it falls into the Today’s Orders section, as well as the Month-to-Date and

Year-to-Date sections.

Bookings made for Normal and Release type Orders are included in the Booking statistics. Changes

made to these Orders are applied to the day and the month that the change is made.

Changes impacting the Booking files include:

Deletion of an Order or Order Item

Addition of an Order Item

Changes to the Order Costing

Changes to the Pieces, Measure and Quantity of Order Items

Non-weight based products are converted to their weight equivalent based on Theoretical Weight.

16. Bookings Page 396

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Today’s Order Section

For this section, the Orders are selected based on the current Calendar Day as defined in the Accounts

Receivable Company table. This includes all new Sales Orders and all changed or deleted Orders entered

on the Calendar Day.

Example:

A Sales Order is entered on June 1st for:

Mat Tot Sls ............ 200

Mat Tot Cst ............ 296

Tot Wgt .................. 1087

On June 2nd the Order is modified to increase the Sales to $300, the Cost to $370, and the weight

to 1359.

The booking record for June 2nd contains the net difference due to the modifications:

Mat Tot Sls ............ 100

Mat Tot Cst ............ 74

Tot Wgt .................. 272

Manually deleted Sales Orders are subtracted from Today’s Orders and the Month-to-Date Orders. It

should be noted that Orders that are shipped and invoiced are not included in the deletions.

The End of Day procedure rolls the daily Booking data. If this report is run shortly after the End of Day

procedure (before Orders are entered, modified, or deleted), the Daily information is blank. When the End

of Day is run on the last working day of the month, the bookings table is rolled leaving the new month

empty. If this report is run after the End of Day and before the End of Month, the Year-to-Date figures

exclude the previous month.

Month-to-Date Orders Section

For the Month-to-Date section, the Orders are selected based on the current Calendar month as defined in

the Bookings Calendar table. This includes all new Sales Orders and all changed or deleted Orders

entered in the Calendar month.

Example:

A Sales Order is entered on June 28th for:

Mat Tot Sls ............ 200

Mat Tot Cst ............ 296

Tot Wgt .................. 1087

On July 2nd the Order is modified to increase the Sales to $300, the Cost to $370, and the weight

to 1359.

The Booking record for July contains the net difference due to the modification:

Mat Tot Sls ............ 100

16. Bookings Page 397

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Mat Tot Cst ........... 74

Tot Wgt ................. 272

The End of Day procedure rolls the Monthly Booking data on the night of the last Calendar day of the

current Booking Calendar month. If this report is run after the End of Day procedure (before Orders are

entered, modified or deleted), the monthly information is blank.

Year-to-Date Orders Section

For the Year-to-Date section, the Orders are selected based on the number of completed accounting

periods in the current fiscal year. The program checks the Current Accounts Receivable Period in the

Accounts Receivable Company table. Based on that period, the program determines the number of

Booking periods to read for the Year-to-Date figures.

Example: It is currently the end of May 97.

Your fiscal year end is March 31.

The current Accounts Receivable period is 9702.

Therefore, when you run the report in May, the program gets the Year-to-Date figures for 2

months.

Restriction

When End of Day is run on the last working day of the month, the Bookings table is rolled, leaving the

new month empty. If the report is run after the End of Day and before the End of Month, the Year-to-

Date figures exclude the previous month.

Sales

The sales statistics are summarized by Product Line, and include sales on a daily, monthly and yearly

basis.

The Sales and Cost figures are taken from the Sales Analysis files, which are updated at time of Invoice

Update.

Non-weighted based products are converted to their weight equivalent based on Theoretical Weight.

Today’s Sales Section

The data is selected based on the current Business Day as defined in the Accounts Receivable Company

table.

The End of Day procedure rolls the Business Day. If this report is run after the End of Day procedure, the

daily information will be blank.

Month-to-Date Sales Section

The data is selected based on the Accounting Period as defined in the Accounts Receivable Company and

Business Calendar files.

16. Bookings Page 398

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The End of Month procedure rolls the Monthly Sales Analysis data. If this report is run after the End of

Month procedure, the monthly information will be blank.

Year-to-Date Sales Section

The program checks the current Accounts Receivable Period in the Accounts Receivable Company table

and selects Sales data based on the number of fiscal periods that have passed since year end.

Example: It is currently the end of June 97.

Your fiscal year end is April 30.

The current Accounts Receivable period is 9702.

Therefore, when you run the report in June, the program will get the Year-to-Date figures for 2

months.

Open Orders

This section is a summary of Open Sales Orders summarized by Product Line and Sales Order Item Due

Date. It includes Orders that are listed in the New Sales Orders section.

The different ranges of Due Dates are a forecast of Sales Orders based on their Item Due Date. The

ranges are fixed periods representing the following:

First 15 days of the current month

Day 16 through the end of the current month

The following month

All subsequent months

Restrictions

It must be noted that the Internal Material Charge amount is used for the Sales Amount. If you have

additional Material Charge numbers, they will not be picked up by this report.

Example: If the report is run any time in June, the ranges would be as follows:

Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Due through Jun15 Jun16 through Jun30 Jul01 through Jul31 Aug01 and Later

15 Day Range Day 16 to Mth End 1 Month Range All other months

This section prints N (Normal) and R (Release) type Sales Orders and does not print Sales Orders that

have been flagged as Completed (C), Manual Deleted (M) or Auto Deleted (A). This includes Sales

Orders for all Branches, Warehouses and Sales Categories.

The weight printed is the balance of weight that is to be shipped. The value printed is the balance of the

value of the Sales Order.

Example: On June 1st, a Sales Order due on June 2nd is entered for the Carbon Bar (CB)

Management Summary Group. The Open Sales Order section is printed as follows:

Open Sales Orders

16. Bookings Page 399

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

--- Due through Jun15 ---

Weight Sales

CB 6380 3,190

On June 2nd, half of the Sales Order is invoiced. If the report is run after invoice update on

June 2nd, the Open Sales Order section would be printed as follows:

Open Sales Orders

--- Due through Jun15 ---

Weight Sales

CB 3190 1,595

When the balance of the Order is invoiced, it will no longer appear on the report.

Inventory

This section summarizes Inventory by Product Line indicating the current inventory position at the time

of report execution. This inventory position reflects what is currently on-hand and available.

Non-weight based products are converted to their weight equivalent based on Theoretical

Weight. Transient Product Items are all excluded from the report.

The Inventory Value is the Total Value of the Material. It can include Material, Processing, Freight and

Other amounts.

The Available Weight is the On-hand Weight less the specific Reservations’ weight. Non-Specific

allocations are excluded from the computation.

Incoming POs

This section is only displayed when the Include Incoming Material selection entry is Y-Yes. It provides the

Weight and Total Costs of open Purchase Orders by Product Line (Management Summary Groups) at the

time of report execution. The Purchase Orders are selected based on the P/O Type selection entry option.

By Default, N-Normal, R-Release and B-Blanket POs are included.

Open Receivers

This section is only displayed when the Include Incoming Material selection entry is Y-Yes. It provides the

Weight of open Receivers by Product Line at the time of report execution. Updated Received are excluded as

the material is accounted for in the Inventory section of the report. Customer Receipts are excluded if the

Exclude Customer Owned Inventory selection is set to Y-Y. All other receiver types are included.

Cash Receipts

The Cash Receipts are taken from the Cash Receipts Journal at the time of report execution. Cash

Receipts are only printed after the Cash Receipts Update has been run. This section does not include cash

in process.

16. Bookings Page 400

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The Session Date is used to pick up all Cash Receipts entered into the system on a certain day. However,

these receipts may have been entered for a different deposit date.

Today’s Receipts are printed if the System date equals the Session Date. Therefore, in order for Today’s

receipts to be viewed, you must run the report before midnight of the current day. Month-to-Date

Receipts are the total of the checks received in the current month. Once End of Month is run, the Month

to Date column is reset to 0.

Open Bills of Lading

This section provides the value of the Load and Ship Bills of Lading that are not on updated invoices. In

the Open Receivables section below, an ‘Open B/L’ column indicates the Total Value and Weight of all

Load and Ship Bills of Lading.

Open Receivables

This is the position of the Open Receivables at the time of report execution. The value of the Invoice

Entries that are not yet updated is not included in the report.

If the Open Receivables include foreign currency amounts, they are converted to the Base Currency using

the Current Exchange Rate for the customer’s Currency.

Report Sample

The sample shown below assumes that the Product Installation Option is set to G-Gross Profit. If it was

set to N-Net Profit, the column headings would print NP instead of GP. It also assumes that the Include

Incoming Material selection option is set to N-No. If it was set to Y-Yes, Incoming POs and Open

Receivers sections would be printed next to the Inventory section.

16. Bookings Page 401

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Run: 02Jun04 21:02 INVERA INC. Page 2 Daily Operating Report Brh: CHI Chicago Prd Ln -------------- Today's ------------- -------------- Month to Date ---------- ------------- Year to Date ------------ Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP% Booking AE 481 154 154 100.00 1245815 38,383 38,383 100.00 1245815 38,383 38,383 100.00 AF 360 340 159- 46.81- 49140 104,474 27,661 26.48 49140 104,474 27,661 26.48 CB 13400 27,576 1,522 5.52 98665 228,527 52,712 23.07 98665 228,527 52,712 23.07 CF 56775 29,454 1,587 5.39 1351097 813,791 178,593 21.95 1351097 813,791 178,593 21.95 HB 1400 3,538 1,304 36.86 341776 169,714 37,957 22.37 341776 169,714 37,957 22.37 RR 37990 85,534 12,376 14.47 37990 85,534 12,376 14.47 RT 2350 6,620 2,331 35.21 2350 6,620 2,331 35.21 SS 18475 10,210 10,210 100.00 1144414 568,893 568,893 100.00 1144414 568,893 568,893 100.00 Tot: 90891 71,274 14,620 20.51 4271247 2,015,939 918,910 45.58 4271247 2,015,939 918,910 45.58 Sales AE 15201 696 696 100.00 1080922 23,851 23,851 100.00 1100922 33,851 33,851 100.00 AF 4392 8,429 709 8.42 28201 63,120 16,030 25.40 28201 63,120 16,030 25.40 CB 21360 56,026 8,919 15.92 110491 268,510 44,058 16.41 110491 268,510 44,058 16.41

CF 113055 62,314 11,225 18.01 1303471 761,395 160,576 21.09 1303471 761,395 160,576 21.09 HB 10102 10,033 1,674 16.69 411252 195,439 36,471 18.66 411252 195,439 36,471 18.66 MI 9,136 9,136 100.00 9,136 9,136 100.00 RR 55773 119,340 23,902 20.03 55773 119,340 23,902 20.03 RT 1879 5,693 2,057 36.13 1879 5,693 2,057 36.13 SS 57222 28,528 371 1.30 724609 360,148 4,709 1.31 724609 360,148 4,709 1.31 Tot: 221332 166,028 23,597 14.21 3696598 1,816,635 320,793 17.66 3736598 1,816,635 330,793 18.21 Open Orders --- Due thru Jun15 --- -- Jun16 thru Jun30 -- -- Jul 1 thru Jul31 -- --- Aug 1 and Later -- Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales AE 528429 16,613 55000 1,650 2348 188 AF 35215 74,112 10809 22,635 10589 22,175 11100 22,053 CB 41113 101,254 10225 26,539 34825 82,780 39170 89,029 CF 691651 396,695 273158 160,293 326638 185,578 313050 210,936 HB 229370 114,075 24900 15,438 73600 38,073 89451 46,515 RR 24950 56,042 21612 50,904 18384 38,291 34278 61,484 RT 350 560 1242 1,801 2000 6,060 SS 157599 81,479 2757230 1,365,281 Tot: 1551078 759,351 395704 277,459 625225 450,365 3246279 1,801,358

Inventory Weight Value Avail Wgt CB 20000 15,500 18526 CF 45000 25,350 45000 Tot 65000 40,850 63526 Cash Receipts Today Month to Date 3,125.00 385,125.50 Open Bills of Lading Load B/L Ship B/L 3,758.11 37,456.00 Open Receivables Open B/L Current 1 – 30 31 - 60 61 - 90 91 - 120 Over 120 Days Total 41,214.11 1354,517.53 475,881.11 172,435.93 65,845.87 17,696.96 11,139.97 2138,731.48 23508 <page break> ======================================================================================================================

Daily Operating Report – page 2

16. Bookings Page 402

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Run: 02Jun04 21:02 INVERA INC. Page 3

Daily Operating Report

Brh: PHI Philadelphia

Prd Ln -------------- Today's ------------- -------------- Month to Date ---------- ------------- Year to Date ------------

Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP%

Booking

AE 481 154 154 100.00 1245815 38,383 38,383 100.00 1245815 38,383 38,383 100.00

AF 360 340 159- 46.81- 49140 104,474 27,661 26.48 49140 104,474 27,661 26.48

Tot: 841 494 15 5.50 1294955 142,857 66,044 55.56 1294955 142,857 66,944 55.56

Sales

AE 15201 1,696 1,696 100.00 1100922 33,851 33,851 100.00 1100922 33,851 33,851 100.00

AF 4392 8,429 709 8.42 28201 63,120 16,030 25.40 28201 63,120 16,030 25.40

CB 11360 56,026 8,919 15.92 100491 268,510 44,058 16.41 100491 268,510 44,058 16.41

CF 113055 62,314 11,225 18.01 1303471 761,395 160,576 21.09 1303471 761,395 160,576 21.09

Tot: 144008 128,465 22,549 17.55 2533085 1,126,876 254,515 22.59 2533085 1,126,876 254,515 22.59

Open Orders

--- Due thru Jun15 --- -- Jun16 thru Jun30 -- -- Jul 1 thru Jul31 -- --- Aug 1 and Later --

Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales

CB 41113 101,254 10225 26,539 34825 82,780 39170 89,029

CF 691651 396,697 273158 160,293 326638 185,578 313050 210,936

Tot: 732764 497,949 283383 186,832 361463 268,358 620578 299,965

Inventory

Weight Value Avail Wgt

AE 20000 15,500 20000

CB 1500 7,250 1500

CF 45000 25,350 27548

Tot: 66500 48,100 49048

Cash Receipts Today Month to Date

6,005.00 285,125.50

Open Bills of Lading Load B/L Ship B/L 488.40 725.71

Open Receivables

Open B/L Current 1 - 30 31 - 60 61 - 90 91 - 120 Over 120 Days Total

1,214.11 154,517.53 475,881.11 172,435.93 65,845.87 17,696.96 11,139.97 938,731.48

526

<Page Break> =====================================================================================================================

Daily Operating Report – page 3

16. Bookings Page 403

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Run: 02Jun04 21:02 INVERA INC. Page 4

Daily Operating Report

Recap

Prd Ln -------------- Today's ------------- -------------- Month to Date ---------- ------------- Year to Date ------------

Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP% Weight Sales GP GP%

Booking

AE 962 308 308 100.00 2491630 76,766 76,766 100.00 2491630 38,383 38,383 100.00

AF 720 680 159- 46.81- 98280 208,948 55,322 26.48 98280 208,948 55,322 26.48

CB 13400 27,576 1,522 5.52 98665 228,527 52,712 23.07 98665 228,527 52,712 23.07

CF 56775 29,454 1,587 5.39 1351097 813,791 178,593 21.95 1351097 813,791 178,593 21.95

HB 1400 3,538 1,304 36.86 341776 169,714 37,957 22.37 341776 169,714 37,957 22.37

MI

RR 37990 85,534 12,376 14.47 37990 85,534 12,376 14.47

RT 2350 6,620 2,331 35.21 2350 6,620 2,331 35.21

SS 18475 10,210 10,210 100.00 1144414 568,893 568,893 100.00 1144414 568,893 568,893 100.00

Tot: 91732 71,768 14,620 20.51 4271247 2,015,939 918,910 45.58 4271247 2,015,939 918,910 45.58

Sales

AE 15201 2,392 2,392 100.00 2201844 67,702 67,702 100.00 2201844 67,702 67,702 100.00

AF 8784 16,858 1,418 8.42 56402 126,240 32,060 25.40 56402 126,240 32,060 25.40

CB 44080 112,052 17,838 15.92 210982 537,020 88,116 16.41 210982 537,020 88,116 16.41

CF 226110 124,628 22,450 18.01 2606942 1,522,790 321,152 21.09 2606942 1,522,790 321,152 21.09

HB 30204 10,033 1,674 16.69 411252 195,439 36,471 18.66 411252 195,439 36,471 18.66

MI 9,136 9,136 100.00 9,136 9,136 100.00

RR 55773 119,340 23,902 20.03 55773 119,340 23,902 20.03

RT 1879 5,693 2,057 36.13 1879 5,693 2,057 36.13

SS 114444 28,528 371 1.30 724609 360,148 4,709 1.31 724609 360,148 4,709 1.31

Tot: 365340 294,493 46,146 15.67 6229673 2,943,511 575,308 19.54 6229673 2,943,511 575,308 19.54

Open Orders

--- Due thru Jun15 --- -- Jun16 thru Jun30 -- -- Jul 1 thru Jul31 -- --- Aug 1 and Later --

Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales Weight Sales

AE 528429 16,613 55000 1,650 2348 188

AF 35215 74,112 10809 22,635 10589 22,175 11100 22,053

CB 82226 202,508 20450 53,078 69650 165,560 78340 178,058

CF 1383302 793,390 546316 320,586 653276 371,156 626,100 421,872

HB 229370 114,075 24900 15,438 73600 38,073 89451 46,515

MI 24950 56,042 21612 50,904 18384 38,291 34278 61,484

RR 350 560 1242 1,801 2000 6,060

SS 157599 81,479 2757230 1,365,281

Tot: 2283842 1257,300 679087 464,291 986688 718,723 3866857 2,101,323

Inventory

Weight Value Avail Wgt

AE 20000 15,500 20000

CB 21500 22,750 20026

CF 90000 50,700 72548

Tot 131500 88,950 112574

Cash Receipts Today Month to Date

9,130.00 670,251.00

Open Bills of Lading Load B/L Ship B/L

11,200.40 21,227.82

Open Receivables

Open B/L Current 1 – 30 31 - 60 61 - 90 91 - 120 Over 120 Days Total

42,428.22 1509,035.06 951,762.22 344,871.86 131,691.74 35,393.92 22,279.94 3077,472.96

24034

End of Report

Daily Operating Report – page 4

16. Bookings Page 404

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER WEIGHTS OVERRIDDEN REPORT

This report provides a listing of Order Items having an Original Ordered Item Weight that differs from the

Theoretical Weight. It uses the daily Bookings Transactions table and only prints the Orders that were

entered or modified during the current day. It also prints the Login ID of the person who added or last

modified the Order.

To ensure that the Login ID printed on the report represents the last person who could have affected the

Order weight, you must install the LID=X Product Installation Option on the Order Entry program. This

option ensures that the Order Header Login ID is updated every time the Order Weight is changed. Refer

to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Restrictions

The report has no Selection Entry screen. It is run from an option provided on the menu.

Only Normal and Release Type Orders are printed on the report as the Booking Transaction table is

not updated for any other Order Type.

A Theoretical weight cannot be computed for Product Items having an Inventory Organization of WT

or for Items where the Ordered Pieces are zero. These Items are not printed.

Report Sequence

This is sequenced by:

Inside Salesperson

Branch

Order number

Report Totals

Totals are provided for:

Each Salesperson

The Report total

16. Bookings Page 405

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Field Description

For each Salesperson, the following fields are printed on the report.

Report Field Name Description

Brh Sales Order Branch

Order Sales Order Number

Login ID The Login ID of the person who entered or last reviewed the Order. This field

is dependent on the LID=X Product Installation Option on the Order Entry

program.

Mode Allows you to verify the nature of the change to Bookings.

Options are:

A Added. The Order was added during the day.

C Changed. The Order was changed during the day.

Ord Pcs Ordered Pieces

Theo Wgt Theoretical Weight

Ord Wgt Ordered Weight

Diff Difference between Ordered and Theoretical Weights.

16. Bookings Page 406

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Sample

RUN: 16Jul04 16:27 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY orrowo003752 PAGE: 1

Order Weights Overridden

Brh Order Login ID Mode Ord Pcs Theo Wgt Ord Wgt Diff

Dave Green

CHI 354-12 John C 42 1200 1100 100

CHI 1271-1 Bill A 1001 14200 14100 100

PHI 77-5 Ted C 701 4010 4010 0

Total 19410 19210 200

John Goodman

CHI 101-7 Bill A 902 7250 7050 200

PHI 1272-1 Dave A 451 18500 18600 100-

Total 25750 25650 100

TOTAL 45160 44860 300

Mode Code: A-Added, C-Changed

*** End of Report ***

Order Weights Overridden Report

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

17. COUNTER SALES PROCEDURES

OVERVIEW

The Counter Sales procedures are designed to handle situations involving sales counter or cash and carry

orders, where material is paid for and picked up immediately. The Counter Sales procedures use

eSTELquote for streamlined entry. Quotes can then be converted to Sales Orders at which point the

Payment Method is defined. The Payment Method determines if payment is to be collected by a cashier

or if an invoice is to be sent.

Major features of this function include:

Support for walk in customers that currently do not have an account number

Streamlined entry of orders using eSTELquote entry

Choice of a Payment Method and Delivery Method for each Order

Automatic credit approval for Cash Sales

Automatic printing of Work Orders where advanced staging is required

A Cashier Payment program that allows customers to pay using various tenders and be refunded when

required

Automatic printing of Pick Tickets in the product warehouse locations

Automatic printing of a Counter Receipt form

Controlled access to the Change Order function

A Return Material Authorization function integrated with the Counter Sales process

Automatic generation of a Bill of Lading when required

Automatic printing of a Cash Register Journal to reconcile the cashier’s activity

Invoicing and General Ledger interface

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 408

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

GENERAL INFORMATION

Prerequisite

The Cash Product Installation Option, CSH=X, must be set on the Sales Order Entry program <orpord>.

NOTE: The Product Installation Options are set by Branch in the PIO table. They are applied based on

the Branch stored in the Login ID of the user.

A site could have one Branch using the Counter Sales module, and other Branches using the

regular Order Entry procedure. In this situation, if orders are processed by a corporate Sales and

Credit Department, each user entering or checking orders should have and use two Login IDs:

one for the Counter Sales Branch and one for the other Branches.

Reference Table Setup

The following Reference tables must be established for using the Counter Sales procedures:

Location/Delivery Printer oraldv

Cash Payment Method Type scapmt

Some of the fields of the following Reference tables are used differently or specifically for the Counter

Sales procedures:

Branch Options table scabop

It assigns a Counter Receipt Printer and a Pick List Printer to each Branch.

Manager Options table scaboc

It is used to record an alternate Counter Receipt Printer for on Account Orders, i.e., Orders with non-cash

Terms.

Terms scatrm

It assigns a Cash Type to each Payment Term.

Customer Information aracus

In the Counter Sales procedures, the Cash Acct field defines a Miscellaneous Customer.

Refer to the Reference manual for more details.

Delivery Methods

The Counter Sales procedures use the standard ‘OT-Our Truck’, ‘CC-Common Carrier’ and ‘CP-

Customer Pick-up’ Delivery Methods. In addition, the following features are provided:

The CP Delivery Method triggers the automatic creation of an Invoice Entry and the printing of the

Counter Receipt and Pick Ticket forms.

A ‘CB-Common Carrier with Auto Bill of Lading creation’ Delivery Method has been specifically

designed for the Counter Sales, to speed up the shipping process. It is used for example when orders

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 409

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

are placed over the phone or Internet and the material is sent via courier or by parcel post. This CB

Delivery Method triggers the automatic generation of an S-Ship Bill of Lading (Summary type) and

the printing of Pick Tickets.

The table below recapitulates the forms that are automatically generated and printed based on the order’s

Delivery Method.

Delivery Method Legend:

– Automatic Generation and/or Printing

Space – Not Generated, not Printed

CP-Customer Pick-

up

CB- Common

Carrier w/ Auto

BL creation

OT-Our Truck

CC-Common

Carrier

Work Order (If required)

(If required)

(If required)

Counter Receipt

Pick Ticket

S-Ship Bill of Lading (Summary

type)

(Generated but

not Printed)

Payment Terms Validation

During the Quote to Sales Order conversion, the Term’s Cash type is validated against the Delivery

Method for the Payment Method defined in the Create Order window. The following Cash Type/Delivery

Method combinations are allowed:

For the C-Cash Payment Method:

Delivery Method CP CB CC OT

Cash Type ‘A’ – Cash in Advance

Cash Type ‘D’ – Cash on Delivery

For the A-Account Payment Method:

Delivery Method CP CB CC OT

Cash Type ‘D’ – Cash on Delivery

Cash Type ‘N’ – Non Cash Term

Legend

– Allowed

Space – Not Allowed

Credit and Profit Verification

The Credit Verification is performed based on the order’s Payment Method.

If the Payment Method is C-Cash, the order is automatically credit approved. This occurs when the

Quote is turned into an Order.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 410

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If the Payment Method is A-Account, the Credit Verification occurs when you exit the orders (all

Delivery Methods) or, for the orders whose Delivery Method is CP and CB, when you press the Imm

Ship action bar option.

The Credit Verification is independent from any form printing process.

If the Order is credit held, a warning message is displayed on the screen.

If the Payment Method is changed from C-Cash to A-Account, the Order Header’s Credit Hold flag

originally set to A-Approved, becomes N-Not Credit Checked so as to perform the Credit

Verification. If the Payment Method is changed from A-Account to C–Cash, the Credit Hold flag

becomes ‘A’.

Profit Verification

The Profit Verification is performed if enabled. Like the Credit Verification, it is based on the order’s

Payment Method:

C-Cash Orders are automatically profit released,

A-Account Orders are verified when you press the Imm Ship action bar option or when you exit the

order.

Refer to the Accounts Receivable manual for more details on the Credit and Profit Verifications.

Reservation Verification

A check is performed to prevent an Order from being released when one of its Items has no Specific or

non-specific Reservations. When you press the Imm Ship action bar option the error message "No

Reservations for XXX-999999-999. Cannot Immediate Ship” is displayed indicating the items that need to

be reviewed.

Restriction

This check only applies to Orders that are released from the Order Entry program. No verification is

performed when:

A Cash Order is modified using the Counter Sales Change Order function

An Order on Account is ‘immediate shipped’ in the Credit Release function

Workflow Messages

If the Workflow functions are enabled, various workflow messages are emitted during the Order Entry

Cycle. Refer to the ‘Workflow Management’ chapter of the eSTEL/SCOPE manual for details.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 411

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

SUMMARY OF OPTIONS

The Counter Sales procedures allow for a multitude of payment options and delivery method

combinations. The options are detailed below:

Miscellaneous Customer: Always a Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up

A customer without a Customer Account number walks in the store to purchase material. In this

situation, the material must be paid for right away and picked up in person. In eSTELPLAN, this

translates into an Order for a ‘Miscellaneous’ Customer with a Cash Payment Term and a CP Delivery

Method. The order fulfillment process is as follows:

The salesperson enters a Quote.

The Quote is accepted and converted to an Order.

The Order is ‘Immediate Shipped’, which creates an entry in the Cashier Payment Queue.

The customer proceeds to the cashier and pays for the material. This generates the printing of a

Counter Receipt at the sales counter and Pick Tickets in the warehouse(s).

The customer is given the Counter Receipt. He proceeds to the warehouse to pick up the material.

The Counter Receipt is compared to the Pick Tickets. The material is picked and loaded onto the

customer vehicle. The customer leaves the warehouse.

Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up

A ‘regular’ customer, i.e. a customer with an Account number, walks in to purchase material that he pays

for right away and picks up. In this situation, the order fulfillment process is the same as above except

that the Order is made for the Customer Account number instead of a Miscellaneous Customer.

Cash Order with Material Delivered

A ‘regular’ customer purchases material that he pays for right away and has delivered. An Order is

entered with a Cash Payment Term and a CB Delivery Method:

The salesperson enters a Quote.

The Quote is accepted and converted to an Order.

The Order is ‘Immediate Shipped’, which creates an entry in the Cashier Payment Queue.

The customer proceeds to the cashier and pays for the material (the Order can also be paid for over

the phone or Internet). The payment triggers the creation of a Ship Bill of Lading and the printing of

Pick Tickets in the warehouse(s).

The Bill of Lading is printed. The material is picked and delivered as per the normal shipping

procedures.

If the CC or OT Delivery Methods are used instead of CB, the order fulfillment process is the same

except that no Bill of Lading is automatically generated, and no Pick Ticket is printed.

Account Order with Customer Pick-Up

A customer walks in to purchase material that he picks up but pays for on his account. An Order is

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 412

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

entered with non-Cash Payment Term and a CP Delivery Method:

The salesperson enters a Quote.

The Quote is accepted and converted to an Order.

The Order is ‘Immediate Shipped’, which triggers online Credit Verification.

The Credit Release generates the printing of a Counter Receipt at the sales counter and Pick Tickets

in the warehouse(s).

The customer is given the Counter Receipt. He proceeds to the warehouse to pick up the material.

The Counter Receipt is compared to the Pick Tickets. The material is picked and loaded onto the

customer vehicle. The customer leaves the warehouse.

An Invoice is later sent out by mail as per the normal invoicing procedures.

Account Order with Material Delivered

A customer purchases material that he gets delivered and paid for on his account. An Order is entered

with non-Cash Payment Term and a CB Delivery Method:

The salesperson enters a Quote.

The Quote is accepted and converted to an Order.

The Order is ‘Immediate Shipped’, which triggers online Credit Verification.

The Credit Release generates the creation of a Ship Bill of Lading and the printing of Pick Tickets in

the warehouse(s).

The Bill of Lading is printed. The material is picked and delivered as per the normal shipping

procedures.

An Invoice is later sent out by mail as per the normal invoicing procedures.

If the CC or OT Delivery Methods are used instead of CB, the Order doesn’t get ‘Immediate Shipped’. It

goes through the normal eSTELPLAN Credit Verification and order processing functions.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 413

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ADDING AN ORDER THROUGH THE COUNTER SALES PROCESS

In the streamlined Counter Sales procedures, orders are initially entered through the Quote Entry function.

Quote Entry

Quotes are entered as per the regular Quote Entry procedure. Refer to the eSTELquote manual for more

details.

Converting a Quote to Sales Order

When a quote is converted to an order, the Create Order window is displayed as per the regular Quote to

Sales Order conversion. Refer to the ‘Creating a Sales Order’ chapter of the eSTELquote manual for

more details. Access to the Trm and PmtMthd fields is controlled by the CSH=Y Product Installation

Option. The PmtMthd field determines if payment is to be made at a cashier or if an invoice is to be sent

out.

Create Order Brh HOU QT 96286

Slc Itm Br * Ord Sel Brh HOU

Sold-to 38274 COVERT DIANE

Ship-to 1

Type N Sts Trm 99 PmtMthd C

Cus PO No

Release No

Due Date 09/29/05 Wrk Ord Dt 09/29/05

Promise Dt IS 111 OS HSE

Create Order window

Field Name Default Validation Description

Payment Method C – for

Cash

Payment

Terms

A – For

Account

Payment

Terms

C or A

Validated

against

the Cash

Type in

the

Payment

Terms

table

Determines the type of Counter Sales, i.e.,

whether the Order is being paid for in Cash or if

it is to be added to the Customer’s Account.

Options are:

A Account. The Order is invoiced at a later

time. The invoice is added to the Customer’s

Receivable.

C Cash. The Order is sent to the Cashier

Payment Queue and immediately paid at the Cash

Register.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 414

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Counter Sales Order Header

Once you have created the Order, you can review it before processing it. The CSH=X Product

Installation Option, in conjunction with the Payment Method and Delivery Method, determines the

display of the Imm Ship action bar option.

Type N Sales Order Header SO No HOU- 6532

Sold-to 33701 Ship-to 1

TEXAS GAMMA RAY JANE 281-487-8300

TEXAS GAMMA RAY

2815 LILAC 2815 LILAC

PASADENA, TX 77503 PASADENA, TX 77503

Slspsn IS-CGL OS-HSE Frt Resp WC CPU Dlv Mth CP

Pymt Trm 2 Mth A Cry Frt Charge /

Status Due Date 10/08/04 Frt Cost /

Prn Hold N Order Date 10/08/04 Vendor

Ship Hold N Wrk Ord Dt 10/08/04 Ship Via

Cr Hold A- Promise Dt Route-Stop -

Ship Brh HOU Whs HPR FOB Pt

Cus PO No Tx Rgn Apl License No

Release No JANE 1 TX1 A

Job Number 2 TXHO A

Sales Cat RS Source 3 TXHOMT A

Bko Alwd N Metric N Mail Y 4 NT4 E

Test Cert Chem N Phy N Typ O Shp Inv Frm Prt N Ack Prt N UD

1-Itms 2-Chg Hdr 3-Hdr Rmks 4-Freight 5-Recost 6-Totals 7-Fax/Eml 8-Imm Ship

Order Header when CSH=Y

Action Bar Action

Imm Ship The action bar option is displayed when the CSH Product Installation Option is set to

Y-Yes on the Order Entry program and:

The Order is a Cash Order, i.e., the Payment Method is C-Cash OR

The Order is on Account (Payment Method A) and the Delivery Method is CP-Customer

Pick-Up or CB-Common Carrier w/ Auto BL.

When you select the Imm Ship action bar option,

Cash Orders are sent to the Cashier Payment Queue. The message “Order has been

placed in the Payment Queue. Please proceed to the Cashier” is displayed.

Orders on Account are processed:

o Credit Verification is performed,

o If the Order is credit approved and the Delivery Method is CP, an Invoice

Entry is generated and the Counter Receipt and Pick Tickets are automatically

printed.

o If the Order is credit approved and the Delivery Method is CB, a Cash Receipt

transaction is posted to the General Ledger, a BL is generated and the Pick

Tickets are automatically printed.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 415

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Order Header and Item Status Update

The Product Installation Option SST=XXX set on the Bill of Lading Entry program is used to default a

Status to the Order Header and Items at the time of shipment. This SST option, only available for the

Counter Sales procedures, works in conjunction with the existing STS=X Product Installation Options.

When STS=Y and SST are set to a valid Status, the Order Header/Items and BL Header Status are

updated as follows:

For the Orders whose Delivery Method is CP, the Order Header and Item Status are automatically

updated to the Status set in SST when the Order is ‘Immediate Shipped’.

For all other Orders, the Order Header/Items and BL Header Status are automatically updated to the

Status set in SST when a Ship Bill of Lading is created. This occurs independently of how the BL is

generated (manually, automatically when the order’s Delivery Method is CB, through the BL

Gateway or the Auto BL Generation program).

Back Orders

Back Orders are not allowed for Cash Orders. If the order’s Payment Method is C-Cash, you must set the

Order Header Bko Alwd field to N-No, otherwise you get the “Back Order not allowed for Cash Sales”

error message.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 416

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CASHIER PAYMENT PROCESSING

The Cashier Payment function is mostly used to process payments on orders that are considered Cash

Payments. It allows customers to pay using various tenders.

It is also designed to process customers’ credits against orders paid at the counter. These credits are

granted when the quantity on a Cash Order is reduced after the customer has paid the original order

amount or when he returns some material at a later date. Refer to the ‘Changing a Sales Order’ and

‘Return Material Authorization’ sections of this chapter for more information.

Finally, the Cashier Payment program is used to make advance payments when customers ‘walk in’ and

make payments towards their accounts.

These functions are performed using the action bar options available in the Cash Register Unpaid screen.

Cash Register Unpaid Orders

The Cash Register Unpaid screen lists all the transactions that were placed to the Payment Queue from

either:

the Quote or Order Entry,

the Counter Sales Change Order, or

the Return Material Authorization Entry

These transactions need to be paid by the customers or, in case of credits, reimbursed to them by the

cashier.

Cash Register

Login ID Janea Unpaid Brh HOU

Customer Name Reference Slp Balance Cr Ctl

________________________________________________________________________________

PERKINS WELDING SERVICES SO-96793 JAN 757.75 OK

PHOENIX PLASTICS SO-96790 GAR 112.00 AL

WELTON SALES SO-96792 TOM 5842.00 OK

DIA METAL IE-138286 GAR 130.08 CR GT

AUTO PARTS INC SO-96794 TOM 322.15 OK

CARROS INC NE-17852 TOM 650.40 CR OK

1-Pay/Refund 2-View Paid 3-Pay On Acct 4-Close 5-Total 6-Refresh

Cashier Register Unpaid screen

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 417

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Field Name Default Validation Description

Login ID User Login ID The Cash Register User. Corresponds to the UNIX

Login ID.

Brh User’s

Branch

Branch

Reference

The Cash Register Branch.

Customer Name Order

Defaults

or Invoice

Entry

Defaults

Customer

Info

The name of the Customer to whom material has been

sold or a credit is owed.

Reference The reference of the order to be paid or the

credit to be reimbursed.

Options for the reference prefix are:

SO Unpaid Order.

NE Credit Note. The Credit Note is created

when a Return Material Authorization (RMA)

is released against a Cash Order. Refer to

the ‘Return Material Authorization’ section

of this chapter for more details.

IE Invoice Entry. The ‘Invoice Entry’ is also

a credit against a Cash Order. It is

created when the Order is modified through

the Counter Sales Change Order function.

Refer to the ‘Changing a Sales Order’

section of this chapter for more details.

The transaction number next to the prefix is the

Control number assigned by the system in the Order

Entry, RMA Entry or Counter Sales Change Order

function.

Slp Order

Defaults

Slsperson

Reference

The Salesperson who has taken the order.

Balance Order

Defaults

or Invoice

Entry

Defaults

The Order amount to be paid or the Credit amount

to be reimbursed.

‘CR’ for ‘Credit’ is displayed next to the Balance

field when the reference is a refund, i.e., has an

IE or a NE prefix.

Cr Ctl Customer

Info

Credit

Authority

Reference

The Credit Authority code from the Customer

Information table.

The transactions are sorted in the sequence they were sent to the Cashier Payment Queue; the last sent

being displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Action Bar Action

Pay/Refund Calls the Cash Register Payment or Cash Register Refund windows. They allow you to

process a payment or a refund for the selected Order.

View Paid Allows you to view the orders that have been paid or refunded on all cashiers.

Pay On Acct Calls the Cash Register Advance Payment window. It is used to process a cash payment

made by a customer toward his account.

Close Closes the Cash Register. This automatically generates and prints a Cash Register

Journal. Refer to the ‘Cash Register Journal’ section of this chapter for more

details.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 418

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Action Bar Action

Total Calls the Total window. It shows an online total of the current cashier contents,

sorted by Payment Method Type.

Refresh Forces a screen refresh. The screen automatically refreshes every 30 seconds.

Cash Register Payment

When you highlight an unpaid Order and press <Enter> or select the Pay/Refund action bar option, the

Cash Register Payment window is displayed. It allows you to process the payment for this order.

Cash Register

Payment

Cus: PERKINS WELDING SERVICES

Order No: HOU- 96793 Amt: 757.75

Bal: 57.75

Seq Payment Method Payment

________________________________________________

1 MASTER CARD 500.00

2 VISA 200.00

Cash Register Payment window

The cursor is positioned at the Method field allowing you to enter the Payment Method, i.e., cash, Visa,

etc., then the amount the customer pays with this tender. A Payment Method Look-Up is available and up

to 8 different Payment Methods can be used to pay each order.

A sequence number is assigned by the system for each Payment Method. To modify the amount paid

with one Payment Method, press <Esc> back to the Seq field and enter the corresponding sequence

number. When the line is displayed at the bottom of the window, you may change the amount.

A declining Balance field displays the amount left to pay against the order. After the Balance is zero,

press <F1> to accept the payment and return to the Cash Register Unpaid screen. When you accept the

payment, the Cash Register Payment program performs the following functions:

For C-Cash Orders with Customer Pick-up

It automatically prints the Counter Receipt and Pick Tickets on the designated printers.

It creates an Invoice Entry.

It moves the Order to the Cash Register Paid screen.

It flags the Order as A-Automatically Completed.

For C-Cash Orders with Material Delivered

It automatically prints Pick Tickets on the designated printers and generates a Ship Bill of Lading

when the order’s Delivery Method is CB.

It creates a Cash Receipt Entry and calls the Cash Update function.

It moves the Order to the Cash Register Paid screen.

Seq: 0 Method: Amt: 57.75

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 419

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

It flags the Order as A-Automatically Completed.

Refer to the ‘Form Printing’ and ‘Invoice and General Ledger Update’ sections of this chapter for more

details.

Cash Register Refund

When you highlight a credit, i.e., an IE or NE transaction, and press <Enter> or select the Pay/Refund

action bar option, the Cash Register Refund and Original Payments windows are displayed.

The Cash Register Refund allows you to reimburse the customer for the credit. Both the Payment Method

and the Credit amount default and may be overwritten. The Payment Method defaults to the first method

that was used to pay the order. A refund is processed as a payment. Refer to the ‘Cash Register

Payment’ section for more details.

Cash Register

Refund

Cus: DIA METAL

Ref: IE-138286 Amt: 130.08-

Bal: 130.08-

Seq Payment Method Payment

________________________________________________

The Original Payments window indicates the original amount of the order and how it was paid. It is used

to display the Payment Method on the Cash Register Refund window. Note that the original amount is

NOT reduced by the credits done against the order and reimbursed to the customer.

Example: An order is entered for 10 pieces of material worth 100$. As there are only 8 pieces left in

the warehouse, the customer returns to the sales counter and the salesperson decreases the

quantity of the order to 8 pieces through the Counter Sales Change Order function. A 20$

credit is reimbursed to the customer in the Cash Register Refund window. The following

day, the customer returns 3 pieces. A Return Material Authorization is printed and a 30$

credit is placed on the Cashier Payment Queue. When the cashier refunds this second credit,

the total in the Original Payments window still shows 100$.

Seq: 0 Method: MC Amt: 130.08

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 420

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

O r I g i n a l

P a y m e n t s

Order: 96820

Mth Payment

__________________

MC 600.00

C 50.40

Tot: 650.40

Original Payments

Paid Orders

If you select the View Paid action bar option, the Cash Register Paid screen is displayed. It lists the

orders that were paid by the customers and the credits that were reimbursed to them on all cashiers. The

transactions are sorted in the sequence they were originally sent to the Payment Queue. The <Page

Down>, <Page Up>, <F2> and <Shift F2> keys are available to scroll through the transactions if there is

more than one page.

Cash Register

Paid

Customer Name Reference Slp Amount Paid Cashier

_______________________________________________________________________________

TIGS UNLIMITED, INC. SO-96812 JAN 189.57 sss1

PHOENIX PLASTICS IE-138162 GAR 112.00 CR sss1

PERKINS WELDING SERVICES SO-96793 TOM 757.75 sss2

DIA METAL SO-96790 GAR 1300.80 sss1

DIA METAL SO-96788 GAR 1300.80 sss2

AUTO PARTS INC SO-96601 GAR 148.80 sss2

AUTO PARTS INC NE-138030 GAR 148.80 CR sss1

WELTON SALES SO-96773 JAN 1196.91 sss1

DIA METAL SO-96771 TOM 975.60 sss2

R.T.M. SO-96767 GAR 650.40 sss1

Cash Register Paid screen

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 421

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

You may view how a payment was made when you press <Enter> on a highlighted transaction:

Payment Details

Ref: SO-96793

Seq Payment Method Payment

__________________________________________________

1 MASTER CARD 500.00

2 VISA 200.00

3 CASH 57.75

Payment Details window

Cash Register Advance Payment

If you select the Pay On Acct action bar option, the Cash Register Advance Payment window is

displayed. You enter the Customer number then proceed as for a payment on an order. Refer to the

‘Cash Register Payment’ section for more details.

The entry created in the Cash Register Paid screen has no ‘Reference’. It needs to be manually reconciled

towards the open receivables of the customer who made the advance payment.

Cash Register

Advance Payment

Cus: 2125

ABC AIR CO

Tot Paid: 500.00

Seq Payment Method Payment

________________________________________________

1 CHECK 500.00

Cash Register Advance Payment window

Seq: 0 Method: Amt: 0.00

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 422

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Cashier Total

If you select the Total action bar option, the current content of the cashier is displayed for each Payment

Method Type:

Total

Cashier: sss

Cash 8190.31

Debit Card 0.00

Check 0.00

Credit Card 700.00

Total ....... 8890.31

Total window

Deleting an Order on the Cashier Payment Queue

The deletion function is controlled by the User Menu Option ‘d’ on the Cash Register program

<orppmq>. This allows you to restrict access to authorized personnel only.

In the Cash Register Unpaid screen, you can only delete an unpaid order. The “Cannot delete order

refund or customer return” error message is displayed if you try to delete a credit. To delete an unpaid

order, highlight it and press <F6>. Messages appear requesting confirmation. If you select Y-Yes, the

order is removed from the Cash Register Unpaid screen and flagged as M-Manually deleted.

In the Cash Register Paid screen, the <F6> key only allows you to delete an advance payment toward an

account.

Cashier Payment Queue Cleanup

A Cashier Payment Queue Cleanup selectively deletes paid transactions in the Cash Register based on the

number of days, specified in the DAY=999 Product Installation Option, since the transaction was paid.

The cleanup is part of the End of Day procedure.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 423

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CHANGING A SALES ORDER

A Change Order function is available for the Counter Sales process. This function allows for secure

access to the orders by the sales counter personnel where only the following changes are permitted:

Change the Invoice Hold code and the Ordered/Shipped Dates on the Header.

Reduce the Item Quantity ordered (up to zero).

Review/Re-default the Item Reservations.

Modify, Add or Delete a Charge on the Item.

Procedurally, the Change Order function should only be used when the order is modified before the

customer leaves the warehouse. If the order needs to be modified later, then a Return Material

Authorization (RMA) is issued. Refer to the ‘Return Material Authorization’ section of this chapter for

more details.

In order to modify an existing order, a Sales Order number is entered. The Change Order program then

automatically links the order to the associated Invoice Entry where only the functions described above are

available.

If the order is a Cash Order, the “Order has been placed in the Payment Queue. Please proceed to the

Cashier” message is displayed when you exit the Change Order function. A credit entry is added to the

Cash Register Unpaid screen for the difference between the original amount paid and the amount

corresponding to the real quantity picked up by the customer. The prefix for this credit is ‘IE’, as the

Change Order function internally modifies the Invoice Entry created when the order was paid.

If the order is an Order on Account, the original Invoice Entry is modified to reflect the real quantity

picked up by the customer and a new Counter Receipt is printed when you exit the Change Order

function.

Example: An order is entered for 10 bar angles. The customer pays for the material at the cash and

then proceeds to the warehouse for pickup. At the warehouse, the customer decides that only

8 pieces are required:

The amount ‘picked’ is indicated on the Pick Ticket and given to the customer to return

to the salesperson.

The salesperson initiates a Change Order, where the quantity is reduced from 10 to 8

A new entry in the Cashier Payment Queue is created for a credit of 2 pieces.

The credit is given to the customer along with a new Counter Receipt.

Restrictions

The Change Order function is only available for orders which corresponding invoice entries have not

been updated; otherwise a RMA must be generated.

Using this function,

you can only reduce the quantity ordered. If more material is required, a new order should be created.

you can modify, add or delete a charge but the new order total amount cannot exceed the value of the

original order amount.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 424

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Counter Sales Change Order Screens

COUNTER SALES PROCESSING

Sales Order No PHI- 0

Counter Sales Change Order Entry screen

Type S Order Processing - Header Entry No PHI-138180

SO No PHI 96473 Session ID 10924

Sold-to 9999 Walk-In Customer

Bill-to 9999 Ship-to 1

Walk-In Customer **** CASH SALE-TAXABLE ****

**** CASH SALE **** **** CASH SALE ****

******************* *******************

HOUSTON TX 77026-0000 HOUSTON TX 77026-0000

Slspsn IS-111 OS-HSE Frt Resp WC CPU Dlv Mth CP

Pymt Trm 93 Cry Frt Charge /

Ship Brh HOU Whs HPR Frt Cost /

Inv Hold N Ordered Dt 10/26/05 Vendor

Shipped Dt 10/26/05 Ship Via 530U

Rtr/Ad Rsn Ref Route-Stop -

FOB Pt

Cus PO No Probill No

Release No Tx Rgn Apl License No

Job Number 1 TX1 A

Sales Cat RS Source 2 TXHO A

Bko Alwd N Metric N Mail Y 3 TXHOMT A

Test Cert Chem N Phy N Typ O Shp Inv 4 NT4 E

1-Items 2-Chg Hdr 3-Freight 4-Recost 5-Inv Tot

Change Order Screen – Header

The Freight action bar option is dimmed. When you select the Chg Hdr option, you can only modify the

Invoice Hold code and the Ordered and Shipped Dates.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 425

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Type S CASH SALE-TAXED Order Processing - Item Entry No PHI-138180- 1

Order Item PHI 96473- 1

Cus Part Specs: 9999-

Group SX SQUARE TUBING

Size 4083 4 X 4 X 14 GA. X 25'

Grade Width Length 25' " Ga

Shipped 2 PCS Qty 50 ' Wgt 221 LBS

Sls Cat/Typ RS-1 Chg Qty Typ T

Ch Description PWC Rate UM Typ Quantity Amount

1 MATERIAL 310.0000 CFT E 50 ' 155.00

1 *** Net Material *** 310.0000 CFT I 50 ' 155.00

Taxes 12.79 Total 167.79

Ship Brh HOU Whs HPR Source Stk/NST S Upd Usg Y Commission

Ship Dt 10/26/05 Rsn Orig Due Dt 10/26/05 Cur Due Dt 10/26/05 Days Late

1-Res 2-Chg Itm 3-Rmks 4-Dir Ship 5-Cost 6-Hdr 7-Totals 8-Ord Res

Change Order Screen – Item

The Rmks and Dir Ship action bar options are dimmed. When you select the Chg Itm option, you can

only reduce the Pieces, Weight and Quantity on order and modify the Charges.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 426

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION

The Return Material Authorization (RMA) function has been integrated with the Counter Sales

procedures. The RMA is an authorization prepared by the sales counter personnel when a customer

returns some material or when he advises you that some material will be returned by a carrier. It is

converted into a Credit Note entry when you select the Release action bar option from the Return Request

Header screen.

If the order is a Cash Order, the ‘Order has been placed in the Payment Queue. Please proceed to the

Cashier’ message is displayed when you release the RMA. A credit entry is added to the Cash Register

Unpaid screen for the amount of the RMA. The prefix for this credit is ‘NE’, as the Release action bar

option internally converts the RMA into a Credit Note.

If the order is on Account, the RMA is converted into a Credit Note when you release it.

Refer to the ‘Credit Notes’ chapter of the Invoicing manual for more details on the Return Material

Authorization.

Example: An order is entered for 10 bar angles. The customer pays at the cash, picks up the material at

the warehouse and leaves. A few days later, he returns 3 pieces.

The salesperson creates a RMA for 3 pieces and prints the form.

The customer returns the material to the warehouse. The material is inspected, re-stocked and the

RMA form is approved.

The customer returns to the salesperson and the salesperson releases the RMA.

A new entry in the Cashier Payment Queue is created for a credit of 3 pieces.

The credit is given to the customer along with a Counter Receipt that indicates ‘Customer Return’.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 427

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

FORM PRINTING

The following forms are available for the Counter Sales procedures:

The Counter Receipt contains the order information. It is printed at the sales counter and given to

the customer.

The Pick Ticket lists the products and quantities ordered. It is printed based on the location of the

material in the warehouse. It is used to pick up the material and load it onto the customer vehicle.

The Work Order is used when advance staging or processing is required for the order. In both

situations, automated printing is available through specific Product Installation Options.

The Counter Receipt and Pick Ticket forms are only available when the CSH Product Installation Option

is set to Y-Yes.

Counter Receipt (orfcrp)

The Counter Receipt is only generated for the orders which Delivery Method is CP. It contains the order

information regarding the products, quantities and prices. It is used as a proof of purchase and an invoice.

For Cash Orders, it indicates the Payment Methods used to pay the order. Two copies are automatically

printed, one is given to the customer and the second one is used as an office control copy.

For C-Cash Orders

Original printing of the Counter Receipt occurs when the payment is completed in the Cash Payment

Queue. The title of the form is ‘Receipt’.

If the order is modified using the Change Order function, a ‘Receipt – Reprint’ form is printed when

the credit is reimbursed to the customer in the Cash Refund screen.

If a Return Material Authorization is issued for the order, a ‘Customer Return’ form is printed when

the credit is reimbursed to the customer in the Cash Refund screen.

Copies of the Counter Receipt are printed on the Counter Receipt printer defined in the Branch

Options table.

For A-Account Orders

Original printing of the Counter Receipt occurs upon Credit Release when you press the Imm Ship

action bar option in the Order Header. If the order goes on credit hold, you can print the Counter

Receipt from the Credit Release by answering Y-Yes to the “Do you want to Immediate Ship the

Order” question.

If the order is modified using the Change Order function, a ‘Receipt – Reprint’ form is printed when

you exit the Order Processing Header screen.

No Counter Receipt is printed if a RMA is issued for the order. The Counter Receipt Print/Re-print

function is available if a ‘Customer Return’ form is required.

Copies of the Counter Receipt are printed on the Counter Receipt printer defined in the Manager

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 428

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Options table. If no printer is defined in this table or the table doesn't exist, the default Counter

Receipt printer from the Branch Options table is used.

Product Installation Options for the Counter Receipt

VAL=X Controls the printing of the order amount information.

PWB=X Enables you to print the Material Charge and Unit of Measure as well as an equivalent

Charge and Unit of Measure for the material charge code 1 entered on the item. The

equivalent charge is based on either Measure or Weight.

PRM=X Controls the printing of the Measure for each Product Item shipped regardless of the Item

Charge Unit of Measure.

PPR=X Controls the printing of the Item Production Remarks.

FRM=X Controls the printing of the name and address information.

SLP=X Allows you to select the Salesperson name to be printed on the form.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Standard Messages

Standard message remark lines can be printed on the Counter Receipt. The following Standard Message

Types are used:

CRH Counter Receipt Header remarks

CRD Counter Receipt Detail remarks

CRS Counter Receipt Summary remarks

Counter Receipt Printing/Reprinting

These selections are used to print or reprint the Counter Receipt if a batch printing to a specific printer is

required.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 429

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Counter Receipt

Report Program: ORFCRP

1. Selection Entry No.. 157435

2. Original/Reprint.... [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Receipt Type........ [O]

5. Range Table......... [R]

Reference Nos....... From: To:999999

Table of Ref Nos....

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Counter Receipt – selection screen

Receipt Type ............................. [_] XXX

Allows you to print or re-print the Counter Receipt for specific transactions only.

Options are:

O - Order (Default). Counter Receipts are printed/re-printed for selected orders.

R - RMA. Counter Receipts are printed/re-printed for selected RMA.

Refer to the ‘Selection Entries’ chapter for details on the other selections.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 430

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Form Sample

R E C E I P T No: PHI WS-689

Sold By: Pickup Date 05Oct04

eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH CUSTOMER COPY

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1050) Ship To: (000)

PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY PHILADELPHIA STEEL SUPPLY

242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 242134 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021

Trm 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS Pmt A Ord 05Aug99 Due 08Aug99 asap

Frt Prepaid Via OUR TRUCK FOB PREPAID TO DEST

Con JEAN LAMBERT PO/Rel 10003/12

Slp JOHN NELLING Tel 215 233 2324 Fax 215 792 9760

DANA BLACK

================================================================================

SO No PHI WS-689 IE No IE PHI-011234

Test Certs: Chem Y Phys Y 1 Separate copies with shipment, 0 with Invoice

Counter Receipt Header – Standard Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cold Rolled Steel Coil Commercial Quality 1 PCS 5,000 LBS

.0478 Nom X 48.0000"

Extended Description

Part No CRC18

Description Remarks

Invoicing Remarks

Production Remarks

MATERIAL 5,000 LBS @ 25.0000 CWT 1,250.00

PROCESSING 5,000 LBS @ 1.0000 CWT 50.00

Counter Receipt Detail – Standard Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Bar Angle ASTM A36 10 PCS 638 LBS

2" x 2" x ¼" X 20' Description Remarks

MATERIAL 638 LBS @ 24.0000 CWT 153.12

Counter Receipt Detail – Standard Remarks

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Order Totals: 2 Items 5,638 LBS

********************************************************************************

Material Processing Freight Other Taxes ORDER AMT

1,403.12 50.00 12.50 1,465.62

********************************************************************************

Taxes: PAPH 12.50

VISA 1,400.00

CASH 65.62

Counter Receipt Summary – Standard Remarks

Page: 1 .... Last

Counter Receipt – Customer Copy

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 431

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Pick Ticket (orfpkt)

The Pick Ticket is only generated for the orders which Delivery Method is CP or CB. It indicates the

order number and lists the products and quantities ordered. It is used to pick up the material in the

various warehouses and load it onto the customer or carrier vehicle. When the order’s Delivery Method is

CB, the BL number of the automatically created Bill of Lading is printed on the form.

For C-Cash Orders

The Pick Ticket automatically prints when the payment is made in the Cashier Payment Queue.

For A-Account Orders

The Pick Ticket automatically prints upon Credit Release when you press the Imm Ship action bar option

in the Order Header. If the order goes on credit hold, you can print the Pick Ticket from the Credit

Release by answering Y-Yes to the “Do you want to Immediate Ship the Order” question.

Printer Assignment

The Pick Ticket is printed based on the location of the material in the warehouse. For each Order Item, a

Pick Ticket printer is assigned as follows:

The ‘Default Location’ in the Standard Location table is determined based on the product item. If no

Standard Location record is found or no ‘Default Location’ is defined in the Standard Location record

for this product, the Pick List printer in the Branch Options table is used.

If a ‘Default Location’ is found, the Location/Delivery Method table is verified for the item Shipping

Warehouse, Default Location and order’s Delivery Method combination. If a match is found, the

printer defined in this record is used. Otherwise, the Pick List printer in the Branch Options table is

used.

One Pick Ticket is generated for each printer assigned. Therefore, you can have several items of the same

order displayed on one Pick Ticket and several Pick Tickets printed for one single order. You cannot

however have multiple orders on one Pick Ticket. To help you reconcile the various lists associated with

one order, the ‘Pick List 99 of 99’ remark is printed on each Pick Ticket.

Product Installation Options for the Pick Ticket

RHR=X Controls the printing of the Header Remarks on every page of the Pick Ticket.

PSR=X Controls the printing of the Shipping Remarks.

RNG=X Controls the printing of the decimal gauge and gauge range.

PIP=X Controls the printing of the Group, Size, Grade and Dimensions of the Incoming Product.

PIW=X Controls the printing of Inventory Reservation information.

CON=X Controls the printing of the Contact Information.

SLP=X Used to specify which Salesperson name is to be printed on the form.

FRM=X Controls the printing of the name and address information.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 432

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Standard Messages

Standard message remark lines can be printed on the Pick Ticket. The following Standard Message Types

are used:

PKH Pick Ticket Header remarks

PKD Pick Ticket Detail remarks

PKS Pick Ticket Summary remarks

Pick Ticket Printing/Reprinting

These selections are used to print or reprint the Pick Ticket if a batch printing to a specific printer is

required.

Picking Ticket

Report Program: ORFPKT

1. Selection Entry No.. 157068

2. Original/Reprint.... [O]

3. Selling Branch...... [Y] PHI

4. Order Type.......... [N] N R T

5. Range Table......... [R]

Order Number........ From: To: 999999

Table of Order Nos..

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Pick Ticket – selection screen

Refer to the ‘Selection Entries’ chapter for details on the selections.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 433

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Form Sample

06Aug99 10:32 P I C K T I C K E T No: PHI WS-97194

Sold By: Ship From:

ESTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007 PHILADELPHIA, PA 19007

Tel: 215-325-0301 Fax: 215-356-4320

Sold To: ( 1010) Ship To: (001)

ACME FABRICATION INC ACME FABRICATION

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 1254 ROUTE 1

PHILADELPHIA, PA 19021 NEWTOWN SQUARE, PA 19073

Tel: 215 142 5145 Fax: 797 792 9760

Trm Net 10 days Ord 24Jul99 Due 08Aug99 asap Rt 142-002

Frt Charge Via ABC FREIGHT FOB Destination

Slp JOHN NELLING PO/Rel 10003/12

STEVE HENDERSON Job 5792

Con LUKE STEVENS M Tel 281-872-1106 Fax

================================================================================

BL No:PHI 3773 P I C K L I S T SO No PHI WS-97194

Header Notes ____________

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 SQUARE TUBING >> 5 PCS << 530 LBS

4 X 4 X 14 GA. X 24' 120 FT

Extended Description - 4 X 4 X 14 GA.

PSQ 1

Pull __________

Check __________

Header Notes ____________

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 WELDING ROD >> 3 PCS << LBS

ALUMINUM 1/8" WR18AL

Extended Description - ALUMINUM 1/8" WR18AL

PSQ 1

Pull __________

Check __________

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Order Totals: 2 Items 530 LBS

I have received items in good condition __________

Pick List 01 of 01

Page: 1 ....Last

* End of Report: eSTELPLAN *

Pick Ticket

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 434

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Work Order Form

The Work Order form is automatically printed when the following Product Installation Options are set on

the Order Entry Form program:

WCF=XX (Will Call Freight Responsibility) where XX is a valid Freight Responsibility. When the

Freight Responsibility set in this option is the same as the order’s Freight Responsibility, the Work Order

prints upon exiting the Sales Order. The form is used to prepare orders taken on the phone or Internet, so

that the orders are ready when the customer arrives to pay and pick up the material.

PVF=X (Production Verification). When an Order Item has a Processing Charge with a valid Work

Center and the order’s Delivery Method is CP or CB, the Work Order prints upon exiting the Sales Order.

The form is used to schedule and process the material.

The WCF and PVF options are specific to the Counter Sales procedures i.e. the CSH option must be set to

Y-Yes. Both options work independently of the PRT=X and other Work Order form related Product

Installation Options.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 435

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

CASH REGISTER JOURNAL

The Cash Register Journal is printed automatically when the cashier closes the Cash. It can also be

printed/reprinted using the Selection Entry program. The report shows one or all cashiers’ activity since

the last close.

It is primarily used to reconcile the cash collected against the total value of the orders paid and refunded.

It also enables you to review the advance payments toward customer accounts and to apply them against

the customers’ open receivables.

Selection Entry Screen

The report has the following selection screen:

Cash Register Journal

Report Program: ORRCRJ

1. Selection Entry No.. 157069

2. One-Time/Permanent.. [O]

3. Cash Register Branch [Y] PHI

4. Cash Register User.. [Y] ss1

5. Source Type......... [N] A C O R

6. Process Date........ [Y] From:01/31/06 To:02/08/06

7. Detail/Summary...... [D]

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Cash Register Journal Selections screen

Cash Register Branch .............. [_] XXX

Allows you to select one or all Cash Register Branches.

Options are:

N - All Branches are selected.

Y - (Default.) Your User’s Branch is automatically displayed. You can override the Branch

code if you have multi-Branch access.

If you do not have access to other Branches, your User’s Branch is displayed and the field

is skipped.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 436

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Cash Register User .................. [_] XXXXXXXX

Allows you to select one cashier or all cashiers.

Options are:

N - All cashiers are selected.

Y - (Default.) Your Login ID is automatically displayed.

Source Type .............................. [_] X

Used to select the transactions to include in the Journal.

Options are:

A - Advance Payment: payments toward an account.

C - Change Order: credits granted for orders that have been modified.

O - Order: regular counter sales payments.

R - RMA: credits granted for some material returned.

Process Date ............................. [_] From: To:

Allows you to select the transactions based on a range of activity date.

Options are:

N - (Default.) Transactions are selected regardless of their Process Date.

Y - Enter a valid range of dates. Only the transactions processed within the selected range are

printed.

Detail/Summary ...................... [_]

Used to select the format of the report.

Options are:

D - (Default.) Detail

S - Summary

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 437

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Sample

RUN: 08Feb06 16:10 ACME STEEL orrcrj878354 PAGE: 5

Cash Register Journal

Ref No Cus Name Prs Date Time

Tender Amount

Cashier: ss1 Branch: PHI

SO-96812 PIGS UNLIMITED, INC. 02Feb06 : 1057

CASH 189.57

Total : 189.57

SO-96824 1518 AUTO PARTS 07Feb06 : 1046

MASTER CARD 215.50

Total : 215.50

SO-96826 1518 AUTO PARTS 07Feb06 : 1417

VISA 120.00

CASH 23.66

Total : 143.66

SO-96828 AAA WELDING 07Feb06 : 1453

CASH 86.60

Total : 86.60

SO-96844 DIA METAL 07Feb06 : 1655

CASH 148.80

Total : 148.80

SO-96847 DIA METAL 07Feb06 : 1709

CASH 942.40

Total : 942.40

SO-96846 P N S MFG. INC. 07Feb06 : 1709

CASH 1214.00

Total : 1214.00

Total Order Payment: 13605.21

Total By Cashier (ss1 ): 13633.93

Summary By Tender Type:

Cash 12627.15

CASH 12627.15

Debit Card 0.00

Check 0.00

Credit Card 1006.78

AMERICAN EXPRESS 28.72-

MASTER CARD 715.50

VISA 320.00

Total...... 13633.93

* End of Report: ACME STEEL *

Cash Register Journal – Detail report

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 438

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

INVOICE AND GENERAL LEDGER UPDATE

The Counter Sales generate a large number of transactions. The Invoice and General Ledger Update

processes have been adapted to handle this volume of transactions. For each payment and delivery

method combination described in the ‘Summary of Options’ section of this chapter, the processes are

detailed below:

Cash Order with Customer Pick-Up

Invoice Entry Generation and Modification

An Invoice Entry is automatically generated when you pay the order in the Cashier Payment Queue. You

can modify the invoice entry using the Change Order function or the regular Invoice Entry program. In

both situations, the allowed changes are limited. Refer to the ‘Changing a Sales Order’ section of this

chapter for more details.

Invoice Update

The standard Invoice Update program is used. The Payment Method selection option allows you to

segregate the orders that were paid Cash from the orders on Account and update the invoices in batch.

The Invoice Update works as described in the ‘Invoice Update’ chapter of the Invoicing manual, except that

it does not update the Customer Balance and Accounts Receivable Open Items tables. It also creates a

General Ledger transaction for each invoice but distributes the GL accounts differently.

Invoice Printing and Invoice Archiving

The Invoice form is not required as the Counter Receipt is used as a proof of payment.

The Counter Receipt does not get archived, therefore, if archiving is required, the Invoice printing

function must be used with the ARC=X Product Installation Option. The Invoice form does not have to

be physically printed (hard copy generated) but the spooling process must occur. When you generate the

Invoice form spool file and use the Payment Method selection option to segregate the invoices, the spool

file does not get displayed in the CS/IRIS Controller for the Cash Invoices. This prevents Invoice forms

from being printed by mistake.

General Ledger Update

The Cash Receipt function is not used. When the invoice is updated, the Cash account is immediately

debited in the General Ledger. The Cash account used is the Bank G/L Acct of the Bank defined in the

AR Company table.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 439

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

The simplified GL account distribution for a Cash Invoice is as follows:

Debit Credit

Sales and AR portion (1) Cash

(2) Sales (by Charge Code)

(3) Sales Tax

(1) Bank Information table – based on AR Company’s Bank

(2) Sales Allocation Charge code table

(3) Tax Region table

Cash Order with Material Delivered

When the Order is paid in the Cashier Payment Queue

A Cash Receipt Entry is automatically generated and updated when you pay the order in the Cashier

Payment Queue. A Cash Update Session log is also printed. The Cash Update posts a Cash Receipt

transaction, ‘CS’ prefix, in the General Ledger where the AR Control account is credited and the Cash

account is debited. It also creates an Unapplied Credit, ‘CR’ prefix, in the AR Open Items with the Order

reference number stored in the PO field of the Open Item Detail window.

When the Material is Shipped on a Bill of Lading

The BL is invoiced using the normal invoicing procedures. At Invoice Update, an ‘IV’ transaction is

created in the AR Open Items and posted to the General Ledger. As for customer picks-up, the Invoice

form is not required but the spooling process must occur to archive the invoice.

You must then offset the Unapplied Credits created when the material was paid against the Invoices. This

manual reconciliation can be made using the AR Open Item Adjustments or the Cash Receipt Entry

function. It should allow you to find the cases where the quantity billed after shipment is different than

the quantity that was paid at the sales counter, and take appropriate measures.

Account Order with Customer Pick-Up

Invoice Entry Generation and Modification

An Invoice Entry is automatically generated when you ‘Immediate ship’ the order, either in the Order

Entry program or in the Credit Release function. You can modify this invoice entry using the Change

Order function or the regular Invoice Entry program. In both situations, the allowed changes are limited.

Refer to the ‘Changing a Sales Order’ section of this chapter for more details.

Invoice Update, Invoice Printing and Invoice Archiving

The standard Invoice Update program is used and works as described in the ‘Invoice Update’ chapter of the

Invoicing manual. The Invoice form is generated, printed and archived as per the normal invoicing

procedures.

17. Counter Sales Procedures Page 440

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

General Ledger Update

This non-Cash transaction updates the General Ledger as any standard eSTELPLAN Sales. In the Invoice

GL Entry, the Sales accounts are credited and the AR Control account is debited. The Cash Receipt

function is later used to apply the payment received from the customer against the AR Open Item and, in

the General Ledger, to debit the Cash account from the customer’s Bank.

Account Order with Material Delivered

This non-Cash transaction is considered a standard eSTELPLAN Sales. Note that in this situation, you

must use the Auto BL Generation or the Invoice Entry program to create the Invoice Entry as it is not

automatically generated.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

18. PERIODIC PROCEDURES

ORDER COMPLETION AND DELETION UTILITY

The Order Completion and Deletion utility is used to automatically flag as ‘complete’ those Orders and

Order Items that have a balance of Quantity and/or Value that are less than a certain minimum criteria set

for the company. It also physically deletes Orders and Order Items that have been manually deleted or

completed for a period of time.

To determine which Orders need to be completed, the utility scans the Open Orders. To determine which

Orders need to be deleted, it scans the Completed Orders with a Completion Date less than the System

Date minus the DAY=X Product Installation Option.

NOTE: an Order can be flagged as ‘complete’ at Invoice Generation time if:

the Order being invoiced has the Back Order set to N-No,

the Order being invoiced has the Back Order set to Y-Yes, the Product Installation

CSO=X is set to Y-Yes and you answered Y-Yes to the “Do you wish to complete the

Sales Order(s)?” message in the Invoice Creation – Select Items screen.

In these situations, the Order is completed without any consideration of the balance Quantity or Amount

left on it, i.e. as if you pressed <F6> to delete it. Orders completed this way, however, get an A-

Automatically Completed flag. Orders completed through the Order Completion and Deletion Utility are

completed with a C-Completed flag.

The criteria for both completion and deletion through the Order Completion and Deletion Utility are

controlled by Product Installation Options, as follows:

Order Completion Options

The Product Installation Option DAY=999 allows you to determine the number of days an Order is kept on

file. This also controls how long Sales Orders can be accessed, after completion, for inquiry purposes. The

recommended number of days is 32. The default is 60. The option is to leave all Orders on file until they

are manually deleted or until the Balance Quantity on Order and Value are both zero.

Two Product Installation Options, QTY=9999 and MIN=999999, are provided to set conditional

requirements for the completion. There is a provision for both a quantity and value checking. These allow

you to control the percentage of the current Order balance quantity to the original quantity, as well as set a

minimum value below which the Order is considered complete.

The Product Installation Option RES=X is also provided to check if any Specific Reservations exist before

18. Periodic Procedures Page 442

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

completing an Order Item.

Order Deletion Options

An Option is provided to retain Orders that are manually deleted in Order Entry for the same period of time

as completed Orders. If the RMD=X Option is not set, then manually deleted Orders are deleted from the

file as soon as the utility is run as these Orders do not have any activity against them.

Orders that are completed through invoicing or through the Completion utility itself are retained on file until

the number of days specified by the DAY=999 option.

Order Header Verifications for Completion

The Order Type must be one of the following types:

o N (Normal)

o R (Release)

o T (Transfer)

The Order cannot be already complete or manually deleted.

The Order cannot be on credit hold.

The Sales and Work Order forms must have been printed.

The Order cannot be on Shipping or Production Hold.

Blanket and Standard Orders (Order Types B and S) never get completed by the Order Completion and

Deletion utility. They have to be manually deleted by the user using <F6>. Additionally, a verification is

performed to prevent a Blanket Order that has Open Releases to be deleted.

Order Item Verifications for Completion

The Order Item must not already be complete or manually deleted.

The Order Item Shipped to Date quantity must be greater than zero indicating at least one shipment

has taken place.

There can be no open eSTELpro, eSTELman, Bill of Lading, or Invoice entries on file corresponding

to the Item.

There can be no Specific Inventory Reservation for the Item if the Product Installation Option

RES=X is set.

If all of the above verifications are passed, the Order Item is considered for completion. The specific checks

performed at this stage are the following:

Balance Quantity Verification

The Balance Quantity is compared to the Original Order Quantity and a Balance Qty Percentage is

calculated:

100 x QtyOrder

Qty Bal = %Qty Bal

18. Periodic Procedures Page 443

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

If the Balance Quantity Percentage is less than the Product Installation Option QTY=9999 then the Order

Item is flagged as Complete.

Balance Amount Verification

The Balance Amount is compared to the amount set in the Product Installation Option MIN=999999 and,

if the Balance Amount is less than the minimum amount option, the Item is flagged as Complete.

If there are any Inventory Reservations or Reservations against Incoming Material, the records are deleted

and the quantity reserved is made available for other transactions.

Order Header Completion

An additional verification is done after all Items for an Order have been checked and completed.

If all Items for the Order are either Deleted or Completed, then the Order Header is flagged as Complete.

Order Deletion

Conditions for Deletion

If the Order Item Delete code indicates a manual deletion, and the RMD Product Installation Option is set

to N-No, the Order Item is deleted immediately, otherwise, the DAY Product Installation Option is

verified to see if the Order Item can be deleted yet.

If the Order Header Delete code indicates the Order is Complete (and therefore all Items are also

complete or deleted) the Order completion date is verified to see if the Order can be deleted yet. The

System Date is compared to the Order Header completion or manual deletion Date and if the difference is

greater than or equal to the DAY=XXX Product Installation Option, the Order is deleted.

Restriction

The Completion of an Order that is on a Manifest is allowed but the Deletion (purge) is not.

Completion or Deletion failure

When an Order does not get successfully completed or deleted, the Order Completion and Deletion utility

writes the reason for the failure in the Order Completion table.

You can view the completion and deletions errors in this table through the Order Inquiries. Refer to the

‘Order Look-Up and Inquiries’ chapter of this manual for more details.

You can also print the completion and deletion errors on the Completion and Deletion Log. Refer to the

‘Order Completion and Deletion Log’ section of this chapter for more details.

Every time the Order Deletion and Completion utility runs, it replaces the failure condition and date in the

table. It deletes this information when the Orders are physically purged from the system.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 444

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Deleting the Contact Information Record

A Contact Information record is maintained at the Header level for each Sales Order created from a

Quote. The Sales Order Completion and Deletion utility purges this Contact information record for the

Sales Order once the Sales Order is flagged as Completed.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 445

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER COMPLETION AND DELETION LOG

The Order Completion Log shows management what value has been written off due to incomplete Orders,

so you can determine if you are giving up significant revenue on any completed Items (such as when an

Order with BackOrder = N is deleted with only 1 Item shipped).

In addition to the orders that were completed or deleted by the Completion/Deletion utility, you can view

on the Order Completion and Deletion Log the orders that were not successfully completed or deleted,

and the reason for the failure. This is controlled by the LOG=X Product Installation Option. Refer to the

Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Log Printing

The log prints the Order Type before the Reference number. Valid Types are:

B Blanket

N Normal

Q Quote

R Release

T Transfer

For each completed or deleted transaction, the Reason code is printed under the Item number. Valid

completion and deletion Reason codes are:

CMP Transaction completed.

DEL Transaction manually deleted.

DAY Transaction deleted. This occurs when an Order was completed for a number of

days greater than the number of days set on the Product Installation Option

DAY=999 or when a Quote was completed for a number of days greater than the

number of days set on the Product Installation Option QDY=999.

Restriction

Occasionally, a completed transaction doesn’t get written to the log. This happens with Quotes turned

into a Sales Order. When the Order item is created, the Quote item is flagged as Completed. During the

End of Day, the Order Completion and Deletion utility completes the Quote header. However, as the Log

is based on the Items completed, this transaction doesn’t appear on it.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 446

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Log Sample

RUN: 04Feb04 12:55 eSTELPLAN orrodl000736 PAGE: 1

Order Deletion and Completion

Order-Itm Customer Name Group Size Grade Dimension Gauge Material Value Total Value

RSN Exch Rt Ord Dt Bal: Units Quantity Weight Material Profit Pft % Total Profit Pft %

Branch: (CHI) Chicago

--Orders Completed--

N 3191-001 ABC STEEL RT 112083 513 20' 0.045M 10.00 11.00

05Jun03 1 20' 25 1.17 11.70 1.17 10.64

003 ABC STEEL RT 112083 513 40' 0.045M 40.00 44.00

05Jun03 4 160' 200 5.22 13.05 5.22 11.86

Order Totals: 50.00 55.00

225 6.39 12.78 6.39 11.62

Q 3195-002 MAIN STEEL BA 2214 36 20' 64.00 64.00

04Feb04 2 40' 128 5.00 7.81 5.00 7.81

Branch Totals Completed: 114.00 119.00

353 11.39 9.99 11.39 9.57

--Orders Deleted--

T 3194-001 XYZ STEEL RT 112083 513 20' 0.045M 12.00 12.00

DAY 04Feb04 2 20' 25 2.00 16.67 2.00 16.67

002 XYZ STEEL BA 2214 36 20' 32.00 34.00

DEL 02Feb04 1 40' 64 4.00 12.50 5.00 14.70

Order Totals: 44.00 46.00

89 6.00 13.64 7.00 15.22

Branch Totals Deleted: 44.00 46.00

89 6.00 13.64 7.00 15.22

****** Completion Error ******

N- 3101-001 Advanced Shipped Quantity is Zero.

N 002 Advanced Shipped Quantity is Zero.

N- 3102-001 Ford Motor Shipped Quantity is Zero.

N 002 Ford Motor Shipped Quantity is Zero.

N- 3103-001 American Applia Open B/L exists.

N- 3106-001 Chicago Steel Shipped Quantity is Zero.

N- 3126-001 Ford Motor Balance Quantity % > PIO QTY %

****** Deletion Error ******

N- 2918-001 Advanced Open Invoice exists

====================================================================================================================================

RUN: 04Feb04 12:55 eSTELPLAN orrodl000736 PAGE: 6

Order Deletion and Completion

Order-Itm Customer Name Group Size Grade Dimension Gauge Material Value Total Value

RSN Exch Rt Ord Dt Bal: Units Quantity Weight Material Profit Pft % Total Profit Pft %

Grand Totals Completed: 114.00 119.00

353 11.39 9.99 11.39 9.57

Deleted: 44.00 46.00

89 6.00 13.64 7.00 15.22

Legend:

RSN Description

DEL Manually deleted

DAY Completed for number of days greater than the PIO

*** End of Report ***

Sales Order Completion and Deletion Log

with LOG Product Installation Option set to Y

18. Periodic Procedures Page 447

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

ORDER CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE CLEANUP UTILITY

An Order Cross-Reference table deletion utility is included in the End of Month procedure. This utility

also deletes the Archived Invoices associated with the Cross-Reference records.

The Product Installation Option MTH=ZZ is used to determine the number of months a transaction is

kept on file. Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 448

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

RESERVATION CLEANUP UTILITY

An optional End of Week utility is available to ensure that the Product Item Reserved Quantity is in sync

with the corresponding valid Reservations. Due to technical problems with PC connections causing an

incomplete termination of applications, Reservation records can exist for completed/deleted transactions.

This utility scans the Reservation table and if an invalid Reservation record is found, it is purged and the

Product Item Allocated Quantity is re-built.

A Product Installation Option, RED=X, controls the purging of Reservation records for reference prefixes

CO-Cutting Order and AE-Inventory Application Entry. This PIO is required when the utility is run with

users logged on because it is possible that Reservations with these Reference Prefixes are valid and

therefore must not be deleted.

Restriction

This PIO must not be set to Y-Yes if the utility is run with users logged on, as it purges any Reservation

records for reference prefixes ‘CO’ and ‘AE’ regardless of whether they are valid Reservations.

In order to use this utility, please contact the Invera Support Center.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 449

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

HIGH LINE NUMBER ALLOCATION REPORT

The High Line Number Allocation report is a utility included in the End of Month Cleanup function. It

lists any Sales Order Items where the reservation line numbers are greater than 800.

Any Sales/Transfer Order that is printed on the report is in danger of reaching the max limit of 999

reservations. You must reset the line number counter by removing all reservations from the Order Item

and then reallocating them.

In order to avoid other problems, any Sales Order appearing on this report should be closed, and a NEW

Sales Order created to replace it.

18. Periodic Procedures Page 450

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

INTERFACE WITH BOOKING

Under normal conditions, the End of Day procedure runs automatically before midnight Monday through

Friday or before noon Tuesday through Saturday. During the End of Day procedure run between noon on

the last calendar day of the month and prior to noon on the first calendar day of the new month, the

following occurs:

the Bookings Calendar is created for the next month

the Sales Order Bookings files are re-initialized (rolled) for the new month

Special Case

In the case where the last day of the month falls on a weekend and the End of Day procedure is not run

during the specified period, the Bookings Calendar is not created and the Sales Order Bookings files are

not re-initialized. As a result, the Sales Order Bookings for Day 1 of the new month are recorded under

the corresponding day of the previous month.

Example: In May, the last day of the month (May 31) falls on a Saturday, and the End of Day

procedure is not run during the specified times. In this case, the Sales Order Bookings for

June 2 (first Monday) are added to the data recorded on Day 1 of May. Consequently, 2 days

of Bookings information is added together under Day 1 of the previous month.

In order to correct the merging of Bookings table information for the current and previous months, you

must contact the Invera Support Center. Running the End of Day procedure after the specified time will

not correct the problem.

Ensuring Correct Bookings Calendar Creation/Bookings Table Re-initialization

In order to ensure the creation of the Bookings Calendar and the re-initialization of the Bookings files, the

End of Day must be run on the evening of the last calendar day of the month or before noon on the first

day of the new month. The End of Day can be batched on Friday to run at the appropriate time on the

weekend.

Correcting Bookings Table Problems

If Invera needs to correct entries in the Bookings Calendar and re-initialize the Sales Order Bookings

files, all of the Sales Order Bookings information for the new month as well as the previous month is

deleted.

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

APPENDIX A

USER MENU OPTIONS

The following User Menu Options are available. They allow flexibility within the eSTELPLAN software

and enable Invera to tailor the system to the specific needs of your Company. Please discuss them with

Invera’s personnel if modifications are required.

Order Entry ORPORD

d Enables the Order Deletion and Order Item Deletion functions.

m Provides for manual assignment of the Order number.

f Provides flexibility on the Order Entry function for sites wishing to use the Future Delivery

Days feature. See the Product Installation Option FDD=X in Accounts Receivable.

Cash Register (Counter Sales) ORPPMQ

d Enables the Deletion of transactions in the Cashier Payment Queue.

Appendix A Page 452

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

APPENDIX B

COMPLETION AND DELETION ERRORS

The following error messages may be recorded in the Order Completion table.

Completion Errors

Completion Error Business/Technical Reason

Open Invoice Exists Invoice Entry exists for the Order

ivh_upd_cd = N and ivh_inv_del is not Y in

ortivh_rec

Order is in use Transaction Lock (scttlk_rec) exists

Shipped Quantity is Zero Order has not been shipped yet

(ord_shp_unt=0 and ord_shp_msr=0 and ord_shp_wgt=0

in ortord_rec and –for quotes- qth_expr_dt < system

date in petqth_rec).

Order Item has Reservations RES Product Installation Option is on and

Reservation (intres_rec) exists

Open B/L exists Order is on an Open BL:

bld_del = N or spaces in ortbld_rec

Order Item is on an MPO: ###-##-######-### When MAN or PRO System Installation Options are set

and:

An MPO Step Processing record (mntmos_rec)

exists and the MIL Product Installation Option

is set to Y OR

An MPO Header is not completed: moh_comp is not

Y in mntmoh_rec OR

An MPO Step Processing Information record has

not been updated: moi_upd_cd = N or spaces in

mntmoi_rec.

###-##-######-### represents the Branch, Reference

Prefix, MPO Number and Item Number.

Order Item has a CCA Costing Production Allocation (pntcaa_rec) exists

Order Item is on an Open Job: ###-###### When the PRO System Installation Option is set.

Job has not been updated:

joh_upd_cd = N in pntjoh_rec

###-###### represents the Branch and Job Number.

Order Item is on a Manifest Manifest Detail Information (ortmfd_rec) exists

Order Item is in use Order Item (ortord_rec) is locked

Appendix B Page 454

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Completion Error Business/Technical Reason

Product group is invalid Product Group (inrprg_rec) does not exist

ILC code is invalid ILC (inrilc_rec) does not exist

Balance Qty % > PIO Qty % Order Balance Quantity is greater than the QTY

Product Installation Option:

in ortord_rec, (ord_bal_unt*100/ord_ord_unt)> value

of QTY PIO or

(ord_bal_msr*100/ord_ord_msr)> value of QTY PIO or

(ord_bal_wgt*100/ord_ord_wgt)> value of QTY PIO

Total Amount > PIO MIN Order Total Amount is greater than the MIN Product

Installation Option:

oit_tot_extl_amt in ortoit_rec > (value of MIN PIO

* value of MLT PIO)

Return-to-Stock Transient Reservation has been

used. Cannot remove RES

When a product has been Returned to Stock in the

Order Reservation screen and the Transient Tag has

been allocated somewhere else.

The Reserved Quantity (res_res_qty in intres_rec)

is more than the Product On-Hand less Allocated

Quantity (prd_ohd_qty – prd_alloc_qty in

intres_res)

Could not delete Incoming Reservation (ICR) Informix/Oracle error on deleting Incoming

Reservation (inticr_rec)

Could not delete Incoming Material (ICM) Informix/Oracle error on deleting Incoming Material

(inticm_rec)

Could not Rewrite Order Header record Informix/Oracle error on rewriting Order Header

(ortorh_rec)

Could not Rewrite Order Header key record Informix/Oracle error on rewriting Order Header Key

(ortohk_rec)

Could not delete Order Credit record Informix/Oracle error on deleting Order Credit

record (ortocr_rec)

Deletion Errors

Error Reason - possible Remedy

Open Invoice exists Invoice Header (ortivh_rec) exists.

Invoice cleanup should be run first to remove the

Invoice Header.

Open B/L exists Bill of Lading Header (ortblh_rec) exists.

BL cleanup should be run first to remove BL Header.

Order is in use Transaction Lock (scttlk_rec) exists

Quote Header is in use Quote Header (ortqth_rec)is locked

Commodity Total is in use Quote Commodity Total (petqtt_rec)is locked

Could not delete Order Header/Order Header key

records

Informix/Oracle error on deleting Order Header

(ortorh_rec) or Order Header Key (ortohk_rec)

Order Item is on an MPO When MAN or PRO System Installation Options are set

and:

An MPO Step Processing record (mntmos_rec)

exists and the MIL Product Installation Option

is set to Y OR

Appendix B Page 455

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Error Reason - possible Remedy

An MPO Header is not completed: moh_comp is not

Y in mntmoh_rec OR

A MPO Step Processing Information record has

not been updated: moi_upd_cd = N or spaces in

mntmoi_rec.

Order Item has a CCA Costing Production Allocation (pntcaa_rec) exists

Order Item is on an Open Job When the PRO System Installation Option is set, Job

has not been updated:

joh_upd_cd = N in pntjoh_rec

Order Item is on a Manifest Manifest Detail Information(ortmfd_rec) exists

Order Item is in use Order Item (ortord_rec) is locked

Return-to-Stock Transient Reservation has been

used. Cannot remove RES

When a product has been Returned to Stock in the

Order Reservation screen and the Transient Tag has

been allocated somewhere else.

The Reserved Quantity (res_res_qty in intres_rec)

is more than the Product On-Hand less Allocated

Quantity (prd_ohd_qty – prd_alloc_qty in

intprd_rec)

Quote item is in use Quote Item (petqtd_rec) is locked

Quote Product record is in use Quote Product (petqtp_rec) is locked

Buyout record is in use Buyout (petbyo_rec) is locked

Transfer Requisition is in use Transfer Requisition (ortgto_rec) is locked

Could not delete Incoming Reservation (ICR) Informix/Oracle error on deleting Incoming

Reservation (inticr_rec)

Could not delete Incoming Material (ICM) Informix/Oracle error on deleting Incoming Material

(inticm_rec)

Appendix B Page 456

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

APPENDIX C

DISTINCTION OF MATERIAL ORIGIN OVERVIEW

Distinction of Material Origin is required when a customer specifies that they will only accept material

from a specific country or region.

The Distinction of Material Origin functions provide you the ability to control which material is used to

satisfy a sales order based on the materials country or region of origin.

DISTINCTION OF MATERIAL ORIGIN

Distinction of Material Origin relies on the use of Source codes to fulfill the following functions:

Identify Material Origin.

o Source codes are entered on a Mill/Heat to identify the origin of the material sold. The Source

code contains a description and statement of origin.

Identify Order Items that have a Distinction of Material Origin Requirement. o Source codes are used in Quote, Sales Order Entry, Customer Part Specs, Bill of Lading Entry,

and Invoicing to identify customer requirements where Distinction of Material Origin is required.

Source codes are defined and maintained by the users. The codes indicate the country or region where the

material was produced and whether or not a Distinction of Material Origin is required.

Users may require more than one Source code for the same country or region.

For example:

D – Domestic No distinction required. Smelted and Manufactured in the USA.

US – USA Distinction required. Smelted and Manufactured in the USA.

New Source codes MUST be created for each country or region where Distinction of Material Origin is

required.

Source

The Source code for the Sales Order header defaults from the User Default.

The Source code for the Order Items defaults from either the Order Header or Customer

Appendix C Page 458

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Part Specification.

Source codes flow from Quote to Order to Invoice. The Source code can be manually changed at any step

in the Order fulfillment cycle with restrictions based on reservations and Distinction of Material Origin

requirements (see section Order Fulfillment – Change Mode Restrictions).

Material Origin

Material Origin is identified by entering a Source code in the Mill/Heat record.

To enable tracking of Material Origin, a Mill/Heat must be entered on each tag received.

The reservation function verifies if the tag Mill/Heat Source code matches the Order Item Source code

when the Order Item Source code Distinction of Material Origin flag is set to Y-Yes.

Appendix C Page 459

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

REFERENCE TABLES

Distinction of Material Origin requires entries in the following reference tables:

Source Code <scrsrc>

Mill Code <scrmil>

Mill/Heat <inhhet>

Changing the Source code attributes in the Source code reference table affects all Order Items, Bills of

Lading, Invoices, Mill/Heats and tags that are using the modified Source code.

Changing the Source code on a Mill or Mill/Heat record affects all Tags and Bills of Lading that have the

same Mill/Heat.

It is possible that you may no longer be able to Ship or Invoice material after changing the Source code or

Source code attributes.

The following reports must be run after you have modified the Source information:

Material Source Exception report <inrvrs>. Lists all transactions with material that does not meet

the Distinction of Material Origin requirements. The report should be run whenever changes are

made to Source codes, Mill codes, and/or Mill/Heat records.

The output identifies the Transaction, its required Source code and a listing of reserved Tags and

Mill/Heats that have failed the check

Bill of Lading Mill/Heat report <inrvbl>. Lists Bill of Lading Items where an entered Mill/Heat

does not meet the Order Item Material Distinction requirement.

The report includes both Tag Master Required and Non-Tag Master Required Product Items.

Appendix C Page 460

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

MATERIAL RESERVATION

When reserving Tag Master Required material the following Distinction of Material Origin rules apply:

If the sales order item source code’s Distinction of Material Origin Verification flag is set to N then

material with any source code (origin) can be reserved.

If the sales order item source code Distinction of Material Origin Verification flag is set to Y-Yes,

then the source code of the Mill/Heat on the Tag being reserved MUST match the Order Item Source

code.

o If they are different an error message is displayed and the tag cannot be reserved for this sales

order item.

Error message “Tag/Whs source does not match transaction source”

o If there is no Mill/Heat entered on a tag, and verification is required an error message is

displayed.

Error message “Material Origin error. Missing Mill/Ht.”

o The verification check is only applicable for Tag Master Required material.

The rules apply to the following eSTELPLAN order fulfillment functions:

Quote Entry

Order Entry

Bill of Lading

Invoicing

Bill of Lading Gateway

Sales Order Gateway

Production – reserving production tags to an Order Item

Restoring a Reservation History Record.

A warning message is displayed if the Tag does not meet the Distinction of Material Origin

requirements when re-instating a Reservation History record. The user must determine what change(s), if

any, are required.

Order Fulfillment – Change Mode Restrictions

The following rules apply when changing the Source code on a Quote, Order Item or Invoice Item.

Warning:

o No Specific Reservations. A warning message is displayed when you replace a Source code that

requires Material Distinction.

o Specific Reservations Exist. A warning message is displayed when you replace a Source code that

requires Material Distinction with one that doesn’t require it.

Error:

o Specific Reservations Exist. An error message is displayed if you enter a Source code that

requires Distinction of Material Origin. In this case, you must remove the reservations before

changing the Source Code.

Appendix C Page 461

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Quote Entry

Unrestricted. The Source code can be changed without restrictions if there are no Specific

Reservations.

A warning message and prompt are displayed if you replaced a Source code that requires Material

Distinction: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”.

Restrictions. If there are Specific Reservations, the following restrictions apply:

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is N-No: it can be replaced with any other Source code

whose Origin Verification Flag is N-No.

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: it can be replaced with any Source code whose

Origin Verification Flag is N-No. A warning message is displayed with a prompt to continue

N/Y: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”

o New Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: an error message is displayed: “Source

code cannot be changed due to reservations”

Sales Order Entry

Conditions that apply when changing a Source code on an Order.

Unrestricted

o Order Header

The Order Header Source code can be changed without restrictions at any time.

A warning message and prompt are displayed if you replaced a Source code that requires Material

Distinction: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”.

o Order Item

The Order Item Source can be changed if there are:

No specific material reservations

No open Bills of Lading

No open Invoices

The Item is not Planned on an eSTELman or eSTELpro Job

A warning message and prompt are displayed if you replace a Source code that requires Material

Distinction: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”.

Restrictions – Order Item

If there are Specific Reservations, open Bills of Loading, open Invoices or the Order Item was entered

as Planned Production on an eSTELman or eSTELpro Job, the following restrictions apply:

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is N-No: it can be replaced with any other Source code

whose Origin Verification Flag is N-No.

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: it can be replaced with any Source code whose

Origin Verification Flag is N-No. A warning message is displayed with a prompt to continue

Appendix C Page 462

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

N/Y: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”

o New Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: an error message is displayed: “Source

code cannot be changed due to reservations”

NOTE: When adding/changing an Order Item Part Spec, an error is displayed if the Part Spec

Source code cannot be used for the Order Item.

Invoice Entry

Conditions that apply when changing a Source code on an Invoice.

Unrestricted

o Invoice Header

The Invoice Header Source code can be changed without restrictions at any time.

A warning message and prompt are displayed if you replaced a Source code that requires Material

Distinction: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”.

o Invoice Item

The Invoice Item Source can be changed if:

There are No specific material reservations.

The Item was not created from a Bill of Lading.

A warning message and prompt are displayed if you replaced a Source code that requires

Material Distinction: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”.

Restrictions – Invoice Item

If there are specific reservations or Invoice was created from a Bill of Loading Item the following

restrictions apply:

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is N-No: it can be replaced with any other Source code

whose Origin Verification Flag is N-No.

o Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: it can be replaced with any Source code whose

Origin Verification Flag is N-No. A warning message is displayed with a prompt to continue

N/Y: “Src code Distinction of Material Origin changed - continue?........N”

o New Source Code Origin Verification Flag is Y-Yes: an error message is displayed: “Source

code cannot be changed due to reservations”

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

INDEX

Access Rights .................................................. 56, 233

Accounting Period ................................ 234, 240, 397

Actual Shipping Date ............................................ 228

Actual Weight ................................................... 2, 109

Administration Cost ...................................... 166, 176

Administration Cost Required .............................. 176

Allocated Quantity ................................ 448, 454, 455

Allocation code ..................................................... 264

Allocation Remarks11, 180, 286, 288, 316, 332, 335,

349

Allocation Type ... 48, 71, 81, 123, 124, 126, 129, 135

Allocation Warehouse ....................................... 96, 99

Amount33, 35, 39, 40, 41, 62, 63, 72, 74, 75, 78, 80,

81, 83, 84, 86, 125, 127, 128, 130, 131, 146, 147,

151, 152, 153, 168, 172, 176, 203, 207, 209, 216,

217, 219, 281, 286, 287, 307, 366, 367, 392, 398,

420, 425, 428, 437, 441, 443, 454

Automatic Cost .............. 11, 25, 39, 69, 160, 166, 168

Automatic Credit Hold .......................................... 277

Average Cost ..........................160, 166, 169, 170, 171

Backorder Allowed ................................................. 44

Balance34, 35, 40, 57, 58, 65, 73, 83, 93, 94, 96, 98,

101, 111, 117, 126, 129, 160, 163, 165, 168, 169,

170, 171, 191, 215, 216, 217, 220, 223, 229, 232,

257, 265, 277, 334, 335, 353, 354, 355, 366, 367,

394, 416, 417, 418, 438, 441, 442, 443, 446, 454

Balance Pieces ..... 58, 96, 98, 126, 129, 191, 334, 335

Balance Quantity93, 232, 277, 335, 353, 441, 442,

443, 446, 454

Balance Weight ........................... 35, 65, 96, 191, 277

Bank ...................................................... 438, 439, 440

Base Currency ............ 69, 81, 163, 170, 310, 366, 400

Base Measure .................................. 30, 269, 304, 310

Bill of Lading Branch228, 234, 240, 242, 246, 248,

250

Bill of Lading form ..................13, 31, 42, 85, 87, 290

Bill of Lading number200, 227, 228, 231, 232, 234,

240, 242, 243, 246, 248, 250

Billing Type .................................................. 366, 367

Blanket Order Branch ............................................. 60

Blanket Order Item number .................................... 61

Blanket Order number ............................... 59, 61, 210

Branch Name ........................................................ 299

Business Date ........................................................ 377

Business Day ......................................................... 397

Buyer ....................................................................... 18

Carrier Name ......................................................... 228

Cash Account .................................................... 27, 44

Charge Amount ............................... 71, 73, 80, 81, 86

Charge number70, 75, 79, 163, 164, 166, 252, 253,

398

Charge Quantity2, 35, 48, 72, 79, 80, 81, 85, 86, 87,

88, 96, 98, 108, 109, 215, 306, 366

Charge Quantity Type2, 35, 72, 79, 98, 108, 109,

215, 366

Charge Rate48, 75, 79, 80, 81, 141, 146, 150, 152,

172

Charge Type ... 72, 73, 79, 80, 163, 164, 253, 267, 366

Coil ID .................................................................. 189

Color code ..............................283, 308, 309, 327, 334

Color Description .................................................. 309

Common Carrier139, 141, 144, 145, 148, 150, 408,

409, 414

Company Name .....................206, 276, 283, 382, 385

Completion Date ................................................... 441

Contact ... 236, 272, 276, 281, 300, 301, 302, 431, 444

Corporate Average Cost ........................ 169, 170, 171

Cost Amount .......... 148, 149, 162, 163, 164, 165, 392

Cost Description.................................................... 163

Cost Entry ............................................................. 162

Cost Quantity .................................. 78, 163, 164, 173

Cost Rate139, 140, 141, 142, 147, 148, 149, 150,

154, 155, 162, 163, 164, 168, 172, 173, 176

Cost Rate U/M .............................. 148, 149, 162, 164

Cost Reconciliation ........ 145, 148, 159, 160, 163, 170

Create Tag ............................................................. 183

Created Date.......................................................... 367

Credit Authority .................................................... 417

Credit Hold code ....................................... 15, 36, 284

Credit Note90, 98, 107, 172, 181, 231, 232, 234, 237,

239, 240, 417, 426

Credit Status ................................................ 9, 28, 205

Currency code ................................... 27, 63, 170, 310

Currency Symbol .................................................. 283

Customer Look-Up Name ..................... 215, 217, 253

Customer Name40, 196, 208, 223, 253, 272, 340,

341, 342, 345, 347, 348, 350, 357, 416, 417, 420,

446

Customer number21, 34, 46, 100, 124, 206, 239, 241,

243, 245, 247, 249, 254, 353, 421

Customer Owned .................................. 255, 394, 399

Customer Part number215, 232, 247, 304, 327, 328,

Index Page 464

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

334, 336

Day9, 88, 218, 220, 277, 365, 367, 373, 395, 396,

397, 398, 422, 445, 450

Default Location .................................................... 431

Delivery Manifest .................................... 54, 222, 228

Delivery Method29, 45, 139, 141, 142, 143, 144,

145, 147, 148, 149, 150, 154, 254, 407, 408, 409,

410, 411, 412, 414, 415, 418, 427, 431, 434

Delivery Sequence ................................................ 254

Destination49, 102, 112, 113, 124, 135, 136, 137,

138, 146, 317, 320, 324, 433

Destination Branch ........................ 112, 113, 124, 135

Destination Warehouse49, 102, 124, 135, 136, 137,

138

Detail/Summary ............ 254, 380, 386, 394, 435, 436

Direct Invoice .................. 93, 106, 143, 144, 145, 181

Direct Ship code .................................................... 126

Direct Shipment6, 37, 40, 41, 71, 163, 166, 170, 252,

255, 296, 351, 353, 355

Display Cost .............................................. 32, 63, 160

Display Price ........................................................... 63

Due Date20, 21, 22, 25, 27, 29, 33, 35, 36, 37, 39, 41,

43, 44, 48, 57, 111, 116, 125, 128, 130, 131, 135,

204, 205, 210, 212, 226, 255, 257, 268, 334, 335,

351, 353, 354, 359, 366, 367, 398, 413, 414

End Use ................................... 38, 219, 285, 286, 288

End Use Description................................ 38, 285, 286

Entry Date ............................. 255, 312, 356, 391, 393

Estimated Shipping Date ....................................... 228

Exchange Rate ......... 2, 27, 28, 81, 144, 163, 170, 400

Exclude Warehouse ............................................... 256

F.O.B. .................................................................... 235

Fax number...................................................... 26, 301

Form Type ..................................................... 300, 315

Forms14, 27, 41, 42, 66, 68, 75, 83, 187, 251, 258,

271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 278, 280, 281, 283,

284, 287, 290, 291, 297, 298, 299, 303, 315, 323,

333, 336, 431

Freight Charge1, 23, 25, 26, 29, 60, 79, 139, 140,

141, 142, 144, 146, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 156,

157, 158, 175

Freight Cost74, 139, 140, 141, 142, 144, 147, 148,

149, 150, 154, 155, 156, 166, 307, 338

Freight Cost Rate139, 141, 142, 147, 148, 149, 154,

156

Freight Cost Unit of Measure ................................ 156

Freight Rate139, 146, 148, 150, 152, 154, 155, 156,

157, 158

Freight Responsibility45, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143,

144, 146, 147, 148, 151, 152, 153, 154, 209, 434

Freight Vendor ........................................ 29, 144, 149

Freight Weight .............................................. 150, 155

Gauge Required ............................... 94, 101, 189, 213

Gauge Type ....................... 90, 98, 105, 224, 233, 304

Gross Profit Amount ............................................. 339

Gross Profit Percentage ..................................... 15, 66

Gross Weight ............................................................. 2

Header Remarks11, 17, 25, 45, 56, 135, 138, 177,

180, 202, 207, 210, 279, 285, 286, 287, 288, 303,

313, 316, 319, 431

Heat30, 121, 122, 277, 278, 282, 308, 309, 324, 337,

369, 371, 457, 458, 459, 460

Heat number .................................................. 308, 309

Hold code .................................... 15, 16, 49, 423, 424

Hold Status ............................................................ 205

ILC code ........................................................ 257, 454

In Process ...................................................... 222, 229

Incoming Item ....... 125, 126, 127, 128, 130, 131, 335

Incoming Material2, 39, 58, 90, 93, 123, 124, 256,

257, 352, 358, 394, 399, 400, 443, 454, 455

Inside Salesperson18, 27, 45, 111, 204, 206, 208,

217, 223, 334, 375, 404

Insufficient Allocation........................................... 257

Inventory Allocation ............................................. 349

Inventory Organization46, 60, 92, 94, 108, 109, 189,

191, 305, 404

Inventory Position ......................................... 269, 394

Invoice Date .......................................................... 242

Invoice form .............. 30, 79, 232, 235, 236, 438, 439

Invoice number200, 221, 231, 232, 234, 239, 242,

248

Item Due Date43, 57, 98, 111, 116, 126, 131, 217,

223, 257, 268, 276, 278, 289, 304, 326, 335, 342,

343, 345, 346, 348, 349, 351, 352, 358, 398

Item number40, 52, 53, 59, 60, 61, 98, 111, 126, 129,

131, 134, 163, 170, 197, 214, 215, 218, 220, 221,

222, 227, 232, 233, 234, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,

244, 275, 281, 289, 327, 328, 336, 445

Item Type ...................................................... 289, 327

Job Information Required .................................. 22, 23

Job number23, 30, 44, 98, 205, 217, 258, 276, 281,

287, 300, 301, 302

Job Type ................................................................ 225

Login ID18, 41, 49, 68, 111, 283, 291, 404, 405, 406,

408, 416, 417, 436

Look-Up Name .............................. 239, 241, 243, 335

LOT Charge .................................... 84, 157, 158, 172

Mail code ........................................................... 44, 45

Management Summary Group254, 256, 380, 381,

383, 398, 399

Manifest number ................................................... 228

Manifest Status .............................................. 222, 228

Markdown ............................................. 69, 70, 74, 75

Markup ............................................ 69, 70, 74, 75, 76

Material Cost ................................. 166, 168, 169, 395

Material Value ................................................. 75, 446

Maximum Skid Weight ................................. 191, 192

Measure34, 35, 40, 47, 48, 57, 58, 69, 75, 79, 80, 81,

84, 96, 101, 108, 127, 136, 156, 163, 164, 187,

268, 269, 279, 282, 283, 304, 308, 334, 353, 377,

395, 428

Message Type........................................ 309, 428, 432

Metric code............................................................ 306

Mill code ....................................................... 369, 459

Index Page 465

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Mill Line ............................................................... 225

Monthly Sales ....................................................... 398

MPO Required ........................................................ 36

Net Profit Amount ................................................. 339

Net Profit Percentage ............................................ 339

Nominal Gauge ....................................................... 94

Non-Specific Allocation ................................. 63, 282

Non-Tag Master Required .................... 121, 371, 459

Non-Tag Master Required Product ............... 371, 459

Non-Tagged Product ......................................... 92, 95

Number of Copies ........................... 67, 276, 281, 283

One-Time/Permanent258, 260, 312, 314, 340, 342,

345, 348, 351, 356, 358, 364, 380, 384, 386, 391,

394, 435

Open/Complete ..................................................... 258

Order Amount ..........................62, 207, 284, 285, 428

Order Branch134, 138, 208, 215, 217, 220, 221, 234,

244, 294, 295, 334, 336, 405

Order Costing ................................................ 386, 395

Order Date19, 20, 25, 27, 29, 57, 135, 204, 205, 210,

259, 300, 340, 342, 343, 345, 346, 348, 349, 414

Order Due Date ....................................................... 29

Order Item Due Date 40, 129, 215, 323, 334, 343, 362

Order Item number37, 60, 197, 215, 217, 241, 336,

349, 362

Order number18, 20, 21, 22, 29, 43, 44, 56, 163, 170,

195, 196, 200, 206, 208, 209, 214, 215, 216, 217,

218, 220, 221, 222, 231, 232, 241, 244, 245, 246,

247, 248, 259, 261, 283, 334, 336, 340, 341, 343,

353, 356, 404, 451

Order Quantity ........... 43, 83, 138, 257, 265, 353, 442

Order Status ................. 2, 9, 11, 18, 51, 135, 209, 231

Order Type4, 26, 44, 45, 56, 58, 60, 92, 196, 204,

207, 208, 212, 259, 260, 314, 315, 326, 340, 342,

345, 348, 349, 351, 353, 356, 366, 367, 404, 432,

442, 445

Ordered Weight ............................................. 223, 405

Original Date ......................................................... 367

Original Due Date ....................................... 37, 48, 57

Original/Reprint ..... 260, 312, 314, 323, 326, 429, 432

Other Cost ..................................................... 166, 339

Outside Salesperson27, 44, 45, 206, 208, 217, 223,

264, 282, 284, 375

Ownership ............................................................. 368

P/O Type ............................................... 260, 394, 399

Packaging ......... 39, 173, 174, 187, 188, 191, 192, 338

Packaging Cost...................................................... 174

Packaging Cost Basis ............................................ 174

Piece Control Required ........................................... 90

Pieces per Tag ....................................................... 191

PIW ....................................................... 190, 278, 431

Position ........................................................... 81, 394

Postal/Zip code.............................................. 254, 266

Pricing Remarks ............................................ 179, 180

Print Allocations ................................... 260, 343, 349

Print Backorders ...................................... 83, 314, 315

Printer Type .......................................................... 289

Process36, 79, 208, 229, 262, 293, 295, 302, 321,

435, 436

Process code .............................36, 262, 293, 295, 302

Processing Cost ..................................... 166, 172, 173

Processing Work Center79, 80, 163, 164, 166, 172,

227, 293, 295

Processing Work Center Cost ............................... 166

Product coding ........................................................ 79

Product Description33, 47, 111, 125, 126, 128, 129,

136, 181, 183, 185, 197, 215, 216, 223, 306, 317,

318, 320, 324, 327, 328, 336

Product Group34, 47, 79, 169, 193, 213, 249, 256,

349, 362, 374, 380, 381, 382, 454

Product Item2, 46, 47, 89, 90, 92, 94, 95, 99, 100,

101, 105, 107, 108, 112, 113, 114, 118, 119, 120,

121, 122, 125, 129, 133, 138, 160, 166, 173, 174,

183, 187, 224, 231, 256, 257, 279, 289, 325, 336,

353, 368, 399, 404, 428, 448

Product Line ................... 358, 394, 395, 397, 398, 399

Product Selections ......................... 262, 342, 345, 348

Product Tax Status .................................................. 77

Production Entry ................................................... 183

Production Hold16, 28, 36, 50, 57, 90, 204, 205, 209,

223, 262, 288, 333, 340, 352, 442

Production Hold Status ......................................... 205

Production Sequence36, 92, 93, 95, 262, 282, 304,

321, 322

Production Work Order form68, 187, 281, 282, 299,

308, 322, 431

Profit % Above ............................. 343, 346, 349, 391

Profit % Below .............................. 343, 346, 349, 391

Profit Type263, 343, 346, 349, 384, 385, 386, 388,

389, 390, 391, 392, 393

Program Installation Option .................................. 394

Purchasing Contact ............................................... 236

PWC Ticket ........................................... 293, 295, 321

PWC Ticket Printer ............................... 293, 295, 321

Quantity Available .................................................. 90

Quantity Ordered ................................ 34, 80, 81, 169

Quantity U/M ........................................................ 216

Quote Item35, 75, 82, 90, 95, 105, 115, 119, 133,

134, 136, 171, 455

Range/Table .......................................................... 263

Reason code .......................................................... 445

Reason Type.......................................................... 135

Receipt Type ......................................................... 429

Receiver number ........................................... 163, 170

Receiving Warehouse............................................. 335

Reference Branch .......................... 112, 113, 126, 129

Reference Item ...................................................... 225

Reference number20, 129, 131, 170, 225, 239, 299,

335, 445

Reference Prefix4, 98, 120, 126, 129, 214, 234, 239,

243, 335, 369, 371, 448, 453

Remark Template .......................................... 177, 186

Remark Type ..........................177, 178, 183, 184, 185

Reply To ....................................40, 41, 110, 111, 116

Index Page 466

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Report Sequence .................................................... 404

Reports ................................ 1, 36, 166, 252, 312, 387

Reservations Against Incoming................. 12, 32, 125

Reserved Quantity ................. 169, 268, 448, 454, 455

Responsible For ..................................................... 264

Return-to-Stock ....... 90, 107, 122, 160, 309, 454, 455

Route20, 25, 27, 29, 45, 210, 228, 254, 264, 267,

414, 424

Sales Category18, 22, 30, 36, 44, 48, 69, 71, 79, 81,

100, 101, 102, 105, 123, 124, 126, 127, 129, 134,

135, 163, 164, 205, 208, 215, 264, 267, 268, 293,

294, 296, 297, 298, 300, 351, 366, 367

Sales Order form ................................. 1, 67, 276, 309

Sales Order Item6, 17, 52, 90, 92, 93, 112, 113, 115,

127, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138, 183, 192, 207,

222, 223, 226, 229, 261, 279, 283, 305, 334, 336,

352, 353, 359, 360, 398, 428, 449

Sales Order number40, 111, 200, 232, 275, 321, 322,

348, 359, 423

Sales Tax Applicable ............................................... 31

Sales Territory ......................... 45, 265, 342, 345, 348

Salesperson code ........................................... 204, 375

Schedule Date........................................................ 227

Schedule Sequence ................................................ 225

Scheduled Item ...................................................... 225

Scrap Rate ............................................................... 79

Secondary Printer ............................................ 68, 276

Selling Branch2, 6, 7, 19, 26, 37, 40, 56, 110, 111,

116, 196, 260, 265, 272, 293, 296, 299, 308, 312,

314, 315, 323, 326, 340, 342, 345, 348, 351, 353,

356, 362, 380, 384, 386, 391, 393, 429, 432

Send To ................................................................. 111

Sequence code ................................. 36, 225, 262, 321

Sequence number .......................................... 228, 362

Service Order number ........................................... 129

Session Branch ...... 233, 240, 242, 244, 246, 248, 250

Session Date .......................................................... 400

Session ID ............................................................. 424

Ship Via20, 23, 25, 27, 29, 45, 143, 145, 146, 147,

148, 149, 154, 210, 414, 424

Shipment code ....................................................... 227

Shipment Status ............................................. 222, 265

Shipped Weight ....................................................... 86

Shipping Branch6, 7, 18, 19, 29, 37, 40, 41, 44, 68,

96, 110, 124, 139, 223, 227, 251, 266, 282, 293,

294, 296, 297, 298, 299, 305, 308, 321, 322, 333,

336, 342, 345, 348, 351

Shipping Hold28, 49, 50, 51, 57, 91, 204, 205, 209,

223, 266, 340, 352, 353, 355

Shipping Hold Status ............................................. 205

Shipping Order form4, 13, 42, 67, 68, 275, 276, 277,

278, 280, 302, 305, 309

Shipping Order Printer ............................................ 67

Shipping Remarks11, 67, 180, 279, 282, 285, 286,

287, 288, 309, 313, 316, 319, 332, 334, 431

Shipping Warehouse29, 44, 96, 99, 100, 140, 149,

259, 262, 266, 305, 308, 364, 368, 431

Ship-To Name ............................. 22, 45, 98, 334, 336

Ship-To number ............................ 24, 27, 43, 45, 254

Ship-To Route ....................................................... 267

Skid Type ...................................... 174, 188, 191, 192

Skid Weight ................................................... 191, 192

Sold By263, 264, 313, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 324,

342, 345, 348, 430, 433

Source Reference .................................. 18, 22, 30, 37

Specification Abbreviation .................................... 193

Specification Template .......................................... 193

Specifications1, 11, 17, 32, 34, 36, 39, 47, 57, 95, 99,

100, 101, 127, 133, 136, 187, 188, 189, 193, 194,

202, 218, 219, 222, 285, 286, 288, 305

Standard Product ................................................... 283

Start Date ............................................................... 225

Status code35, 51, 52, 53, 105, 131, 218, 223, 226,

258, 280

Status Date ............................................ 210, 218, 219

Step number .................................................... 98, 227

Stock Reservation .......................................... 107, 160

Stock Type ............................................................ 268

Stocking Branch .................... 110, 111, 112, 113, 308

Stop ................. 20, 25, 27, 29, 45, 210, 254, 414, 424

System Date19, 22, 40, 44, 111, 134, 135, 205, 255,

299, 366, 441, 443

System Installation Option ............ 369, 453, 454, 455

Tag Format............................................................. 336

Tag Information ...................................................... 72

Tag Master Required90, 94, 98, 99, 105, 114, 121,

160, 169, 224, 226, 370, 371, 459, 460

Tag Master Required Product90, 94, 99, 105, 114,

121, 169

Tag number ....................................................... 89, 99

Tare Weight ..................................................... 72, 109

Tax Amount ...................................... 63, 81, 311, 366

Tax Region ...................... 31, 44, 45, 48, 77, 311, 439

Temporary Account................................................. 21

Terms of Payment27, 28, 31, 44, 276, 278, 283, 286,

287, 300, 311

Test Certificate30, 31, 45, 180, 286, 287, 303, 304,

316

Theoretical Quantity ................................................ 80

Theoretical Weight2, 72, 80, 96, 109, 172, 173, 191,

279, 336, 395, 397, 404, 405

Toll Order .............................................. 365, 366, 368

Total Cost .............................................. 176, 395, 399

Total Material Cost ............................................... 166

Total Pieces ........................................................... 226

Total Sales ............................................... 63, 176, 395

Total Value On Hand ............................................ 368

Total Weight.................................................. 147, 148

Transaction Date ................................................... 366

Transaction Type ..................................... 98, 359, 362

Transfer Order Item40, 51, 93, 118, 124, 126, 135,

136, 138, 181, 298, 333

Transfer Order number .......................... 134, 137, 138

Transfer Request ......... 2, 54, 104, 105, 110, 111, 116

Index Page 467

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

Transfer Requisition1, 2, 5, 12, 17, 32, 37, 39, 110,

124, 133, 134, 136, 137, 138, 269, 351, 455

Transfer Type .......................................................... 90

Type of Certificate .......................................... 30, 303

Unit of Measure35, 48, 69, 74, 75, 79, 80, 81, 84, 85,

98, 105, 146, 148, 150, 156, 157, 158, 163, 164,

165, 169, 170, 172, 173, 176, 187, 189, 190, 191,

215, 217, 269, 279, 282, 283, 304, 310, 327, 328,

334, 353, 377, 428

Usage Status .......................................... 150, 155, 297

User Branch ........... 206, 212, 272, 297, 374, 375, 376

User Group2, 32, 63, 65, 160, 195, 208, 225, 231,

235, 252

User Menu Options ............................................... 451

Vendor Look-Up Name .......................................... 335

Vendor Name ................................................ 144, 145

Vendor number ........................29, 144, 145, 163, 170

Warehouse Type ....................105, 224, 256, 262, 269

Weight Limit ................................................. 150, 155

Weight U/M ...........................269, 380, 384, 386, 391

Weight Unit of Measure35, 80, 98, 327, 328, 334,

387

Work Order form36, 38, 68, 107, 112, 137, 180, 259,

269, 271, 276, 278, 279, 280, 282, 288, 291, 296,

299, 305, 309, 314, 315, 428, 431, 432, 434, 442

Work Order number ...................................... 282, 321

Work Order Printing 68, 280, 293, 294, 296, 297, 298

Year225, 374, 375, 377, 395, 396, 397, 398, 401,

402, 403

Index Page 468

Sales Orders – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry